Home

RAM Commander User Manual

1. Note description of repair types like restricted unrestricted may be found in the To enter data for an 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 361 RBD element paragraph earlier in this chapter The source of the formulas is Reliability Handbook by B A Kozlov A Ushakov 13 3 2 5 K out of N Without Repair The formulas in the following table are used to compute MTTF and reliability for various redundant item loads and without item repair Load of Cn Reliability items 100 1 N 0 Fa r EN n na A po N K 1 A fy A F A i jetan SEA o i NE l 7 II ETP IJ es 2 r x i Po H vijA ty A i0 A vi gt gt E e m vY K N K m K The source of the formulas is Reliability Handbook by B A Kozlov A Ushakov 13 3 2 6 Equivalent Lambda MTBF Equivalent Effective Lambda or Effective MTBF is calculated according to formulas and assumptions described below Calculation is allowed only with following limitations e Repairable Configuration all elements with repair e Failure Rate distribution only Exponential e Repair Rate distribution only Exponential e K out of N elements e Load 100 active redundancy e No Switch e No Split Effective A FR equations approximations Configuration 2014 ALD Software Ltd AL Ag ip a op Ag Ag 1 al A je Ain W
2. 3 Hex VD Y R 3 Project TUTORIAL on Drive C E z He Report By ItemCode for Project TUTORIA gt el 23 Ref Des ID Name Oty Opr FR 10 6 Status a W TUTORIAL METETE 187 0769 HD E Communic 1 CNO17000 1 100 2550 Is ae lareto analysis by item code l Dus 2 80C88 1 0 2678 l h Puro 3 80031 1 podio Dur 4 LM299 1 00625 pet tom Du13 5 74L530 1 0 0367 Totali Memcode umutativo Y R110 6 ALA 10 0 0890 item code Qiy Failure FR contribution 5 R1412 7RN 2 0 0365 Y R3034 8 AZ 5 0 0849 Ee fee toss fee ste CCI 9 CK 1 0 0619 5 78 980 2210 a7 036 pi C2 10 CK 1 0 0619 ifhtenna tee 1o 0595 O PS sie Des 4500 7 047 11144 a _ __ _Q__ o rQR S A A A a Mission Profile Mission Pollo Mame TEST Phase Description Op Nop Env Temp Time Alpha Nc 1 Storage Nop GB 25 0 300 050 0 00 gt Transportation Nop GM 350 40 0 00 0 00 3 Flight Op AIC 50 02 0 00 0 0 0 8 2 16 3 24 5 32 7 40 8 49 0 57 1 65 3 73 5 81 6 9 8 98 0 4 1 12 2 20 4 28 6 36 7 44 9 53 1 61 2 69 4 77 6 85 7 93 9 Temperature C Add Phase Edit Phase Delete Phase l Move Up l Move Down Clipboard 2 y For Help press F1 ID 1 NUM 4 1 5 Stage 5 Reliability and Availability Modeling RAM Commander provide tools to model system reliability and availability using Reliability Block Diagram RBD specifying different redu
3. Log normal elo 0 2 A gt 0 K positive integer Constant Equivalent MCT calculation for different repair time distributions Exponential 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 357 where is gamma function o e E Time independent Erlang gt 0 K positive integer Constant T 13 3 2 3 Basic calculations The following formulas are used to calculate reliability and availability of basic RBD models Configuration Reliability R Unreliability UR Availability A Unavailability UA Serial configuration R Ra Rp A A Ap dea Hea UR UR UR UR UA UA UA UA UR UA Parallel configuration R 1 1 R 1 Rp A 1 1 A 1 Ap UR UR UR UA UA UA Reliability and Availability calculation of individual blocks is explained in previous paragraphs Reliability Distributions For complex model RBD diagrams diagram breakdown to basic models described above is performed and calculation is done using the same principles and formulas Consider for example the following diagram 2014 ALD Software Ltd First the serial segment containing blocks A and C is calculated resulting in R R_R Then serial segment is considered a single block AC which is parallel to block B and reliability of the whole system
4. dal Availability 0 6 0 4 0 2 Unavailability 0 0 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 10000 30000 50000 70000 90000 Time hours Time Dependency State Probabilities for time interval table and graph O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis KO Y State Probabilities for Specified Time Interval for Project TUTORIA D Oj xj Markov Time Dependency Mode State Probabilities Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Test 1 Start Time O hours End Time 10 hours Number of points 101 a State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 hours ajo jos os fp MA PENN ESPA PERES PA e jos 01441157673 04357773121 0343073375 0 07703354563_ Ce E MAI EEE INANE Tenor i ee WA MwoAeeon hd Markov State Probabilities 0 6 0 5 7 State 1 0 4 State 2 0 3 0 2 State 3 0 1 7 State 4 0 0 005 115 2 25 3 35 4 45 5 55 6 65 7 75 8 85 9 95 10 Time hours See also Reports and Graphs paragraphs in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 2014 ALD Software Ltd O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter FMECA Failure Mode Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA is a systematic set of activities intended to identify and help eliminate failure modes Modern standards and regulations require designers and manufacturers to formally prove that all potential malfunctions have been eliminated or put under control
5. ooooonccnnnccncoonncnnnnonononncnnnnononanncnnnnononannncnnnnnonananos 252 Reports di 252 Data MPOT da A RA A A Ade 253 Using Component Libraries in Reliability Prediction ooooccccccnnnccnnicncccccnnnncnonononanancrnonnnnannnrrnnnrnannnnnnns 256 Retrieve or save single component data ccoooccccccoononcccoononocononononononononnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenonnens 257 Load OML I Yatee ae E AE EE E EE ch lana ua aa a tena AS 258 A a E a eka n hah ete 259 y COS RET FENCO antonia E a a 259 Using Cross Reference Library in Reliability Prediction ooonccnccccccnnncnncccoccnnncnanonnonnnannnnrnnonnnananannns 261 BAU AMET Or E caoa 264 4 Part Number Recognition ii se terennere cred a aai a a aa 264 3 ARI geet ne cay rca ee eS ae ae OTOL a ER eae en Pe 265 Entering the GPRD LIDral yieee tatca a cGy A A de Aa 266 General Part Dita di a 267 EMECAR ari is 268 Fie ld Failure Rate Tables int 268 Mantal FR Mable Data BV eea a aide lest alate le kl a cots aera uated e 269 PACK TO BORC PAE A eee eR 2 0 A lah Phat Ae ace tM od enna atte ioe Lot PA tte Ota 272 IBD OFETTONVAS CITO toai o e is als a O acs 272 DORE ii larcipie 273 Copying and Deleting Failure Rate Tables oooccocccccococncnncnccononconnnnnnononnnononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnonos 274 Using GPRD Library in Reliability Prediction cococcococoncccnnnconcoocncnnnnononononnnnnononarncnnnnononananonnnos 274 Falie Ra
6. Level of replace Intermediate Notes assembly is repaired by replacing one or more of its l lower level parts The level of replace of the lower level Level of repair Depot parts must be equal to the level of repair of the assembly E MET Source Predicted ji Quantity 2 Complexity for Mick 0 allocation Mick user defined 0 286833 S335 Confidence level 70 Mict predicted ada Miet 0 373333 Mct allocated 1 02501 FAULT ISOLATION TO Al QTY Status MLH calculated 0 373333 NT 1 Nef2 Nei Nala Nos Check lO MLH user defined O 1030 42492 45 55 lt 4 397 45 100 Cale ak MTTRA allocated O Ambiguity Factor 1 26 Mick max 0121524 MTTR 0 110871 Hrs ax canes The three fields grouped together in the upper left section of the dialog box contain information required to calculate maintainability parameters for the current item Define the following Method of Mct If you select default from the list box then RAM Commander uses the calculation maintainability method defined in the Project Configuration dialog box If you select user defined then you can select a maintainability method in the Method list box Make a selection from this list box if you selected user defined in the Method of Mct calculation list box Level of Replace Make a selection from this list box if you want to consider the item during maintainability prediction See more on leve
7. F Ref Des Cumulative Test Time Source Cumulative MTBF 1 TUTORIAL 1 Tree 1000 00 WT 2 TUTORIAL 1100 00 Tree 550 00 WET 3 TUTORIAL 1200 00 Tree 400 00 WT 4 TUTORIAL 2000 00 Tree 500 00 a TIOS TUTORIAL 2900 00 Tree 580 00 T 6 TUTORIAL 3300 00 Tree 550 00 T 7 TUTORIAL 4500 00 Tree 642 86 Wit sa TUTORIAL 8000 00 Tree 1000 00 IT 8 TUTORIAL 9000 00 Tree 1000 00 T 10 TUTORIAL 29000 00 Tree 2900 00 MT 11 TUTORIAL 33000 00 Tree 3000 00 T 12 TUTORIAL 34000 00 Tree 2833 33 T 13 TUTORIAL 67000 00 Tree 5153 85 To view individual subsystems of the Reliability growth list from the View menu choose Subsystem Select an item from the reference designator dialog box and then choose OK RAM Commander displays the Reliability growth list with only those records that have the selected reference designator To view all records from the View menu select System 15 3 To enter reliability growth data 1 Activate the Reliability growth list 2 Provide information about all failures you may specify system failures and failures of particular system items assemblies perform the procedure below for each failure 2014 ALD Software Ltd 384 RAM Commander User Manual 15 4 3 From the Item menu choose Create the Reliability Growth Entry dialog box opens Reliability Growth Entry Ref Des Tree Location Source Tree Cumulative Test Time 0 OF Remark See Date 4 In the Reliability Growt
8. Cancel 6 Choose OK RAM Commander updates the target project s libraries 9 7 2 Global Library Files Location Many reliability engineers perform a reliability analysis for various customers with the RAM Commander In these projects the same catalog number may be used for different items Having just one component global library and cross reference file can result in using the wrong data for the prediction To avoid this and to allow the user to create alternative global library and cross reference files for each customer RAM Commander provides the user with access to all existing global library and cross reference files Another reason to change global library files location is to place these files on a shared network folder to share it between multiple RAM Commander users In client server installation it is done by default see and Settings Management also Standalone Installation Common Network Database paragraphs for standalone installation 9 7 3 Back Up and Restore of Global Libraries As with all important data sources RAM Commander s global libraries should be backed up on any storage medium This protects your information from computer crashes allows data to be moved between computers and provides a way to recover data if you need to reconstruct projects in the event of incorrect data entry To back up global libraries 1 Close not minimize all RAM Commander windows 2 From the Library menu of the in
9. No thanks already have my license configured Tou may return to the Licensing Wizard any tine later to configure your license gue 3 The following dialog box appears O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 3 4 3 1 A Manager Generate Site Code o get computerlocked software license tor this computer you have to T perform the Generate operation Site code an encrypted information with ay i unique data about your computer will be generated Please send this Information to ws Generate site code Generate software license report om IF you wish to change your license conditions wish to get information about pour license options or have some troubles with the software licensing please generate a license report and attach it to your email Generate license report Delete license Use Delete license option if you wish to stop using our software on this sn computer wish to transter license to another computer or if you were requested to do it by software distributors A Special file will be generated please send this file to software distributors as confirmation of the operation Delete license 4 Click Generate site code You will receive a message providing you with the file name containing your site Computer code 9 Send this file to your software vendor or Support ald co il Please write also your full name company name and contact information 6 You will
10. FMEA Severlty Likelinood Matrix amp Acceptable severity important Y Critical Likelihood O D After generating the graph the user has the option of selecting the Failure Causes in a specific range as Critical Important and then marking them as priority tasks for improvement For example to select and mark the Failure causes for improvement using the Scree plot 1 Close the graph 2 Click Yes when prompted to select critical causes 3 In the Select Critical Causes dialog box enter the values for the range of selected causes in the From and To boxes For example in the following graph the Select causes in range option is selected and the Values 22 27 are entered in the boxes This is the range where RPN value growth is exponential Select Critical Causes Selection action f Select causes in range f Select causes in range and unselect all the rest Cancel Unselect causes in range Unselect all causes Causes range numbers by order according to APN Scree Plot From 2 To 27 4 The selected causes appear in red in the FMEA grid 9 For a list of all the critical causes run the Pareto report and select the Only Critical Failure 2014 ALD Software Ltd 524 RAM Commander User Manual Causes check box or open Item gt FMEA Data Table and set filter to Critical causes only 21 7 Team Collaboration Severity Occurrence and Detection ranks are given by exp
11. Report Columns Setup Report Name FMECA FMEA Report Report columns setup Column name ltem mfo FM Descr NHE Nent ltem EE Severity Detechon method Lompens provisions Remark Failure Cause Caused by Item Cancel Fiestore Defaults 3 Select report from the list 4 You will see a list of columns names and their sizes in characters for the selected report you may change it by double clicking on corresponding row and changing the width Zero column length removes a column from report 9 Use Restore Defaults button in the lower right corner of the dialog to return columns width to the initial values 6 Press Ok to close the dialog and save the changes 5 7 1 2 View Stored Reports RAM Commander saves the last report of each kind generated for each project You can review a previous report at any time even during subsequent RAM Commander sessions Since you can view more than one report at a time this utility provides the benefit of performing an on screen comparison analysis between different projects To view a previous report 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Reports menu choose View Report the Reports for the current project selection box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd 9 1 2 Report Selection selected report Applied Values Def Report Name Format Created Ye Pareto Report By ltemCode HTML Monday June 28 2010 a Assembl
12. d Choose Pd Calculation the power dissipation appears in the field e Choose OK the resulting power dissipation appears in the power dissipation Pd field 7 Choosing OK returns to the Product tree view Repeat the above procedure to enter stress data for other components Some fields in the Derating analysis dialog box require either a quotient or a numerator and denominator For example in the figure to the left enter either a value for the frequency stress ratio or a value for both the applied frequency and rated frequency If applied frequency and rated frequency are entered RAM Commander computes the actual frequency stress ratio 12 3 Derating Reports When generating a derating report RAM Commander compares the actual stress values for each component with those for the guideline s thresholds A report can be displayed for all the project s components or only for those components whose derating values exceed the corresponding threshold The following table describes the available derating reports 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Stress Analysis 337 Applied values Actual stress parameter values Applied values defaults Actual stress parameter values default values appear in fields not explicitly defined for each component All parts derating results For each stress parameter for each component displays derated value applied value and the ratio between the two Overstressed parts Exception report of
13. 2 The Installation Wizard will go through a sequence of the setup screens asking the user to make the appropriate selections Press Next on the first screen InstallShield Wizard RAM Commander Setup The InstallShield Wizard will install RAM Commander for Windows on pour computer To continue click Nest Cancel 3 Confirm the License Agreement Yes button 2014 ALD Software Ltd 32 RAM Commander User Manual InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Fress the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Product License Agreement Rev M N0 2007 1 0 GENERAL GRANT OF LICENSE Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement 4 0 0 hereby grants to Licensee a nonesclusive license to use Favoweb Product solely for Licensee s internal business purposes the enclosed software program s including any link time and run time modules any hardware key that may be furnished user documentation andor documentation Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement IF you choose No the setup will close To install RAM Commander tor Windows you must accept this agreement 4 Choose Single user installation on Setup type selection screen InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Selection Pleaze select a setup type 1 Single User Installation Description 2 server Network Installation Use this option to install RAM 3
14. Cancel View planning 3 In the Items group box select one of the following All Report generated for all available entered failures N last Report generated for only the last N entered failures If you select this option enter a value for N in the adjacent field Bootstrap Report generated with a confidence level Select the desired confidence level from the list box 4 If required select the View planning information check box 9 Select either Text or Graph from the Type list box 6 Choose OK RAM Commander displays the selected report 2014 ALD Software Ltd 388 RAM Commander User Manual System TUTORIAL Failures 14 Cumulative Test Time 6 000 Hours Failure Cumulative Cumulative Current Time Delwesn CO O free 1000 00 E fruronia oo ree E DO E rotor ooo free oda fon 00 a rotora 2000 00 Tree 500 00 21 90 foomo o pe _JTUTORrL sunno a fresoe Gun a 5 TUTORIAL 2300 00 rres E50 0 TUTORIAL a000 00 res 1000 00 1177 60 3500 00 jy fruToRia 2000 00 frre 1000 00 1280 08 100000 fo fo FTUTORDL asomo fee Banano 480477 _feonongg fa Ht _ TUTORIAL 33000 00 Tree 2000 00 5864 0 4000 00 fa rotorer fosa free oso estr 13 TUTORIAL jason oo ies feoragz 6107 38 Joo0000 0 0 14 TUTORIAL 6700 00 Tree 4785 71 10124 41 27000 00 052 Expected termination time 42247 96 Hours MTBF required 6331 22 Hours or graph A Graph Generator for RAM Commande
15. Complexity for FR allocations 407902 Kb_spec Source of user defined FA DK l Cancel Item data dialog contains multiple pages The page which is related to the currently selected analysis type Operating FMECA etc is active by default Switch between pages to enter the available information The General page contains general item information like Part Number Catalog Number Description and more ily Electronic or Mechanical Leave for assembly Component ltem type like resistor capacitor or spring Each family has its own list of ltem types See the full list of all possible ltem types later in this manual Item type abbreviations Catalog number Item catalog number typically in house part identifier Military number ltem military number Generic name Item generic name used in library searches for component data Description litem description Remark ltem remarks Item remarks oS O Item Function Description of item function Manufacturer Component manufacturer Allows manual input or selection from drop down list of manufacturers O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 171 Background color ltem background color in the tree view Press Change button to set the color using color picker Colors are convenient way to mark items in the product tree problematic with red approved with green etc according to your needs LeN Logistics Contro
16. Product Tree COM O O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 20 RAM Commander User Manual 7 4 1 6 3 Depth field The Depth column represents the imported item level in the tree hierarchy The Depth field allows the hierarchical construction of the tree For example for the following BOM file Field_1 Field_2 Field_3 Field_4 lf Field_1 is defined as Depth then the result will be as follows EXISTING ASSEMBLY 7 4 1 6 4 Parent Ref Des field Parent Ref Des reference designator contains the parent s name of the component whose data is defined in the current row For example for the following BOM file Field _1 Field_2 Field_3 Field_4 Field_5 C0603C472K1RAC C0603C472K1RAC A12 DSP C0603C472K1RAC C0603C472K1RAC A12 FLASH C0603C472K1RAC C0603C472K1RAC A12 DSP If you define Field_5 in the Parent Ref Des column and Field_1 in the Ref Des column the result after importing will be 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 201 EXISTING ASSEMBLY 7 4 1 6 5 Hierarchical Parent Ref Des field Hierarchical Parent Ref Des contains parent reference designators of all of the levels above the current component For example for the following BOM file Field_1 Field_2 Field_3 Field_4 Field_5 ps rs es os C0603C472K1RAC C0603C472K1RAC AAA BBB FLASH lf Field_5 will be defined as Hierarchical Parent Ref Des then the result will be O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 4 1 6 6 Stress Stress i
17. Search data for calculation Gy Automatic search then manual selection if rot found RAM Commander s NPRD database contains information on failure rates for various Item types keyed by part family Item type part description environment and quality level NPRD failure rates are not given for all combinations of these parameters RAM Commander attempts to find the failure rate using two sets of data primary and secondary You can tell RAM Commander how to perform the search by e Using only the automatic search definition e Using only the manual selection definition e Using the manual selection only if the automatic search fails On the NPRD 95 screen you need to define the appropriate Part Description which describe in the best way your specific part Then you need to select the Quality level After all this selections according with Part Description Environment Quality RAM Commander search for FR in NPRD 95 database Two scenarios may occur a the FR exists in the NPRD 95 for selected set of data b there isn t FR for selected set of the data because NPRD failure rates are not given for all combinations of these parameters To solve situation for scenario b you need to use the manual record selection where you can define similar part description quality level envronment not exact as you have in the system but as close as possible Manual selection also supports situation when NPRD 95 contains FR for
18. To generate a parameter listing report 1 Activate the Derating list for the guideline you want to review 2 From the Reports menu select List of Parameters O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 334 RAM Commander User Manual 12 2 RAM Commander displays the report in a report window Another guideline report lists the derating curve parameters by item code To generate a derating curve parameter report 1 Activate the Derating list for the guideline you want to review 2 From the Reports menu select one of the following e Current Guidelines for a report on all the guideline s item codes e Current Item Code for a report on the displayed item code RAM Commander displays the report in a report window Entering Actual Stress Values To enter actual stress values for a component first configure the project for derating mode 1 Activate Product Tree View window 2 Choose Derating button in the left button bar The next step is to enter actual stress data for individual components To enter component stress data 1 If prediction data is available for components in Operating mode they can be used for Derating as follows a Activate the Product tree view b Select Derating by clicking on the Derating button OR choose Configure from the Project menu c From the Project menu select Translate the Translate dialog box opens d Select Operating in the From list box e Choose OK RAM Commander copies each c
19. gt MIF S e ate Lers id 1 25 where w e is unconditional failure rate of the BE e MIF is Marginal importance factor the rate at which the TOP unavailability S increases when the unavailability of component e increases MIF S 8 So House Event Profiles House events are often used in what if situations when user wishes to check what is the top event probability if some event definitely occurs or does not occur The House event profiling option brings that what if analysis to the new level Multiple house event profiles may be created with specific states True False of house events Then each profile may be activated and calculated FTA House Event Profiles Current tree Tutorial House Event Code Current aaaa bbb Antenna failure False True z Transmitter failure HardDriwe Mormal To create house event profile and perform its calculation 2014 ALD Software Ltd a0 RAM Commander User Manual 19 4 4 1 Open Fault Tree module 2 Choose House event profiles from the Library menu 3 The profiles dialog will appear with the list of house events in rows and list of profiles in columns The Current column shows the current state of house events in events library 4 Right click the grid choose Add profile Profile dialog will appear provide the profile code description etc Press Ok 9 New column in the profiles grid will appear corresponding to the newly
20. it should be the folder which will be shared later for all RAM Commander workstations plus RAMC32 subfolder for example C APP RAMC3z2 where C APP will be shared on server and mapped by workstations InstallShield Wizard RAM Commander for Windows Setup The setup program will copy R b Commander files into the following directory A new program group will also be added to the Program Manager Destination Folder CAAPPARAMO32 Cancel O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 0 RAM Commander User Manual 8 RAM Commander displays a Select Components dialog box Click Next InstallShield Wizard Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not wart to Install Description R M Commander Basic module Product tree reliability prediction and allocation temperature curves Pareto analysis mission profile reliability reports import wizard ogg Help Files Ja Tutorial Project e BELLCORE Issue 5 4 BELLCORE Issue 6 4 BRITISH TELECOM HADA Je BRITISH TELECOM HADS 4 CNET RDFSS ya erating fi GIB299 Part Count ll Space Required on D 20604 E Space Available on D 4 293012 K Installshield Back Lancel 9 Select Start menu folder where RAM Commander icons will be located and Click Next InstallShield Wizard Select Program Folder Pleaze select a program folder Setup will add program
21. 10 The symbol W D refers to searches level by level while D refers to depth first search The symbol ID refers to an item tree identification number according to the location in the tree For all reports components assemblies or both can be displayed You can limit the report s search by specifying how far down RAM Commander inspects the tree from your starting level In addition to the predefined reports user defined reports may be defined see Report Generator paragraph See also advanced Reliability Analysis reports and methods like Temperature Curve Pareto Mission Profile and more 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Reliability Libraries and Defaults A RAM Commander User Manual Reliability Libraries and Defaults RAM Commander provides multiple libraries for convenient reliability calculation and analysis The reliability related libraries include 1 Component library This library may contain technical part data required for the reliability prediction such as specific capacitor style capacitance V rated etc The library uses the Generic Name of the component as a key for search and retrieval of the components Customer may enter import component data to the library or purchase library from ALD with more than 70 000 widely used active electronic components data 2 Cross Reference Library Frequently electronics developers must cope with a variety of part numbering schemes when designing products P
22. 14 7 Reports Two report options are provided Summary and Details Summary report is useful to compare reliability of several configurations System configuration Project name TUTORIAL Configuration name MTBF hrs qa Metthrsy MEME lero mes Switching base configurat 7640 8 10758 8 4 173E 002 60000 0 100 0 Non switching base config a699 2 938973 4 039E 002 500000 0 Detailed report provides all the available information about the selected configuration and its blocks O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 378 RAM Commander User Manual 14 8 system configuration Project name TUTORIAL Configuration Switching base configuration MTEF hrs MTBCE hrs Met hrs Maxtime hrs otep hrs 7640 8 10758 58 4 173E 002 60000 0 100 0 tem name MTBF hrs Metinrs 9030Y K Reliab lity MN Model Main Switch 1981363 0125 2 Paralel 1694118 8 K out oFN ee pier h sera 119760 5 OS Contra a edestal MS Receiver BK Each report may contain one selected configuration data or data for all existing configurations E a ut of N Use Reports menu or popup menu right click the configuration record to initiate the selected report generation See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports Summary In this chapter you saw how several blocks of a product can be combined in various configurations to compare the reliability of the different
23. 16000 DRAM 16000 SRAM 16000 3 Views displayed in the Default Manager list are keyed by reliability prediction method family and Item type Select the prediction method family and Item type in the respective drop down lists to see the desired information Note Do not add new records to or delete records from the global default listing Doing so will have an unpredictable impact on reliability calculations To change the defaults for the specific calculation method component family Item type and type style open the calculation defaults manager select required filter double click the desired record and perform the changes Applying New Default Values If a change is made to one of the values in the project s defaults and you want the defaults to be taken into account then you must apply them by choosing Recalculate All from the Calculation menu of the Product Tree view Generating Calculation Defaults reports To generate a listing of the defaults do one of the following e Fora report on the current family and Item type from the Report menu choose Current Item type e For a report on all family and Item type combinations from the Report menu choose All Defaults RAM Commander displays the report in a window Updating Global Defaults from a Project The system manager can update global defaults library using project defaults library It is useful if you ve performed some changes in the default values for a partic
24. 22 5 Working with different standards recommendations RAM Commander Safety Module suits different standards and safety hazard analysis types SAE APR 4761 MIL STD 882 etc It can be customized and used for other recommendations and standards Some recommendations give different names to the same data and require additional information to be provided One of such supported recommendations is AFO defined by MOC 2 Russia lt requires additional fields in the Failure Conditions table and gives different names to failure data To switch between standards select the desired standard recommendation name from the View section of the main application menu a RAM Commander for Windows Functional Tree for Project S18 AIRCRAFT on Drive we Tree Calculation Library Reports Tools Window Help i l de w Toolbar w Status bar Name Gp 518 AIRCRAFT Expand all Tree GP Control Thrust 8 Control Flight Path aq Determine Orientation Cl Determine Position and Heading GP Control Aircraft on the Ground a Determine airground position m Decelerate aircraft on the ground Stopping Wheel Rotation on the Ground m FHA SAE ARP 4761 554 5AE ARF 4761 AFO Russia SHA MIL 5TD 582 OSHA MIL STD 582 User defined page 178 The failure conditions table contents will be refreshed and will display columns relevant to the 2014 ALD Software Ltd 546 RAM Commander User Manual 22 6 sel
25. 6 6 Project Overview Project Information Reliability Analysis Failure Analysis Reliability Block Diagrams FMECA Open_ ble el ai wy i _open Q Available with Testability Available 6 diagrams Revision 1 Markov Analysis Open Fault Tree Analysis Open Description Sample Communication System Available 3 diagrams Done 3 trees Available 1 mission profiles Done 1 diagrams Edit project properties fs Process FMEA Open Product Tree Available gt Available Za Reliability Predicti W Maintainability prediction Open x eliability Prediction i i Open priis 3 Done MTTR 0 374304 h CE FESPA Se Open a Operating mode Open lt A Available Done FR 187 077 z H Spare parts Safety Non Operating mode Open Available 1 scenarios lt Safety Assessment Open Done FR 15 4868 5 g Maintainability ILS Maintenance Ed Available 3 failure conditions Guy Derating Stress analysis Open ry RCM ry MSG 3 MMEL Available 3 scenarios c Right click the project record and select FTA ETA or other module from the popup menu The selected module will be initiated It is the quickest way if you work only with the particular module available in the popup menu Backup Restore Project may be compressed to a single file with RMW extension You may store this file as a backup you may create multiple backups we recommend to perform backups daily weekly and store all previous versions of th
26. Operation Default Method Assembly ae Electronic MIL 21 F 2 F stress Co AA DE NPRO 95 A Mechanical gt Electro Mechanical NPRD 95 Cancel Select the required analysis type by clicking the relevant radio button Press Ok 2014 ALD Software Ltd xa RAM Commander User Manual 7 2 3 7 2 4 Expanding and Collapsing To expand the lower level tree elements 1 Double click on the element with the at the node OR 2 Click the node To collapse the lower level elements 1 Double click on the element with a at the node OR 2 Click the node To expand all elements of all successor tree levels 1 Select a Product Tree item 2 Choose Expand all tree from the View menu Opening items Product Tree consists of Items components and assemblies Assemblies are those items to which children or other components can be added Components are items that cannot have children added to them There is one special assembly item in each project which represents product tree Top item In the Product tree vew RAM Commander displays a icon next to assembly items For component items RAM Commander displays the relevant component icon To view item data 1 Open the product tree view 2 Navigate to the desired item and select it 3 Double click the item if it is component or right click it and choose Edit from the popup menu 4 Item data screen will a
27. VA AR 123 355 Ic 38043 d e Project Library for Project TUTORIAL Drive ELECTRONIC IC Digital Generic Mame U ic 100EL34 U IC 10EL89 U U C 10H105 uU uU C 160616 a ham a J a tat af L u ee Ww 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 263 4 Component data are retrieved from the component library I Digital MIL AOBRK 21 PER Ref des aTY 1 ENV GF Temp 35 C ae Part name AA 123 355 Cancel Mil num Cat num Help Generic name IC 38043 WHSIC 7 YLSI CMOS M este ET Type Gate Logic Arrays a Process Die Area Tech CMOS Hof bite Features ize H of gates 51 Range uth Range tof Pins 16 Years in productor Package SMT Nonherm Quality KA T junction FI q Dl a il gt a Bl 3 vw A 7 u a oa Se ji af af wll E 5 Press Ok to close the prediction method data screen and calculate the Failure Rate Functional Blocks General Logistics Operating Nonoperating HM aintainability Family ELECTRONIC RefDes U12 ltem code IC Digital Part name RR 123 355 Environment a Cur Els Delta Temp a TE Cur 35 E Method of FA p calculation default Method MIL 217F 2 P stress ee CE MIL 217F 2 F stress Failure distribution Exponential Field fact 1
28. You can generate a report of the Standard tasks library by choosing Report from the Tasks Library Manager dialog box To add a new task to the Standard Tasks Library 1 From the Tasks Library Manager dialog box choose Add Task 2 Enter a description in the Task Description dialog box Choose OK 3 To add a new action or connection choose Append or Insert 4 In the Action Connection dialog box do the following 9 Choose a connection from the Standard connections list box OR Enter a name in the Action Connection field 6 Enter a quantity 7 To use a time different than the default enter it in the Time field 8 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Tasks Library Manager dialog box with the new action or connection appearing at the end To delete a task from the Standard Tasks Library Caution Take care when deleting tasks from the standard tasks library There is no undo facility to easily return the library to its previous state 1 From the Tasks Library Manager dialog box select a task from the Task Description list box 2 Choose Delete Task You can edit tasks within the Standard Tasks Library by creating new operations or deleting and O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 321 editing existing ones 11 5 2 3 To edit a task in the Standard Tasks Library 1 In the Tasks Library Manager dialog box select a task from the Task Description list box 2 Do one of the following e To add a new a
29. b SSA C Hazard Analysis d MMEL 8 Additional analysis types a Derating Stress Analysis b Spare parts optimization C RCM d MSG 3 e Reliability Growth O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 104 RAM Commander User Manual f Dispatch Reliability 9 Next steps recurrent analysis DLCC FRACAS The diagram below illustrates the RAM Commander process 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Concepts 105 Stage 2 Build Product Tree Stage 1 Create project Provide component Information using Build Product Tree manually or using import wizard Set up the project reliability prediction method environment temperature Component Library GPRD Library Stage 3 Calculate Reliability Maintainability Perform reliability FRIMTBF calculation using selected Perform maintainability MctMTTR calculation by MIL reliability prediction methods o1 D4 72 54 method Stage 4 Reliability Analysis Analyze system behavior Gel required reports and in different environments graphs and temperatures using Temperature Curve Get components with Gat total Mission larges FR contribution Reliability using Mission using Pareto Profile Get system MTBCF Reliability Availability analyze Get system Reliability Availability Downtime redundancy using RBD Performance etc using Markov Analysis Stage 6 Failure Analysis f Fai
30. characters such as comma tab etc separate each field OR e Fixed Width fields are aligned in the fixed width columns For Delimited type select delimiter Comma Space Tab or Other select specific delimiter character 3 If texts in your file are wrapped by quote marks select the appropriate Text qualifier 4 If first row of your file contains field names labels captions click the Labels on first line checkbox lt usually the case with CSV files 5 Set the Start at row value if required it allows you to begin the data import from any point within the data file being imported 6 Press Next to go to the Step 3 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 187 7 4 1 3 Step 3 Text files 1 Step 3 text file import dialog will appear if Fixed width text file format is selected it allows dividing the input file into data columns Import wizard Step 3 of The wizard needs to know where each data field breaks Lines with arrows signify held break To create a break line click at the desired position To delete a break line double click on the araw To move a break line click and drag it ZU 30 RIR ERR ERRE RARA RARA AAA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to Coin a MM 0 oo oo a WE SE MD HD ae LD MO k E AE IM Mm oe oe a a a a a i a Aa Ga Eaa G a a o E a E a E So oo oo OIG DI DOI GI Gi Gl Go 2 A A A a oo on ee Aa a a G a a Ma od eT D oO O d a O n mooww
31. components between Product tree views 1 Perform steps 1 3 of the above instruction 2 Hold down lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt buttons drag the selected items into the target Product Tree view window and drop the item s on the item you want to appear directly after the moved item s Note Do not forget to calculate the project after you have made changes to your Product tree view to ensure that correct data will be displayed in the Product tree view Copying Items Between Projects You can easily copy components from one product tree to another 1 Open Product tree views for both the source and target projects 2 Activate the source Product tree view 3 Select one or more items to copy in the source Product tree view 4 Hold down the left mouse button and drag and drop the selected item s onto the target item in the target Product tree view 9 RAM Commander displays the target Product tree view with the new items Note When copying items into the same project open a new Product tree view for that project by choosing New Window from the Window menu Use one Product tree view as the source and the other as the target You can also open up several Product tree views for one project and copy components between them This is useful in cases where you add virtually identical assemblies to a project Global Change You can quickly make changes to multiple items in the product tree You can assign changes to all items within a
32. press the Edit Formula button to get the formula editor Edit formula Formula OP FR Parent O0P FA 100 Fields Operators FM EE Beta FM Test Efficiency FM Duration FM EE_Criticality Parent GA Quantity Parent GN Spare Part Turmaround_time Parent GN Spare Part Condernnation Rate Parent GN Spare Part Minimal Oty Parent GN Spare Part Maximal Oty Parent OP them temperature F ee Parent OP MT BF Parent OP Predicted FR Parent OP User defined FR Parent OP Field_FR Parent OP Complexity for_La Parent OP Allocated FR Parent OP Duty cycle Parent OP Field factor Parent OP Multiplic factor Parent OP Additive_factor Parent OP Selected _FR Parent OP Selected_MTBF Parent OP Single_lten_ MTBF Parent OP Single_lterm_FA Dorm MOD Dl A Compose the formula by double clicking on fields list functions and operators lists to insert them into the formula at current cursor position The generated report will contain column with values calculated for each item according to the defined formula Each report definition may contain multiple O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 133 formulas Existing customized reports may be edited To edita customized report 1 From the Report Generator dialog box select the report from the Report Definition list box 2 Select the required field by clicking on its number under the column 3 Choose Edit from the lower Field box make the req
33. A A eee aa 190 Database Fields NGS a ca tices a te ala e do a lean a ace 192 tem Code ADE VIA MON Su lOs 195 Dept Held yria en De en cet SE De ee cae Deer eae 200 Parent Rer DoS ll criadero eds 200 Faerarchical Parent Ret Des Held scsi eter nw de e Ye 201 A A A 202 Sa err ota ar ee eee ee 205 Levekof teblace leal leia ales cial 205 Failure Rate Source Sw Ch o a alae ae Nia ON allt etal al aie 206 NWA TMER SOUCO SWIG etinrcah ee tok O a chi 206 SOP AO AAA A A A 206 Using Import Wizard Tor tree update cocos dd tdi 207 BOr A A EEEE E E EE aa a ive 207 9 REPOS oia e a ea e a eee EE 208 Part 8 Reliability Calculation 211 1 Configurating Reliability Module oococcccocococococccococoncococononananannnrnrarararanarananrnrarananns 212 Operating vs Non Operating Mode ccoooonncnccccccccnncnccconocononanononononnnnnornrnnnnn nan rrrrnrnnnnnnrrrrrrnnnnnrrrrrrnanannrrnnnnns 212 Choosing suitable Reliability Prediction Method ooooooncccccccnnccncccoccconccanononcnnnananornnnnnnannnrrnnnnnannnnrennnnns 212 2 Mem FR Cal Gulationy sous tel o a ld 215 Component Failure Rate prediction cuina adi 217 Special Fields in the Prediction Method Screens oooocccccccccncoccccncnonononcncnnnnnonnnoncnononnnnnannnnnnononannnnnnnonnnos 220 JURCuUOn HINO SANS aia 220 A A AA 221 WeINOG SDECINIG Teatre ri A sane 222 e eo o O A 222 NERDEZ OT e ere nee ee 224 E AP E O A 226 FIDES 200 a a a aaa 228 Non Operating ML ADBK 21 7E ca t
34. Choosing of the needed MMEL algorithm is the first step of operating the MMEL Module 23 4 2 To select a required algorithm 1 From the Project menu choose Configuration 2 The Project Configuration dialog box opens 3 Select required MMEL calculation algorithm from the MMEL list box 2014 ALD Software Ltd Project Configuration Curent Analysis zas C Operating ESE Operating MNonoperating O Derating Maintainability Derating Miscellaneous C Nonoperating O Maintainability Mt max Calculation based or MIL HDBE 472 Lognormal distribution Repair Replace Levels FMECA FMEA Phase all Table Setup Criticality Analysis Alpha sum validation Default Method Assembly Electronic a Uk Mechanical K Cancel Your selection will be applied to MMEL Quantitative Analysis and Detailed Report 23 4 3 To activate quantitative analysis 1 Press Calculation button on the MMEL dialog box RAM Commander will perform quantitative analysis according to selected algorithm When calculation is finished a Detailed report for the quantitative analysis will be displayed in a report window and in the grid in the lower MMEL screen part 2014 ALD Software Ltd 564 RAM Commander User Manual MMEL Quantitative analysis results JAA Project name TUTORIAL MMEL ATA 36 11 05 ltem Name BLEED TEMPERATURE SENSOR L Prob Prob after ay Bes Fault ailure d Probability c
35. Copy Delete Items You may copy and delete items in the product tree see the Product Tree Building chapter for more information These operations affect FMECA data too e Copy inside project When copying inside the project the item copied will include all FMECA and TAM information The item is copied with information for all existing phases e Copy between projects When copying between projects the item copied will include all FMECA and TAM information Any necessary related data from the FMECA library will also be copied Items are copied with information from the current phase from the source project to the current phase into the destination project e ltem Delete When an item is deleted everything related to the item s FMECA and TAM information is deleted including all unshared chains up to the EE Copy FMECA processor data between items You may copy FMECA data from one item to another in the same project or in different projects To copy FMECA data 1 Open two product tree windows a To copy between items of the same project choose New window from the Window menu to open another product tree view window of the same project b To copy between items of different projects go to the projects list and open the product tree view window of another project Select items in both windows Choose FMECA mode in both windows Select window with the source information From the Tree menu choose Copy processor data oe eS Cop
36. El Receiver 2 ACODA 0 0214 El Transmitter 3 TR987 001 0 3419 oa E Santo Control Unit 1 fo 4953 Non Operating Modules ACM MSG 3 For Help press Fl ID 1 1 1 12 During the product tree building phase enter or import the product tree Using a top down process you decompose the system into a tree of assemblies subassemblies and components For each element in the tree define all required parameters such as environment reference designator part number and quantity RAM Commander increases your productivity by allowing you to retrieve data from various external sources such as e Import of CAD files of most commonly used file types such as ASCII MS Excel MS Access Mentor Graphics etc e Predefined sets of default values e Component libraries O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 158 RAM Commander User Manual 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 Product tree is a pre requisite for such analysis types as reliability maintainability stress analysis FMECA Spare parts Product tree is used by such modules as RBD FTA Markov System Configuration and more Activating the Product Tree View To activate the Product Tree View 1 Activate the Project list see Projects list paragraph in Working with Projects chapter 2 Select the project you wish to open 3 From the Project menu choose Open or right click and choose Open from the pop up menu or press F2 4 RAM Commander displays the Product tree view Pr
37. FM MHE MHE 2 EE Description Alpha IDN Description Beta IDH Description Beta Description 1 A 0500 11111 6 1 000 1 1 1 1 No effect 1 000 4 Edit the NHE description as described in earlier in the To define a single NHE paragraph and change the IDN if required as described in the To select affected assembly paragraph Fla MHE MHE 2 EE Description Alpha IDN Description Beta IDN Description Beta Description Beta Seventy A 00500 11111 6 1 000 1 1 1 1 L 1 000 No effect 11 000 For this example if you wish to omit the Assembly level and specify the effect of NHE B on System level click the button in the IDN cell of NHE 2 group and select System item from the product tree Ret Des ID Mame Cty Opr FA 002 6 Status E Aircraft 1 1 0 0000 System 1 1 0 0000 Subsystem 1 1 0 0000 El Assembly 1 1 0 0000 El Block 1 1 0 0000 Fh MHE MHE 2 EE Description Alpha IOM Description Beta DI Description Beta Description Beta Severity A 0500 11 111 B og it C 1 000 D 11 000 1 7 Proceed with steps 3 4 to enter all the NHE chain 8 Enter End Effect information for the last NHE as decribed in Entering FMECA data for Item paragraph 2014 ALD Software Ltd mo RAM Commander User Manual 18 5 2 Additional operations in FMECA grid Spelling Checker You may use spelling checker in FMECA grid see Spelling checker paragraph in RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter
38. RBDFTETProjectOptions FailureModels PrimaryEvents Gates or FT Events FT Generic Models FT Gates FT Common Cause Failures For each table you should select all the available columns to be exported Export El x Database Schema Tables Columns Fiters Messages Table Failure Models Application Column Exported Ald 12 Beta 12 CalculatedQ 12 Calculated 1 2 DangerousCoveragePC Application Column 1 2 DangerousFailurePC ab Description DomancyAlag DoubleSequenceFlag 12 Eta EtaDistribution 4 Perform the export using this template creating Excel XLS file To import Isograph FT fault tree into the RAM Commander 1 Open the desired project and database 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 2 Open the list of fault trees create new or open any FT 3 Choose Import from Isograph Fault Tree option from the Tools menu 4 Select the previously created Excel file 9 Fault tree will be imported and you will get message about import result 19 3 14 3 Import FT from CAFTA RAM Commander may import single fault trees from CAFTA It needs two CAFTA files to import data e CAFTA Database file rr file containing basic events and gates data It is native CAFTA file you do not need to prepare it for import e Fault tree file FRE file containing fault tree structure It is not native CAFTA file CAFTA stores fault trees in CAF files and p
39. Reliability Availability Analysis Spares L Prowisioning Prediction Maintainability MTBF Prediction act ae PTH LEMECA FTA FIR Failure Criticalit Analysis na Fel Criticalit TAM Critical Failures False Alarm i BIT Coverage fe Testability FIR E False Alarm DRAIVI T Rate The described data flow is possible due to RAM Commander module integration and common data use by the modules e Reliability for both Operating and Non operating mode Maintainability and Stress Analysis use the same common Product Tree e FMECA module is based on the same product tree as reliability maintainability analysis e RBD module blocks may be linked to Product Tree items and their FMECA Failure Modes using their calculated MTBF and MTTR e Spare Parts module uses the same Product Tree and Reliability Maintainability calculation results e FTA module Basic Events may be linked to Product Tree items and their FMECA Failure Modes using their calculated MTBF and MTTR e Safety Module uses Fault Trees for failure conditions probability calculation 4 3 RAM Commander Data Organization Project is the major information unit in RAM Commander Project is a sort of a briefcase containing all the information available analysis types and cases diagrams calculations predictions and reports for specific system product or equipment unit 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Concepts 115 RAM Commander database
40. Swstem calculation results awailability T Unavaitability a Repair Frequency T recoweriesmour parar as Mer por ar Time Dependency Calculation Results O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis 417 F Steady State Mode Results for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Markov Time Dependency Mode Calculati 2 State A failed B ok Operational 0 007199100442 3 State3 A ok B failed Operational 0 007305526655 4 State4 A and B failed Failure 0 251395848 Svster calculation results 1 State1 Aok B ok Operational 0 7340995269 Availability 0 40604154 Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Relex1 Time 100000 hours state probabilities tor specified time Failure Frequency 2 170372 7548 006 fallures hour Performance 14 82703681 AAA Time Dependency Calculation Results for time interval table and graph 2014 ALD Software Ltd 3 Steady State Mode Results for Project TUTORIAL Drive E Markov Time Dependency Mode Calculation Results Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Relex1 Start Time O hours End Time 100000 hours Number of points 11 Bee Availability Unavallability Failure Frequency rh CC SSS Ci in sea eee e soooo josesazssass 01346744045 171288502 25087746120006 e roooo jo srosassas forezaotars 1617375113 23875039856006 ja eoooo o 7a32730802 02087281108 157117765 22008804190006 E Markov Calculation Results
41. The main purpose of Fault Tree Analysis is to evaluate the probability of the top event using state of the art analytical and or statistical methods These calculations involve system quantitative reliability and maintainability data such as failure probability failure rate expected failure down time repair rate etc Two types of analysis can be conducted using Fault Trees e Qualitative Analysis performed by means of Minimal Cut Sets MCS building e Quantitative Analysis calculating the Absolute probabilities i e the probabilities of system failures Definition A Cut Set is a collection of basic events that if all its events occur the fault trees top event is guaranteed to occur A Minimal Cut Set is such Cut Set that if any basic event is removed from the set the remaining events collectively are no longer a cut set A cut set that includes some other sets is not a minimal cut set For large trees with a large number of identical events the number of MCS may be very large increasing the calculation time immensely In this case MCS Cut off is used During the Cut Off some minimal cut sets which barely affect the final result can be deleted Three Cut Off parameters are the Max MCS number for Cut Off Relative cut off value and Relative Cut Off order see Building FTA diagrams Define FTA properties paragraph When the MCS count in calculated tree increases the Max MCS number the Cut Off process is performed If the rela
42. Welcome to the ALD Software Licensing Wizard fou must obtain and configure a walid license to start using your software ALD Software provides a plenty of different licensing models please choose a suitable licensing model below Each software copy is protected by a license file linked to the specific computer User have to generate site code file send it to the software vendors Yendo will provide a computer locked license file Network floating license file ALD Licensing Server ALD Licensing Server should be installed and configured You have to specity a path to the server on each workstation C Local HASP Plug Aladdin USB HASP Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of this workstation computer ou do not need to do anything except connecting the plug Network floating HASP Plug laddin USB NetHASP Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of licensing server and HASP License Manager should be installed on the server You do not need to do anything on a workstation No thanks already have my license configured Tou may return to the Licensing Wizard any tine later to configure your license gue 3 The following dialog box appears 4 License Manager i E xX Generate Site Code To get computer locked software license for this computer you have to perform the Generate operation Site code an encrypted information with unique data about your computer
43. 0 05 for some CCF Group and maximal probability of basic event in this CCF Group is 0 1 you mean that 0 1 0 05 0 005 is the probability that the common cause failure will occur and will cause all basic events in that CCF Group to occur as well During the FTA calculation each basic event belonging to some CCF Group will be connected through OR gate with its CCF Group which means that or basic event alone will occur or CCF will occur in other words basic event A belonging to CCF group X will be replaced with A OR X expression Probability of each basic event in CCF group will be Qi q Beta Qi where Beta is beta factor and Qi is event i total original unavailability Probability of CCF Group will be Qccfi Beta Qmax where Qmax is highest unavailability between unavailability values of events in this CCF group Project may have multiple CCF Groups Each basic event may belong to a single CCF Group To define a CCF Group e Select CCF Groups from the Library menu list of groups will appear e Press Add button new CCF Group screen will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 475 COF group Code Pwer Supplies Mame Description z Beta model assures that all events that belong to CCF Group fall when the common cause failure occurs susie ale Common cause failure probability is denved from comesponding basic event probabilities using the Beta factor below Madel BIE Parametrs 0 05 Be
44. 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 229 FIDES type RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type Protection Low power amp Power 8 5 O N 9 Silicon MOS Low power amp Power Silicon MOS O Silicon JFET Low power IGB T Power De 123 B 123 123 o 123 a cl 123 123 123 123 123 123 123 125 128 128 130 130 130 30 30 33 36 36 36 38 Te IGBT S Optoelectronic Optocoupler S transistor Optoelectronic Optocoupler S photodiode Minimelf common Resistor use high stability low power film Low power Resistor wirewound precision 8 9 Trimming potentiometer CERMET Potentiometer CERMET trimming O Resistive chip Resistive chip 41 SMD resistive network SMD resistive network 42 High stability bulk metal foil accuracy 1 Resistor AU metal foil precision 43 Fuse Fuse Fuse without type Ceramic capacitor with defined E 44 1 C t C T temperature coefficient Type 1 aae capacitor Sram Wipe m U 32 33 4 3 Optocoupler with phototransistor Minimelf high stability RS common RC low power film O O1 Q9 3 N Low power wirewound accuracy Eh Ceramic capacitor with non defined 4 T II 2 temperature coefficient Type ll a QYPE Ceramic capacitor with polymer Cerami Capacitor Polymeric Type ll iN O terminations with non defined temperature coefficient Type ll 47 Aluminium liquid electr
45. 339481 5 14 5 RBD diagram building System Configurations module may build an RBD diagram autmoatically for the selected configuration To build an RBD 1 Right click on a configuration select RBD from the pop up menu OR From the Configuration menu choose RBD 2 The Open RBD dialog box opens the first time the RBD module is run Mame HEW MEW Cancel NEW NON SWIT STANDARD GIT CHIN xl 3 Define the RBD diagram name After the RBD name has been entered once all future RBDs for this configuration will be created with this name 4 Press Ok RAM Commander will initiate RBD module and build a new RBD diagram corresponding to the selected configuration Note Each time you enter an RBD from Sys Conf the RBD is recreated If you want to use the RBD diagram in the future and change it without changing the configuration choose Save as from the RBD menu and sawe it under a new file name 2014 ALD Software Ltd System Configuration 377 14 6 MTBCF Calculation Select a configuration by clicking on it 2 Choose Edit from the pop up menu OR From the Configuration menu choose Edit 3 The System Configuration dialog box opens 4 Click the Calculate button 5 The MTBCF for RBD graph appears See RBD module chapter MTBCF_calculation for information about this calculation type 6 Choose Close to save the calculation data Max time Step and MTBCF to configuration
46. Cm Remark End effect criticality numbers IDN Name FR FIT Oper Time FM description FM ratio alpha Severity Point Criticality Cumulative Criticality End Effect Fail effect probability beta Criticality matrix List and count of FM items by severity and criticality Fault tree Presentation of EE NHE_FM chains in different forms EE all its causes NHE for each NHE all its causes other NHE or FMs etc NHE criticality IDN Name FM Description Max Severity Failure Rate Data Source Fail effect probability beta FM ratio alpha FR FIT Oper Time NHE criticality Testability see Testability Analysis Reports earlier in this chapter Configuration control Report for checking the consistency of FMECA data total Alpha 1 total Beta 1 etc In addition to these predefined reports Report Generator may be also used to create very customizable reports 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 8 1 To Generate an FMECA Report From the Reports menu choose Tree The Report Selection dialog box opens Report Selection dd Criticality Analysis End Effect Ass Criticality Matrix Fault Tree NHE Criticality Testability FECA 0 Configuration Control MMEL y fill Failure Cause No Effect presentation Print if itis the only WHE O Print always Detection Test Type Test Code Test Name Subtest Note The fields displayed change according to the report type selected Several reports may be produced
47. Corrective Actions Item types Feasibility Severity Occurrence Detection Copy Library The Process Design FMEA provides libraries for e Failure Modes e Failure Causes e End Effects e Process Controls e Corrective Actions e Feasibility e Severity e Occurrence and e Detection While building the project you can revise all of the libraries The libraries Severity Occurrence and Detection are provided with data that complies with the AIAG FMEA document and can also be changed as required O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 532 RAM Commander User Manual You can fill your libraries automatically using data from your FMEA table using Load to library function 21 9 1 To view and update FMEA libraries 1 Run the FMEA module 2 From the Libraries menu select the required library 3 The Library window opens e g Occurrence MN Library Occurrence Rank Probability Description Possible FA imn Probab From Probab To i Wer High Failure is almost inevitable Wer High Failure is almost inevitable High Repeated failures High Repeated failures Moderate Occasional failures Moderate Occasional failures Moderate Occasional failures Lowy Relatively few Failures Low Relatively few failures 150000 Remote Failure i unlikely 1500000 4 a f B 5 4 4 El 1 add Edit Delete Piw 4 The following buttons are available on the library window Add To add a library item E
48. FR 8350 FR 8350 FR 8350 FR 51 307 FR 51 307 FR 51 307 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 354 MTTR 0 354 MTTR 0 354 mr For Help press F1 3 75e 007 Repairable FR 2945 67 MTTR 0 127333 2 66e 007 Event Tree Analysis inductive failure analysis performed to determine the consequences of single failure for the overall system risk or reliability zR RAM Commander for Windows Event Tree Explosion for Project TUTORIAL on Drive Sp Event Tree tem Calculation Reports Library Toole View Window Help 28 9 Y amp 945 function Fire alarm is not activated True Sprinkler system P 0 001 does not function True Hr Fire alarm i mot activated False f P 0 999 Start of fire True P 0 8 Fire alarm is not activated True P 0 001 ee ee a E E A A E E A E A E E E E e a a Explosion P 0 01 A Sprinkler system does not function Fire alarm i mot activated False P 0 999 Ar Start of fire False P 0 2 A For Help press F1 Fire alarm is not activated Major damage P 992e 005 Damage P 928 006 Damage P 0 00791 208 Mentioned failure analysis methods may use product tree data and reliability maintainability analysis results 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Concepts 113 4 1 7 Stage 7 Safety Analysis RAM Commander Safety module helps to perform Functional Hazard
49. Getting Started InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Selection Please select a setup type Description Use this option to install AM Commander on a computer connected to a network on which R b Commander i already installed 1 Single User Installation 2 Server Network Installation Workstation Network Installation lnetallShreld Back Cancel 9 Choose the folder where the previous version components where installed it is folder C APP RAMC22 on the server C APP should be shared and mapped as network drive on a workstations with the same letter for example R Then required destination folder of workstation installation will be R RAMC32 InstallShield Wizard a X Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Type full pathname to R Commander in Network ASRAM Lae Browse InstallShield Back Cancel 6 Proceed with the rest of the setup process 2014 ALD Software Ltd so RAM Commander User Manual 1 Perform this procedure for all workstations 3 7 Minor Update RAM Commander Minor Update is required if you wish to install the latest RAM Commander Service Pack for your version The procedure slightly differs depending on current RAM Commander installation configuration standalone or client server e In case of Standalone configuration the procedure is performed in each PC with RAM Commander in standalone config
50. Hes or Allen Type Screws 0 60 T0 HesrAlen Type Screws Remo 0 17 TO Hex Allen Type Screws Reple 0 43 TOS Captive Screws 0 35 TOS Captive Screws Remove 0 15 TOS Captive Screws Replace 0 0 104 Dans 11 4 Turmlock 0 13 104 O2us 114 Tumlock Remove 0 08 104 O2us 014 Turmlock Replace 0 05 TOS Trdair Fasteners 0 12 tt helps calculating more complex task times by composing them from multiple small operations taken from that library Standard Tasks Library is used to define typical tasks composed of multiple standard simple operations i Tasks Library Manager Task Description EXAMPLE Edit Task Description Add Task DieleteT ask H Acton Connection Time Total Time 0 42 1 68 Report 0 07 0 07 3 T39 Cut Wire of Sleeving 0 04 0 04 Total Task Time 1 79 Jine ti Maintenance Library contains maintenance staff skills definitions equipment and materials definitions 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction NEON Maintenance Library Data Okil Support and Test Equipment Description Hour Cost 1 00 Amperemeter 1 00 Welding machine 300 Amp A 00 Welding machine 1200 Amp PANI Hoist 2 00 Compressor 2 00 Gr You may specify required skills equipment and materials for each maintenance task and then RAM Commander will be able to predict estimated labour hours usage hours materials usage required for field maintenance of your system The information in all these libraries is o
51. Mame Revision Owner Omer group Se Date Project group vil EA ee O ee 2010 08 25 2 TUTORISL_ DISPREL ALD 2010 05 12 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL MEL S ETA ALD 2010 05 16 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL MSGs ALD 2010 05 23 Tutorial A ITODIAI BOFIA ALT AmA A A The user who creates a new project owner or the first user who enters a non selected project project without current manager becomes the project manager Only this user can change project default settings default prediction methods FMECA Criticality settings etc All other users can enter the project and work with it However only the project manager can perform backup restore rename operations and only when there are no other active users currently working on the project The current project manager may decline his status by closing the project and de selecting it in the project list Then another user may select the project and become the project manager User opening a project without current manager becomes it s temporary manager until he finishes working with this project and closes the Product Tree view window of that project If user wishes to become a permanent manager of a particular project should select the project in the list of projects and perform the Select operation right click the project and choose Select from the popup menu To stop being a manager of the project user should perform the Deselect operation on this project Then any
52. O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 2 5 3 7 3 7 3 1 ILS user defined fields 9 Press Close 6 The Product Tree display will be updated to show the user defined fields Normal Functional View There are two product tree view modes for FMECA module Normal View with components and Functional Blocks View with FB displayed instead of assemblies To switch from one mode to another use View menu Normal Functional Block View mode See more in FMECA chapter Functional Blocks paragraph Product Tree Building Product Tree building is usually the next stage after the the new project creation Product Tree building involves 1 General Project Configuration definition 2 Top item data definition including ambient temperature environment conditions etc 3 Hierarchical tree structure creation with item data input using a Manual data input b Import Wizard Project Configuration Project related information like default reliability prediction methods Maintainability organizational levels or FMECA current phase are defined using Project Configuration dialog To change Project Configuration settings 1 Open a Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Configuration 3 The Project configuration dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 165 Project Configuration Default 5 Current Analysis Brault oCreen Monoperating zaz Maintainability Maintainability Repair Replace Levels De
53. Per ai Cumulative MTBF hours H HHHH EN a PPT AHH IA H CCCI CONC 10 100 1000 10000 Cumulative test time hours The graph above is created using the following sample failure data set O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 15 1 Point 6 B Reliability Growth 381 Point Module Features e The default values of MTBFi and Initial test time for Reliability Growth Planning are defined in accordance with MIL STD 1635 e The default MTBF R values for each project item are those predicted by the RAM Commander e Reliability Growth calculation can be performed for the whole system for any subsystem or even for an external item that doesn t belong to the current project e Reliability Growth Test plan and expected remaining time to test accomplishment are presented e Calculation of a Confidence Interval for a selected Confidence Level using the new Bootstrap technology A new statistical technology named Bootstrap reproduces the origin sample as many times as necessary and all new samples have absolutely identical statistical properties e Reports for all failures available or only for the last N reported failures e Tabular or graphic report presentation See next paragraph for a theoretical discussion of reliability growth Reliability Growth Modeling Reliability Growth Modeling RAM Commander s reliability growth module is the Duane method as described in MIL STD 1635 In this model the test
54. Product i unstable Severity E B Initial Potential Cause of Failure Occurence E gt Bad roaterals gt or Probability 0 000000 Detection ld B Risk Priority a5 Number RPM I Control methods Visual inspection 4 rays analysis el importance Critical Acton Results Actions Taken Decision making Severity 7 gt Mark different sizes with differ colors Always clean surtaces before E J welding l gt or Probability 0 300000 Detection 3 gt Fisk Priority Number APM Document Link Browse Open o I Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 519 Fill in the necessary fields and press Ok or 3 To insert data directly into the table double click on the Cause column of the blank row with only a Failure Mode entered in the table and then enter Cause data as required The number of Causes modes for every Failure Mode is unlimited 21 5 3 To edit or delete Failure Modes Failure Modes and Causes may be edited and deleted Right click the mouse and choose Edit Delete FM or Edit Delete FM Cause in the pop up menu or From the Item menu choose Failure Modes and select Edit Delete Failure Mode or Edit Delete FM Cause 21 5 4 To copy failure mode Use this option to copy a Failure Mode with all its hierarchy from one element to another inside the project or between different projects 1 Right click on req
55. Project name AIRC_EN 11 ATA 21 52 48 Item Name PACK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR L Failure PRED Fault Probabili after Next Worst ae Failure Cond i Failure Mode Indicati gt ty cand Failure in Condition Classificati i on per FH failure flight on per FH a A ee eee eee Out of range Un anniciated oii 2 5 1E 3 734E EXT ElU 2 L 8 923E high total loss of air 010 009 EIU Loss 005 supply to crew ye 2 571E EXT CP 2 13 and s 010 Control passengers Panel Loss of RAV opening command Out of range low In range high range In range high ee A A E IU O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Explanation of the report columns Above the report table two data fields appear ATA Candidate Item ATA Number Item Name Candidate Item Name Failure Cond Failure Condition Classification according to FHA Catastrophic Classification Hazardous Major Minor Probability per FH Expected probability of the Failure Condition according with FTA calculation No results without O amp M Yes results after O amp M Prob after cand failure Expected probability of the Failure Condition after the candidate failed per FH according with FTA calculation Next Worst Failure in Next Worst Failure 1st failure in flight according with Fussell Vesely Flight Importance criterion rob after next worst per Expected probability of the Failure Condition after the next worst FH failure according w
56. RAM Commander FMECA is a module that has been designed for reliability professionals and design engineers and is suitable for both hardware and functional approaches The module fully compliant with MIL STD 1629A and other standards is a powerful tool with the following features FMECA data management Calculation of criticality numbers Report generation FMECA utilizes the RAM Commander product tree and associated failure modes You can actually view each level of your project giving an overview of how all items interact with each other e Library driven FMECA is equipped with an extensive set of libraries for managing components failure modes test methods etc FMECA features e Fully integrated within RAM Commander The FMECA module utilizes the RAM Commander product tree and its reliability information e Library driven FMECA is equipped with an extensive set of customizable libraries for managing components failure modes test methods etc like FMD 97 CENELEC EN50129 etc e Multiple phases different EE severity in different phases Fully visible failure mode gt NHE gt EE chain input with unlimited number of NHE Next Higher Effect Functional Blocks analysis on components or on functional level Customizable additional fields customizable field names Reports FMEA Criticality Matrix Criticality Analysis and more Graphical Fault Isolation Tree Fault Tree Report automatic fault tree creation in FTA Software Modu
57. Reliability Calculation Reliability Calculation 211 8 Reliability Calculation The reliability calculation prediction is usually the third stage after Project Creation and Product Tree Building in RAM Commander Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety analysis process Create the project and build the product tree before you may proceed with the procedures explained in this chapter During this stage user should obtain failure rate for components in the product tree RAM Commander will then calculate the sum of component failure rates to calculate the FR of assemblies subsystems systems and of the whole product Alef Des ID Mame Cty Status W TUTORIAL Communication System EA e Communic 1 CN017000 Main Switch 1 CAO 004 Tbu 1 80864 T gt 13 2 80088 T gt 1110 380031 b 1112 4 LM299 b u13 5 74L530 A1 10 E ALA 1 F A11 12 7 AN A30 34 a AZ 9 CK 10 CK ee 11 CK e 12 CK cc5 13 CK Ys L0 4 14 HLMP 2450 YE L5 b 15 HLMP 2400 102 16 DP2 Receiver 2 CN017016 1 RAM Commander may perform the reliability prediction for both Operating and Non Operating modes There is a number of ways to calculate components Failure Rate 1 Performing reliability prediction using one from more than 30 reliability prediction methods such as MIL HDBK 217 Telcordia Siemens FIDES NPRD 95 etc Specifying manually or importing fixed Failure Rate received f
58. Report button to print out the list of found items You may also locate item in the product tree by the known hierarchical ID like 1 2 4 5 1 Activate the Product Tree view 2 From the Tree menu choose Go to item 2014 ALD Software Ltd 162 RAM Commander User Manual 3 Provide the item hierarchical ID Sa Ta 7 2 5 7 2 5 1 4 The item will be located in the product tree Changing tree presentation You may change the source of item Name column shown in the product tree get additional fields displayed in the product tree and switch tree presentation between hardware items and functional blocks Changing Name of tree items The Product tree vew uses the Name column to display one of the following item identifiers e Generic Name e Part number e Catalog Number e Military Number Each item has four identifiers One of them is always displayed in the Product tree view and in the various reports The Item ID Priority dialog box sets the order of priority of which name to display for an item in the Product tree view and printed out in the reports If one field with higher priority is empty for some item value will be taken from next by priority field If it is empty too the next highest priority field value will be taken To choose the item identifier you d like to display print out as item name 1 From the View menu choose Item ID Priority tem ID Priority Generic name Part name Can
59. To calculate a failure rate FR for a part using NPRD 2011 you must first define its calculation method as NPRD 2011 1 Click the NPRD 2011 button in the Item Data dialog 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 225 Item Data Family MECHANICAL RefDes foinhfd ltem code Accelerometer Fart name Environment us Cur AUC Delta Temp 0 js Cur 35 e Method of FR p calculation default Method NPRD 2011 Failure distributior Exponential FR p Predicted Fieldfact 1 Item FR The part s NPRD 2011 dialog box opens NPRD 2011 Motor Ref des Motor Ty EMM GF Temp 35 Part name MOT9 78 Mil num Cat num CNOZ3770 Generic name Part Type Search Automatic search in library Manual library record selection Motor Environment Qualty FR 10 Environment A E m 15 337195 Quality Commercial 27 050321 Military 12 138937 Unknown 14 872046 Unknown 154 376007 Failure Rate E 10 6 i Search data for calculation by Automatic search only The NPRD 2011 provides data form much larger variety of component types than you can find in the standard list of RAM Commander s Item types Part type may be defined automatically by RAM Commander or you may use NPRD 2011 search to find the required part type To start the search 1 Press Search button The Search dialog will appear 2 Type Part num
60. To open the libraries from Safety Module choose Safety FMECA Library from the Libraries group of the main menu Libraries screen will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Duration in hours 1 000 Phase Name Phase Description Default Phase anenenenenenssenesceneseenssnnnsenessnnaescceseacssconssonessnnessnasssenssenessnneseensscnessasessceed Copy all FMECA data Normalize all Alpha and Beta Close Report The screen contains all libraries each library is located on its own page Select the page title with library name in the upper part of the screen to switch to the required page Three libraries in Safety FMECA common library are relevant for Safety module Phases Safety Severities and End Effects Working with Phases Switch to the first page of the screen called Phase Phases library is a list of product life cycle phases like Flight Landing etc Each project should have at least one default phase in the library Each phase has a name description and phase duration in hours To create a new phase just find the last empty table line select the first cell Phase Name and type in the phase name Press enter switch to the next field and type phase description Press enter and type phase duration in the last field To edit any phase parameter double click the corresponding cell type the information and press enter Working with Severities Switch to the page named Safety S
61. enter at least one End Effect with the Severity rank Each End Effect must have a Severity Rank specified 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 18 4 3 18 4 4 18 4 5 Optional FMECA Libraries The Failure Mode Cause and Component Libraries are optional These three libraries may be very useful during the FMECA information input The Failure Mode and Cause libraries may contain user s definitions of the Failure Modes that may be selected from the list This saves time for typing and allows you to achieve consistency of spelling The Component library serves for recording of the failure modes data for different components parts based on the component s Family Item Code and Type The data is based on the FMD 97 publication from the RAC USA Testability Analysis Libraries Test Type Test and Indication Libraries are used for the Testability Analysis At least one Test Type and Test must be defined when you start performing the Testability Analysis Subtest library contain different subtests for the user to select during Testability Analysis information input Generating a Library Report You may generate a report of any library that displays its contents To generate a specific library report 1 Open the FMECA library 2 Select a page with the name of the library you wish to display print 3 Choose the Report button Global Change of the End Effect Library To make a global change of the Severity
62. enter the element s specifications Choose OK O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 345 or e Activate the Product tree view Drag and drop a tree item into the RBD element RAM Commander displays the reliability data RAM Commander updates the reliability block diagram The Element parameters definition dialog box contains several fields as shown below Element parameters definition Ref Des Transmitter Element Type REGULAR Part Number Repair Full repair Descriptiors 7 Inspection period Remark Duty cycle 2 Color FR distribution E out of M Repair distribution Exponential 1 Exponential FR distribution parameters 1 Repair distribution parameters MTBF hours 445099 100 MCT hours 0 127333 Switch Connection with Product Tree FMECA Product Tree Iter ID E FR number i Select Fe description When you add elements to the RBD you must specify their characteristics in the Element parameters definition dialog box s fields These characteristics include FR distributionjA probability density function describing the part s failure rate FR distribution Parameters describing the FR distribution such as wand ofor the Normal parameters distribution or MTBF for exponential distribution K the minimum number of units that must operate for the element to function N the total
63. field FR etc Non operating Environment temperature field FR etc Maintainability level of replace repair MTTR etc Miscellaneous Price volume etc see Item data editing for more information ILS Integrated Logistics Support user defined fields see ltem data editing for more information Full list of fields you may see in the paragraph Database Fields Index later in this manual However there are several entries in the field names list which do not correspond to any of the existing RAM Commander database fields e Ignore select for fields you wish to ignore and do not import e Depth select the data column presenting the imported item level in the tree hierarchy The Depth field allows the hierarchical construction of the tree e Parent Ref Des O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree NOS e Hierarchical Parent Ref Des e Stress e Search in library See next paragraphs for more information about each one of these fields There are also several fields which contain list values and not just numeric or character values these field will be imported correctly if correct values codes abbrewations are provided See more information about correct acceptable values for the following fields later in this chapter e Item type e Environment see Top item definition for envronments list Do not set environment for each item if it is the same for the whole project or assembly envronment and temperature data are inhe
64. intent The potential failure mode could also be the cause of a potential failure mode in a higher level subsystem or system or be the effect of a potential failure mode in a lower level component A recommended starting point is a review of past items that have gone wrong concern reports and group brainstorming Potential failure modes that could only occur under certain operating conditions such as hot cold dry or dusty weather should also be considered Effect of Failure An Effect is an adverse consequence that the Customer might experience The Customer could be the next operation subsequent operations or the end user State clearly if the failure mode could impact safety or non compliance to regulations The effect should always be stated in terms of the specific system subsystem or component being analyzed Potential effects of failure are defined as the effects of the failure mode on function as perceived by the customer Severity Severity is an assessment of how serious the Effect of the potential Failure Mode is on the Customer value of the most serious effect Explanation of Severity values can be found in the library press the lt gt button near the Severity field Enter the following Cause of Failure data Potential Cause of Failure A Cause is the means by which a particular element of the design or process results in a Failure Mode Enter every Potential Cause for Failure Mode Potential cause of failure
65. into the same or different tree multiple times You can perform the following actions with Transfer gates e To add sub tree to the current tree select the predecessor gate right click and choose Add transfer to sub tree Then select the desired tree from the list e To open the sub diagram double click the transfer gate in the diagram e To change the sub tree under the transfer select the transfer gate right click and choose Edit from the pop up menu In the Edit dialog box click Select and choose the desired sub tree from the list e To delete the transfer and insert the whole sub tree into the current tree select the transfer gate right click and choose Expand sub tree from pop up menu e To divide a part of a large tree into sub tree select tree element you wish to be a top gate of the sub tree right click and choose Transfer branch to sub tree from the pop up menu The Transfer gate and a new sub tree are created 19 3 5 Events library All basic undeveloped and house events that you assigned to the tree are added to the event library In tree element item data screen you may choose an event from the library by opening Code combo box or by clicking the gt button to the right of it lf you want to edit or view the Events Library choose Events from the Library menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd 19 3 6 FTA events library Description Alternative transmitter Failure Alternative mobile radio station failure
66. ltem FR Duty cycle 1 3 42052e 002 n A FF p El A i iHe 002 redicted O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 9 4 Data Import You may import the Cross Reference library data from ASCII text file It should be text file where each line corresponds to one cross reference pair PN gt GN CN gt GN or MN gt GN and each line contains three fields Cross String 2 Defining the type of the cross reference reference flag It may have one of the following three values CN Catalog number PN Part number MN Military number Cross String 62 Left justify and add trailing Part number catalog or military number reference name blanks so that the string is 62 characters long Generic name String 42 Left justify and add trailing RAM Commander blanks so that the string is 42 Generic name characters long See the example file contents below CN1817430 T4nCOG CN1817451 74HC04 CN1817452 CASOS The first line of this file defines import of Cross Reference Library record wich means that the part with Catalog number CN 1817450 corresponds to RAM Commander s generic name GN 74HCOO The import of such file will result in the following records of the Cross Reference Library B ross Feference Manager Cross Reference Mame Generic Mame D 1817450 7AHCOO EJ 11817451 74HC04 E 1817452 7AHCO A Ue To Import Cross reference Data from an ASCII File 1
67. o Data Exchange rnia a A aa 138 9 SPENDO Checker asia dd iii 139 Part 6 Working with Projects 142 1 Projects SA aa a a aa aaraa a iow seneetediecauewe biases 142 Working with the project list coooonnncccnnnnnccconcnncoccnconcnnnnnnnconnnnnn coreana rrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnrrnnnnanes 143 2 M ltiuUSer ACCC SS ana a a r a 144 2014 ALD Software Ltd Contents 5 3 Creating a NeW Prol nossos a ai 146 4 Managing PETMISSIONS ti a a a a aaa aa A E 147 Advanced Permis SIONS sinss nl 148 9 OPENING Project a a EEA 150 6 Backup Reslore isinan EE riscos 152 T Proj ct COPIES TOVISIONS sisses a aa 153 AddHti nal Operations ninia a a a eee 153 9 Project Translation to Different Languages ooococococccccoconcncococecocananannnnnrarararnraranananenes 154 Part7 Product Tree 157 Activating the Product Tree Vie Wi 158 2 Product Tree NAVIGATION cuina 158 Selecting Current ANAIS lata 158 ExXpa ding ana Colaps IRA suicida 160 Openmo tem S iran A scans R 160 o a a a i 160 Changing tree presentation aa A eaaa A a Ea 162 Changing Name Of tee Kems asirna A ucla ites IE 162 Custom tee Meld Snu a a a Sor ene dd o E 163 Normal Functional Vie W essien n aaa a R e gee ee 164 3 Produci Tree BUIN aiii a 164 Project COntgUFACI N naciste ir 164 TOP lem GENNIO dian E a S lio ti 165 NOW IEE IN creation a a Do 167 New CA AAA A eteees ca eamcan ore ian ieee 168 e een Oe ee ee ee 169 tem datae ditihg
68. possible way See each option description for better understanding When creating a new diagram diagram properties should be set up e from the ETA menu choose Properties or e double click an empty white space on the diagram The following properties may be defined Alignment Central or Top balanced tree alignment automatic arrangement should be checked If checked element code will be displayed on the element box If checked element name will be displayed on the element box Show probability lf checked element probability will be displayed on the element box Results display Choose Q mean steady state probability or Q t probability at time t calculation Having defined your ETA diagram properties you can now start creating the ETA diagram O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 500 RAM Commander User Manual 20 2 ETA diagram building When a new diagram is opened Initial event and outcome event are created so the tree building can be started immediately by adding regular events among the initial and outcome columns E ee ce rc er rr ce Initiating event Outcome Initiating event P 0 To add an event select another event and e right click on it and choose Append event from the pop up menu to add a new event to the end of the diagram before Outcome Or e right click on it and choose Insert event from the pop up menu to insert a new event before the selected event You wi
69. to copy selected components only from the project library to the global library for the selected family ltem type only You may select multiple components using right click and Select Deselect option As you select components the V icon appears in the left column of the Library Manager window Caution Be careful when copying to the Global library There is no undo option to easily recover from mistakes Another option to reuse project component library in another project is to copy the library from one project to another See Copy libraries between projects paragraph later in this chapter Reports To generate a project global library report 1 From the Report menu choose All Library or Current Item type report 2 The Library Manager Report Selection dialog box opens 3 In the Library Manager Report selection dialog box select report type and filtering conditions Generic name search Start First position pattern search using the string in the Generic Name field Middle Pattern search starting in any position using string in Generic Name field No pattern search Generic name Target string for the pattern search Type of report Include only generic name Include all library fields Data source includes Include components provided by ALD Include components entered by user Include both ALD and user defined components 4 Choose OK to accept the entered values 5 RAM Commander displays a report list containing the requeste
70. 0 125 Luality ha Pl g 1 Lead Configuration Mon SMT Distance rile Note the actual values marked with yellow which will be used instead undefined values on the previous screen Click the same button again to return to the normal view Calculation defaults are stored per each project and are also stored in the global RAM Commander configuration When you create a new project global calculation defaults are copied to the newly created project Any user can review the defaults for any component type defined for a specific reliability prediction method Users can also modify defaults for their own projects Only the system manager can update global defaults The Default Manager list displays data for the reliability prediction method selected in the Project Configuration dialog box For instance if Telecordia formerly Bellcore Issue 6 was selected as the reliability prediction method then the Default Manager list initially displays all the defaults for IC Digital components specified by Telecordia formerly Bellcore Issue 6 To open the Calculation Defaults manager 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Default Manager the list will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd MIL 217F 2 P stress ELECTRONIC IC Memory Techn Type Subtype Correct code Memory Wed cmos ROM 16000 WE cmos PROM 16000 UYEPROM 16000 EEPROM FLOTOX 16000 Cmos EAPROM
71. 03 01 516_AlRCAAFT Safety Assessment Process Example SVETA ALD 2010 06 07 Tutorial SAFETY MEW gwen ho qwerna doquier iofwern iolwem ALD 2010 06 17 TANKE_ SAMPLE MOTI 2010 03 07 Tutorial TUTORIAL Communication System ALD 2010 06 28 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL_DISPREL Dispatch Reliability testing and demo ALD 2010 05 24 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL MMEL Sample project with MMEL analysis SWETA 2010 06 23 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL M5G3 Sample project with MSGS analysis example ALD 2010 06 01 Tutorial TUTORIAL NODA ALD 2010 06 22 TUTORIAL VALE ALD 2010 06 14 TUTORIAL RAFI 2010 06 01 Projects may be backed up sent by email restored placed on your local or network drive Multiple users may work with the same project simultaneously over the network Administrator may set up project access permissions You should create a project in order to start building the Product Tree or use any one of available analysis types Stage 2 Product Tree Building Inside the project Product Tree or Bill of Materials should be built It represents full hierarchical product system structure from main subsystems to the smallest blocks and components like springs capacitors and resistors with detailed information about each block or component 2014 ALD Software Ltd 4 1 3 RAM Commander Concepts 107 2d RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C cro Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View BD AE P Current Analysis Bef Des ID Na
72. 1 MROS241 5044 Product tree BOM Librar MCMM O1001 JED 561 JF 421401001 ED561 JF Cancel 4 In the Search for list box do one of the following e To load data for all items including those that already have data select All parts e To load data for only those items without data select Parts without data e To load data into empty fields only those marked select Fields without data O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 259 9 In the Component Library and GPRD list boxes select two different search priorities e N A do not use this library at all e Low Priority use this library after the other one e High Priority use this library first You must select two different search priorities For example if you want to use only the component library select High Priority in its list box and N A for the failure rate table library If you want to use both libraries first search the failure rate table library and then the component library only if no matching entry was found in the failure rate library select High Priority for the GPRD FR table library and Low Priority for the component library 6 Select Use automatic PN recognition if you wish to use it see Part Number Recognition paragraph 7 If partial recognition is acceptable choose partial recognition which allows finding part data in the library even if PN as stated in the BOM product tree differs from PN stated in the l
73. 11 7667 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 354 MTTR 0 354 MTTR 0 354 mr For Help press F1 RAM Commander FTA is a powerful tool with the following features e Up to date intuitive and powerful fault tree diagram interface allowing full control over the diagram elements location colors styles Zooms etc e Handy methods for diagram printing and simple Copy amp Paste transfer to other applications e Easy to use Events Library e Calculation of Unavailability at time t Mean Steady state Unavailability and Minimal Cut Sets generation e Highly intelligent MCS Cut off truncation for large fault trees calculation e Calculation of Importance and Sensitivity e Calculation of Frequency Intensity PFH PFD IEC 61508 Lambda Equivalent EN 50129 e BDD Binary Decision Diagram Calculation and visualization e Customizable reports FTA diagram MCS events library etc e Visualization of MCS on the fault tree e Visual True False Propagation of event states e Repeated Events Indication e Common Cause Failures CCF Support e Link between FTA Reliability Maintainability and FMECA modules 2014 ALD Software Ltd ao RAM Commander User Manual 19 1 e Automatic creation of the fault tree from FMECA FMEA and RBD FTA basics Fault Trees are one of the most widely used methods in system reliability and failure probability analysis A Fault Tree is a graphical representation of events in a hierarchical tree like structu
74. 424 516 Failure Mode Ratio 424 fault isolation 316 Fault Trees 460 Feasibility 529 FIDES 226 228 FMD97 431 FMEA 508 FRACAS 113 Frequency 459 FTA 459 Functional Hazard Analysis 538 Fussell Vesely 490 H House event 460 hybrid 238 Import Wizard 184 Importance 459 Importance amp Sensitivity Analysis 490 Importance amp Sensitivity analysis 481 Intensity 459 Junction temperature 220 e Level of replace 297 2014 ALD Software Ltd Index M Q Maintainability 297 QS 9000 509 Maintainability allocation 302 QS 9000 508 Markov Markov chain 406 R Markov chain analysis 406 Steady State Mode 406 RAM Commander 16 Time Dependency Mode 406 RBD 340 Master Minimum Equipment List 556 RCM 323 MCS Cut off 487 reliability allocation 241 Mct 299 Reliability Analysis 108 286 Mct max 301 Reliability Block Diagram 340 mean time between critical failures 340 reliability growth 380 Mean Unavailability 487 Reliability Centered Maintenance 323 MIL HDBK 472 297 Report Generator 130 MIL STD 1635 380 RIAC System Reliability Toolkit 361 MIL STD 882 538 RPN 516 Minimal Cut Set 460 Minimal Cut Sets 459 S Mission Profile 286 MMEL 556 SAE APR 4761 538 Monte Carlo 340 481 Safety 113 MSG 3 571 Sensitivity 459 MTBCF 340 362 366 Severity 424 516 MTIR 299 Spare Parts 391 N Spare parts calculation 392 Spare parts optimization 395 Stress 328 Next Higher Effect 424 Stress Strength 236 NHE 424 substrate 238 No Short
75. 9 Enter RAM Commander and press Enter 6 Program will find and show you one line in the right part of the screen Press TAB cursor will move to the left part of the screen Press Del confirm Yes When you start RAM Commander installation again it will not offer you Modify Remove option again but will offer to install RAM Commander perform the usual installation steps Licensing and Plugs Problem 1 The PC used as a network plug server has Windows 95 operating system and plug driver should be started manually after server reboot Solution On the server copy NHSRVW32 EXE to the SYSTEM directory in the Windows root directory c WINDOWS SYSTEM Create NHSRVW32 EXE shortcut in the Startup group of the Start menu Open Windows Explorer O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started find and select cC1WINDOWSISYSTEMINHSRVW32 EXE file Right click on Start button choose Explore open folder Programs then subfolder Startup Drag amp Drop c WINDOWS SYSTEM NHSRVW32 EXE file to StartUp folder Restart the computer Now you may remove insalation CD from server and HASP manager should start automatically after login to windows please note not after server OS loading as in WinNT but after successful user login Problem 2 HASP Plug can t be found on Windows 2000 XP Installation is completed but RAM Commander can t be started and gives error message about Local and Network Plugs Solution You should install new
76. Choose OK 6 RAM Commander displays a project list A project list shows a list of all the RAM Commander projects stored on the selected drive You may create open in different modes delete copy backup restore and rename projects To open a project in main analysis mode O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 122 RAM Commander User Manual 9 6 1 Activate the Project list 2 Select the project you wish to open 3 From the Project menu choose Open or right click and choose Open from the pop up menu or press F2 4 RAM Commander displays the Product tree view See Product Tree chapter for more information about the Product tree view To create a new project 1 Activate the Project list 2 From the Project menu choose Create or press F7 The Edit project properties dialog box opens 3 Enter the Project name Group Description FR units and Permission 4 Choose OK 9 RAM Commander updates the Project list See chapter Project building for more information about project definition See Working with Projects chapter for more information about the projects management advanced operations project permissions management and more Product Tree View The RAM Commander Product tree view is a graphical hierarchical presentation of the project s items Bill Of Materials Product breakdown Navigating through a project is very similar to navigating through any commonly used hierarchical structures such as e
77. Data Part and Catalog numbers manufacturer price condemnation rate Maintainability repair distribution e Reliability data field failure rates tables e FMECA data Failure Modes list for the part The GPRD module allows the use of available field and manufacturer s data in the process of reliability analysis and provides prediction of the Failure Rate for unknown temperature values Sometimes modules of the system under analysis are off the shelf products with existing field reliability data In such cases it would be necessary to manually enter or automatically import such as from FRACAS the available field data for the reliability analysis The GPRD module gives an efficient solution to this problem and extremely useful when e Field Manufacturer s Failure Rates are known only for a few temperature values e A complex assembly is repeated in the project e The display of underlying assembly components is not desirable for security or other reasons but its FR should not be fixed 5 Calculation Defaults Library 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 247 RAM Commander provides defaults values for all component information required for reliability prediction RAM Commander uses these default values for reliability prediction in all places where the necessary data was not entered Any user can review the defaults for any component type defined for a specific reliability prediction method This chapter deals with
78. Do the following 9 Press Start button 10 Choose Run 11 Type regedit and press ok 12 0pen HKEY LOCAL MACHINE group then Software Pervasive Software Microkernel Router Version 7 Settings 13 Double click on Target Engine key in the right part of the window 14 Change key value to 0 15 Press Ok Problem 7 Error message with code 8020 after starting RAM Commander Solution In client server configuration can appear on client if connection with the server was terminated User should ensure the server is on the connection is established network drive etc and reboot the workstation Problem 8 Error message W3DBSMGR Error 8509 Timeout occurred during the initialization of MKDE or error message with code 3012 inside it Solution The most common reason of the problem absence or old version of Microsoft dll files WINDOWS SYSTEM MSVCP60 DLL and WINDOWS SYSTEM MSVCRT DLL Both files must be present and their creation year must be later then 1998 If you need the files contact our support service or take them from other computer with the same operating system Problem 9 Error 1021 Sometimes happen because there is not enough free space on the system disk disk where 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started NOS Windows installed or insufficient access rights to RAM Commander folders with database files Solution 1 Check free disk space if low free some disk space and tr
79. EE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta IDN Description Beta Description Beta Severity Total dive 0 30 1 2 3 No data 1 000 7 2 Communication 7 000 Communication 1 000 II Te 1 fall processing System Control Loss an B Loss pa Single 0 0 123 Erom Data 1 000 1 2 Wrong System 1 000 Communication 0 800 III Te 2 sector data processing Control Degradation k an errar i i p Maintainance 0 200 Iv Degradation Each failure mode may have multiple detection methods selected from FMECA Tests library Each detection method may have Efficiency factor probability of failure detection from O to 1 Selected Test Data Code Name Subtest Efficiency f Mole recelve best 1 00 10 visual Inspector 1 00 Failures without detection methods considered to be undetectable latent failures Additional information remarks compensating provisions corrective actions user defined fields etc may also be defined for each Failure Mode See below descriptions of standard FMECA data table fields Field Description MIL STD 1629 Failure Mode The manner by which a failure is observed Generally describes the way the failure occurs and its impact on equipment operation Failure Cause The physical or chemical processes design defects quality defects part misapplication or other processes which are the basic reason for failure or which initiate the physical process by which deterioration proceeds to failure Alpha Failure Failure mode c
80. Failure have a direct adverse effect on operating safety Question 3 Does the combination of a Hidden Functional Failure and one additional failure of a system related or backup function have an adverse effect on operating safety Question 4 Does the Functional Failure have a direct adverse effect on operating capability 8 Hidden Safety Selected answers are marked by green background color c Press Ok when done d Press Provide remarks and explanations button 9 Hidden Economic e Remarks dialog will appear provide remarks on your decision MSG 3 FEC Selection Failure Data Item Data Ref Des Fuel Storage System ATA Number Description Part Number MAINTENANCE SIGNIFICANT ITEM MSI Function and Failure Data Function Fuel Storage System Functional Failure Fuel storage Failure Effect Fails to store fuel Questions Answers and Clarifications 28 10 00 Question Remarks and Clarifications Q1 Is the occurrence of a Functional Failure evident to the operating crew during the performance of their normal duties Q2 Does the Functional Failure or secondary damage resulting from the Functional Failure have a direct adverse effect on operating safety 03 Does the combination of a Hidden Functional Failure and one additional failure of a system related or backup function have an adverse effect on operating safety 04 Does the Functional Failure have a direct adverse e
81. Fe DARAMES2LibiCompliblmport xls 7 DS fe 17 CERDIP COIF Ceramic Dualln Line Package CT E calle Memory ff ME were pe type Technology Quality 4 PartNarne TYPE TECH PACK QUAL SETE 4 UYEPROM 5 FTTL 17 CERDIP CDIP Ceramic Dud D 6 MEM B 11 OTP 41 LETTL CERDIP COIP Ceramic Dual In Line Enhanced POFP Plastic Quad Platpack L lead SOFP TOFP WQFP LOFP Plastic 5 20 Power QFP CROFP HOFP PowerQuar CERPACE Bele Eg CQFF Cerquad Ceramic Quad Flat F 7 Arial T PLCC Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier J CLCC Ceramic Leadless tand Leadi e 12 Such libraries lookup fields contain both general description like UVEPROM TTL etc and RAM Commander internal code 1 2 3 etc required for import it may be used to create automatic data conversion routines from customer specific components database to RAM Commander import file Such conversion routine may be created inside the supplied CompLiblmport xls file using VB for applications or lookup fields formulas see sheet ConversionExample of the excel file O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 255 SN CB Po ee ee Fa 1 Automatic conversien example of discrete values from customer library code to RAM Commander library code 4 lc Memory 24623462346 A 1 T 234623463444 B 2 24623463424 E e 3 234623462346 O 4 0 234623462346 E 5 RAM Commander code js received from customer code us
82. HASP plug drivers If you have our installation CD open folder HASP Driver Ver 4 99 and start file HDD32 EXE Install the driver for Parralel port and reboot your computer If you have no CD please ask your RAM Commander suppliers for the new plug driver version 4 99 If 4 99 version driver does not help please try to install HASPUserSetup exe driver from the installation CD HASP Driver HL folder Another option is to download the latest HASP driver from ALD web site http www aldsoftware com download download HASPUserSetup_6x21 exe Problem 3 HASP Plug can t be found in segmented network VLAN Solution License Manager developers give the following solution a There is a file nethasp ini b Place this file to RAMC32 BIN folder c Open this file with Notepad d Find section NH_TCPIP line 96 find key NH_SERVER_ADDR 111 111 111 111 e modify its value to the License server s IP address for example NH SERVER_ADDR 192 114 176 65 f save the file RAM Commander should be able to find the plug There could be some more surprises in the network The server has more than 1 network adapter If after steps from a to f you still have the same message about plug not found and you have a possibility that some computers are connected through other network adapter do the following g There is a file nhsrv ini h On the server place this file to license manager folder where the executable is i Open th
83. INLET PRESSURE SENSOR L Out of _BASIC O EXTEN EIS _UNDEVELOPED O EXT EIU 1 L EIU Erroneous data BASIC CO ECS 205 L PIP_1 145C14 Erroneous BASIC O 21_411111_L Unannunciated loss of left pack TRANSFER O 21_411111_L Unannunciated loss of left pack O 4111111 L Component external leakage requiring pack clos _ AND Oo 2141111111_L Component external leakage requiring TRANSFER 41111112L DR ll UNDEYELOPED O EXT EIU 1 L EIU Erroneous data BASIC Oo 4111113 L Compononent failure leading to pack closure no _ AND go 41111132 L Loss of pack closure annunciation OR O UNDEVELOPED O EXT EIU 1 L EIU Erroneous data BASIC o 21_41111131_L Compononent failure leading to pack _ TRANSFER Oo 4111112 L FC closure not detected _AND Oo FCV1 L FLOW CONTROL VALVE Valve failed closed _BASIC 3 In the Set Worst Failure screen select new Worst Failure and press OK Cell with manually selected failure will be marked with grey background In order to return to the automatic selection Select required cell and press Reset button To perform quantitative analysis for entire project select Recalculate MMEL from Calculation menu 23 5 2nd step MMEL Five Column Format Report Preparation Note This step is performed only if after the quantitative analysis it has been decided that an Item is considered as a MMEL candidate Prior to generation of Five Column Format Report you have to do the foll
84. InstallShield lt Back Lancel 2 Insert SunVote Receiver into the USB port of your computer 3 During the driver installation select specified location for drivers Ramc Tools SunARS_USB_Driver folder on RAM Commander installation CD 4 When the driver installation is finished check COM Port number assigned to SunVote device a Right click on My Computer choose properties b Select Hardware tab press Device Manager button find Ports section locate USB Serial Port device th ge MONICOrS El a Network adapters E dl Ports COM amp LPT e me Communications Port COMI unn LE ECP Printer Port e a p ne H na Sound video and game controllers c Double click the device select Port settings tab press Advanced button Port settings screen will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd USB Transfer Sizes Select lower settings to correct performance problems at low baud rates Select higher settings for Faster performance Receive Bytes 4096 d Remember the port you may also change it if required and close the open system dialogs e Open RAMC ini file in RAM Commander installation folder BIN subfolder using Notepad 9 Edit VotingSysCOMPort set port number found earlier in above steps For example if port is COM3 then RAMC INI file should contain the following lines FMEA VotingS ys COMPort COM3 6 Save RAMC ini 7 Installation is finished 21 8 Making Decisions on Corre
85. Ltd Working with Projects 147 Permission Permission refers to the access level assigned to the project The following settings are possible Owner user Owner group All Advanced See more information in the Permissions management paragraph later in this chapter Automatic tree Changes to the product tree do not automatically initiate the reliability recalculation maintainability FMECA recalculation process For a correct analysis the product tree must be recalculated prior to creating reports Check the Automatic tree recalculation checkbox if you want RAM Commander to automatically recalculate the entire project before any report is produced This option is not recommended for large projects since the recalculation takes a long time and is performed before each report generation 4 Choose OK 9 RAM Commander updates the Project list Now you may open the project and work with the desired module or modules see corresponding module manual chapter for further directions You may return to project properties editing any time later 1 Close the project if it is open 2 Activate the Project list 3 Double click on the project you want to edit 4 In the Edit Project Properties dialog box enter the new values 9 Choose OK 6 4 Managing permissions The permission level is set individually for each project from one of the following options Only the project author may access the project Only project manager may
86. Mas time 1e 006 Simulation Fast H of points 10 Number of runs Report Both Seed 17 Identical for current ABD only Inspection period 2 Uk Cancel 3 In the Monte Carlo Configuration dialog box enter the configuration values Start time Starting time for collection of results The simulator always starts at time t 0 Max Time Elapsed time for collecting results of points Number of intervals in output graph Report Text graph or both Identical If selected simulation assumes that if multiple blocks are identical have the same Ref Des value it is actually the same single block even if it appears multiple times on the diagram 2014 ALD Software Ltd Conf Level Simulation Seed Inspection period Reliability Block Diagrams 367 Confidence level of the output Fast least number of iterations 100 Intermediate medium number of iterations 1000 Accurate most number of iterations 10000 Custom number of iterations defined by user Seed for random number generator Inspection Period Element sent to repair value 0 upon component failure default Inspection Period Element checked every value gt O Inspection Period hours If failed sent to repair RAM Commander applies the value in the Inspection period field to all RBD elements that do not have a defined inspection time marked as in the Element parameters definition dialog box 4 Choose
87. Naval Surface Warfare Center Nineteen basic mechanical components have been identified for which reliability prediction equations have been developed All mechanical equipment is composed of some combination of these nineteen components A designer can utilize the equations to determine individual component reliability and then combine the results in accordance with the system reliability diagram to determine total system reliability in its operating environment a Equipment SR 332 Issue 2 September 2006 Equipment SR 332 Issue 2 January 2011 Telcordia Issue 1 Telcordia Issue 2 Operating Electronic Telcordia Issue 3 Operating ElectroniciNew 29500 1 Siemens SN Operating 29500 2005 1 Stress Strength Operating Calculation of Failure Probability Unreliability Unreliability by distribution parameters of Stress and not Failure Strength Rate UTE C 80 810 Operating ElectronicjMission RDF 2000 Provides complex models that can profile handle permanent working on off cycling and based dormant applications Analysis French operating 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 8 2 Method Supporte Features Description d compone nts Translates operating Failure Rates to Non operating using coefficients e coe operating a a AH 1995 operating When the decision is taken you may set the default reliability prediction method for the whole project See paragraph Project Co
88. Open Description Sample Communication System rok Mission Profile Available 1 mission profiles Product Tree Available Reliability Prediction Da PA Done MTTR 0 374304 h g Operating mode Open Done FR 187 077 T i al ie spare parts Non Operating mode Open ae Available 1 scenarios Done FR 15 4565 Derating Stress analysis Open ry RCM ry MSts 3 Available 3 scenarios These additional modules initiate a new window or dialog Ed RAM Commander for Windows RBD Standard for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Failure Analysis FMECA Available with Testability Fault Tree Analysis Open Done trees Event Tree Analysis _ Open Done 1 diagrams Process FMEA Open Available Design FMEA Open Available Safety Assessment _Open_ Available 3 failure conditions RBD Edit Item Calculation View Window Help Lal a im je de 25 Project TUTORIAL on Drive C EZ OH fee List of Projects on Drive C Name 2 RAMC_PRJ_OVERY PA RAMC_PRJ_OVERV_R RA Current Analysis _ Ref Des ID Name Qty TUTORIAL 1 Communication System El Communic 1 COMMO01 El Main Switch 1 Sw888 518 AIRCRAFT Dui 1 80864 SAFCOMUI pun 3 80031 SPAREPARTS a 4 LM299 O 5 74L530 RBD Standard for Project TUTORIAL Drive C TANK_SAMPLE Opr FA 10 6 Status MTBF Temp 187 0768 5345 398 100 2550 9974 567 8 7416 1 1E 005 0 2442 4 1E 006 0 0862 1 2E 007 0 0625 1 6E 007
89. Q t probability of failure at a given time point To choose which result to calculate and display on the diagram see paragraph Using FTA module FTA properties RAM Commander also supports Frequency unconditional failure intensity at time t W t calculation see Frequency W t Calculation paragraph for more information In order to perform the MCS Calculation algorithm performs bottop up fault tree analysis building set of Minimal Cut Sets and performing Boolean transformations of the cut sets according to Boolean algebra laws Then probability of each cut set is calculated and then the top gate probability is calculated For large fault trees with a large number of identical events the number of MCS may be very large increasing the calculation time immensely In this case MCS Cut off is used During the Cut Off some minimal cut sets which barely affect the final result can be deleted Three Cut Off parameters are the Max MCS number for Cut Off Relative cut off value and Relative Cut Off order see FIA properties When the MCS count in calculated tree increases the Max MCS number the Cut Off process is performed If the relative affect on the calculation result for the MCS is less than the Relative cut off value the MCS is deleted Easary Proschan Formula Esary Proschan formula is an approximation formula used for FTA top event probability calculation after Minimal Cut Sets generation It is able to take into account common b
90. RAM Commander User Manual 21 4 21 4 1 Drawing the Diagram During the process flow diagram building phase create the diagram of the main blocks of your process Process design FMEA should begin with a block diagram representing the system subsystem and or components being analyzed for design FMEA and the sequence of the process stages for the process FMEA The diagram should indicate the functional relationships to the appropriate level of analysis For each item of the diagram define all required parameters such as name and item function The next section describes the basics of creating and manipulating the diagrams used to present a process for Process FMEA and a product for Design FMEA Drawing a Node Bring the mouse cursor into the diagram press the left button indicating the first corner of diagram block move the mouse to another position to the opposite block corner desired position and then release the left button You have created a node The newly created node will be selected 9 handles little squares are displayed The handle at the center of the node is used to draw a link The 8 others allow resizing the node To move the node bring the mouse cursor into the node depress the left button move the mouse and release the left button To resize the node click and move any one of node handles located on the node perimeter You may align multiple nodes by their left or top edges set the same size for mul
91. RAM Commander ignores the others when making computations If no value for dT JC exists RAM Commander computes it using values for Q JC and P using the logic shown in the table below Input parameters fields Formula for dT jc Thermal resistance Power User defined User defined jc User P User User defined 8 JC User P Default Set temperature parameters for an item in its reliability prediction method parameters data screen 8 2 1 1 2 Stress values The actual stress values may be provided in multiple reliability prediction method Stress group box with values appears on the reliability prediction method data screen for these methods see MIL STD 217 for Capacitor for example Stress W applied 0 75 WR Y rated 1 dT 2014 ALD Software Ltd 222 RAM Commander User Manual See the full list of available stress parameters for different components in the Stress of Product Tree Chapter RAM Commander computes stress ratios for passive components such as resistors and capacitors There are three fields used in computing stress ratios ratio itself applied value and rated value For example for the capacitor it is VSR Voltage stress ratio Vapl Applied voltage Vrat Rated voltage If you enter a value for VSR RAM Commander uses it to compute stress ratios using the formulas in MIL HDBK 217 F If VSR has no value RAM Commander computes it using the formula VSR Vapl User
92. RPN You can mark these failure causes as Critical Causes or Important Causes on the Failure Cause screen right click the required cause choose Edit Cause from the pop up menu and change the cause importance These causes appear as red Critical or yellow Important in FMEA table Potential FM Board not usable Bad assembly Undefined failure Wrong component uncompartible O 2014 ALD Software Ltd End Effect of Failure Product is unstable Product is unusable Product is unstable Product is unusable Severity Cause Occurence 7 Designers error lt Bad materials E Designers error Bad materials Designers error Unqualified worker alt 522 RAM Commander User Manual You may use the Pareto report to get a list of causes with the largest RPN values and perform prioritization using this report However if you use the Scree Plot graph or Severity Likelyhood matrix you will receive a more intuitive and visual presentation of the relative importance of each cause The Scree Plot graph displays the Pareto report data for the RPN sorted in ascending order The Y axis represents the RPN value and the X axis represents the Cause Sequential number RPN B00 B00 400 200 Cause N The Severity Likelihood matrix displays points on 2 dimensional space where Y axis represents the Severity and X axis represent Likelihood Detection Occurrence 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 523
93. Standard Screws Tasks Library Time min 0 42 0 35 0 14 0 21 ros Captive Screws ros Thumbscrews E Slide Locking Oty fa fos fr ps fa for A E po fp pf pf pf pf po fo You can use this dialog box to specify maintainability tasks using the standard tasks and times libraries supplied with RAM Commander 11 4 2 2 1 To define a tasks using user defined times 1 Select User Defined from the list box in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box 2 Enter a task name in the Description field 3 Enter the time in the User Defined Time field 4 Enter a value for Mp if different from 1 5 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Maintainability RCM dialog box with the updated task 11 4 2 2 2 To retrieve a standard time from the standard times library 1 Select Standard Times from the list box in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box 2 In the Standard Times group box select a standard time from the Description list box 3 Enter a quantity for the standard time in the adjacent Qty field the standard time is displayed in the adjacent Time field 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for each additional standard time in the task 9 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Maintainability RCM dialog box with the updated task O 2014 ALD Software Ltd ata RAM Commander User Manual 11 4 2 2 3 To retrieve a standard task from the task library 1 Choose Tasks Library from the list box in the upper rig
94. To perform maintainability allocation 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Calculation menu choose Allocation 3 Choose All Tree Down to start the allocation from the current item downwards OR choose Current Level to allocate the current item only one level down RAM Commander calculates the allocated Mct values 11 4 4 1 1 To copy maintainability tasks data to other items 11 5 1 Open the source and target Product tree views or two views from the same product 2 Activate the target Product tree view 3 In the target window select the items to which you want to copy maintainability data by highlighting it and using Windows conventions 4 Activate the source Product tree view and select the item from which you want to copy maintainability data 5 From the Tree menu choose Copy Processor Data Select the target project in the Select Target dialog box and choose OK RAM Commander copies the component data to the target window Maintainability Libraries RAM Commander prowdes a library facility to store standard times tasks and Maintenance data Skills Support and Test Equipment and Materials Standard Times Library contains typical times for typical simple operations like Screw remove Screw replace etc 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Standard times library Interchange Time T01 Standard Screws 0 42 TO1 Standard Screws Remove 0 76 Description TOT Standard Screws Replace 0 26 TO
95. Transmitter DO Pedestal MTBF f640 8 1198136 3 1694118 6 445099 4 119760 5 1263933 002500 5 1694118 6 0699 2 1694118 6 445099 4 119760 5 126353 00200 95 hick 4173E 002 0 125 0 154 0 12 0 118 1 667E 002 0 125 0 154 4 039E 002 0 154 0 12 0 118 1 667E 002 0 125 AS Parallel K out of H Serial Farallel Serial Serial K aut of M K out ot H Serial Parallel Serial Reliability Model Edit Alt Enter Delete Del Locate in tree Insert blank Insert from tree Mew configuration Copy Paste RED Update RAM info Seral Report Details The tree above shows system configurations and their elements The elements have different Reliability models their connection types The icons in the tree depend on the item s Reliability model Serial Parallel 5 K out of N Th Now you may create new configurations edit existing add new configuration elements from scratch or insert new configuration elements dragging them from the Product Tree 14 2 To create a new configuration 1 Right click in the blank area of the list and in the pop up menu choose New Configuration or From the Configuration menu choose New 2 The System Configuration dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd System Configuration 373 System configuration Mame MTBCF MEL Iris Max time 10 MTEF Hrs Sl 1 Mission time 4 p MTBCF 0 0 Hrs Repair
96. Vrat User Formulas for power stress ratio PSR and capacitance stress ratio CSR are similar 8 2 1 2 Method Specific features 8 2 1 2 1 NPRD 95 RAM Commander incorporates the NPRD 95 Non electronic Parts Reliability Data reliability prediction method This method is applied to mechanical and other non electronic parts To calculate a failure rate FR for a part using NPRD 95 you must first define its calculation method as NPRD To define NPRD as the calculation method 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Create a new item by pressing F7 OR Edit an existing item by pressing ALT Enter OR Right click and choose Edit OR From the Tree menu choose Edit The Item Data dialog box appears 3 Select Mechanical in the Family list box 4 Make a selection from the Item type list box 5 Type a reference designator in the Ref Des field 6 Select User defined as the Method of FRp Calculation which can be defined as default in Project Configuration 7 Select the NPRD 95 option in the Method field O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 223 8 Click the NPRD 95 button The part s NPRD dialog box opens Antenna Ref des ENV GF Part name ANT 555 Mil num Cat num CN023190 Generic name Automatic search in library Manual library record selection Part Description Part Description 7 Sues Communication Communication ENY GF Quality Failure Rate
97. Will the failure condition due to the expected degradation in combination with a L HIRF event No m Justification prevent the continued sate flight and landing of the Aircraft i Remarks L HIRF Protection Analysis Ratings Environmental Deterioration Possible x repesin Level GVI Accidental Damage Likely Density Low Inspection Interval 24 Month 2500 Fh 2215000 f h Tasks Definition Task Number one Task Description Task Interval Inspection Level Candidate 111 01 111 General Yisual Inspection of the 24 month E Tes Radome lightning diverters for general condition installation and proper attachment Cr Ee Detailed guide on this module is available on demand from ALD 2014 ALD Software Ltd 586 RAM Commander User Manual Alpha 424 ambiguity factor 300 316 APR 4761 538 ATA Number 169 Availability 340 396 B Basic event 460 Bayes formula 481 Beta 424 Burn in 169 295 Ca calculated field 130 CCF 474 Common Cause Failure 474 Compensating Provisions 424 Condemnation rate 169 Corrective Action 424 Cut Set 460 D Decision Making 529 Derating Derating curve 328 Detection 424 516 DLCC 113 Duane 380 381 sE Effect of Failure 516 Effective MIBF 361 Efficiency 529 End Effect 424 Environment 165 Equivalent MIBF 361 Esary Proschan formula 487 Event Tree Event Tree Analysis 497 F failure analysis 111 Failure Cause 424 Failure Mode
98. Without repair RED file name Cancel 3 The calculate button is only activated when an RBD has been created 4 Input a new configuration name and relevant data into the other fields Now you may add blocks to the newly created configuration 14 3 Adding Blocks to Configuration When the configuration is created you may add existing Product Tree elements blocks to the configuration e Drag and drop an existing block from the Product tree view into your new configuration or e Right click the configuration record and select Insert from tree Tree browser dialog appears select the desired element and press Ok You may also add new blocks from scratch 1 Right click on a configuration or an item and in the pop up menu choose Insert blank item 2014 ALD Software Ltd 374 RAM Commander User Manual 14 4 14 4 1 or From the Item menu choose Insert blank item or Select configuration record and press F7 2 The System Configuration Item dialog box opens System configuration item Marne Transmitter Rehability Model Serial Met Hrs 0 127 Ent i MTBF Hrs 239481 8 K jo Cancel 3 Input the relevant data and click OK Do not update from tree 4 The new item is appended at the end of the item list Repeat the procedure to add all required configuration blocks When the configuration is built you may build RBD diagram automatically calculate MTBCF a
99. Word 21 4 11 Inserting nodes from Product Tree 21 5 You can drag and drop elements from Product tree into Design FMEA RAM Commander copies their failure modes and causes from FMECA data or from FMECA Library if there is no FMECA data entered for the element To copy a Tree element into Design FMEA 1 Activate the Product tree view and FMEA Diagram windows 2 Select a tree item drag it to the FMEA diagram and drop on a free place of the diagram Failure Modes Causes and Effects When a diagram node representing a Design element or Process is selected the table in the lower part of the screen displays corresponding Failure Modes and Causes The lower FMEA table shows the following Potential Failure Mode Failure Modes are sometimes described as categories of failure A potential Failure Mode describes the way in which a product or process could fail to perform its desired function design intent or performance requirements as described by the needs wants and expectations of internal and external Customers Each process element may have an unlimited number of failure modes and each failure mode may have an unlimited number of corresponding causes of the failure 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 517 As noted in the AIAG Potential FMEA Reference Manual a potential failure mode is defined as the manner in which a component subsystem or system could potentially fail to meet the design
100. Workstation Network Installation Commander on a stand alone computer Back Lancel 9 Select the drive and folder you wish to install RAM Commander into Default value is C RAMC32 Click Next O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 33 InstallShield Wizard RAM Commander for Windows Setup The setup program will copy RAM Commander tiles into the following director A new program group will also be added to the Program Manager Destination Folder ECXARA4MmE32 Browse Cancel 6 RAM Commander Setup displays a Select Components dialog box Click Next InstallShield Wizard x Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to Install Description RAM Commander Basic A Tutorial Project module Product tree reliability prediction and allocation M BELLCURE Issue 5 temperature curves Pareto am BELLCORE Issue E analysis mission profile oof BRITISH TELECOM HAD4 reliability reports import wizard ST BRITISH TELECOM HADS 4 CNET ADF93 or Derating fg GIB 299 Part Count i Space Required on D 09604 E Space Available on D 41293012 K InstallShield a asic Package g Help Files Back Cancel T Select Start menu folder where RAM Commander icons will be located and Click Next 2014 ALD Software Ltd InstallShield Wizard Select Program Folder Please
101. You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored O OFF not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders What else should know about Windows Firewall v Switch to Exceptions tab of the dialog vi Make sure that there is Database Service Manager program in the list Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections except for the programs and services selected below Adding exceptions allows some programs to work better but might increase pour security risk Programs and Services amg Database Service Manager Remote Assistance Mi Remote Desktop CURAR Framework Mi If there is no Database Service Manager click Add program button then click Browse and select W3dbsmngr exe program in RAM Commander working folder 2014 ALD Software Ltd 96 RAM Commander User Manual usually RAMC321BIN Then press Ok Database Service Manager should now appear in the list of exceptions viii You may need to provide also access for Database Service Manager to TCP ports 3351 137 139 and 2441 IX Press Ok on the Firewall dialog to close it and store changes Problem 2 All RAM Commander users can t access network drive with projects users unable to open project
102. analytical criterion for spare parts calculations in such situations Instead the usual practice is to perform several calculations for each operation mode and then combine the results in the appropriate manner Example 1 An oceangoing vessel has a total mission time of 10 years During this time it sails for periods of two months during which no spares supply is possible In this case the spares stocks computation is done in three steps 1 Calculate sail away kits for two months unsupported mission 2 Calculate base spare parts stocks for 10 years regular operation 2014 ALD Software Ltd ao RAM Commander User Manual 16 6 2 16 7 3 Overall spares stock is the sum of the quantities computed in steps a and b Example 2 During wartime a weapon system is used frequently and enjoys short repair turnaround times The same weapon system during peacetime is used only occasionally and experiences long repair turnaround times Spare parts planning for such a system can be accomplished as follows 1 Calculate spare parts quantities for peacetime operation 2 Calculate spare parts quantities for wartime operation 3 Total spares stock is the maximum of the quantities computed in steps a and b Spares and Level of Repair Decisions The quantities of spare parts required have a major impact on the level of repair decisions In cases where several alternatives are technically feasible the decision is based mo
103. as equipment compartment and bomb bay in fuselage tail wing of fighter AIC Typical conditions in cargo compartments which can be occupied by an aircrew AUC Enwronmentally uncontrolled areas which cannot be inhabited by an aircrew during flight SF Earth orbital Approaches benign ground conditions Vehicle neither under powered flight nor in atmospheric reentry such as installing envronment of electronic equipment in satellites ML Severe conditions related to missile launch solid rocket motor propulsion powered flight space vehicle boost into orbit and vehicle re entry and landing by parachute such as noise vibration strike and other severe conditions 8 2 1 2 7 Stress Strength Stress Strength is a new mechanical reliability analysis method in RAM Commander Stress Strength analysis method determines the probability of failure based on the probability of stress exceeding strength Having distributions of Stress and Strength we may calculate failure probability Unreliability 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 237 IR l l ew Pade us us F ora Having variation information between stress and strength Factor of Safety n and Variations we may also calculate the unreliability l T 2 UR 1 e dz VAT n1 WA To select this method change Failure Distribution to Time independent and set Method to Stress Strength Method of FA p calculation default Meth
104. between phases 1 From the Project menu choose Configuration 2 Check the FMEA radio button 3 Select the required phase from the drop down list next to the FMEA section 2014 ALD Software Ltd a28 RAM Commander User Manual 4 Press OK 18 3 3 FMECA Grid Customization FMECA supports user defined fields for failure modes User may also change existing field names and sizes to adjust FMECA grid to perticular standard language or requirements To change the FMECA grid appearance 1 From the Project menu choose Configuration 2 Check the FMEA radio button 3 Clisk the Table Setup button near FMEA section List of FMECA fields will appear FMECA Table Setup O x H Field Name Show Width 3 FM Description A 150 a FM Alpha wt 40 q FM Redes a 40 4 FM Class j 4 g iFM Cause wt 100 g NHE IDN A 60 7 NHE Description i 150 a NHE Beta cm OB g EE Description eo 150 10 EE Beta MOS 11 EE Severity A 4 12 FM Detection A 100 33 FM Compensating provisions t 100 14 FM Remarks A 100 15 FM Fl Code A 20 16 FM User 100 17 FM Users y 100 18 FM User j 100 319 FM Userb y 100 4 Change the names of existing or new fields switch the Show checkbox on or off to show hide each field chage field size in characters 5 Press Close then Ok FMECA grid will change its appearance These definitions are stored per each specific RAM Commander project O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 3 4 Phase selection FME
105. category for all End Effects with a certain severity category choose the Change Severity button Copy FMECA Libraries Between Projects Each RAM Commander project has its own FMECA library You may reuse FMECA library data by copying libraries from one project to another To copy FMECA libraries from one project to another 2014 ALD Software Ltd 1 Open two projects and activate the product tree view for the source project 2 From the Library menu choose select Copy Library 3 Select the target project and choose OK the Copy FMECA Library dialog box opens Copy FMEA Library Safety Severity Criticalty Groups always overwrite End Effect Failure Mode Classification Cause Component Test Type Test Subtest 4 From the Copy FMECA Library dialog box select which parts of the library are to be copied and how they are to be copied Overwrite or Merge 9 Click OK 18 5 Entering FMECA data for Item RAM Commander FMECA grid displays FMECA data for the currently selected product tree item To provide FMECA data for the product tree item 1 Select the desired item in the product tree 2 Specify the Failure Mode in the FMECA grid beneath the product tree a type directly a Failure Mode in the FM description column and press Enter or Tab key FF HHE Eje Description Alpha Cause IDK Description Beta Description Beta Severity The fail or b right click the Failure Mode Descri
106. click on its control button Use the report management techniques described in Chapter Fundamentals paragraph Reports to view and print the report 11 7 RCM Module RCM Reliability Centered Maintenance utilizes a systematic approach to understand how equipment fails and what maintenance tasks can be done to minimize failures and maximize reliability RCM also provides the foundation for understanding why certain maintenance tasks are performed and the justification for eliminating unnecessary Preventive Maintenance PM activities It is the optimal mix between the Corrective Preventive and Condition Based maintenance RCM is a function oriented approach which considers mission importance environment safety security economics and regulation requirements The RCM analysis process involves 7 main steps each one of the steps is supported by the RCM module of RAM Commander 1 System definition product tree Functional blocks 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Centered Maintenance FM neen channels Slow switching between channels Communication Degi No scrambling Communication Ded Tong scrambling Communication Loss Function Main Switch Switching Main Switch Scrambling Main Switch Scrambling 2 Significant Functions identification RCM Function Significance Determination Scrambling RCM Functional Significance Determination Logic Mo NON SIGNIFICANT FUNCT
107. computed below It is assumed that failure is isolated to an entire group of O lt N lt 99 for 1 5 parts The probability that the fault will be isolated for Ns parts is XS 100 You can use up to 5 groups i e 5 The probability of the highest one must be equal to 100 Furthermore the inequality Xq lt X gt lt Xa lt X4 lt AG 70 must hold See also the Fault Isolation and Ambiguity paragraph O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 301 11 2 4 Maximum Corrective Maintenance Time The Maximum Corrective Maintenance Time Mct max for the f th percentile Mct f is the value max of corrective maintenance time below which f percent of all maintenance actions are expected to be completed Mctrax 0 exp log MTTR 06 ntel where N Y log Met mS log Met N i N 1 See also Set Mct max Calculation Method paragraph for more information RL _ 1 O Met 11 2 5 Mean Maintenance Man hours per Maintenance Action Component Level E E MMH MA gt MMH gt MBIT i zi Mean maintenance man hours required for the ith maintenance task preparation fault isolation disassembly reassembly etc average time to perform the ith maintenance task see Mct definition above Manpower required for the ith maintenance task K number of maintenance tasks required preparation fault isolation disassembly reassembly etc Assembly Level N mar Al MMH pa
108. conditions specified for example for environment GB scenario a but when you change some product tree settings like environment to GF in the Product Tree you may come to situation where NPRD 95 does not contain 2014 ALD Software Ltd 224 RAM Commander User Manual exact FR for these new settings any more scenario b and then RAM Commander may take data according to the manual selection if defined Note If you select a manual selection choice you will always get an FR for a part even if an FR may not exist for several combinations of the automatic library search To search for the NPRD failure rate 1 In the Automatic search group box select a Part Description 2 Select a value from the Quality list if the criteria are found in the NPRD database the failure rate is displayed in the Failure Rate field 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to define the Manual selection choice alternative choice 4 Define the search algorithm Select Automatic Only Manual Only or Automatic then manual from the Search Data for Calculation list 8 2 1 2 2 NPRD 2011 RAM Commander incorporates the NPRD 2011 Non electronic Parts Reliability Data reliability prediction method This method is applied to mechanical and other non electronic parts NPRD database contains information on failure rates for various non electronic parts keyed by part family Item type part description environment and quality level NPRD failure rates are not given f
109. data management how to use libraries cross referencing failure rate tables their reports and formulae backing up and restoring libraries the default manager and project defaults lt will also explain how various values for a project are entered automatically into the project either from the Global Libraries or Project Library or through the management and provision of default values See the Reliability Calculation chapter for more information on libraries usage during the reliability prediction See other module specific chapters for information about other RAM Commander libraries such as FMECA Maintainability etc This chapter covers only the reliability prediction related libraries 9 1 Global and Project Libraries Each project has its own Component Library GPRD Library and Calculation Defaults Library In addition to Project local libraries RAM Commander central database contains Global Libraries Component Library GPRD Library Calculation Defaults Library and Cross Reference Library The diagram below provides illustration to the available library types and their locations Component Cross Project Library Reference Product Tree BOM Calculation defaults Component Library Calculation detaults Project 2014 ALD Software Ltd 268 RAM Commander User Manual 9 2 Project libraries are used by one particular project there is also a
110. does not generate the MCS list For all calculation types basic event probabilities should be defined and calculated using several event probability models constant probability unrepairable repairable latent etc See the Basic Event Types paragraph for more information about basic event probability models In addition to calculation of FTA top gate probability you may calculate intermediary gate 2014 ALD Software Ltd 482 RAM Commander User Manual probabilities perform Importance Sensitivity Analysis perform FALSE TRUE Propagation get Unavailability Curve and a lot of different FTA reports and graphs 19 4 1 Basic Event Types RAM Commander allows several types of Basic Event reliability model The description of each model and calculation formulas is given below Input Parameters Probability Probability q FR A Probability q Constant mission time Frequency uncondition Description Unavailability Q Constant probability not depends on mission time Frequency Events occur with Probability of event linked to element which 1 1 q exp A Tm 1 1 q exp ATm Mission time Tm works during Repairable FR A Probability q MTTR u 1 MTTR Unrepairable FR A Probability q FR A Probability q Periodical some constant mission time not depends on mission time Repairable element with Known FR and MTTR Failures are detec
111. ere ee E nee ne E a Soe ar a a ee vane on A anon a er ceee ren 931 To view and update FMEA libraries cu aa 532 To update a library during FMEA data input cooonnccconnnncoconcnnconennoncononnnnrononnnnronnnnnnronnnnnnrrrnnnnnrernnnnnrernnanns 532 To select a field value from a library iii 533 To copy librarles between projects minicadena 533 Load t LIDI Vd 534 TU TRE DONS ci ea aeaa e ae a ea a aae OaS 534 WO prn INe TODO A E E R a E 536 Ti Summary AS A E E E 536 Part 22 Safety Analysis 538 Safe V Module Basics ina 538 2 Safety module initiation asia acia 540 3 Date y LID MOS in c 541 Working WIEN Libraries ii o di 541 4 BUILGING INE Functional Tre 8 ui 543 5 Working with different standards recommMendations o ocococccconanononoconanananararararararanos 945 6 Working with Failure Conditions ocoocococcccccccccncococococacananoncnroranaranaranannnrarararnraranananenes 546 f Probability Calcula lona oi cio avia aus 551 O ODO Siete i ais 551 Part 23 MMEL 956 1 Prerequisites for MMEL generation using RAM Commander MMEL Module 556 2 MMELANAIYSISDrOCESS ui E A E EA EOE 557 2 10 PEMOIMMMEL analysis s ta na aAA a a E NA lusts 557 4 1st step MMEL Quantitative Analysis oocococccococcccncococococanacanoncrarannrnnarannnrnrararnrananana 560 MMEL Module Quantitative Analysis Algorithm cccccnnnnnncicccoconcconcnocononcnanononononananornnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrnananannns 560 To Select a FE quired algorit
112. first step in performing a mission profile analysis is to define the mission profile and its phases You must be in operating or non operating mode to access the Mission profile module For a revew of project operating modes Reliability Calculation chapter A mission profile is a progression of phases Each phase is characterized by the following Operating or Non operating mode Environment Temperature Time Test coverage alpha Number of on off cycles per 1 000 hours non operating mode only Complex mission profiles using many phases can be built For example you can design an airplane s mission profile starting at hangar storage takeoff various altitude climbs and return to base Each of these phases can be broken down into smaller phases until you fine tune your mission so that it closely resembles the airplane s actual operational conditions O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Analysis ES 10 3 1 1 To add a mission profile 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu choose Mission Profile the Mission Profile dialog box opens Mission Profile Mission Potile Mame Phase Description OprHop Enw Temp Time Alpha Hoc Storage Nop GB 250 30 0 0 50 0 00 Transportation Nop GM 35 0 40 0 00 0 00 Flight Op AE 50 02 0 00 MP Analyzer Add MP Save As Delete MP Add Phase Edit Phase Delete Phase Move Up Move Down 3 Choose Add MP the Add Mission
113. graph Data Exchange RAM Commander has multiple options for data exchange with other applications Different modules of RAM Commander has Import Export Facilities Module Data Exchange Options Product Tree BOM Customizable Import Wizard for Excel Access and ASCII files Import Wizard Report Generator for data export Export Reliability Data Component Import from Excel Data Import Libra 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 139 Module Datta Exchange Options GPRD Library Customizable Import Wizard for Excel Access and ASCII files Import FMECA Import Export using predefined MS Excel file format Import Export Safety FHA SHA Import Export using predefined MS Excel file format Process amp Design FMEA Import Export using predefined MS Excel file format Please contact our support service for data exchange information in other modules In addition any report in RAM Commander may be exported to MS Excel or to ASCII CSV format User may create his own report formats by defining the required columns in the report using the Report Generator and then user may generate the reports and export them into MS Excel or other formats this way Report generator becomes a data exporting tool Additional data exchange option is data exchange with ALD Favoweb FRACAS application using web services please contact our support service for specification 5 9 Spelling checker RAM Commander has a
114. guide 2014 ALD Software Ltd EA RAM Commander User Manual 3 11 2 Problem 3 during the workstation installation message The following error occurred on file rra and Access is denied appears The folowing error occured on file YARAM CaA Binara Er Sarra Access ls denied 051 Abort Retry Ignore Solution During RAM Commander workstation you should provide shared server folder where RAM Commander server is installed like R RAMC32 The message above appears when you do not have Full Control access rights to this shared server folder and all its sub folders and files Grant valid access rights and try again Problem 4 RAM Commander can t be completely uninstalled Solution If you want to reinstall RAM Commander we recommend to uninstall it with the help of Windows Add Remove Programs dialog from Control Panel or with the help of RAM Commander installation and then install it There could be a problem when after uninstalling software installation program gives you option to Remove RAM Commander once more If you choose option remove finish removing and start installation once more you get Modify Remove option again To remove the problem 1 Uninstall RAM Commander 2 Enter registry from Start menu choose Run type regedit choose Ok 3 Go by the path HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Uninstall 4 Choose Uninstall press right mouse key choose Find
115. hesitate to write us at the addresses listed in the Getting Help section of this manual or use our ALD Software Feedback Form Modules Overview RAM Commander is the pioneering Reliability and Safety software for reliability professionals and design engineers RAM Commander combines ingenuity of approach calculation accuracy convenience of use Designed by reliability engineers RAM Commander covers the entire scope of engineering tasks related to reliability of electronic electro mechanical and mechanical systems RAM Commander is modular software allowing a customer the flexibility of gradual addition of the modules to the package in accordance with the requirements of a project or the budget constraints List of RAM Commander modules contains Reliability Maintainability RBD Fault Tree Analysis Event Tree Analysis Safety Assessment Spare Parts optimization Derating FMECA and Testability Analysis Process amp Design FMEA and more Table below provides brief information about software modules Module Descriptiom Basic Reliability Reliability Calculation for Operating and Non operating state using more than Prediction and 25 reliability prediction standards such as MIL STD 217 FIDES BELLCORE Analysis GJB299 Telcordia NSWC NPRD 95 and more Reliability data libraries Reliability analysis using reports Pareto Temperature Curve Mission Profile and more mport Wizard Report Generator Customizable user defined reports ge
116. i Mpe 13 Pegula dell of rfk 1 000 Mo effect 1 000 EX Furtboral Tree far Preeti TUTORIAL HMEL on Orie E her io ha Pinch TCS cooling rat Nare Descompiion ganc Eni abn pede cimbol preten CPCS Fabat Condition Phaea Ebeci Clasica EEPE i Espectad 2 probabli hour peobabdit thou Anmuncisted betel absence al nrunciabsd abonos ofan mpok Megor Anunce tole st 0 1 eS of a puppy lo ar i a9 corn en PO 1 conditioning tem wra ricino pubs Mo a puppi do ant iyitem parengan ond cree ca Let ol at supply hom one al Rejinciod s pupplets depending Miner GATITA 475 006 1 0 00 E ate speli gilan vag iera ALANIS seem 7 me ab 3 Len dl bleed al suple lo Cmim bb bo pro rs ot M or Hiii l i 1 0 0013 TE ls el erame abate oor Sharting ba bised ar aber es Probability COTS iL COTS 2b COTS AL RFS iL Eronen rimai of ir epi Lean of dancers atl artis CONTROL VALVE PACE INLET FLW ona charra bragas mead FE SENSOR L Lesk 2 HE eo bs 4 67 006 156 007 23 2 MMEL Analysis process MMEL Analysis contains two steps which should be performed for each product tree item 1 Qualitative MMEL Analysis selection of MMEL list candidates using RAM Commander calculations algorithms of quantitative analysis 2 MMEL Five Column Format report preparation with information about rectification periods and inoperative equipment operational and maintenance implications 23 3 To perform MMEL analysis To perform MMEL analy
117. icone to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders Administrative Tools Games Startup Back Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 10 Press Next on Review settings dialog InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files fF you want bo review or change any settings click Back If you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Setup Type 2 Server Network Destination Directory CAAPPARAME32 Program Folder A L D Engineering Cancel 11 The Installation Wizard will copy necessary files InstallShield Wizard Setup Status RAM Commander for Windows Setup is performing the requested operations Installing CAAPPS R AMC 3248n A amew eze Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd 42 RAM Commander User Manual 12 If this is the first time Ram Commander is installed on the computer the Edit user parameters dialog box is displayed Enter system manager User Name Password optional and Group optional and click OK Edit user parameters ne Password Lancel Group Level Beginner Password is optional Groups are used by RAM Commander to control access privileges Access to the projects may be denied for th
118. in the of points field 6 Enter coefficients for price weight volume and a fixed cost 7 When all the required data for product tree items and scenario are defined you may proceed to optimization and reports 16 4 5 Generating Optimization Reports RAM Commander provides two types of optimization reports e summary which gives the objective function value at various monetary values and e detailed which gives the quantities of spare parts at various points within the optimization 16 4 5 1 To generate an optimization report 1 Make sure that all data relevant to calculation scenario product tree prices failure rates etc are provided and calculated 2 Open Spare Parts Optimization module Modules menu Spars parts option Optimization item 3 Select the required scenario 4 Choose Optimize the Spare parts Report Options dialog box opens 9 Select which parts to include in the report from those replaced at any combination of Organizational Intermediate or Depot levels 6 Enter a value for report depth if different from default 7 Choose Prepare Report RAM Commander displays both a tabular spares report and graph Note The optimization algorithm computes spare stocks satisfying the criteria established in steps 5 6 in the previous procedure The report starts the optimization at the current product tree level parts appearing in higher levels of the product tree are ignored Example of Availabilit
119. interface and many of its useful features are not available in other FTA programs 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Event Tree Analysis Event Tree Analysis 497 20 Event Tree Analysis Event Trees are one of the most widely used methods in system risk analysis It is an inductive failure analysis performed to determine the consequences of single failure for the overall system risk or reliability Event Tree Analysis uses similar logic and mathematics as Fault Tree Analysis but the approach is different FTA uses deductive approach from system failure to it s reasons and ETA uses the inductive approach from basic failure to it s consequences An event tree itself is a visual representation of single failure sequences it s influence on other events and on the whole system EN NS A EN i i i i i i i aa a eck ace Initiating event Start of fire Sprinkler system does not function Fire alam is not activated Outcome Fire alarm is not Critical damage y activated True aa Sprinkler system P 0 001 P 8e 008 does not function A True a P 0 01 Ire alam IS no Major damage activated False E E P 0 999 P 7 992e 005 Start of fire True P 0 8 0 Explosion Pire Aami nor Damage P 0 01 na Te P 7 92e 006 E Sprinkler system P 0 001 t l does not function k False P 0 99 Fire alarm is not Damage activated False r E P 0 999 P 0 0
120. is defined as an indication of design weakness the consequence of which is the failure mode The designer should assess the occurrence and detection of each cause as well as the severity of each end effect Occurrence Occurrence is an assessment of the likelihood that a particular Cause will happen and result in the Failure Mode during the intended life and use of the product An explanation of Occurrence values may be found in the library press the lt gt button near the Occurrence field Controls Controls Design and Process are the mechanisms that prevent the Cause of the Failure Mode from occurring or which detect the failure before it reaches the Customer Detection Detection is an assessment of the likelinood that the Current Controls Design and Process will detect the Failure Mode thus preventing it from reaching the Customer An explanation of Detection values may be found in the library press the lt gt button near the Detection field RPN Automatically calculated you do not have to enter it The Risk Priority Number is a mathematical product of the numerical Severity Occurrence and Detection ratings RPN S O D This number is used to place priority on items than require additional quality planning FMEA automatically calculates risk priority numbers Actions Taken Data about the corrective actions implemented to improve RPN Occurrence resulting Improved Occurrence value after the implement
121. is found in the Library or recognized it will be added to the Tree 95 GPRD The General Part Reliability Data Library contains following sections e General Part data Part and Catalog numbers manufacturer price condemnation rate Maintainability repair distribution e FMECA data Failure Modes list for the part O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 266 RAM Commander User Manual e Reliability data field failure rates tables The library allows for storing different data for specific parts and retrieves this data for the more convenient creation of new product tree items with the same Part Number Two separate GPRD libraries are supported Global and Local Global Library is shared for all projects but each project has its own Local Library 9 5 1 Entering the GPRD Library To enter the GPRD Library 1 Activate the Product Tree window 2 Choose GPRD from the Library menu The GPRD Library table with Parts data is displayed Pe o Project GPRD Library for Project TUTORIAL Drive Part Mame Catalog Humber Manufacturer Description COS8461 CA OO001 IBM CO ROM drive F35 CAO000 IBF Floppy drive HODOU CA OO003 IBM Hard Drive disk MOTITE 3 Choose Edit Delete or Create from the main or pop up menus to update edit or create records in the GPRD library 4 Choose Local or Global from the View menu to switch between the Global and Local Libraries 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 267 9 5 2 Gen
122. is listed first and the capacitor second RAM Commander provides two types of textual Pareto reports You can select a detailed report by part identifier see Item ID Priority in Chapter 8 Item Identifier ID Display Options or a summary report by Item type You can produce a Pareto report in graph form using ltem type only To view a Pareto report 1 Activate the Product Tree View 2 Navigate to the desired level in the product tree 3 From the Reports menu choose Pareto the Select type of Pareto Report dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Select type of Pareto Report 5 ltem Name Table ltem Code Table ltem Code Graph O by Condition Table Sub systems Graph 4 In the Select type of Pareto dialog box select the type of report you require 9 Choose Prepare Report 6 RAM Commander displays the selected Pareto analysis report If the selected report type is a table after vewing the report close it by double clicking the window s control button Pareto analysis by name Project name TUTORIAL Start fram TUTORIAL ze Total Failure tem Failure rate Cumulative FN aty l radar triFy iti rate contribution contribution 76 749 41 025 41 025 CANO O99 17 000 9 087 50 113 CDI3AB1 14 430 7 713 57 826 1 MB00887 12 000 6 414 70 966 HOD002 11 484 6 139 77 104 CNO1720 8350 4 463 81 568 When the Item type Graph report is selected the Graph View window opens
123. its successors as described above Sometimes there is a need to insert tree element to the specific position between two other existing elements as shown on the example below 4 Functional Tree for Project TEST on Drive D EGP TEST New function To insert a function between two existing functions 1 Select the function which shall become the next function after the new one will be inserted 2 Right click on it and choose Insert from the popup menu 3 Fill in the function data and press Ok 4 The new function will be inserted into the tree before the selected existing function 2 Functional Tree for Project TEST on Drive D EM TEST Control Aircraft Direction on the Ground teme Oo a e ay Determinate 4nrGround Transition 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 545 To edit a specific function e Select it and then right click Choose Edit from the pop up menu Or e Double click on it if it is a lowest level function and it has no successors Or e Select it and then press Alt Enter keys Function data screen will appear change the data and press Ok to save you changes or cancel to discard the changes To delete a specific function e Select the function right click on it choose Delete from the popup menu Or e Select the function and press Del button on the keyboard Or e Select the function and choose Delete option from the Tree section of main application menu
124. lt j Control 2 Control Unit 75 4953 1 3E 004 un E Monitor 1 MONOO1 8 0000 1 3E 005 E A a El SystemBlock 3 MBEE5 50 4953 2 0E 004 E HardDrive 1 HODOO 11 4544 8 7E 004 E co RoM 2 COGG4B 1 14 4500 6 9E 004 MotherBrd 4 MBOOSS 12 0000 8 3E 004 3 POO LIB 8 8E 004 Antenna 1 ANT555 6 6583 1 5 005 cl motor MOT SFE 45000 ET Derating Bearing 3 B0896 0 1682 5 9E 006 Fh EE Detection Description Alpha Cause IDH Description Beta Description Beta Severity FMECA Bearing Failure 0 280 1 No movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 II Visual Inspection Operation a Loss Non Operating Fall Aun After Strt 0 230 l lt No movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 11 Visual Inspection ze Loss nh a Fails to Start 0 180 lt Mo movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 Noite receive test ni Loss us gt 2 Winding Failure 0 310 lt o Wrong movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 Ill gan Deoradatior non Modules RCM MSG 3 FMECA module is based on the RAM Commander product tree and uses data of reliability calculation prediction module You can now configure the FMECA module if required and enter the FMECA data for relevant product tree items 2014 ALD Software Ltd az RAM Commander User Manual 18 2 FMECA Module Basics FMECA grid in the lower part of the screen appears after the FMECA module activation It displays Failure Modes and its consequences for the currently selected product tree el
125. message may appear on different installation steps or event when the installation is finished E Windows Security Alert Eg To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Mame Database Service Manager gt Publisher Pervasive Software Inc CU APP RAMCSZ BIN W Sdbsmgr exe Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections trom the Internet or a network IF you recognize the program or trust the publisher wou can unblock it Wher should unblock a program 12 Question about adding a new user to users list will appear choose Yes if you wish to add user Edit user parameters dialog box will appear provide user name and other details and press OK Edit user parameters ne Password Cancel Group Level Beginner Password is optional Groups are used by RAM Commander to control access privileges Access to the projects may be denied for the users according to their groups see Project Definition in Chapter 8 Level is optional See Users Management paragraph later in this manual for more information about the user parameters definition 13 Choose Finish on the last installation wizard O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 3 3 4 RAM Commander Setup Setup has finished installing RAM Commander for Windows on your computer 14 RAM Commander is installed on
126. movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 Ill d Deoradatior as ten Reports Libraries Tool Wie Mindo Help Computer Potential FM End Effect of Failure Severity Cause Occurence Controls Detection RFN 2 ers report often system Impossible to work 3 Hardware is not stable 3 1 270 gt TestH Operating system i rot 4 360 gt Choo stable ann not re ae 05 configuration is invalid 7 630 gt Defini The equipment is not Tail Check armor gt Armor os armored Users report often phisical JE quipment is not reliable damages A A For Help press F1 System block Fault Tree Analysis deductive analysis performed to determine all combinations of events leading 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual to a single general conclusion or hazard failure ZA RAM Commander for Windows FTA Tutorial_RBD for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C pa FTA diagram tem Calculation Reports Library Tools View Window Help SeA DEX Y BE EO NM a i RBD Sample Fault Tree for project Tulerial REO TUTORIAL according to Reliability Standard Block Diagram STANDARD 7 280 007 PS Power Suppllies 3 Receivers parallel 3 53e 007 2 12e 013 9 45e 019 Repairable FR 927 236 MTTR 0 380667 9 83e 007 9 83e 007 9 83e 007 2 66e 007 2 66e 007 Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable
127. multiple standalone installations The network diagram below displays the most complex case when RAM Commander is installed in network configuration and also Network plug license model selected Workstation License Sever Except number of users limitation license also contains information about the set of RAM Commander modules purchased Only after proper RAM Commander installation and license configuration you may start working with the software Several licensing methods may be used concurrently RAM Commander will search for the license by the following priority 1 Local computer locked license file 2 Local USB plug 3 Network floating license file 4 Network floating USB plug For example a company could have network floating license file and also local USB plug All engineers in the office are concurrently using the floating network license If any engineer should work offline with his laptop he takes local USB plug connects to his PC and works disconnected from the network in this case he should also have Standalone and not Workstation installation of RAM Commander on his laptop Please choose your preferred RAM Commander installation configuration and your preferred licensing model and see corresponding paragraphs of this chapter Installation Requirements Installation Licensing 2014 ALD Software Ltd 3 2 3 3 Getting Started EE Editions There are several RAM Commander editions Fu
128. number of units in the element Load defines the status of non functional elements Load 0 Element non operating standby redundancy O lt Load lt 100 Element partially stressed warm redundancy Load 100 Element with active redundancy Repair Specifies the repair policy for failed elements If you select Restricted or Full repair you must specify the distribution for the repair time as for the FR distribution Without repair Element is not repaired upon failure The repair distribution parameters are ignored Restricted repair Only one element is repaired at a time queuing for repair 2014 ALD Software Ltd 13 2 5 Applicable for Monte Carlo simulations only and if the element has either Restricted or Full repair Inspection Period check box not checked Element sent to repair upon RBD failure Inspection Period check box checked and value O Element sent to repair upon component failure default Inspection Period check box checked and value gt O Element checked every Inspection Period hours If failed sent to repair Duty cycle Amount of time the part is operational relative to mission time D Taken from the product tree used for updating element data from the product tree FM Number Taken from the FMECA analysis used for updating element data from FMECA Description For descriptive purposes only Part number Taken from tree data for descriptive purposes only Ref Des Refer
129. of the BE with number i_j at the time t Unconditional failure intensity of the top gate of the fault tree W_TOP t F gt 07 _MCS 10 11 1 F_MCS IIOY j l jz gt where MCS 1 MCS j MCS m minimal cut set W_MCST j Unconditional failure intensity of the specific MCS with number j F_MCSTIj unavailability Q t of the specific MCS with number j 19 4 2 4 PFH and PFD Calculation RAM Commander may also calculate the PFH and PFD parameters as required by the IEC 61508 functional safety standard You may get this calculation from the reports menu PFD Probability of failure on demand is calculated by the following formula 2014 ALD Software Ltd 19 4 2 5 19 4 3 Fault Tree Analysis 489 1 1 PFD 7 MDT T a9 T MDT T where U is instantaneous unavailability at time t Q t see the Tree Unavailability calculation paragraph Us tat J PFH Probability of Failure per Hour is calculated by the following formula 17 PFH T w t dt To where W t is frequency at time t see the Frequency W t Calculation paragraph Lambda Equivalent RAM Commander may also calculate the Lambda Equivalent parameter according to the EN 50129 standard CENELEC requirements Use the Equivalent Lambda report from the Reports menu of FTA module Lambda equivalent of the system S is an indicator of the ability of the system to fail It is evaluated using the following equation
130. or interpolates the failure rate for temperatures that are not explicitly defined Data may be entered for one environment only and then RAM Commander will use RAC Toolkit formulas to convert this data to different envronment according to settings in your specific product tree The GPRD field FR table utility is useful when you need to e Perform a reliability analysis for any temperature if you have failure rates for only a few temperature values e Apply reliability values to different assemblies in one project or in several projects e Access reliability data for a project even though you are not authorized to review the project s actual components such as for security reasons Data can be entered to the reliability prediction table by 3 methods manually using import or as a packed box 9 5 4 1 Manual FR Table Data Entry When you enter data manually into a failure rate table you must specify the temperature and its associated known failure rate for each envronment To manually create a new failure rate table 1 Activate the Product tree view 2014 ALD Software Ltd 270 RAM Commander User Manual 9 5 4 2 2 Open the GPRD Library 3 Select Global or Project library in the View menu project library is opened by default If the Project library is selected the component data you enter can only be used in the project where it is created 4 Open an existing Part screen or create a new Part record 9 In the Gener
131. paragraphs will explain in brief main RAM Commander User Interface elements such as Windows Toolbar Status bar Lists and more 5 1 Windows RAM Commander User Interface type is MDI Multi Document Interface You may open multiple windows at the same time switch between windows arrange and close them You may drag amp drop and copy paste information between certain window types A RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View Window Help 6p AG r x Z 0H gm FTA Tutorial for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Current Analysis Ref Des ID Name a E TUTORIAL 1 Communi Sample Fault Tree for projec sata oan E Communic 1 COMMOC dicas aci to project s flue Product Tree and FMECA Main Switch 1 SW888 gt 1 80864 Operating yg U10 3 80031 Commun cats E D gt ut 2 4 LM 299 hh Control tallare 3 2 Du 5 74LS30 LT e 1535006 Non Operating P110 6 ALA A11 12 7 RN R30 34 8 AZ Rece her PS heyboard Gis 10 CK 2700 98200 1 132 007 a Graph Generator for RAM Commander version 3 0 p r Repaliabe Repalrabk FR 8 35 FR 3 4 5 A IES MTTR 0 117657 MATTR 0 00333353 tare i Taimiter a 372008 Repalrabk fino Repalrabk FR 0 7 51307 FR 3 46531 D Capacitor D Antenna Ba Switch D IC Digital Ea Motor Other Working with RAM Commander
132. parent Assembly where you wish to copy the selected items 9 Choose Paste from the Item menu or press Ctrl V or click Paste on the toolbar To copy items from one project to another or in the same project 1 Open the Product tree view of both the source and target projects OR From the Windows menu choose New Window to open the second window of the same project 2 Activate the source Product tree view 3 Select one or more items to copy using usual MS Windows item selection conventions 4 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the selected item s into the target project and drop them on the desired parent To copy with insert items between projects or in the same project 1 Perform steps 1 3 of the above instruction 2 Hold down the lt Shift gt button drag the selected items into the target Product tree view window and drop the items on the item you want to appear directly after the copied items To move items between projects or in the same project 1 Open a Product tree view of both the source and target projects OR O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 176 RAM Commander User Manual 7 3 5 3 From the Windows menu choose New Window to open the second window of the same project 2 Activate the source Product tree view 3 Select one or more items to copy 4 Hold down the lt Ctrl gt button drag the selected item s into the target Product tree view and drop them on the desired parent To move with insert
133. pien parienger ond cre Let ol at poh hom one al Redinced at puppets depending Minor GATITA 475 006 a BOR lor q condon spele apip abr LAI L glih porn ad Leds dl bleed arsupplvio mia blo pro ers ot Mine Hiii l i 1 0 0013 aie 3 empre startet oor Sharting by bised an miben Es Probability AFS iL PACE INLET FLOW SENSOR L Leak 156 0017 COTS iL COTS 2b COTS 4L ee ee rs ergo Lean of der tli ELO CONTROL VALVE z Vaheo ahane midea FC o EHF O 878 006 The last part of the analysis is data output Safety Module provides different reports SSA FHA Functional Breakdown etc 22 2 Safety module initiation To enter the RAM Commander Safety module open the project and then do one of the following e Inthe project s product tree view choose Safety from the Modules menu Or e Click Modules at the left button bar of the product tree view and click the Safety button Or e Double click on the project in projects list Project Overview window opens Click Open button next to Safety module The Safety module screen is displayed The screen contains two parts functional tree above and failure conditions list below Failure conditions list displays failures for currently selected function in the functional tree 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis NS Now you may 1 Setup Safety Libraries Phases End Effects 2 Build the functional tree and 3 Provide information about possible failures and
134. premise areas subject to shock vibration temperature or atmospheric variations GM Ground Mobile Conditions more severe than GF mostly for shock and vibration More maintenance limited and susceptible to operator abuse Typical applications are portable and mobile telephones portable operating equipment and test equipment AIC Airborne commercial Conditions more severe than GF mostly for pressure temperature shock and vibration In addition the application is more maintenance limited than for GF Typical applications are in the passenger compartment of commercial aircraft 2014 ALD Software Ltd 236 RAM Commander User Manual SF Spacebased commercial Low earth orbit Conditions as for AIC but with no maintenance Typical applications are commercial communication satellites GJB299 GB Normally weather almost no mechanical stress and readily accessible to maintenance such as laboratory with temperature and humidity controlled or large ground station GMS Typical conditions in ground silo in which missiles and its assistant equipment are set GF GF1 Typical conditions in the inside of generic building or on permanent racks with good ventilation With moderate strike and vibration Such as environment in which permanent installation radar communications facilities TV and recorder etc are installed NUU GF2 Ground conditions with poor protected facilities for weather and Underground conditions Severe condit
135. probability X2 of detecting the fault while examining the set N2 will be higher This continues until the technician examines the last set of parts N5 whereupon the probability of isolating the fault after examining a components is X5 100 For example if a failure is always isolated to a single part in group N1 then X1 X 100 and N1 1 If in 80 of the cases a failure is isolated to a single part and in the remaining 20 to two parts then X1 80 X2 100 N1 1 and N2 2 In the Fault Isolation group box enter your values for N1UN5 and X11UX5 The value of the ambiguity factor S is calculated based on fault isolation and is used to calculate the MTTR for an assembly see Ambiguity Factor paragraph RAM Commander is able to take the ambiguity groups data from FMECA module 2014 ALD Software Ltd 11 4 4 11 4 4 1 Maintainability Prediction 317 Maintainability Allocation You can use RAM Commander to perform top to bottom maintainability allocation When allocating maintainability use the following fields in the Tree Maintainability dialog box MTTRa allocated required MTTR of an item Complexity for Mct a weighing factor for item s children intended for maintainability allocation See Maintainability Allocation paragraph earlier in this chapter for a theoretical discussion of how RAM Commander allocates maintainability to each child of a parent
136. receive an e mail containing your RAM Commander license file 7 Save your license file to RAM Commander installation folder BIN subfolder usually C RAMC32 BIN 8 You may run RAM Commander now Note If you plan to change software Operating System or hardware whole computer or hard drive or motherboard or processor on the computer where RAM Commander is installed you should delete your license before using License Manager Utility and send us the license delete confirmation file After the changes are completed you should repeat the site code generation and send us the new site code then you will be able to receive a new license Deleting license If you are going to perform hardware changes or wish to transfer ALD Software from one PC to another you should delete the existing license first and send us the delete confirmation file When the hardware changes are performed or software is installed on the new PC you should perform the site code generation procedure again and send us the new site code file This way we will know that the old license is deleted and will provide you with the new license To delete existing software license file 1 Click the Start menu choose Programs and then A L D Engineering 2 Open Tools submenu run Licensing Wizard utility Select Computer Locked License File option press Next O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 63 d ALD Software Licensing Wizard Workstation l x
137. set Epsilon to the minimal MTBCF value where you want to stop the R t integration on the graph the Epsilon is a distance between T axe and graph where you are satisfied with the preciseness of the result and want to stop calculations Larger Max Time smaller epsilon and smaller integration steps lead to better results yet longer computation times if you choose short Max Time and large step the function integration may be presented as squares area Calculation MIBCF 8582 08 Print Export graph Close 1 how 100 001234507608 1011121314151617161920 if you choose large Max Time and small steps the function integration may be presented as squares area calculation O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 364 RAM Commander User Manual Max Time 40000 Step 1000 MTBCF fasi g3 MTBCF 9419 30 Calculate Print Esport graph riel Cloze 1 how 1003 00034 iG LODE 1618 2029 4 2036303234 303640 So you may see how the parameters you enter influence the calculation process 13 3 3 1 To calculate MTBCF and R t 1 Activate the RBD window 2 Choose MTBCF from the Calculation menu the MTBCF For RBD dialog box opens MTBEF for RBO STANDARD Max Time Shep MT BCE Calculate Export graph 1 lan 00 g s 10152025 303740435055 60 497077 2055 90 95100 106 1 Close 3 In the lis
138. sheet Testability data This sheet has the following structure o ltemiD string Item hierarchical ID in tree o FM_name string Failure Mode o TestCode numeric code of the test from test library for current Item and Failure Mode o Efficiency numeric test efficiency o Indication string test indication 2014 ALD Software Ltd Here is an example for project TUTORIAL Phi_name Testtode Efficiency Indication 1 1 1 No Transmission 10 1 TE Bearing Failure 10 1 Fail Run After Strt 10 Fails to Start 10 11 3 Binding sticking 10 1 Excessive Flay 10 1 EZ Total drive fall 1 Indication 1 Single sector data error 4 1 Indication 2 Lede Mo Data reading t 1 Indication 3 12 2 3 Mo Data reading b 1 Indication 3 Mo Data writing b 1 Indication 3 e Tests sheet Test library This sheet has the following structure o TestCode numeric code of the test in tests library o TestName string test name o TestLevel string test level first letter O Organizational D Depot I Intermediate S Supplier M Manufacturer o Testlypes string test types Here is an example for project TUTORIAL 1 TestCode TestName TestLevel Testi ypes E Test 4 BIT C TestS 0 BIT 4 6 Testb O BIT Test BIT EH Test 0 BIT 9 Testd 0 BIT o 10 Testi 0 Visual EB sheet List Functional Blocks EM sheet Failure Modes list from FMECA library EE sheet End Effects list from FMECA library Class sh
139. steady state unavailability to be calculated and displayed under the element box and in reports Show Q t Select this check box if you want the Q t unavailability at time t or instantaneous or point availability probability that a system or component will be operational up and running at a specific time t to be calculated and displayed under the element box and in reports Max MCS Cut off will be performed only if number of MCS is more than the value entered number for Cut Off in this text box The setting is global for current workstation Relative cut off MCS will be deleted if the Q Total Q i e relative unavailability is less than value the value entered in this text box The setting is global for current workstation Relative cut off MCS will be deleted if its order is greater than the shortest MCS order order specified value The setting is global for current workstation Sensitivity factor Sensitivity Factor is used for high and low unavailability values for Sensitivity calculation the default value is 10 The setting is global for current workstation Width Default diagram node box width Height Default diagram node box height 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 467 19 3 3 FTA diagram building When a new diagram is opened the tree top event is created You can now start the tree building by adding successors child items to the top event To add a successor child to the tree e
140. stress parameter for each component for which the applied value exceeds the derated value To generate a derating report 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Switch to Deraing mode using left button bar 3 From the Reports menu select Tree the Report Selection dialog box opens Report Selection Type Applied values Derating Guidelines SE NO07 F Go under Hybrid Starting level itermn Depth from start item 9 4 Select a report type in the Type list box 9 If All parts derating results is selected or Overstressed parts in the Type list box select a guideline from the list box 6 Choose OK RAM Commander displays the derating report in a report window 2014 ALD Software Ltd 338 RAM Commander User Manual Applied Values Defaults Report Project name TUTORIAL lt Derating gt Assembly Ref Des Main Switch IC Digital Redes PN pita HU pu Segment of a derating report showing derated value applied value and the stress percentage See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 12 4 Summary This chapter described the RAM Commander derating module The derating reports isolate those components that present possible reliability problems for your particular application 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Reliability Block Diagrams a RAM Commander User Manual Reliability Block Diagrams R
141. tab O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Item Data General Logistics Operating Nonoperating Maintainability Derating Miscellaneous FECA Family ELECTRONIC Ref Des CCZ ltem type Capacitor Part number EnvironmentProfile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Eftectwelnhented from parent item Environment 5 Temperature Delta Ay FR PredictionCalculation Settings Method selection default Method ieee see MIL 217F 2 P stress Failure distribution Exponential Failure Rate Reliability Data Field factor ltem FR Duty cycle 6 1904 e 002 FR Source Predicted FA predicted 6 19047e 002 Mult factor FA user defined 0 4dd factor 4 Status FR field 0 Luantity ear FR allocated 15101e 002 eee Eck OLE E Cale OK Complexity for FR allocations 1 5699e 0 Kb_spec Source of user defined FR IK Cancel You will see the following fields there Field Description i Component family Electronic Mechanical or Electro Mechanical Leave for assembly Item type Component ltem type like resistor capacitor or spring Each family has its own aa of Item types q A Designator Cur Environment Curent environment set to parent s environment if set in Environment fie
142. the RPTB 1998 Spares Optimization Derating Modules and Monte Carlo Simulation modules 1999 RAM Commander 7 0 the 32 bit version is released 2001 Fully integrated FMECA and design process FMEA 2002 Functional FMECA ILS support and NSWC 2003 Integrated Fault Tree Analysis and Siemens prediction method 2004 Integrated Safety module and FIDES prediction method 2005 Multi user work support and IEC 62380 prediction method 2006 Stress Strength Analysis Siemens SN 29500 2005 1 and HTML reports 2006 Event Trees FMECA report generator and RCM 2007 Markov Analysis Telcordia Issue 2 217Plus and multilingual database support 2008 MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List Module O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 20 RAM Commander User Manual 2 2 2009 MSG 3 faster FTA calculation and advanced security 2010 New look FIDES 2009 and reports by MS Word template 2011 MSG 3 Structural Zonal and L HIRF Analysis 2013 Telcordia Issue 3 NPRD 2011 Binary Decision Diagrams 2014 Ul face lift FIDES 2009 Part count and Family count methods FDAL allocation support To maintain our competitive edge we have been collecting customer responses and questions In addition we have added many new functions to keep RAM Commander current with state of the art technologies As always ALD is interested to know how you use RAM Commander If you have any special applications or hints or have come across any particular problems do not
143. the field below O 2014 ALD Software Ltd a2 RAM Commander User Manual 4 Choose Quantities RAM Commander displays the quantity report in a window The output below taken from the Spare Part quantities report provides the exact number of spare parts providing the optimum availability for the selected point SPARE PARTS OPTIMIZATION report No of systems in the field 10 Operation hours per day 24 00 Budget 5000000 0 Unsupported Mission Time days 365 0 tems replaced in Organizational Intermediate Depot Report depth 3 Recommended SPARE PART quantities for project TUTORIAL Level of TAT Level of Cond rate Sum of City in MiniMax Enae eee 96 mem Cost Sin ty Qty stock 12 1 D j C oo o CN017004 Interme 50 Depot Jo 8 7416 126000 0 2 o CNo17009 Interme 50 Depot f0 0 2419 CNO17012 interme 50 Depot o 8 0000 1500 0 CNO17016 Interme 50 Depot fo s28215 169000 0 10 o CNO17045 Interme 50 Depot fo 50 4954 12000 0 j1 o o a k Po ta CNO1700 CNO17099_ Interme 60 Depot Jo 170000 700 0 f1 o CNo17201 interme WA Discardlo 8 3500 75 498 4 lo CNO01788 1 ao o 23 fa 3 o p5 0056 CNo17880 Organiz 30 Intermefo 11 3265 30000 0 1 5 6583 1 pp fe 0 0034200 4 5 1 jo 2 boooso00 1055550 Interme N A Discardjo 0 1682 4 fo 1 00001080 Total cost 15390000 Achieved availability 0 965267 The detailed report displays results com
144. the search condition is for those optoelectronic LEDs that have 3 character displays AND that include Logic 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 3 5 4 OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICES MIL HOBE 21 FNZ Conditions Part name Dizia Mil num Help Cat num Generic name Style LED DISCRETE only for Led Display T junction H of characters 4 a Delta Tic Logic exists YES Quality dis Fl gq Lead Configuration jee Distance appearing in a field in the Conditions dialog box means that each field changed from to another value will participate in the Global change conditions 8 In the Item Data New Values dialog box select or enter new values in those fields to be modified appearing in a field in the New Values dialog box means that each field changed will result in a corresponding parameter change for all items depending on the conditions in Conditions dialog box during the Global Change 9 Choose OK 10 RAM Commander updates the Product tree view with the new values Massive Entry One of the most time consuming tasks in reliability analysis is entering component data RAM Commander prowdes a fast and convenient way to enter components with the Massive Entry option You can also use the Massive Entry option to view and edit component data 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 179 7 3 5 4 1 To open the Massive Entry list 1 Activate the Product tree view and h
145. the workstation 15 Continue installation for other workstations Standalone Installation Common Network Database As it was stated before the standalone installation is useful when each user wishes to work with his own database or work disconnected and network installation provides possibility to work through the central database located on the server However it is still possible for multiple users to work with Standalone installation using common projects database located on the network server and or common libraries located on the network server To allow RAM Commander users to work with common libraries 1 Common libraries should be placed on the network shared folder 2 RAM Commander Standalone computers should be configured to use this network folder as a library location See Reliability Libraries and Defaults chapter and also Settings Management paragraph later in this chapter To allow RAM Commander users to work with common database when users have Standalone RAM Commander configuration 1 Choose PC which will act as a file server It can t be one of RAM Commander workstation client standalone computers You will not be able to run RAM Commander and work on this file server PC 2 Share any folder on this PC give full access rights to all RAM Commander users to this folder Folder name should contain only Latin characters and numbers without spaces or 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 51 special a
146. their consequences reasons etc for all system functions Then for SSA AFO you may 1 Define objective probabilities for failure severities and failure effects 2 Build Fault Trees for each failure condition 3 Calculate expected probability for each failure and compare it to objective probability 22 3 Safety Libraries Safety module uses common libraries with FMECA module Libraries which are relevant for the Safety module are e Phases Define your product mission or life cycle phases on the Phases tab of the library screen Define duration for each phase Put the total mission e g whole flight phase to be the first phase in the list e Safety Severities Classification of End Effect Severities from the point of vew of Safety each EE has two severities FMECA Severity and Safety Severity in the Safety module we need Safety Seevrity On Safety Severities page you may also set objective maximal probability of failure per average mission hour for each severity level for SSA AFO e End Effects List of failure effects hazard effects Each effect should have Safety Severity defined for each phase switch phases using the drop down list above the End Effects list You may set two objective probabilities according to Safety Requirements and according to design requirements for each EE and each phase separately End Effects may be added later while working with failure conditions data grid 22 3 1 Working with Libraries
147. time days 5 SME Po Condemnation Rate O Spare Parts Min Spare Parts Max E Spare parts Min Minimum number of spare parts to be on hand at all times means to take value from TT Spare parts Max parts Max Maximum number of spare parts Maximum number of spare parts means no limitation means no limitation Condemnation rate Condemnation rate is the proportion of items needing repair that it is uneconomical to repair Repair turnaround time Time required to send part for repair and get it back 0 take TAT from days Scenario 6 Price Miscellaneous tab of the Item data screen if Spares optimization by budget will be used Enter also Weight and Volume is optimization will be done by these parameters too Spare Parts Calculation Spare parts calculation performs the evaluation of unrestricted spare parts stock is based on the required No Shortage Probability NSP criterion for up to five maintenance levels e Organizational replacement made at customer site in line in the field e Intermediate replacement made at service center repair base repair hangar e Depot Supplier Manufacturer replacement made at higher levels like factory site With this information together with the reliability data RAM Commander computes the required Spares stocks at each maintenance level You define an operational spares parts scenario using regular operation mode parameters required No Shorta
148. usais aiii 169 Environment and Temperature Definition cccccccooocncccncccononncncnoncnnnnnrncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononananinnnos 172 Standard ENVInOMMe MS 24 il ee Aa hee eae ee tele 174 Additional operations With items ooonncccconnnncoconcnnconcnnnncnnonnnnronnnn nn rr nnn nan rra narran ner nnnnnnrrrnnnnnrrrrnnnnrrnrnaanes 175 Deleg es A e ao 175 CODY MOVE HOMS sicicnddc nai id taa iia EEEE Ni 175 Global change Meneame a eee 176 Mass We EMERY eects A dai 178 To open the Massive Entry ld A A A ea idee A das 179 To add new items in a Massive Entry liSt oooocccccononnnccocononcconononcconononcnnnnnnncnnnnonononanoncnanons 179 Additional operations With the liSt oooccccccooncncccoononocccononoccnononononononononnnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnononnnnnes 180 Coutbrarts QUIN Soi td taa 181 Mass Ne BEntry REPOSO dina eaeel sla ere peste lest ltteers cesta 182 Copy DEW Celi Held sionista o idea incisi n 182 Marking WIL COS ea 183 ORG ANNIZ 6 onto elias mre hated ence bid les 183 A IMPoOrEXDO a 184 Mi port VVIZ AN O ica recae ian an daa 184 O id name rg a On ee een eee een ie eee eee ee ee 185 SeH 2a Si sera case na t sees Sa nataects A AREE 186 SEO TOMOS Tee eee eee eee eee ere eee are 187 Sep A Mentor GrapliCSs encia S ES r ERES h 187 SICH ZE NACCESS MMS ii ee 188 UF OUDICSMOOUN a a A a E OA ARREN E EN 188 2014 ALD Software Ltd 6 RAM Commander User Manual
149. welding machine 300 Amp welding machine 1200 Amp Hoist Compressor Description Hour Cost 1 00 1 00 5 00 7 00 2 00 2 00 e Use the tab sheets above to switch between tables To add a new line just write the data into the empty table line with asterisk in the leftmost column To delete a line right click on the line and choose Delete from the pop up menu Maintainability Reports 1 Select Maintainability mode 2 Navigate to any level in the product tree 3 From the Reports menu choose Standard Kit the Report Selection dialog box opens 4 Select the report Type see below and the applicable Include items options Note how the fields in the Report Selection dialog box change accordingly The table below explains the available report types Tree Tree diagram Tree structure structure Maintainability information ID PN RefDes Qty F R FIT Mct hrs MLH Level of replace information ID PN RefDes NHA Qty Mct hrs Maintainability data ID PN RefDes Qty maintenance tasks F R FIT Mct hrs MLH Maintenance Engineering Analysis System Next higher assembly Part No Part number Freq 10 6 Mnt Lv Manual Detect Method Maint Method Remark Task No Task Description Task Code Time min MP Configuration control ID reference designator Qty Mct MLH 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 323 Maintenance tasks
150. which doesnt fit on a single page RAM Commander automatically divides this large tree to smaller sub trees in the most optimal way and prints them separately To adjust the Page Orientation for tree printing select one of the following options from the FTA menu e Landscape e Portrait e Automatic This is the default setting and allows RAM Commander to choose the most suitable page orientation for each diagram according to its layout Print FTA and all it s sub trees do not print the same sub tree multiple times The automatic hierarchical printing is improved now the same sub tree is printed only once even if it is used several times in different transfer gates 19 3 11 Export Diagram as Picture Export to Clipboard You can insert the FTA tree as a picture into another application Word Excel PowerPoint etc To insert the FTA tree into another application O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 1 Choose Export to Clipboard from the FTA menu The diagram is moved to the Clipboard 2 Open another application 3 Select where you want to paste the diagram and press Ctrl V or choose Paste from the Edit menu The diagram is copied into the application Export FTA all its sub trees to MS Word Use this option to create an MS Word report with the current Fault Tree and all its sub trees including page numbering links between pages etc Choose Export to file Export tree subtrees to MS
151. will appear in the list below Select grant deselect deny permissions by clicking them in the list Permission called Project Open overrides all specific module permissions If you wish to give access to all modules select Project Open in the list If you wish to give permissions to specific modules only deselect Project Open and select specific modules such as FMECA FTA etc 10 Press Ok button to save the permission changes 11 Press Ok on the project data screen to save the changes To change the advanced permissions for project 1 Select the desired project in the list of projects 2 Open project data Right click on project and select Edit from popup menu 3 Press Advanced permissions button in Access Rights group 4 Enter the administration code defined by the project owner during initial advanced permissions definition 9 The access control list will appear manage advanced permissions as described above To enable the advanced permissions for project Another way to enter permissions management for the project is 1 Select the desired project in the list of projects 2 Select Advanced permissions from the Project menu 3 Enter the administration code defined by the project owner during initial advanced permissions definition 4 The access control list will appear manage advanced permissions as described above To enable the advanced permissions for project This second option i
152. will be generated Please send this Information to ws Generate site code Generate software license report om Fou wish to change pour license conditions wish to get information about your license options or have some troubles with the software licensing please generate a license report and attach it to your email Generate license report Delete license Use Delete license option if you wish to stop using our software on this computer wish to transfer license to another computer or if you were requested to do it by software distributors A Special file will be generated please send this file to software distributors as confirmation of the operation Delete license 4 Click Delete license You will receive the message providing you with the file name containing your license delete confirmation file 9 Send this file to your software vendor or support ald co il Please write also your full name company name and contact information We will register that you license is deleted then you 2014 ALD Software Ltd 64 RAM Commander User Manual 3 4 3 2 will be able to get a new license file instead of the deleted one for another computer or another system configuration later Sending License Report License report helps with troubleshooting of problems with ALD Software computer locked license Send us the report with the description of your problem if you got license related error o
153. you will typically have Projects List window and main project view window Product Tree or Bill of Materials open and also you may open additional project windows lile FTA diagram RBD diagram etc Windows belonging to different projects may also be opened simultaneously 2014 ALD Software Ltd ons RAM Commander User Manual 9 2 Apart from the usual Windows features referred to below the advantage of working with RAM Commander is that you can work on several parts of the project or with many projects in different windows The possibility in RAM Commander of opening and working in several windows simultaneously allows you to access various parts of the project such as the Product tree Libraries RBD etc in many projects facilitating reliability task execution RAM Commander supports most of the window management features provided by Microsoft s File Manager You can cascade and tile open windows and arrange the icons of minimized windows Using these functions you can work simultaneously with many open lists operating on several projects or parts of projects For an explanation of wndow management techniques refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Toolbar The toolbar displays buttons that are equivalent to common RAM Commander menu choices Some toolbar buttons are grayed out when the corresponding menu selection cannot be performed within an activated list The following is a description of toolbar buttons i
154. 0 0367 2 7E 007 0 0890 1 1E 007 A 0 999999 For Help press F1 R 0 000999343 You may switch between all open windows and open additional projects views and module windows Refer to the specific chapter for more information about each module 2014 ALD Software Ltd 126 RAM Commander User Manual 5 7 5 7 1 Reports All RAM Commander modules provide data output using reports and or graphs Reports may be generated as regular tabular data sheets in HTML or RTF format or as MS Word documents using customizable templates Users may use predefined reports or use powerful_Report Generator to create additional reports Users may generate store and customize reports and graphs A RAM Commander for Windows FMEDA Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C ole 2 Report Edit View Window Help E a on Drive C ps A bg 3 Applied Values Def Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Criticality Matrix Counting Items Applied Values Defaults Report Me Project name TUTORIAL lt MIL 217F 2 P stress gt Mo Assembly Ref Des Main Switch IC Digital i Hof Active Years in Theta B OS e els A IC rapo ee A 3 FMEDA Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C sacl aed el ied FMEDA Project name TUTORIAL Phase Operation For Severity Catastrophic Critical Marginal Minor For Classification ll gt Assembly Ref Des Main S Fo
155. 0791208 Minor damage Start of fire False da P 0 2 ss RAN O E O A E AS RAM Commander s ETA module features e User friendly and convenient tree building interface zoom export to clipboard as metafile print etc e Customizable graphical representation diagram elements colors styles etc e Events Library e Event Probability assessment models O user defined O calculated repairable unrepairable constant mission time periodical tests O linked to product tree element linked to FMECA Failure Mode NHE or End Effect linked to Fault Tree basic event O O o linked to Fault Tree gate or tree top event e Different Event logic types o Binary logic True False Success Failure o Multiple alternatives for events where not only True False or Success Failure outcomes are 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual considered o Different Event probability types o Equal event probabilities in all sequences o Different event probabilities in different sequences conditional probabilities 20 1 ETA module initiation You may use different ways to enter the RAM Commander ETA module e In the list of projects select project right click on it and choose ETA option from the pop up menu e Open project from the Modules menu choose ETA e Open project click Modules at the left button bar press ETA button In the ETA module you get the list of existing ETA diagrams About dia
156. 3 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Analysis NN E Graph Generator for RAM Commander version 3 0 2 la CU Ne Pareto analysis by item type A nee D Capacitor D Antenna D Switch B IC Digital B Motor D Other The appearance of the Pareto graph may be customized by entering Setup see more in the Graphs paragraph 10 3 Mission Profile RAM Commander provides a Mission Profile analysis module that simulates the product tree under varying conditions Define a mission phase by specifying its operating mode duration temperature alpha and number of cycles A mission profile analysis report describes the product s reliability throughout the mission defined O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 10 3 1 Mission Profile Alpha Ho 0 50 0 00 Time 30 0 Temp 25 0 OprHNop Enw Nop GB Phase Description Storage Transportation Nop GM 35 0 40 0 00 0 00 Flight Op AC 50 02 0 00 MF Analyzer Add MP Save As Delete MP Add Phase Edit Phase Delete Phase Move Up Move Down Complex mission profiles using many phases can be built For example you can design an airplane s mission profile starting at hangar storage takeoff various altitude climbs and return to base Each of these phases can be broken down into smaller phases until you fine tune your mission so that it closely resembles the airplane s actual operational conditions Defining a Mission Profile The
157. 472 Procedure 5 Method A The main definitions models and assumptions presented in this chapter are taken from this document Refer to MIL HDBK 472 and MIL STD 721 for more information on RAM Commander s maintainability prediction module Method A Procedure 5 of MIL HDBK 472 is used to predict maintainability parameters for any type of system or equipment including avionics ground and shipboard electronics or mechanical equipment at organizational intermediate depot supplier and manufacturer levels of maintenance See next paragraphs for a theoretical discussion of maintainability prediction philosophy and assumptions 11 1 Philosophy and Assumptions RAM Commander assumes that all corrective action consists of the following maintenance tasks Preparation Fault isolation Disassembly Interchange Remove Replace Reassembly Alignment Calibration Checkout Verification Start up Other all other tasks not in the above list In addition to the general assumptions listed in MIL HDBK 472 Procedure 5 the RAM Commander maintainability prediction process includes an additional term level of replace Level of replace represents the specific maintenance level location where an item is to be removed and replaced Therefore the level of replace of an item corresponds to the level of repair of its parent This assumes that an assembly is repaired by replacing one or more of its lower level parts The level of replace of the lo
158. 6 Enter the file name for example ramcwXX and choose the RAM Commander folder which you created in step 1 on your Desktop as the place where you want to save the file 7 Click Save 0 RAM Commander File Edit View Favortes Tools Help Fa Norton Antivirus a z i EE RAMCW 7 51 RAMC 4 Occ eee Ll My Computer 2 8 For all registry values inside the Advanced Logistics Developments key change RAMCXX to RAMCYY O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Data value not set ablDE_Mode REG 52 Normal lab GPROPath REG Sf DRAM CS LIB GPRD MDB lab Library REG SZ DRAM C32 LiblLibrary dat ablPripath REG SZ RAMC3ZIPRJ lab ProcPath REG 52 DRAM C32 PRC lab RootPath REG 52 DRAM C32 ab version REG SZ 8 1 lab ref REG 52 DA RAMCS2 LIB REF DAT 9 Copy C RAMCXX folder to CARAMCYY 10 Install the new version of RAM Commander Y YY to RAMCYY folder 11 Open folder Ram Commander located on the Desktop 12 Place the RAM Commander Y YY shortcut icon in it you may copy it from ALD Engineering group in the Startup gt Programs folder and change the shortcut s name to display software version Y YY 2 RAM Commander Ree Me Elle Edit View Favortes Tools Help qa Back mp E O search Ly Folders A ls Lx r Address Go Norton Antivirus gl 7 RAM 7 5 RAM YW 7 5 13 Click Start button and choose Run 14 Enter regedit in Run dialog box and click OK Type the name of a
159. A Add Markov Delete Select Deselect C Add or create any number of probability assessment means using Add RBD Add FTA and Add Markov buttons below O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 548 RAM Commander User Manual d Select one of linked methods as final by selecting it and pressing Select Deselect button The final method will be used in SSA reports Selected final method will appear in green color in the methods list This final method will be used to calculate a probability of the currently selected failure condition e To delete Safety Assessment means from the list select the corresponding record and press Delete button f To open and edit Safety Assessment means directly from the Safety Assessment Definition screen select the corresponding record and press Open button g Press Ok button to save the selected assessment methods and return to the failure conditions list There is possibility to group failure conditions with common behavior Failure condition group will appear on a gray background and specific failure conditions will appear below the group as shown on the picture below To create a new failure condition inside the group 1 Select the group cell in the failure conditions table 2 Right click on it and choose Add failure sublevel from the popup menu oss of Deceleration Capability IA O eTtiOne Delete Failure Add Failure sublevel Delete Fai
160. A RAM Commander uses Microsoft ODBC drivers to access Excel file It puts some limitations to Excel file a Worksheet name should start with Latin letter and should contain only letters and digits without characters like amp or spaces b Worksheet being imported should contain one consistent table not multiple tables with spaces between them C Data type for each column will be defined using first 16 rows If numeric data is entered to the cell type Text they it be interpreted as text if text data is entered to cells with type General or Numeric they will be interpreted as numeric Q Why not all the cells of a specific column are imported A All the cells of a specific column should be of the same type in Excel either numeric or text If cell types are not consistent some values will not be imported If the desired column type is Text you may 1 Add symbol as prefix to all numbers in the cell 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 189 or 2 Create additional column and define a formula CONCATENATE X X where XX is your source column you wish to convert Then use this new column for the import If the desired column type is numeric you may create additional column and define a formula VALUE XX where XX is your source column you wish to convert Then use this new column for the import Q What should do when have to import an Excel file in which some fields that should be character type
161. A module offers the following reports see Reports menu e ETA sequences report displays summary on all tree outcomes 2014 ALD Software Ltd Event Tree Analysis 505 24 RAM Commander for Windows ETA sequences for Project TUTORIAL Drive C a _ o x e Report Edit View Window Help xj e S BER D tX Y SEEN i ETA Sequences Report Project name TUTORIAL ETA Explosion Initiating event Explosion Eventi Eventz Eventa Event Qutcame Probability P 1 Explosion Start of fire True Sprinkler system Fire alarm is not Critical damage does not function activated True True 2 Explosion Start of fire True Sprinkler system Fire alarm is not Damage 428 006 does nottunction Jactivated True False stat offre False Minordamage 0 002 Explosion Start of fire True Sprinkler system Fire alarm ig not Major damage T 992 005 does not function Jactivated False True 5 Explosion Start of fire True Sprinkler system Fire alarm is not Damage 0 00791208 does not function activated False False e ETA sequences detailed report displays detailed information for each tree sequence 10 x TEFL OX oY SEA eo ETA Sequences Detailed Report Project name TUTORIAL ETA Explosion Initiating event Explosion Outcome Critical damage Probability P 5e 008 Event Logical Event Probability Reliability Calculation Explosion 0 01 Ser Probability q 0 01 defined Sta
162. A structures inspection program is required to safeguard structural integrity throughout the aircraft s operating life The inspection program will be prepared from analyses of structures examining airframe susceptibility to fatigue envronmental deterioration corrosion and accidental damage Structure analysis begins with identification of all Structural Significant Items SSI s SSI is any detail element or assembly which contributes significantly to carrying flight ground pressure or control loads and whose failure could effect the structural integrity necessary for the 2014 ALD Software Ltd safety of the aircraft emphasis is on Safety Typical examples of SSIs are Wing and Empennage Fuselage Doorframes Window frames Engine Mounts Entrance doors access doors MSG 3 Structural Analysis for Project AAA on Drive D 24 3 Name ATA Number Zone Description SSI SI Type Aircraft Landing Gear 32 00 00 E Main Landing Gear 32 10 00 Nose T ail Landing Gear 32 20 00 4 Doors 52 00 00 Pssenger Crew Doors 52 10 00 Main Intrance Door 52 11 00 Emergancy Exits 52 20 00 Cargo Baggage Doors 52 30 00 Service Doors 52 40 00 Fluid Service Doors 52 46 00 Landing Gear Doors 52 80 00 Fuselage Structure 53 00 00 Fuselage Bulkheads 53 05 00 Fuselage Main Structure 53 10 00 Fuselage Main Frame 53 11 00 Cockpit Window Structure 53 17 00 Nucelles Pulon Structure 54 00 00 ES Nacelles Pylon Main Frame ETT E O E E Nacel
163. AM Commander s Reliability Block Diagram RBD module allows you to quickly and easily define and compute scenarios for reliability availability and mean time between critical failures MTBCF You can use analytic or simulation techniques to evaluate RBDs Analytical techniques are possible for most configurations When such analyses are not possible you can use RAM Commander s built in Monte Carlo simulation engine to evaluate the RBD scenario RBD Module features e Graphical representaton of a block diagram e Link to Reliability Maintainability FMECA modules e Calculation of Availability Reliability R t MTBCF e Monte Carlo simulation o Series o Complex reliability configurations including standby partially loaded warm and active redundancy o Full or restricted repair with non exponential distribution of time to repair o Non exponential distribution of time to failure Normal Weibull etc o Analysis under Non steady transient state o Analysis of periodical inspection policy o Splited K out of N o K out of N with non ideal switch e Nested RBDs Sub RBD e All types of reliability configurations are supported by RBD module o Series o Parallel o K out of N active redundancy hot stand by cold partially loaded warm o with repair without repair with restricted repair e All common distributions of time to failure and time to repair are available Exponential Normal Log Normal Weibull Erlang o Uniform and other
164. ATE APPLICABLE AND EFFECTIVE ON Yes RESTORATION 9E IS A DISCARD TASK TO AVOID FAILURES OR TO REDUCE THE FAILURE RATE APPLICABLE AND EFFECTIVE Please provide answers for all 5 questions above Th Canos Selected answers are marked by green background color Decision diagram is different for each failure effect category O 2014 ALD Software Ltd MSG 3 979 C Press Ok when done d Press Task Definition button e Remarks Tasks dialog will appear provide remarks on your decision and enter details of scheduled maintenance tasks to the table in the lower part of the screen MSG3 Step 5 Task Selection Information Item Fuel Storage System Function Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar ATA Number 28 10 00 Failure Fails to allow flow inboard Failure Effect Category FEC Effect Loss of redundancy of fuel flow from outboard to inboard in wing tanks Other valves in wing al FEC Description Hidden Economic Cause Flapper valve failed closed Questions Answers and Explanations Answer amp Explanation Based on Applicability amp Effectiveness Criteria ls the lubrication or servicing task applicable and effective Is a check to verify operation applicable and effective Yes a check to verify operation will be applicable and effective ls an inspection or functional check to detect degradation of the function potential failure applicable and effective ls a restoration task to red
165. Activate the Product tree view see Activating the Product Tree View paragraph 2 From the Library menu choose Cross reference 3 The Cross reference manager opens 4 From the Cross reference menu choose Import from ASCII 9 Browse to the desired text file and press Open 6 RAM Commander will perform the import and update the library window Part Number Recognition PN Automatic Recognition actually enlarges the component library The only difference is that component data is not stored in the separate library file but is defined by Part number decomposition and analysis according to manufacturer s algorithms Currently supported part types are Capacitors and Resistors 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 265 Currently supported manufacturers are AVX Bourns Cal chip DALE Hitano Garrett IRC Johanson Kemet KOA Kyocera Mallory Meritek Murata MSI NIC Nichicon Novacap Samsung Siemens Syfer OhmCraft Paccom Philips Ralec ROEDERST TDK Taiyo Yuden Vishay Vitramon Yageo To use the Automatic Recognition feature In the Item Data screen click the General Logistics tab In the Manufacturer field select the manufacturer s name Enter the Part number Define the Family Code and the Item type Open the Method screen press the large button with the method name In the Method Data screen press the Load from Library button If the Part number and Manufact
166. Alternative solution for Windows 7 and up install the Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 Full from the Microsoft website Problem 3 MS Word reports generation does not work generation window shows message like Critical failure Exception generating report System Runtime InteropServices COMException Bad parameter at Word Options set_Pagination Reason For some reason Microsoft Word 2007 automation does not work properly if no user name and initials are defined during the MS Office installation Solution See Microsoft knowledge base article http support microsoft com kb 948682 en us To resolve this issue add the user name and the initials in the Word Options dialog box To do this open the MS Word click the Microsoft Office Button click Word Options enter a user name and initials under Personalize your copy of Microsoft Office and then click OK Problem 4 Error messages while trying to open the generated MS Word document Reason Document to be opened contains macros and MS Word security is set to not allow Macros Solution Enable opening documents with Macros in MS Word or remove Macro commands from default dot template used to generate the MS Word document from the software 3 11 5 General Problems Problem 1 Context sensitive help does not appear on Windows Vista or Windows 7 Solution Microsoft decided not to support hlp format context sensitive application help files in Windows versions starting from
167. Antenna failure Communication antenna Database fallure 3 Motor Fails to Start Failure of item Motor ID 1 3 2 Fails to Start DB engine files absent DB engine registry record is bad HardD rive Total drive fail Failure of item HardDrive ID 1 2 2 1 Total drive fail Installation files bad Installation files are absent bad or damaged Keyboard Total keyboard fail Failure of tem Keyboard ID 1 2 1 Total keyboard License License file absent Main Switch Main Switch Mother Board CPL Fail Failure of item MotherBrd ID 1 2 2 4 CPU Fail Mother Board Mernory Fail Failure of item MotherBrd ID 1 2 3 4 Data bit loss Plug Plug system failure Plug absent Plug absent plug is stolen or temporarily removed Plug driver Failure Plug driver failure wrong driver Windows service Port failure Printer port or USB port failure Printer port or USB port failure PS Power Supply Power Supply PS 1 PS Power Supply PS 2 PS Power Supply PS 3 PS Power Supply Receiver failure Receiver Type 1 Recelwer Receiver Receiver Type 1 Delete Print Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to change library items Use the Print button to print reports with events data NOTES Data of events in the tree is not be immediately updated in the library but only after the tree recalculation has been performed All events in the tree with the same code correspond to the same event in the library If you change one of them in the tree all the e
168. Assessment Preliminary Hazard Analysis System Safety Assessment System Hazard Analysis and other analysis types required by different standards SAE ARP 4781 MIL STD 882D AFO etc It allows buildng functional tree and performing qualitative analysis by defining all possible failure conditions and their consequences Then it allows performing quantitative analysis calculating probabilities of all failure conditions using FTA module s Functional Tree for Project S15_AlIRCRAFT on Drive C Calculation Library Reports Tools View Window Help Xx es ke Hame Description sis AIRCRAFT O Control Thrust 8 Control Flight Path GP Determine Orientation E Determine Position and Heading 9 Control Aircraft on the Ground T Determine air ground position O Decelerate aircraft on the ground SAE ARP 4761 example page 178 Stopping Wheel Rotation on the Ground o Provide Primary Stopping Force Failure Condition Phases Effect Classification Verification Remarks Total loss of wheel braking Unannunciated loss of wheel braking Landing ATO The crew detects the failure when the Critical 518 Aircraft Fault brakes are operated The crew uses Tree spoilers and thrust reversers maximum extent possible This mar result In a TUM OYETAN Annunciated loss of wheel broking Landing Crew selects a more suitable airport Critical 518 Aircraft Fault Crew notes emergency ground support Tree procedures
169. CA Analysis may be performed differently for different mission phases profiles For example some device may have different failure modes and their effects between ground operation and airborne operation so you should create two different FMECA data sets one for each phase You may define multiple phases on the Phases page of FMECA Library see FMECA Libraries paragraph for each phase you should define its name description and duration in hours SafetvFMECA Library Data Duration in hours Default Phase 1 000 Phase Name Phase Description Flight 5 000 Landing 0 400 Landing ATO TAKI 0 800 RATO 0 200 TARI 0 200 TakeUlt 0 400 Take Off before W 2 DE 002 2 3 4 5 E T 8 J Take OFF after 2 0E 002 Landing ATO 0 600 mk a Copy all FMECA data Normalize all lpha and Beta Delete all FMECA and TAM data Then you may select phase of current analysis and switch between phases on the Project Configuration screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Project Configuration Default 5 Current Snalysis Brault oCreen General e Uperatinig Operating Monoperating nea bMamtamnmability Maintainability Repair Replace Levels Derating ony e Miscellaneous Nonoperating MMct max Calculation based on MIL HOBE 4 72 Lognormal distribution Derating FMEA Phase Default Phase Default Phase D Efault rion Landing Adsemble E anding ATO TAXI E AAA E Mechanical d
170. CM 3 A X Ref Des Main Switch Description Main Switch Failure Mode Maintenance type Maintenance procedure Corrective Weekly maintenance Maintenance each 1000 hours Preventive Maintenance procedure type Failure Finding Maintenance procedure frequency Userdefined every 1000 Hours Calculated every 00 Hours Optimize Total maintenance times Mick 0 55 Hours MLH 0 55 Hours H Task Type Task Description min LF q Fault lsolation Perform system tests 200 10 AFA Isolation check contact Sa eer eae ere eee ape ee Z T 3 Other Clean or replace the contacts 10 10 El Append Insert E dit Copy Delete Move Up Move Down Close You can edit or delete your defined maintenance procedures by clicking respectively on Edit or Delete buttons in the upper right hand part of the screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 313 11 4 2 2 MIL 472 Procedure 5 Task Definition Customize tasks by taking data from the standard task library standard times library or by creating your own user defined tasks and times All the procedures relate to the following dialog box Maintainability Task Data F E x General Skills STE Materials Task Preparation Task H f Description Disconnection Total Time min 1 82 Standard Timez Standard Ti User Defined Timefmini 2 Se ge Labour Power f Description To
171. End time i 0 hows results output a Visual representation Show state code Show transition code e Show state name Show transition name Show state performance W Show transition rate Show state initial probability Performance unit x Below is the explanation of diagram properties 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis 413 Precision Calculation precision Used in time dependent analysis calculation Number of points Number of points in time dependent analysis results output For example If start time is O hours and end time is 10 hours and number of points 11 then resulting report will contain points for 0 1 2 10 hours Visual representation Allows defining appearance of states and transitions what is printed and what is hidden Performance unit User customizable performance unit may be of maximal performance or absolute value 17 2 6 Working with diagram Markov module provides the following convenient options while working with Markov diagrams Print the diagram Choose Print option from the Diagram menu to print the diagramZ Zoom in Zoom Out Choose different zooming options from Diagram menu Zoom submenu or use numeric keypad keys You can export insert the diagram as a picture to another application Word Excel PowerPoint etc choose menu item Diagram Export to Clipboard The diagram will be placed to Clipboard Then switch to another a
172. FC Fractional Contribution for a basic event i FC i 1 1 RDF i e Risk Increase Factor RIF Risk Increase Factor for a basic event iRIF i sum of all MCS taking into account that event probability is 1 sum of all MCS Sensitivity Example of the analysis results report FTA Importance amp Sensitivity Analysis Project name FTA FTA RAMC Top event RAMC Q mean 0 807138 Code Occur Q FV FC RDF RIF Sens Sens mea Imp high low rence n 1 e 0 37168 0 10240 1 11409 7 0 732748 1 36472 registered 4 5 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis MON Code Occur Q FV RD RI Sens Sens mea Imp high low rence n calla cad ae Baasa 0788 inst mias FC Btrieve files a 0 10240 1 11409 gt 0 732748 1 36472 absent 5 11 0 0 0 0 2 2 F 3 0 4 ll registry Ma 037168 0 00739 1 00745 1 23895 0 86082 0 80177 1 07365 record is bad 3 4 1 0 3 0 21297 0 049601 1 05219 1 09756 0 88588 0 771276 1 14859 5 bal has absent 0 11150 0 02363 1 0242 1 05514 0 85164 0 789971 1 07807 5 5 bg driver 0 11150 0 02363 1 0242 1 05514 0 85164 0 789971 1 07807 failure 5 2 5 1 0 732748 1 36472 7 IRAMC files bad 0 37168 0 10240 1 11409 ica WI lasses A 4 5 ll ene registry 0 37168 0 10240 1 11409 gt 0 732748 1 36472 records bad 4 5 19 4 5 FALSE TRUE Propagation RAM Commander allows visualizing consequences of any of the fault tree events an
173. Factor Add factor Quatity Check Data validation status set automatically no status Err Error appears as in product tree Warn Warning appears as Xin product tree O K OK appears as in product tree Calc FR calculation status set automatically no status Err Error appears as in product tree Warn Warning appears as Xin product tree O K OK appears as in product tree E sagen of user defined or field Failure rate source manufacturer data field data accelerated life testing data other database etc Cur Nc Current number of on off cycles per 1000 hrs set to parent s Nc if in Nc field i 7 A Q Mult factor Item FR See next paragraphs for different ways of FR definition or calculation Component Failure Rate prediction RAM Commander provides more than 30 methods standards for reliability prediction Failure Rate calculation See Choosing suitable Reliability Prediction Method paragraph for their list To predict component s reliability 1 Create component in the product tree See New item creation and ltem data editing paragraphs in the Product Tree chapter open component s data screen double click it in the product tree 2 Make sure to define the following data for the component e Family and ltem type e Part Number or Generic Name e Environment and temperature if applicable and if differs from parent item see Environment and Temperature Definiti
174. Fuselage tank es 24 10 00 2 20 10 03 RRT TZARA E Refueling pilot valve Mo 3 28 10 04 RAT TAAR E Drain valve Cente Yes 28 10 00 4 28 10 05 NETA e Pressure refueling Ho 5 20 10 06 RAT TAAR E Check valve flapper es 24 10 00 B 28 10 07 SA E Interconnect valves es 28 10 00 Fi 28 10 08 Wing drain valve 8 Wing float vent va Tes 28 10 00 A ee Center tank transf es 28 10 00 10 Wind tank transfer es 28 10 00 11 Transfer inline che Mo 12 5 Close the items list 24 1 2 3 Step 3 FMECA The purpose of this step is Functional Failure Mode and Effects Analysis for MSI maintenance significant items For items with single function regular FMECA analysis should be performed For items with multiple functions defined as functional blocks the FMECA analysis should be performed for the functional blocks O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 23 Project TUTORIAL_MSG3 on Drive C Ref Des Oy Opr FR 10 Modules E Aircraft m 0 0000 E Fuel System 0 0000 A tama Y Fuel storage 0 0000 Fe Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar SR TE GP vent wing tank in flight and during refueling 0 0000 GP Allow interconection of wing tanks from both sides 0 0000 Fuel Distribution System 0 0000 Fuel Dump System 0 0000 El foms FM NHE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta De Fails to allow flow inboard 0 500 Flapper valve failed 1 1 1 Loss of redundancy of fuel flow 1 000 Loss o
175. GP Control Thrust Pp Control Flight Path ay Determine Orientation Cl Determine Position and Heading GP Control Aircraft on the Ground eal Determine airground position eal Decelerate aircraft on the ground stopping heel Rotation on A x x da FHA SAE ARP 4761 554 5AE ARF 4761 AFO Russia SHA MIL 5TD 582 OSHA MIL STD 682 User defined s page 178 the Ground Safety Module screen contains two parts the functional tree in the upper part of the screen and the failure data in the lower part of the screen H RAM Commander for Windows Functional Tree for Project 18_AIRCRAFT on Drive Sars Calculation Library Reports Tools View Window Help gt x on 4 PI Name Description sis AIRCRAFT rl Control Thrust P Control Flight Path Determine Orientation Determine Position and Heading 9 Control Aircraft on the Ground Determine air ground position E Decelerate aircraft on the ground SAE ARP 4761 example page 178 Stopping Wheel Rotation on the Ground T Provide Primary Stopping Force MN Caida Cornardaro Etinnian Pore Failure Condition Phases Effect Classification Verification Remarks Total logs of wheel braking Unannunciated loss of wheel braking Landing ATO The crew detects the failure when the Critical 518 Aircraft Fault brakes are operated The crew uses Tree spoilers and thrust reversers maximum extent possible This mar result In a TUF OYETAN Annunciated loss of wheel broking Landing Cr
176. ION SIGNIFICANT FUNCTION Please gothroughthe 7 decision logic and double click one of the options 3 FMECA analysis Failure Effects Categorization 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 325 RCM Failure Effect Categorization No scrambling Communication Degradation RCM Failures prioritization consequencies logic Evident Evident Hidden Safety Economic t Economic Environment Operational wa Operational Please go through the decision logic and double click one of the options 4 Preventive Maintenance strategy decision RCM Decide about Preventive Maintenance a Communica Procedure Mo No scheduled Maintenance Combination of Procedures Please go through the decision logic and double click one of the options 9 Preventive Maintenance definition and frequency optimization 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability RCM Ref Des Main Switch Description main Switch Failure Mode Maintenance type Maintenance procedure Weekly maintenance Maintenance each 1000 hours Corrective Preventive Maintenance procedure type Failure Finding kd Maintenance procedure frequency Userdefined even 11000 Hours i Calculated ever U Hours Optimize Task Type Task Description Total maintenance times Met 0 55 Hours MLH 0 55 Hours Fault solation Ferform systern tests Fault lsolation Check contacts Clean o
177. JN K ADVANCED Loeistics DEVELOPMENTS Quality Solutions for Quality People A L D RAM Commander User Manual 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 2014 ALD Software Ltd All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this documentor from the use of programs and source code that may accompanyit In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for anyloss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Printed 2014 Publisher The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Advanced Logistics Developments Ltd A L D No part of this document may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission from Advanced Log
178. KN Element Configuration anciana A e a 346 TO er ate a SUDRBD a aaa e a a E a A OE EA AE EAE A AEAEE ERLEA 348 Tovdelete an RBD element rein a a 349 Saving and Opening Reliability Block Diagrams oooonconcccccoconccocccococonananononnnnnananornnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnanannrnnnnnns 349 WOFKINO with Diagrams soii a o aia 349 Remont Col saint oia as 349 To fold a series of RBD elements to fit the SCreen ooocccccccoccconncnnnnoconanoconnnononanocnnnnononanarnnnnnnonananos 350 TO ZOOM inor outor an RBD io oxcswasneasegsasmearmesteaesss 351 TO CODY aii FRED Cle Men di A ea ewe eaa eect ea a Geeks 352 Update RBD ATOM tics iia 352 EXPOLIO MEA DEP a opi 392 Export to MS Word EXCO Lear casosina ic anilla ideada seasasanezeors 352 Global CHange ito eee an es oe ner gee ee ere ee ee ee eee caia 353 3 RBD C lc tationsS eee ena daa 354 TO CalCulate aM RBD a da dica 354 Formulas a cad 355 PRe lability DIS TD A O oe cient peda laa eed Letra ok ares a Soha 355 AVvalapity DS TADUIONS o ld 356 Basica dada E 357 KOU ON YVI REDA eii de E E E S 358 Kout of N Without R pail sorosiane e a a ES 361 Equiv alentLanbda MTBE ni a a a oh a codes 361 MT TBCF and Rar tdi 362 To calculate ITB CF iaa A ae A 364 Monte Carlo SimUlatiOns A A 365 To itlate a Monte Carlo SUI a io do do e ed 366 4 RBO REDONS siii sis 368 9 SUMIMALY ii A A ESE EA 369 Part 14 System Configuration 371 1 To open the configuration system list oocococ
179. M Commander displays three category icons cN ICataloo Number and it s corresponding Generic Number 2014 ALD Software Ltd For example the Cross Reference record displayed below tells RAM Commander that if there is component with Catalog Number RR 123 355 in the product tree it should take it s part data from the component library component with identifier Generic name XNA 1234 ERA tlanager Cross Reference Mame Generic Mame oF GEE et ee AddEdit Cross Reference PatName RR 123 355 Genernc Mame Arias To create edit or delete a record in the Cross Reference Library 1 Activate the Cross Reference Manager list 2 Do one of the following e To add a record to the Cross Reference Library choose Create from the Item menu In the Add Edit Cross Reference dialog box enter your data and click OK e To edit a record choose Edit from the Item menu or right click on the record and choose Edit from the pop up menu In the Add Edit Cross Reference dialog box modify the required data and click OK e To delete one or more records select them using the asterisk key on the additional numeric keyboard Choose Delete from the Item menu or right click the item in the list and choose Delete from the pop up menu A prompt appears asking if you want to delete the record Click Yes and the record is deleted 3 RAM Commander will then update the Cross Reference list You may also create a new record in t
180. M GF 2 Transfer to COMM GF 2 COMM GF 1 PS Antenna failure Power Supply COMM GF 1 1 Se Ot 2 22e 006 LJ Uh 2 228 007 Ao t 9 828 007 e Uh 3 62e 008 Receiver failure woo Gt 2 o0e O0 j Gh 2 50e 008 Alternative transmitter Transmitter failure E failure A Gt 3 75e 007 Ps amas Ot 1 00e 002 CY Oh 3 75e 008 Gh 1 00e 002 pay attention to yellow logical gate codes Compose the pattern and press Change Change Fault Tree Parameters Change tree parameters Box Height Stark cut off if number of MCS more thar Bow Width Relative Cut off value default gt value 126 6 Time Relative Cut off order i Put to leave current value Change This options allows changing fault tree parameters like box sizes time cut off Set value in desired field leave asterisk in fields you do not wish to change Then press Change button The update will affect all fault trees Replace one basic event to another There are cases when it is required to replace all occurrences of some basic event in all fault trees to another basic event For example you have many fault trees with inclusion of basic event A At some stage you understand that you need to replace this basic event A with another event A1 while leaving the event A unchanged in the library Is is possible using this option 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual Replace one basic event with ano
181. MECA FTA ETA o Safety Assessment Hazard Analysis e Industry specific training o Avation Safety o Railway Safety O 2014 ALD Software Ltd ES RAM Commander User Manual o Reliability for Electronics Telecommunications industry o Reliability Safety for Military applications e and more Contact us for more information about training programs O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Getting Started RAM Commander User Manual 3 1 Getting Started This chapter provides instructions on the RAM Commander installation configuration first time running and administration It explains how to solve the following tasks e Choosing the suitable installation model e Choosing the suitable licensing model e Installing RAM Commander in different modes e Configuring RAM Commander license e Installation Troubleshooting e First time use e Administration e Upgrade e Troubleshooting Introduction RAM Commander is a 32 bit Windows application which should be physically installed on all computers where it should be used There are two main RAM Commander installation configurations Standalone and Network In a Standalone configuration there is no dedicated server RAM Commander is installed on multiple computers each of them may use local database set of projects and libraries or use database located on any shared network drive Standalone Standalone In Network client server configuration separate RAM Commander serv
182. MSG 3 Report The purpose of this step is to create and print out the final MSG 3 report for each system subsystem defined as Highest Manageable MSI during the MSG 3 analysis RAM Commander generates MS Word document with MSG 3 report for the selected highest manageable MSI item according to MS Word template Template design fonts colors table headers language etc could be changed by users 1 Select Highest Manageable MSI item in the product tree 2 Choose 7 MSG 3 Report step in the button bar 3 Report parameters dialog will appear MSG 3 Report Information Highest Manageable ltem Data MSI ATA Number 28 10 00 Revision 3 MSI Name Fuel Storage System Date 12 21 09 Approve Date 08 23 03 Author ALD Approved By John Smit Workgroup RAMS Update Date 12 21 09 System Breakdown and Functional ee Description Document Link Browse System Design Feat Descripti E een CARAMC3APRIATUTORIAL_MSGIMSG3 FuelStorageSystem_Design doc eee General Report Settings Company name ALD Department name Reliability amp S afety Product Project Name wing Fighter Spaceship MSG 3 report template document DARAMC3IALIBAMSG3_Template_Main doc Browse Generate Report Save Cancel 4 Provide product subsystem workgroup author and company details which will appear on the report forms 5 Provide MS Word template file name if not default The default template is located in the LIB subfolder of RAM Commander installati
183. Maint Task Task Description Mp Total Time Task Source Description Qty T min Maintenance tasks analysis Item Maint Task required skills equipment and materials for each Information task Maintenance tasks analysis Calculation of Total Labour Hours per year for each skill type Skills summary according to system usage scenario Maintenance tasks analysis Calculation of Total Labour Hours per year for each equipment type STE summary according to system usage scenario Maintenance tasks analysis Calculation of material consumption for maintenance tasks per year Materials summary for each material according to system usage scenario 9 To limit the report to a certain number of levels from the starting level enter that number in the Depth from start item field 6 Under Report items replaced in select Organizational Intermediate and or Depot eg If Depot is selected then only those items whose level of replace is defined as Depot will be included in the report table 7 Select Go under Hybrid so that the sub items of any hybrid in the tree will be displayed in the report 8 Choose OK RAM Commander generates and displays the report in a report window You can print the report by selecting Print from the Report menu or click on the printer icon The Windows print dialog box opens Make the selections appropriate for your printer and choose OK To close a report window double
184. OK 5 From the Calculation menu choose Monte Carlo 6 RAM Commander conducts the simulation and displays resulting report and graph o x za RAM Commander for Windows RBD Monte Carlo for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Repot Edit View Window Help ae amp ce A 3 RBD Monte Carlo for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Monte Carlo Results Monte Carlo results 222222 22 111111 11 333333 31 Time hours Availability Reliability 1 00000000 1 00000000 0 99777102 ERRIRE 1 00000000 1 00000000 0 99777102 0 333333 31 1 00000000 1 00000000 0 99777102 0 27000001 1 00000000 1 00000000 0 99777102 0 15000001 19570515 GR 00000000 1 00000000 0 99777102 0 59936529 21317320 10429486 66000003 72063470 4 0 0 A 0 0 49336970 0 0 32682681 0 0 _ANANAAAN 907774109 AAannnnan l 177777775 LANN Elali fo o5890000 o 00900000 0 03305000 0 00468000 L Availability ANDARD for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Reliability 888888 88 1000000 00 Mm Time S Setup Print Clipboard Save The report contains Reliability reliability is a probability of failure at time t and Availability probability that the system is operating at time t figures for each selected time point according to Monte Carlo settings max time and number of points For Reliability and Availability upper and 2014 ALD Software Ltd 368 RAM Commander User Manu
185. P MONITOR AKSMONS2 EXE See the Troubleshooting paragraph for information about different NetHASP plug problems solution See Updating plug configuration Reporting plug configuration and paragraphs for information about updating checking and reporting your plug configuration allowed modules number of licenses etc Plug update on a virtual server If your plug server is a virtual machine and you can t perform plug update operations physically on this server PC as required by instructions you may use another PC and the following procedure 1 Install RAM Commander Standalone configuration on the selected PC or use any PC with RAM Commander already installed 2 Install HASP driver http www aldsoftware com download download HASPUserSetup exe 3 Take the red USB plug from the server and insert into the USB port of the selected PC 4 Proceed to the required procedure Updating plug configuration or Reporting plug configuration 5 Return the plug back to the server 3 43 Local License File License file is placed on PC where RAM Commander is installed It grants access to RAM Commander to this PC user only and can t be exchanged between computers License file performs unauthorized software copy protection and locks RAM Commander installation O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started st to your PC To get the license file you should use supplied License Manager Utility to create a site code file You should send t
186. PN F Peasibility Set the Feasibility value for each potential corrective action Values range from 1 to 10 1 indicates 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA NS that there are all the required resources to perform the action and the probability of success is high 10 indicates that there are no available resources and or the probability of success for this action is low A more detailed explanation of Feasibility values is described in the section on Libraries After the feasibility for each action is entered normalized RPN improvement value dRPN F is calculated and used for actions evaluation The higher the value of dRPN F for the action the more preferable this action is Entered actions appear in the Failure Modes and Causes table in the Recommended actions column selected actions are marked with gt You may get a full list of all recommended actions for the whole FMEA diagram using Actions data table function from Item menu or list of all selected corrective actions using Corrective actions checklist report 21 9 Libraries Process Design FMEA has an extensive set of ibraries containing all necessary supporting information The set of libraries provides a convenient facility to quickly and efficiently build and update projects You can add or modify data in each library before and during project creation Libraries Tools view Failure Modes Failure Causes End Effects Control methods
187. Please select MS Word Template document for the report Report Safety Assessment Available templates File Hame Description Scope Safety FHA Ternplate doc Safety FHA Report Builtim Safety FHA Template Aus doc Safety FHA Report Russian Built in Safety SSA T emplate doc Safety System Safety Assessment Report Built in Safety SARS _ Template doc Safety Safety Assessment Results Summary Report Built in Safety SFO AResults_Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard 440 PesynetaTbl aHanm3a H pacuera Built in Safety AFO_FailuresList_ Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard 440 onhe nepeyeHb Braas oTKas Built in Safety FHA Template Ales doc dt wer ter ter wer bwer bwer werk werk werk wert Current user MARIE Page setup edt E 3 Press Page setup button to change enter information appearing in report header and footer like Author Document Number Department etc 4 Select the template from the list and press Select button to proceed to the report generation 9 RAM Commander will launch report generation During the generation do not work with MS Word or other MS Office applications Excel PowerPoint etc 6 The generated report will appear on the screen O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 135 Gl ALD_SAFETYReport doc Microsoft Word es Lol JE File Edit view Insert Format Tools AutoTag Table Window Help Type a question For help DS AS SAY BOT o
188. Profile dialog box opens Add Mission Profile Mission Profile Mare Cancel 4 In the Add Mission Profile dialog box enter a mission profile name 5 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Mission Profile dialog box You can now access the new mission profile by choosing it from the MP Name list box Then you may add multiple phases to this Mission Profile 10 3 1 2 To add a mission profile phase In the Mission Profile dialog box select the mission profile to which you want to add a phase from the MP Name list box 1 Choose Add Phase the Add Mission Phase dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Phase Description Mode Operation Mode Environment a Temperature CL Time hours Test Coverage alpha Ho 2 Enter values for the following fields CON Corro Coverage of failure detection testing performed at the end of this phase When 0 no test is performed when 1 full test coverage is Test Coverage assumed The which is passed from the current phase to the next phase is multiplied by 1 Alpha Note Alpha defined for the last phase in mission profile is ignored He Number of on off cycles per 1 000 hours non operating mode only 3 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Mission Profile dialog box with the new phase 10 3 1 3 To delete a mission profile phase Caution Use care when deleting mission profile phases There
189. R Rated Voltage drain source Rated Voltage drain source ON Ss A A Sea A 194 RAM Commander User Manual VDS Voltage stress ratio drain sourse VSRds VGA Applied voltage gate source VGR Rated Voltage gate source VGS Voltage stress ratio gate sourse VSRgs Non Operating Temperature delta Non Operating Environment Standard environment code like GB GF GM etc See Standard Environments Non Operating Manual FR Source description Z o Z S O Non Operating FR Predicted o o o O Non Operating FR user defined J S Non Operating FR Fied o Non Operating FRAllocated J S Number of cycles 1000 Hours SSS O Non Operating Field factor nonop SS Non Operating MTBF Manual J S Maintainability SO MCTPredicted OSO MOT Manual OSOS MCTAllocated OSO MLH Predicted OOOO O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 195 MLH Manual ooo Miscellaneous O O oo Item weight in kilograms Item volume 7 4 1 6 2 Item Code abbreviations Item type field values in the imported file should contain the following abbreviated values or Item type values as appears in RAM Commander Family Electronic 2014 ALD Software Ltd Relay can be tree hierarchy item Family Mechanical Abbreviation Item type AIRC Air Conditioner 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 197 yr BATT BRAC SRA ORAN 2014 ALD Software Ltd 198 RAM Commander User Manual mT NUTT Nut 2014 ALD Software Ltd
190. R is calculated as reliability of two parallel blocks AC and B so R 1 1 R 1 R p 13 3 2 4 K out of N With Repair The formulas in the following table are used to compute MTBF and reliability for various redundant item loads with item repair MTIR 4 MTBF Sorwowa fams S Repar fos of redundant MTBF exact value items Unrestricted 100 Restricted 100 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 359 KAiok 1 1 Ky sii 1 1 1 KAY EP N K D K5 Unrestricted a yi y s E I E N X 1 v LN i 0 El p 1 A E A i PTI V E 41 7 v ral Restricted j y TI K N K 1 v Seer 5 1 g g Tae Source Data Data Load of redundant Mission Reliability over time See approximate value items Unrestricted 100 Restricted 100 Unrestricted 0 eP ar E4 jl exp En l ax G41 Ey O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Restricted 0 El KOE Ky KAH ANP RV K DA Ky Unrestricted E HK v e Y TI E N E 1 r Restricted P exp 4 At poner aa State Availability ap ua value Source Data Data Repar oda 0 Steady State Availability approximate value Unrestricted 100 Restricted 100 Unrestricted 0 ART N K D o f Unrestricted y E aE 1 JI E N E ryu N I roi Restricted W K 1 EN TK N KE 1 r r
191. RAM Commander To import Aralia Simtree fault tree into the RAM Commander 1 Open the desired project and database 2 Open the list of fault trees create new or open any FT 3 Choose Import from Aralia Simtree option from the Tools menu 4 Select the DAG file exported from the Aralia 9 Fault tree will be imported and you will get message about import result 19 4 Analysis amp Calculation RAM Commander provides different ways of Fault Tree top gate probability calculation Minimal Cut Sets Default calculation mode Quick deals with large trees MCS Calculation Calculation but approximate Allows qualitative MCS analysis from the Importance Sensitivity analysis and more calculation menu see the related paragraph later Monte Carlo simulation Suitable for trees with dynamic gates Priority AND Calculation menu gate gt Explore gt Monte Carlo Simulation Simple calculation Arithmetical calculation of the tree according to th logical laws without considering identical events Bayes formula Exact calculation of the tree using Bayes formula Calculation menu suitable for small trees with low number of identicall gt Explore gt Exact events less than 15 calculation Bayes formula BDD Calculation Calculation with the help of Binary Decision DiagramjCalculation menu Generation Suitable for trees with only OR AND logicall gt Explore gt BDD gates without K N and NOT More precise than MCSj Calculation Calculation but
192. S Excel file access technology e ODBC reading Excel data by ODBC driver Does not require MS Excel installation on your computer but has different requirements to Excel file format and different limitations e g data type in each column should be consistent column names should start with Latin letter worksheet name should start with Latin letter and should contain only letters and digits without characters like amp or spaces etc It is the technology used by previous versions of RAM Commander e Excel Automation requires MS Excel installed on your computer may work slower than the ODBC mode but does not have limitations and requirements listed in the ODBC item above Recommended mode 3 Select script the Import Wizard allows you the choice of e Importing directly from an import file Use the Import Wizard screens to assist in the preparing the import file for the data transfer into the RAM Commander e Using an already existing script with field mapping information Using existing scripts saves time and effort when importing similar files Select an appropriate script from the list Import Wizard prepares your import file for the data transfer according to the specified script You may add a new script to the existing list of scripts at the last step of the Import Wizard procedure Adding a new script is recommended when you plan to import similar files in the future O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 186 RAM Com
193. SOB Ts B 2 E Bu i si 2 Ar Zipo 241 A Normal Times Mew Roman 12 140 1 1121 1141 116 1 115 1 20 lee Functional Hazard Assessment Communication System H Hld 1 2 At cm Ln 1 Col 1 REC TRE EsT O R English U S User may also add his own templates edit and delete existing user defined templates To create a new user defined template 1 Choose the appropriate item in Reports menu of required module 2 Available report templates list will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd MS Word Template Selection Please select MS Word Template document for the report Report Safety Assessment Available templates File Hame Description Scope Safety FHA Template doc Safety FHA Report Built in Safety FHA Template Aus doc Safety FHA Report Russian Built in Safety S54 Template doc Safety System Safety Assessment Report Built in Safety SARS _ Template doc Safety Safety Assessment Results Summary Report Built in Safety SFO Results_Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard 440 PesynetaTbl aHanm3a H pacuera Built in Safety AFO_FailuresList_ Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard 440 onhe nepeyeHb Braas oThas Built in Safety FHA Tenplate Ales doc dt wer ter ter wer bwer tert werk werk werk wert Current user E Select Cancel Page setup Add Edit Delete 3 Choose template which is close to your required report 4 Find the template fi
194. Suggest Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Working with Projects RAM Commander User Manual Working with Projects RAM Commander Project is a separate database for a single analysis case lt contains all information you enter or calculate for single analysis case for all the possible analysis types you use Reliability Maintainability RBD FTA etc Several facts about what you can to with the projects e Each local or network drive may contain a single database with list of projects e Projects located on a local network drive may be accessed by the PC user only Projects located on a shared network drive or on RAM Commander server computer may be shared and used simultaneously by multiple users e You may create open and delete projects e You may open windows from multiple projects simultaneously e You may copy projects from one local network drive to another You may Backup each project into a single compressed file which may be stored or sent by email Then the project may be restored from this compressed file Project permissions may be set by RAM Commander administrator or by project owner for the whole project or per modules like FTA FMECA etc Permissions may be set for each user or for groups of users See the next paragraphs for information about working with projects 6 1 Projects list List of projects displays all projects located on a specified local or network drive To open
195. Summary The FMECA module is an advanced software tool for failure mode effects and criticality analysis It includes many specialized features not found in any other failure mode and effects analysis software The FMECA module provides you with powerful and convenient analysis techniques to identify failure modes during development A thorough use of FMECA results in better products and more satisfied customers 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Fault Tree Analysis Fault Tree Analysis 459 19 Fault Tree Analysis RAM Commander s FTA module is the one of the unique features of the RAM Commander It implements and summarizes the first hand experience gained by the A L D FTA experts in hundreds of projects using RAM Commander and other FTA software ZA RAM Commander for Windows FTA Tutorial_RBD for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C FTA diagram tem Calculation Reports Library Tools View Window Help ae amp Ba D t X ee PAR RBD Sample Fault Tree for project Tutorial RBD TUTORIAL according to Reliability andara Block Diagram STANDARD Aa PS Power Suppllies 3 Receivers parallel 2 12e 013 3 75e 007 En Repairable Repairable FR 927 236 FR 2945 67 MTTR 0 380667 MTTR 0 127333 3 53e 007 9 46e 019 9 83e 007 9 83e 007 9 83e 007 2 66e 007 2 66e 007 2 66e 007 Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable Repairable FR 8350 FR 8350 FR 8350 FR 751 307 FR 751 307 FR 751 307 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0
196. T operation can be performed on gates and events e A diagram may contain unlimited number of free positioned remark boxes with descriptive text and pictures FTA module is integrated with other RAM Commander modules Reliability FMECA and Safety The picture below illustrates linkage between Product tree FMECA FTA and Safety FHA modules FTA uses Reliability and FMECA data for basic events probabilities calculation Safety module in turn uses FTA for failure probability calculation 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 463 a rus Ra Des ID Ham Oly Ope AMPE Sin Ea ds Condioning Spctem 1 341003 BLEED 515 TEM 1 15 75846 AG ICE PROTECTION SS TEM 1 PLE tei a tl COTA Srl 1 221430 Ml FLOW CONTROL VALVE C E A PACK INLET i ETE 1 4d J PACE INLET F SEMA A 1 24 Y PA INLET ASSURE SENSO 1 2440 NHE EE DH Deronption Beta Description Bats Sev 11 Enoneous PCY ponon 1 000 Bio stent 1 000 misen detected by LEE z 7 Ho impact on ECS operator lene 1 andl performace q 0 041 See component 1 2 Entrenos PCW parivor 1 000 Loss of ore Pack Leda of 1 000 1 FHEA ref indication debsched by LAS one Bleed TEL FOS ACY detectad lake of CETT a lage 1 Lowa of amocitied Pack Loss ol sepocuptesd Bleed THC nx 13 Piega dell of sulle 1000 Ho elect 1 000 ak F mi entering the Pack ECS cooling AT AH Cabin pects pester CPCS ATA 21 50 Lott of a supy hom one al Reiincied a
197. User Manual the event is already in the library New node automatically receives the Code equal to the predecessor s node code plus the number of successors For example if top event s code is AAA the predecessors receive codes AAA 1 AAA 2 etc This is only a default value and can be changed by user Name Enter the element name in this text box Enter a description for the element in this text box Negated Select this check box if you want the gate or event to be negated NOT an rre K Enter a value for K out of N Enter a value for K out ofN gate K argument K argument Enter a value for the N for K out of N gate calculated automatically by the number of gate s children Border style Select a border style of the gate event box Solid Dot etc from the drop A A list Background color color Select a Select a background color of the element from the color palette color of the element from the color palette Font Select a font for the element code and name Foreground color Select a foreground color of the element from the color palette Event type Select an Event reliability model from the list Probability Frequency Repaired Unrepaired etc See the detailed description of available models in the Basic Event Types paragraph Logical state Select a Logical state for House events from the drop down list Select a Failure rate from the drop down list failures per million or billion of h
198. Windows Vista Use User Manual in chm format run it from Start gt Programs gt ALD Engineering menu or download and install the following Microsoft update For Windows Vista http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 6EBCFAD9 D3F5 4365 8070 334CD175D4BB8displaylang en For Windows 7 http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 258aa5ec e3d9 4228 8844 008e02b32a2c48displaylang en 3 12 Summary In this chapter you found out how to get started install and run the program and libraries about security plugs upgrades and uninstalling the software O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter RAM Commander Concepts RAM Commander Concepts 103 4 RAM Commander Concepts This chapter deals with the Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety analysis process using RAM Commander the principles of RAM Commander module organization and RAM Commander data management 4 1 RAM Commander Process The Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety analysis process using RAM Commander software comprises of multiple stages some of them optional 1 Project Creation Product Tree Building Reliability and Maintainability Calculations Reliability Analysis a Pareto gt A w b Mission Profile C Temperature Curve 9 Reliability and Availability Modeling a RBD b Markov 6 Failure Analysis a FMECA with Testability Analysis b EMEA C FIA d ETA 7 Safety Analysis a FHA
199. Word from the FTA Diagram menu Then choose MS Word template you may customize or create yoru own template and press Select button MS Word document will be automatically generated by RAM Commander Export FTA all its sub trees to WMF Windows Meta File Use this option to export currently open Fault Tree alone or with all its sub trees to the Windows Metafile You may later insert this file files into another software MS Word Excel Visio etc The picture you get is not static but is a vector graphics set which may be freely resized without quality loss and may be edited in MS Word MS Excel Visio etc Use FTA menu Export to File option to use this feature 19 3 12 Using Common Cause Failures Fault Tree may contain multiple failures basic events which has common cause failure like parts manufactured by the same manufacturer or parts receiving power from the same power supply or installed at the same zone of aircraft etc To take that into consideration we should include the Common Cause Failure for these failures into calculation It is done using Common Cause Failure approach for each group of basic events with common cause the CCF Group should be created and corresponding basic events should be connected to that group Then Beta factor for the CCF Group should be set Beta factor is what fraction of basic event probability would represent a common cause threat Or in other words when you define Beta
200. a RAM Commander projects list 1 From the Drive menu choose Open E RAM Commander tor vWwindows Library Administration View Help AOpen Welcome screen Exit 2 The Open Drive dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 143 Open Orive 3 The Open Drive dialog box displays a list of the drives to which your computer has access both local and network drives 4 Select the drive where your projects are or will be located 5 Choose OK 6 RAM Commander displays a project list RAmMC_PAJ_OWERY 518 _SIRERSFT SAFETY_NEW TUTORIAL _MSG3 TUTORIAL NORA 2 TUTORIAL VALVE VALVES be List of Projects on Drive Description Safety Assessment Process Example gwelon to qwernu iolqweru lo wert lo werp Communication System Dispatch Reliability testing and demo Sample project with MMEL analysis Sample project with MSGS analysis example Ormer Owner group ALD SVETA ALD ALD MOTI ALD ALD SVETA ALD ALD ALD RAFI Locked By Date 2010 03 01 2010 06 01 2010 06 17 2010 03 01 2010 06 28 2010 05 24 2010 06 23 2010 06 01 2010 06 22 2010 06 14 2010 06 01 Project group Tutorial Tutorial TUTORIAL TUTORIAL TUTORIAL Tutorial TUTORIAL You may select single projects and use popup menu and upper main menu to perform operations on the selected project Each project record in t
201. a TA he aon a g 1 2 References 1 and 2 refer to RIAC System Reliability Toolkit page 394 To calculate the effective MTBF execute the RBD report generation and select the corresponding checkbox on the report settings screen Report for RBD STANDARD Reliability Availability Cancel MTBCF Epsilon 10 001 Step 100 13 3 3 MTBCF and R t Mean time between critical failures MTBCF is the mean time until the function defined by the RBD diagram fails RAM Commander uses numeric integration of the reliability function R t Max Time MTBCF RG dt o J where Max Time is an upper limit of integration After computation RAM Commander displays a graph of the function R t which describes the system s reliability over time 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 363 10 MIECF 134032 06 01 1 lan list 0003 i 9 1215182124273033 36304245 4851 54 57 60 With the help of changing the Max Time you reach the result when you reach a certain Max time when the function almost reaches 0 and MTBCF stops changing This means that you can ignore the tail of the graph The general rule is to start with the Max time which is about 10 times of the expected MTBF and the Step 100 times less than the Max time You just match the Max time and Step When after some tries you get necessary Max Time you may reduce the Step to get more accuracy If you choose Epsilon option
202. ability modeling techniques e Maintenance Corrective Time Mct e Mean time to repair MTTR O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 299 e Ambiguity factor e Maximum Corrective Maintenance Time e Mean Maintenance Labor Hours per Maintenance Action MLH MA e Maintainability Allocation 11 2 1 Maintenance Corrective Time The formula for computing Mct is Meti TPREPj TISOj TDISj TR Rj TREASj TCALj IVER ISI where Mctj average maintenance corrective or repair time for the jth replaceable item TISOj average fault isolation time for the jth replaceable item TDISj average disassembly time for the jth replaceable item TR Rj average time to remove replace interchange the jth replaceable item 11 2 2 Mean Time to Repair The formula for computing MTTR is N gt As Tere Tso MDI Twe Temas Toan Tori Terl _ j l LAPT R if gt 4 2014 ALD Software Ltd number of replaceable items on the next lower level of the product tree failure rate of the j replaceable item Ambiguity factor as explained in Ambiguity Factor paragraph 11 2 3 Ambiguity Factor The ambiguity factor is the average number of iterations required to correct a fault and is computed as E T T 199 Cel 7 probability of fault isolation to N replaceable items Xq lt X lt X lt X4 lt 100 Number of items in the ith ambiguity group Xp No 0 Ambiguity factor as
203. ability prediction for equipment Airplane in storage Failure rate in non operating mode such as communications board waiting non operating storage for signal MaintainabilitMaintainability prediction Airplane and communications MTTR and Mct O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree NON Analysis Description Examples Result yo LT board under maintenance ee Derating Analysis Components electrical stress Component stress conditions values What happens when a failure Criticality occurs in one of the system Coverage and items and how this failure is Fault Isolation detected Product tree is opened in the Operating Reliability analysis type by default Changing the analysis type changes product tree presentation relevant fields are shown like FR or MTTR and Mct etc The list of available reports is also affected by the selected analysis type To select the current analysis method 1 Open a Product tree view by selecting the project from the project list and pressing F2 or right click and Open 2 Select the Current analysis method from the Product tree view button bar or From the Project menu choose Configuration The Project Configuration dialog box opens Project Configuration Default 5 Current Analysis Brault oCreen Monoperating i HM aintamability Maintainabilty Repai Replace Levels Derating MIL HOBE 4 72 Lognormal distribution Cs Derating E FMEA Phase
204. ackup Restore Data Component Library Table Library Standard Tasks Library C Standard Times Library ae Cross Reference Defaults for Calculation Derating Definitions C Backup C Restore with overwrite Restore with merge 4 In the Backup Restore Data dialog box do one of the following e To install the library and erase your existing library choose the Restore with overwrite option button e To append the new library to your existing library choose the Restore with merge option button 9 In the list box with library names select the Component library and Cross Reference and choose OK 6 In the Restore Library dialog box browse to the file located on RAM Commander installation CD RAMC LIBRARY GLOBAL RMW or the same file downloaded from our web site using the link below and authorization code provided by ALD software vendor http www aldsoftware com download downform aspx id 57 Download and store this file on your local hard drive first 7 Choose OK RAM Commander updates your current libraries with the latest version using the mode selected in step 3 above Administration RAM Commander Administration includes users management project management permissions management global libraries management and global RAM Commander settings management RAM Commander provides a rich system wide environment that ensures uniformity and simplicity All users have access to uniform data project trees a
205. ad Next Worst after Failure Mode a E Failure in next Indication classification pe failure W worst per FH signal low in absence of air Supply to air conditioning system wing anti lcing system Unannunciated total absence of air supply to air conditioning ves 1 843E EXT 44 1 5 316E system wing 012 008 anti icing system Annunciated loss Majar of wing anti ice on one side See report columns explanation in the MMEL Module Reports chapter 2 Manually select the Next Second Worst Failure if required When performing quantitative analysis RAM Commander automatically selects Next Second Worst Failure using Fussell Vesely importance factor In order to overwrite automatic selection do the following 1 Select appropriate cell in the Failure Details Table columns Next Worst Failure or Second Worst Failure 2 Press Set Worst Failure button Set Worst Failure screen will be opened 2014 ALD Software Ltd O 4 2 Loss of both pack combined with unannunciated loss of RAW ao 41 Unannunciated loss of left and right packs Oo 411 A Loss of right pack combined with unannunciated loss of left pack o 31111 L Unannunciated loss of air flow from left pack g 21_411112_L Unannunciated loss of less bleed O 21411112_L Unannunciated loss of less bleed O EXT_BLEEDL L Loss of left bleed Oo 411111152 L Loss of low pressure detection OR O PIPS2 L PACK
206. ading to the top TUTORIAL Appi mn ha e rai og Tutonal Order of MCS Min 4 Evert 2 PS Artering falre Arterina fale Handle Handle Arterina failure Arterina falure Ever Dala Element pps E Evert pe Retesh Cama i Event 3 Receiver faiie Hecera fale PS Keyboard Mother Board Mamay Fall Mother Board CPU Fail HardDinve Hardlinve Mas 5 Even Transmiter Tianemiler Races fal Receiver fai Mother Boa Mother Ega a Pint MES by i Row Column MICS will be shown parted ri report Close Note that propagation will remove all custom background colors of fault tree events and gates if such colors were specified by users 2014 ALD Software Ltd 494 RAM Commander User Manual 19 4 6 Repeated Events Indication The Repeated events indication analysis allows to find and visually mark all the repeated identical events and transfer gates in your currently selected master fault tree It is important information which helps to track common causes and understand calculation results of logical gates To perform the analysis open Analysis menu expand the Repeated items choose Indicate Analysis will be executed and the fault tree display will be refreshed as shown below Red Rep remark under a gate indicates that inputs A A af this gate are not independent and that there are Rep PL 2588 00 common repeated events In at least two different AND inputs
207. age Probability 392 396 System Safety Assessment 538 Non Shortage Probability 391 NPRD 2011 224 a T NPRD 95 222 224 NSP 391 Temperature curve 286 O U Occurrence 516 Unavailability 459 487 zs P Uncertainty 459 Undeveloped event 460 Pareto 286 287 Process and Design FMEA 508 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd O 2014 ALD Software Ltd
208. ager 1 Start the User Manager utility from the Start gt Programs gt ALD Engineering gt Tools menu group Press the New manager button Enter current System Manager password User data screen will appear Provide the new manager name password and group and press Ok Oo oO FF OO N Close the User Manager utility 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 35 The same procedure may be used to change the existing user manager password See also User authentication using AD LDAP topic later in this chapter Each user may change his own password To change your own password 1 Close all open windows in RAM Commander 2 From Menu choose Administration gt User Administrator gt Change User Password ze RAM Commander for Windows View Help a ce E User Administrator Users Data Files Location User Groups 3 Password changing dialog appears Set Password New Password Confirm Password Cancel 4 Type the new password twice 9 Press OK Your password will be changed 3 10 2 Projects Management Projects may be deleted backed up restored from the backup renamed copied from one drive to another etc Administrator may also set up project permissions separately for each project See Working with Projects chapter for more information about RAM Commander projects management O 2014 ALD Software Ltd se RAM Commander User Manual 3 10 3 3 10 4 Libraries and Def
209. aihtenance Corre clive TIMO aaa 299 Mean TANG TO IRE Dala A A AA A AA IA 299 AMDIQUIEVFACIOS aca er eaceconsteutwaenas satadt cadena cnreZocenenterewat vasuevesveusente 300 Maximum Corrective Maintenance Time onncccccccnnnncnnccococononanononononannnornnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnnnnnnrrrrrrnaannnnnns 301 Mean Maintenance Man hours per Maintenance Action oooncccccnncncccccncnconnnnnnronnnnnnronnnnnnrornananrernananens 301 Mali tainablility AIOCAUON ri A 302 2 PRELMMINALY SIC DS ves tata vend sitet usimeset seas a a aaa aA 303 Customize Organizational Levels cccccccsseesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeessaeeessoeaassneeesseeaanseeeessooes 303 Set Met max Calculation Method isis cciccddeinsicccecccss sicctcee eendecvencees evssnanteccuuaagtaed lane ceeacetiiesanstasteceteseeveatendes 304 4 Performing Maintainability Analysis ococococococcncncocococcnanacannncoranannnnnarannnrnrararnrnnanana 307 To enter NICE d la Ena 308 MIL HDBK 472 Procedure 5A ediles 309 To define MIL 472 Procedure 5A maintainability task iInformati0N ccoooonnnccnncccononnconnnonononnconnnononananos 310 MIL 472 Procedure 5 Task Definition oooocccoccccconocncononocononcnnnononononcnnnononononnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnonananannns 313 To define a tasks using user defined tiMES cccooconccnncccccconccnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnonannnnnnnononananannnos 313 To retrieve a standard time from the standard times libra
210. ailability Curve Graph or table for Unreliability F t Frequency W t Intensity L t Number of Failures E 0 t Available from the Reports menu FTA Summary Report List of all Fault Trees in the project with their calculation parameters and results FTA Calculation Results for Current fault tree top gate probability calculated for all mission All Phases phases phases are taken from Safety FMECA phases library each phase has its own duration and Q t of the tree is calculated for that specified duration There is also a number of additional advanced reports See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 19 6 Summary Fault Tree Analysis is acknowledged as a key tool for increasing safety It is unique and indispensable in analyzing risks and determining various combinations of hardware software and human error failures that result in a specified risk or system failure Fault tree analysis is useful both in designing new products servces and in dealing with identified problems in existing products services In the quality planning process the analysis can be used to optimize process features and goals and to design for critical factors and human error As part of process improvement it can be used to help identify root causes of trouble and to design remedies and countermeasures The Fault Tree Analysis module is an advanced software tool with very convenient user
211. ailure on a system nd Effect etection The means or methods by which a failure can be discovered by an operator unde ompensating Configurating FMECA module FMECA module should be properly configured before you may start entering failure modes and their consequences Several configuration types may be performed 1 FMEA or FMECA analysis selection 2 FMECA Library Definition of Phases Severities End Effects and more 3 FMECA grid customizable fields 4 Phase selection FMEA or FMECA RAM Commander FMEA FMECA has two modes e FMEA performs failure mode and effects analysis without criticality numbers FMEA mode is useful and time saving at the initial stages of the failure mode analysis when the user does not have enough information or needs a criticality numbers calculation e FMECA failure mode and effects criticality analysis In addition to processing all FMEA data FMECA mode displays failure mode ratio commonly known as alpha and failure effect probability beta FMECA mode utilizes Failure Rates calculated entered in the Operating reliability prediction stage alpha beta and phase duration time for criticality numbers calculation To select the desired mode 1 From the Project menu choose Configuration 2 Check the FMEA radio button 3 Check or uncheck the Criticality Analysis check box 2014 ALD Software Ltd FMECA 427 Project Configuration 3 a x i Default Curent Analysis e
212. aintainability Prediction MTTR and Mct Derating analysis Component stress values O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Current Description Analysis FMECA Failure modes and effects criticality FMECA report analysis Testability analysis In addition to its core product analysis modes RAM Commander has numerous modules performing many extremely important and valuable Reliability and Safety tasks see Modules Overview paragraph There are several ways to access RAM Commander modules e The Modules buttons on the Product tree view to the left from the tree rf min 7 LO _ gt Markoy Design FMEA Process FMEA FTA e The Modules menu z Project Tree Calculation Reports Library Tools View Wi Be AP gp mr eZ Current Analysis Ref Des RED TUTORIAL Markow Chains Communic System configuration Main Sy FTA ETA bui Operating DI i gt T gt UID Spare Parts T gt U12 Derating 2 d D U13 Reliability growth Duane Mon Operating a ROM M5G 3 AMO Dispatch Reliability e CC Design FMEA Maintainabiility SECC Process FMEA L go 13 CK l F LO 4 14 HLMP 2450 Y L5 b 15 HLMP 2400 Derating OM 1 2 16 DP e Project Overview Screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 125 Project Overview Project Information Reliability Analysis Reliability Block Diagrams Open Mame TUTORIAL Available 6 diagrams Revision 1 pn z A
213. al lower limit estimation according to Confidence level selected on Monte Carlo configuration screen MTBCF mean time between critical failures is also calculated You may view print save customize and export the generated report and graph see Fundamentals Reports and Graphs 13 4 RBD Reports To review the results of RBD calculations choose Report from the Calculation menu Report for RBD SWITCHIN Report j 7 Availability a Equivalent Lamdba Epsilon In the Report for RBD dialog box select the items you want to include and choose Report You can select from the following options eliability To include reliability calculations Reliabili Availability To include availability calculations Equivalent To include equivalent lambda effective MTBF calculation Equivalent Lambda MTBF Lambda To include the MTBCF calculation If you select this option you must include a value for Max Time or Epsilon and the step value see previous section Choose Max Time or Epsilon and enter a number Select a step value See Chapter 3 regarding Reliability function and MTBCF computations MTBCF calculation and Monte Carlo simulation have their own reports Use the report management techniques described in Chapter Fundamentals paragraph Reports to vew and print the report 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 369 13 5 Summary In this section you learned ab
214. al Part Data screen click either Operating or Non Operating the field FR table appears 6 Select FR or MTBF in the second list box under Part number 7 Enter FR or MTBF according to the temperatures in the table for all temperature values that you have reliability data The failure rates must be expressed in terms of 10 6 or FIT depending on what is displayed in the list box under Part number As you make new entries in the failure table RAM Commander redraws the failure rate graph 8 If you want to limit the extrapolation enter a value larger than your minimum temperature in the Tmin field and a value smaller than your maximum temperature in the Tmax field 9 Click to select the Use for conversion check box to define one of the environments as default This table is now set as the default for a specified environment and for the specified Part number If you try to perform calculation for this Part number and for other environments which do not have FR Table data the program will use the default environment for this Part number and convert it automatically to the required environment using the Toolkit conversion coefficients 10 Click Close You have built a table of field failure rate data that is now ready to be used in reliability calculations for the other product tree parts Choose GPRD as a reliability prediction method for parts with GPRD FR table and RAM Commander will calculate the Failure Rate Pack to Box You can use th
215. analysis 24 1 Systems and Power Plant Analysis The MSG 3 module is used by aircraft manufacturers or aircraft operators airlines to perform aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Development analysis according to Air Transport Association ATA MSG 3 document The MSG 3 Systems and Power Plant Analysis module is integrated with RAM Commander Basic Reliability and FMECA modules It divides the procedure into 7 steps e System Definition e Maintenance Significant Items MSI Selection e FMECA e Failure Effect Categorization e Task Selection and Development e Task Interval Definition Optimization e MSG 3 Report Generation These steps are explained later in this document a pe o m 1 System 2 MSI Selection 3 FMECA 4 Failure Effect 5 Task Selection 6 Task Interval 7 MSG 3 Reports Definstion Categorization It brings user through the decision making process using interactive decision diagrams taken from the standard Prerequisites To successfully perform MSG 3 analysis in RAM Commander you must be familiar with Basic Reliability Maintainability and FMECA including Functional Blocks issue modules of RAM 2014 ALD Software Ltd 572 RAM Commander User Manual 24 1 1 24 1 2 24 1 2 1 Commander Initiating MSG 3 Module 1 Run RAM Commander Open project 2 3 Click on MSG 3 section in the button bar on the left side of the product tree window 4 MSG 3 seven steps menu buttons wi
216. and choose Create or Insert from the popup menu or press F7 for Create operation only 4 Item data dialog will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 3 3 1 Item Data General Logistics Operating Nonoperating Maintainability FMECA Family Ref Des ltem type Part number Environment Profile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Eftectwelnhented from parent item Environment a GF Temperature Delta O E 25 FR PredictionCalculation Settings Method selection default Method Failure distribution Exponential Failure Rate Reliability Data FRS ace Predicted e Field factor ltem FA Duty cycle E 0 FR predicted 0 Mult Factor FA user defined 0 4dd factor FR field a Quantity FR allocated 0 Renae i i k b Complesity for FR allocation _ spec Source of user detined FR 0 tae To add an assembly select in the Family and Item type list boxes To enter a component make the appropriate selections in the Family and Item type list boxes Define Reference Designator of the item Ref Des Then you may define other item information and perform reliability maintainability prediction and more Item data dialog contains multiple pages The page which is related to the currently selected analysis type Operating FMECA etc is active by default Switch between pages to enter the available informati
217. and delete components in the project library All users can view records in the global component library and copy them into a project Only the system administrator can update global component libraries The functioning of the Global and project component libraries are similar for the user The library usage directions provided below apply equally to both libraries 9 2 1 To view the project component library 1 Activate a Product tree view see Activating the Product Tree View paragraph 2 From the Library menu choose the Component Library 3 In the Library manager window select a Family Code and an Item type from the drop down lists Global Library Generic Mame d d p h At 74FCTS440N Ap 74FCTS445N A F4FCTS73 E tp F4FCTS73ATO 4 RAM Commander displays the library records matching your selection 9 2 2 To view the global component library To view the global component library from within a project 1 Activate a Product tree view see Activating the Product Tree View paragraph 2 From the Library menu choose the Component Library 3 RAM Commander displays the current project library records from your selection 4 From the View menu select Global library The Global library component list window opens 9 In the Global library component list window select a Family Code and an Item type from the drop down lists To view the global component library without opening any proje
218. ander uses the Part number envronment and temperature values in the Item Data dialog box to extract an item s failure rates from an GPRD FR table and then performs interpolation extrapolation conversion between environments if required to calculate the actual failure rate To apply a failure rate table to a tree item 1 Open the item s Item Data dialog box in the Operating tab if the table was created in Operating mode or the Item Data dialog box with the Non operating tab if the table was created in Non Operating mode In the Part number field enter the Part Number of the part you have in the GPRD Library 3 In the Method of FR predicted calculation list select user defined In the Methods list select GPRD FR Predicton Calculation Settings NO Method selector user defined Method GPRD Failure distributiors Exponential Failure Rate Reliability Data as Pear O Field factor 1 Item FA 1 11 4844 Duty cycle D Click the GPRD method button 9 RAM Commander displays the GPRD FR Table dialog box You can add or modify FR data or you can use the data already existing You can toggle the data between MTBF and FR and view the resulting graph 6 Click Close to close the GPRD FR table dialog box RAM Commander should display the calculated FR for your part ambient temperature and environment 7 Click Ok RAM Commander displays the Product tree view See also Load from Library para
219. ange B Hof Pins ears in production Fackage ei Pl a a gt a Delta Tyr Alo E a S 10 0 j Lead Configuration Distance Maree T junction You do not have to provide this information manually for each component Use the component libraries instead You may search and load component data from the library and add update component libraries during the product tree building and reliability prediction Most reliability prediction specifications have different formats for classifying data on various components For instance the MIL HDBK 217F specification contains the formulas and factors for some integrated circuit components under the microcircuits VHSIC CMOS classification The Telecordia formerly Bellcore specification has the same for the same component type listed under the IC category and CMOS technology Using RAM Commander s component library data may be accessed that is required for reliability prediction under all major specifications This information is stored in a database keyed by an internal generic name family and Item type To retrieve item data from library specify at least the following information for the item e Family e ltem type O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 9 2 6 1 Reliability Libraries and Defaults 257 e Reliability prediction method e Generic Name RAM Commander then searches the component library for the specific generic name and retrieve
220. aph 7 4 Switch to the next field and a write down the logical expression explaining failure condition cause b Let RAM Commander build the logical expression explaining failure condition cause automatically i Press button ii FTA earlier selected as Safety Assessment Method for this failure condition will be displayed in a plane format 2014 ALD Software Ltd Ep Control failure Ee System Block Failure O Keyboard Total keyboard fail i PS Power Supply Se Communication failure H Receiver Transmitter a O PS Power Supply i E Antenna failure iii Expand the tree branches to the desired level of logical expression detalization iv Press Ok button Logical expression will be build according to the FTA state on the previous screen 2 Functional Tree for Project TUTORIAL on Drive D a TUTORIAL Si Communication H E Transmit A AN Homep oOTrkasa HalimHeHo0BaHHe PUARUMOHaneHoro OTKAZA BosmomHble NpHAYdHHel OTK asa Stan non ta 1 No power Control Failure HT Receiver Transmitter 1 HAH Power Supply HAI 2 Select relevant phases in the next field a Press the button phases list will appear b Select relevant phases from the list multiple phases can be selected c If required Phase is not found in the list add it to the library see Working with Safety FMECA Library later in this document d Press Ok 3 Select failure c
221. aragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports Summary Event Tree Analysis is acknowledged to be one of the key tools for increasing safety lt is ultimate and indispensable to analyze risks determine various combinations of hardware software and human error failures that could result in a specified risk or system failure Event tree analysis is useful both in designing new products servces or in dealing with identified problems in existing products services In the quality planning process the analysis can be used to optimize process features and goals and to design for critical factors and human error As part of process improvement it can be used to help identify root causes of trouble and to design remedies and countermeasures The Event Tree Analysis module is an advanced software tool with very convenient user interface and a lot of useful features not found in many other ETA programs O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Process Design FMEA RAM Commander User Manual Process Design FMEA RAM Commander s Process and Design FMEA module is the latest addition to the unique scope of the RAM Commander features lt implements and summarizes the first hand experience gained by the A L D FMEA experts in hundreds of projects where they used the old version of the A L D FMEA software a RAM Commander for Windows Design FMEA for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Diagram tem Reports L
222. are defined as numeric containing only digits by Excel and therefore are imported into RAM Commander in numeric format A If you enter data with digits only Excel automatically defines the data as Numeric If you wish to use the data as string data later you should define the column as Text before data input However there is a way to solve this problem In the example below the PartName column is defined as Numeric in Excel PartHame RefDes Oty 321432188 F1 1 2 3 321407320 R2 4 324321432 R3 2 5 134543154 Ch b 75465 5656 EL Po lofdoddfdo G o 254636363 Ub 9 245435706 U17 10 321431114 Ctrl 101 h To convert the column data to character format do the following 1 Create an empty column near the source column and enter the following formula REPLACE CONCATENATE B B 1 1 where B B is index of the column you wish to convert 2 Provide the column name in the first row Do the same for all columns which require data type conversion 4 Save the worksheet open RAM Commander and perform the import using newly created converted columns instead of the original oo 2014 ALD Software Ltd 190 RAM Commander User Manual 7 4 1 6 Step 3 4 Mapping The next step 4 for text files and 3 for Access Excel files is the same for different file types During this step you need to map the columns in your file to corresponding columns in RAM Commander database Original column head
223. art Number for some records it may contain Military Number etc Each one of these identification types has its own formula for search in libraries cross references etc so RAM Commander will try to use each value first as GN then as CN then as MN and then as PN 7 4 1 6 8 Level of replace repair Level of replace repair field values in the imported file should contain the following abbreviated values E CN CO orenera EC 2014 ALD Software Ltd 20 RAM Commander User Manual 7 4 1 6 9 Failure Rate source sw itch Failure Rate source switch field values in the imported file should contain the following abbreviated values 7 4 1 6 10 MCT MLH source sw itch MCT MLH source switch field values in the imported file should contain the following abbreviated values a Sosn 7 4 1 7 Step 4 5 Finish Step 5 of the import procedure for Access Excel files it is step 4 is the final stage of the import Import wizard Step 4 of 4 The wizard 12 gomg to import your data ou can save the script you created for future import of similar files Script name Load from Library E Import Status lt Back Finish Cancel Hep Here you can save a new script for future use with similar files Saving your import definitions script can save you time and effort when you import files similar in structure to the one you ve just created a script for You may then choose o
224. art numbers can be based on a variety of numbering schemes including military catalog number and internal part numbers RAM Commander provides a flexible cross reference between generic names and other part numbers using the Cross Reference Library lt simplifies the component search and retrieval from the Component Library 3 Part Number automatic recognition Leading manufacturers use special algorithms naming their parts RAM Commander implements these algorithms for the opposite direction in order to get reliability data from Part number RAM Commander supports algorithms for decoding Part Numbers of Resistors and Capacitors of the following manufacturers AVX ATC Bourns Cal chip DALE Hitano Garrett IRC Johanson Kemet KOA Kyocera Mallory Meritek Murata MSI NIC Nichicon Novacap Samsung Siemens Syfer OhmCraft Paccom Philips Phycomp Ralec ROEDERST TDK TaiyoYuden Vishay Roedenstein Vitramon Yageo This works like the component library the only difference is that component data are not stored in the actual library but are defined by Part number decomposition and analysis according to a manufacturer s algorithm This is much more powerful than the component library because it covers a huge amount of parts even parts which do not exist at the current moment as soon as the manufacturer uses the same naming algorithms 4 GPRD Library The GPRD General Part Reliability Data Library covers e General Part
225. asic events and calculate the result in reasonable time The calculation procedure using this formula consists of several steps 1 Minimal Cut Sets Generation 2 Common basic events factor calculation Common basic events are basic events which appear in all Minimal Cut Sets We need to calculate the common basic events factor using the following formula f common gt gt O e X where e x is common basic event appearing in all MCS and Q e x is its probability 3 Top event probability calculation O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual f _easaryproschan f common 1 1 O MOS 1 where MCS y is Minimal Cut Set number y and Q MCS y is its probability 19 4 2 3 Frequency W t Calculation RAM Commander supports Frequency unconditional failure intensity at time t W t calculation The frequency w t for each particular basic event is calculated based on formulas specified in events list table in paragraph Basic Event Types earlier in this chapter To calculate the W t for top gate we need to generate Minimal Cut Sets list first Then the following formulas are implemented Unconditional failure intensity of the specific MCS with a T a l W_MCS lt gt fwli_ 710 Flv K i oa where MCS 1 MCST j MCS m minimal cut set n j amount of Basic Events of the MCS number j f i_j t unavailability Q t of the BE with number i_j at the time t wli_j t frequency
226. assigns it the next available number in the column To create multiple copies of an item N copy 1 Click on an item in the massive entry list 2 From the Item menu choose N Copy the N Copy dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd N Copy Number of Copies 9 L Increment Ref Des 3 In the Number of Copies field enter the required number of copies 4 To give each new item a unique reference designator select the Increment Ref Des check box works when the last character is a numeric for example if you create 3 copies of component R1 you will get R2 R3 and R4 9 Choose OK RAM Commander updates the massive entry list and Product tree view with the new items Quick Create Should you have a Generic Name Part Number Military Number or Catalog Number but you don t know the component Item type choose Quick Create from the Item menu to find the item in the component library The Quick Create dialog box opens Ref Des PH MM CH GH Manufacturer Component Library 0 GPAD SYHCOsh gt 4 63000 anl SUHC36 S 80386 5SHHCOO 5HF280 Provide the component identifier you know and RAM Commander will try to find its data in the component library The Massive entry list will automatically switch to that group of items 7 3 5 4 3 Additional operations with the list To add edit or delete items in a Massive Entry list Right click and select the appropriate option from the pop u
227. ate for all components and then calculate the sum of component failure rates to calculate the FR of assemblies subsystems systems and of the whole product You can perform full or quick calculations You can also assign a required FR to an assembly and have RAM Commander allocate the required FR to each of its children After calculating RAM Commander displays the item reliability in the Opr FR column when working under Operating analysis and other results for other analyses The symbols in the status field mean that the item has been successfully checked and calculated If there was an error during the computation due to missing data or other reasons the symbol appears in the status field Quick Mode When calculating in quick mode RAM Commander computes R amp M using the entire product tree and recalculates items changed since the previous calculation as well as items for which some conditions have changed Note Changes in defaults do not immediately affect the product tree reliability You must Recalculate all the entire tree to use the new defaults To calculate reliability in Quick mode 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 If you need to change the Current Analysis do the following Click a corresponding icon on the Product tree view button bar OR From the Project menu choose Configuration 3 Choose the current analysis in the Project Configuration dialog box 4 Choose OK 5 From the Calculation menu
228. ation menu List of propagated events will appear FIA True Flase Propagation on TaI Code Logical State Mame Description Add Delete Tue Fale Noma Propagation Clear Close Cancel Choose any number of events set TRUE or FALSE logical state for each of them and press Propagate button to run the analysis and see updated fault tree diagram In addition to this TRUE FALSE Propagation feature RAM Commander may visually display the paths of all events in the selected cutset in the list of Minimal Cut Sets MCS fromthe event level upwards to the top gate level of the fault tree When working with the list of MCS you may select any cut set and click the MCS Propagation button 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 493 FTA Minimal Cut Sets Resull har top event Minimal Cut Sets AH 5 r 39660A 6 bE3E3e 021 9 1791 3ee2 34310023 Tekee 5 49e 023 1021002 a E Seltingz Order bi 2 Probability 0 5 5539 42020 ES 38 4 01 D Cut Set Order 100 gate FTA Manne Humber of MCS 8 Evert 1 3 Antenna lalure 3l mienna falure 4 Shenae Maremke faline 4 Ahemale transmitter fale 4 rtenna alwe 4 Antenna faire 5 Alemane transmitter falre 5 Alema trarambtes falre 20 More By oda Ci By probably MICS vall be shown on the screen MCS Propagation Fiker Then close the list of MCS and note the red paths of all MCS events le
229. ation of Taken Actions Detection resulting Improved Detection value after the implementation of Taken Actions RPN resulting Improved RPN value after the implementation of Taken Actions FMEA automatically calculates resulting risk priority numbers 21 5 1 To create a new Failure Mode There are three ways to create a new Failure Mode FM for the selected item 1 From the Item menu choose Failure Modes and select Add Failure Mode The Insert Update Potential Failure Mode dialog box opens Of O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 518 RAM Commander User Manual 2 Right click on the table and select Add FM from the pop up menu The Insert Update Potential Failure Mode dialog box opens Or 3 Insert data directly into the table double click on the left most cell in the blank line after the last table entry and enter Failure Mode data The number of Failure Modes for every diagram element is unlimited 21 5 2 Tocreate a new Failure Cause There are three ways to create a new Failure Cause for the selected Failure Mode 1 From the Item menu choose Failure Modes and select the Add FM cause menu item or 2 Right click on the table at required Failure Mode row and choose Add Cause from the pop up menu The Insert Update Potential Cause of Failure dialog box opens Iinsertilipdate Potential Cause of Failure Mame Prepare laminate Potential Failure Mode Board not usable End Effect of Failure
230. aults Management System Manager has access to RAM Commander Global Libraries and may perform the following functions Updating the Global Component Library Updating the Global Cross Reference Library Updating the Global Calculation Defaults Data Back up libraries and defaults Restore libraries and defaults from the backup See Libraries and Defaults chapter for more information Settings Management RAM Commander has several configuration settings which may be changed after the installation e Global libraries location and Projects database folder location e Additional application settings Global libraries location and Projects database folder location Several users may use the same shared component library cross reference and GPRD library These libraries should be placed on a shared network drive In case of Client Server installation it is performed by installation procedure in case of multiple standalone installation it should be done manually In any case RAM Commander administrator may change the location of library files RAM Commander projects may be located on any available local or network drive By default projects are located in folder RAMC321PRJ on each drive However this location may be changed 1 Open RAM Commander close all windows and list of projects to leave only the main application frame a RAM Commander for Windows Drive Library View Help 2 Choose Data Files Location from the Administration
231. based on item LCN Logistics Control Number which reflects each item s position in the product hierarchy See for example the LCN field in the import file below and the corresponding tree structure Input Output O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 192 RAM Commander User Manual LCN Ref a 0 El System 2 AA aia a E Assembly 1 3 AAAA Assembly 1 i E Part 1 1 4 AAAAAA Part 1 1 El Part 1 2 5 AAAAAB Part 1 2 pepe 6 AAAB Assembly 2 1 p art 2 1 7 AAABAA Part 2 1 i ns B AAABAB Part 2 2 El Part 2 2 e Parent Ref Des the hierarchy is based on information about Reference Designator of each item and each item s parent item Reference Designator See for example the Ref Des and Parent Ref Des fields in the import file below and the corresponding tree structure Input Output _ A B C El System 1 RefDes Uty ParentRefDes Assembly 1 2 System 1 EF 1 f 3 Assembly 1 1 System art 1 4 Part 1 1 1 Assembly 1 El Part 1 2 5 Part 1 2 1 Assembly 1 El Assembly 2 6 Assembly 2 1 System El Part a7 f Part 2 1 1 Assembly 2 El Part 39 8 Part 2 2 1 Assembly 2 Please note that if you select some hierarchy mode you need to have the corresponding column in your input data file Perform the mapping for all desired import file fields and press Next to go to the next step 7 4 1 6 1 Database Fields Index This paragraph provide an index to all product tree database fields which may be imported using import wizard and also e
232. ber c Item operating Failure Rate FHA Functional Hazard Analysis Safety module FMECA Failure Mode End Effect Criticality Analysis FTA Fault Tree Analysis Failure modes defined in the FMECA must be used as Basic Events in FTA Oo oO FF W N Each Basic Event must be connected to a corresponding Failure Mode through Product Tree ID and Failure Mode Number 7 Each Fault Tree in FTA must be connected to a corresponding Failure Condition in FHA This connection is established done at the Safety Assessment Definition screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd MMEL 997 The picture below illustrates linkage between Product tree FMECA FTA and Safety FHA modules which is used by MMEL module de Pre TUTOR ami Corent Areri Feel Ds D Hama Oy Op ATE See Ba ds Condon System i 1 ru 1013 3 BLEED SYSTEM 1s l 15 7546 OR WG CE FADTECTION STE 2 1 fun Sas Sci EMMROAMENTAL COMTADLSr5T a 1 3 E FLO CONTROL VALVE 1 PALA INLET FLOR SOR L i olle FALE IMLE 1 E SEHA A 3 1 244050 h EN PACF INLET i SSURE SENSO 1 24430 rr MHE EE Bal o pl OM Deponption Bets Description fete Sev a 1 Enoneour FCW ponton 1 000 Mo elect 1 000 micio detected Ey ASC 5 Ho impad on ECS operation hen ating dl perforin yg 1 3 Enri POY pasion 1000 Loss al one Pack Lega of TAWN 1 q nicon detached by LSC one Bisai TEL E FLV desectad aii al CENT MECA Loia of arociolad Pack Loss i ell perae Bleed TEL
233. ber you want to find or part of it and press the Search button 3 The list of suitable search results will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Part Type search Part Type name Motor Dinamotor Gearcase Motor Motor Motor nd Brake Assembly Motor 4esembly Motor Generator Motor Starter Motor Generator Motor T achometer Generator Motor Transmission Rocket Motor Cancel 4 Select the part from the search results and press OK The next steps are very similar to NPRD 95 8 2 1 2 3 IEC FIDES 217Plus Some new methods like IEC 62380 HDBK 217Plus FIDES and UTE C 80 810 use complex mission profiles instead of standard environments used by MIL HDBK 217 like GB GF etc These profiles contain information about thermal cycling humidity pollution vibration process factors and much more When one of such profile based methods is selected as default method in the Project Configuration dialog list of Environments on item data dialogs will switch to method specific missions instead standard list of GB GF GM etc You may configure these mission profiles for each particular project using mission profile manager To open the mission profile 1 Open a Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Configuration 3 The Project configuration dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd Project Configuration Current Analysis a Operating a ho Pa a Pa a Assembly Ele
234. bile Conditions more severe than for Ground fixed mostly for shock and vibration There is less maintenance attention and equipment is susceptible to operator abuse Typical applications are mobile telephones portable operating equipment and test equipment Bellcore Issue 5 GB Ground Fixed Nearly zero environmental stress with optimum engineering operation and maintenance Typical applications are central office environmentally controlled vaults environmentally controlled remote shelters and environmentally controlled customer premise areas GF Ground Fixed Some environmental stress with limited maintenance Typical applications are manholes poles remote terminals customer premise areas subject to shock vibration temperature or atmospheric variations GM Ground Mobile Conditions more severe than GF mostly for shock and vibration More maintenance limited and susceptible to operator abuse Typical applications are mobile telephones portable operating equipment and test equipment Bellcore Issue 6 Telcordia Issue 1 GB Ground Fixed Nearly zero environmental stress with optimum engineering operation and maintenance Typical applications are central office environmentally controlled vaults environmentally controlled remote shelters and environmentally controlled customer premise areas GF Ground Fixed Some environmental stress with limited maintenance Typical applications are manholes poles remote terminals customer
235. box fields shown to the right to set reliability allocation parameters For a given parent part the reliability allocation for all its children is computed according to the formula fa parent t Compl sai Weights for reliability allocation ComplLa have a default value of 1 You can enter or update these values through the Item Data dialog box for each item RAM Commander allows you to start reliability allocation from one level and to expand it either to the next level or all lower levels Reliability allocation for an assembly 1 In the Product tree view highlight the assembly for which you want to allocate a failure rate 2 From the Tree menu choose Edit OR right click the mouse and choose Edit OR press ALT Enter 3 In the ltem Data dialog box enter the required failure rate in the FRa field 4 Choose OK O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 242 RAM Commander User Manual 8 3 9 Enter the data for all those items that need a different Complexity for FRa value Upon completing this procedure you are ready to perform the reliability allocation To activate the reliability allocation 1 From the Calculation menu choose Allocation 2 In the submenu choose All tree down or Current level 3 RAM Commander will allocate the required FR for lower levels Project Recalculation When the reliability parameters for components are provided you may perform recalculation of the Product Tree to get the calculation of Failure R
236. built in Spelling Checker with 16 dictionaries in the following languages SpellUS lex US English SpellLAT lex Latin SpellUK lex British English SpellNL lex Dutch SpellGER lex German SpellPL lex Polish SpellESP lex Spanish Spell CRO lex Croatian SpellFRA lex French SpellSLO lex Slovenian SpellDAN lex Danish SpellSVE lex Swedish SpellITA lex Italian SpellCZ lex Czech SpellHE lex Hebrew SpellRU lex Russian English UK and US German and French dictionaries are included with the standard installation other dictionaries are available by request from our support service To set up Spelling Checker 1 Open your project 2 From the Tools menu choose Spell checker dictionary 3 Select a dictionary from RAMC32 BIN folder see the above explanation for a list of dictionary file names You can now initiate the spell checker in any cell of different RAM Commander grids or any field of the data dialogs To use Spelling Checker 1 Select any cell of different RAM Commander grids or any field of data dialog 2 From the Tools menu choose Check spelling or press Ctrl S O 2014 ALD Software Ltd MON RAM Commander User Manual 3 The standard Spelling dialog box is displayed with options for replacing the misspelled word Notin dictionary Commnication Change to Communication Suggestions Ignore Ignore All Change All AutoCorrect Options Undo last
237. causes etc for each process step or design element 4 Take a decision on critical failures 9 Take a decision on required corrective actions 6 Print all the necessary reports and charts See next paragraphs for more information about each of these tasks O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 511 21 3 Defining FMEA Properties 1 From the Diagram menu select Properties 2 FMEA properties dialog will appear FMEA Properti File name CARSMESAPRATOTORIS LA FMEAP FLY Author FMEA Number Description FMEA Standard Standard approach Automotive SAE J 1739 Disable efficiency calculation for Corrective Actions Automatically create blank cause on FM creation Custom FMEA field names for FMEA table and reports Hame Report header 1 Repor Process name Process name Potential FF Potential Failure End Effect of Failure Potential Effect Severity SEW a Cause Fotential Cause Occurence OLE Controls Curent Control Detection DET RFN 3 Enter the FMEA properties FMEA Number FMEA document number to be used for tracking Description of the FMEA document and its purposes You may change also FMEA grid column captions and enable recommended actions efficiency calculation 4 Press Ok Having defined your FMEA project you can now start creating the process design flow diagram 2014 ALD Software Ltd 512
238. cccccccccccncococococacacannnnnrorararnraranannnranannnn 371 2 To create a new configuration a ia 372 3 Adding Blocks to Configuration isis ennen 373 4 Working with existing configurations ococococcccccccncocococococacanannnrorararnrnnarannnrnraranarananana 374 To Update RAM IO ir E E AEAEE E EAEE 374 A ia T o E SI 375 TO loGate an tem A A as 375 To reorder items inside the Configuration oonccccccconcnncccocononcnnnononenonannncronnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnnnnnnrrrrrrnnnnnnrrrrrenanans 375 TOA AN aia 375 2 RBD Gla Gray DUNOMO aii tds 3 6 6 MTBGF Calculator aaa 377 TL TRE DOINS ii iii 3 7 9 SUMMA saciar iii Ea 378 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 10 RAM Commander User Manual Part 15 Reliability Growth 380 1 Reliability Growth Modeling ivvvsuunsrozariac ia dl acia 391 2 To view reliability growth data viscinsisi aida 383 3 To enter reliability growth data isc nnmnnn 383 4 To compute reliability growth planning parameters o oococcccocococcncocacancoranancarananranananos 384 95 Reliability Growth Form l o A aa 386 6 Reliability Growth Reports iii 386 To generate reliability growth reports asssssssssssnnnsnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnmnnn nenn 387 T Summa ee a a a ganmaniestdacauntesaaneesoaaeede 389 Part 16 Spare Parts Analysis 391 1 Operation Modest oda 391 2 Product Iree Data ui A ci 391 3 pare Parts Calcula toM tt oasis 392 To add an operation scenario ccoocnnccconcnncocononncononnnnconnn
239. cel Catalog number 2 Military number 4 2 Select the priority of the Item ID display 3 Choose OK 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 163 7 2 5 2 Custom tree fields The default Product tree presentation may be changed by adding new columns User can create unlimited number of predefined views each one with its own set of additional columns such as MTBF temperature envronment etc Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Ref Des ID Name Ly Opr FR 107 6 Status MTEF Temp Eny M TUTORIAL Communication System i E Communic 1 CH017000 100 2550 9974 565 35 0 GF E Control 2 CNOT 73534 20 4304 1 3E 004 25 0 GF edestal 3 CH017880 To customize the product tree view 1 Open product tree 2 Choose Custom Tree fields from the View menu 3 Click Add button define the profile name 4 Pick up the desired columns from the list of available RAM Commander database fields Set width and caption for each field Customizable Product Tree View View Definition simple Add Delete Group Field Width Column Name OP MTEF a3 OF ltem temperature 6 1 OF Environment 3 0 T Field Add Delete Edit Move Up Move Down RAM Commander database fields are divided into several groups Group Description O GN General fields OP Operating reliability related fields NO Non Operating reliability related fields MN Maintainability fields
240. cense should be obtained installed and configured see Licensing Then RAM Commander client should be installed on all workstations see Workstation Installation See next paragraphs for procedures description 3 3 3 1 Server Installation Note Only an authorized network administrator should perform this installation procedure 1 Log in into the server PC with administrative privileges Server installation procedure should be run from the server PC 2 Choose or create if needed RAM Commander installation folder It must be shared with full access rights and mapped as a network drive for all RAM Commander users on the network Folder name should contain only Latin characters and numbers without spaces or special and national characters Hebrew Chinese etc For example choose C APP RAMC32 Then C APP folder should be shared on server and mapped as network drive by workstations Note It is highly recommended to set up a automated backup procedure for this RAM Commander folder on the server e g C APP RAMC3z2 in the example above to prevent loss of valuable data like reliability data libraries particular projects and analysis cases 3 Run RAM Commander installation package run installation file downloaded from our web site or RAMC setup exe file from RAM Commander installation CD 4 The Installation Wizard will go through a sequence of the setup screens asking the user to make the appropriate selections Press Next on the f
241. censing server installation procedure is provided below 1 Choose License Server PC 2 DOT NET Framework 2 0 is required if it is not installed download it from Microsoft website or run it from RAM Commander installation CD RAMC Tools dotnetfx20 exe You may also download it from our website http www aldsoftware com download download dotnetfx20 exe 3 Run ALD License Server Setup utility Run the program ALDLicenseMngrServiceSetup msi from the RAM Commander installation CD HASP ALDLicenseManager folder You may also download it from our web site http www aldsoftware com download download ALDLicenseMngrServiceSetup msi 4 Setup wizard will guide you through the setup process press Next on the first screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started Welcome to the ALDLicenseMngrserrice Setup setup Wizard iz ALDLicenseMngrServiceSetup The installer will guide pon through the steps required to install ALD LicenseMngrernviceSetup on our computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of thie program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel Back 9 Choose license manager installation folder ia ALDLicenseMingrServicesetup Select Installation Folder The installer will inetall ALO License ngrs e
242. change the permissions Only members of the same user group as the project author may access the project Only project manager may change the permissions Anyone can access the project Only project manager may change the permissions Permissions are set individually for each user group for each module operation O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 6 4 1 pz Permissions for the selected user E Project Open Project Backup Project Overwrite using Restore Project Delete Project Rename Project Cop Product Tree Reliability Maintainability MECA RED Reliability Block Diagrama Markow Chains FTA Fault Tree Analysis ETA Event Tree Analysis Process Design FMEA Safety MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List Libraries Component Library Libraries GPAD Libranes Calculation Defaults Libranes Cross Reference Add user Remove user nic Cancel RAM Commander administrator or any one who knows special advanced permissions administration code may manage the permissions Only project owner may enable this permission type These options may be defined on the project properties screen which you get when create a new project or when edit project properties User will not be able to open the project or perform specific operation on that project If he does not have corresponding access permissions If the project permissions level is set to one of the first 3 levels User Group or All then only the proj
243. choose Quick Note There is an option of automatic recalculation when defining the project properties to ensure that the RAM Commander output is based on the latest updated data see Creating a new project RAM Commander computes reliability for the entire product tree Reliability results appear in the Product tree view O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 8 3 1 8 4 Reliability Calculation 243 Recalculate All In Recalculate All mode RAM Commander applies defaults for all items and computes R amp M for the entire project Defaults are only applied to fields containing three hyphens If a field has an actual value RAM Commander uses that to compute reliability To calculate reliability in Recalculate All mode 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Configuration Select the current analysis in the Project Configuration dialog box or using the Product tree view button bar 3 From the Calculation menu choose Recalculate All RAM Commander computes reliability using the item s current data and current defaults Reliability results appear in the Product tree view Log File Reliability calculation errors can result from lack of required information When RAM Commander detects an error it issues general system messages to the screen and records detailed error messages to a log file Note Review the log file each time a message is displayed on the screen The log file contains information that a
244. ck To Open projects list from the selected drive Print ip a B prem E Delete the current item B Select Deselect the current list item Calculate a Display Reports selection dialog Show hierarchical structure nested RBD FMEA diagrams FTA diagrams etc Edit project remarks Display context Help O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals KO o Display About RAM Commander To toggle the toolbar display choose Toolbar from the View menu 5 3 Status Bar The status bar contains summary information e g ID and data output about the open list lts contents change depending on what type of list is activated For instance the status bar for a product tree view displays the current item ID For an RBD window the status bar shows the result of the last reliability calculation The viewing area of a list may be increased by removing its status bar To toggle a status bar choose Status Bar from the View menu For Help press F1 ID 13 2 we 5 4 Lists A list is a window that scrolls over records You can sort and filter the displayed records RAM Commander lists have the added feature of allowing you to directly manipulate records Lists are used in RAM Commander for projects and library records Note Even though all the examples below refer to the Library list they can equally apply to all the other lists generated by RAM Commander such as component libraries and cross reference l
245. ck transmitter receiver test wit Organizatia Loop back transmitter receiver best Organizatio Visual Inspection Organizatia New Test Find Deselect all 3 In the Testability dialog box you individually select a test from the list of tests the left part of the screen by clicking on them or select or deselect them as a group by right clicking All tests thus selected will be marked with a V and will be linked as a group to the FM when you click the gt button This selection will remain for all TAM analyses and can be used for other FMs with the same tests list 4 For each linked test you can define Indication by choosing an item form the drop down list and Efficiency by entering the data directly to the grid 5 Press Close button to return to the FMECA grid The first selected test will be displayed in the Detection field If there is more than one test the first name will be followed by gt gt symbol to indicate multiple tests available but not shown To remove a test from the current FM 1 Select the desired test on the right part of the Testability dialog box and click the lt button 2 To remove all tests from the FM click the lt lt button 3 Click Close 2014 ALD Software Ltd ae RAM Commander User Manual 18 6 2 Testability Analysis Reports Testability module provides multiple reports located in the Testability group of FMECA report Report Selection T
246. coffee shops not recommended because these networks often have little or no security Windows Firewall haz blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network IF you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock a program Allow access Cancel What are the risks of allowing a program through a firewall If user answers yes or Unblock or Allow Access Pervasive Engine is added to the exceptions list For all RAM Commander user computers perform steps described below To check that the Pervasive Database Engine is allowed by Windows Firewall i Open Control Panel from Start menu Settings section li Open Windows Firewall iii If Firewall is off no need to continue you may close the Firewall dialog iv If Firewall is on make sure that Don t allow exceptions check box is empty 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 95 Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall ls helping to protect your PE Windows Firewall helps protect pour computer by preventing Unauthorized users from gaining access to pour computer through the Internet or a network This setting blacks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab Don t allow exceptions Select this when You connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports
247. color to the palette which can then be used in the RBD display 13 2 9 2 To fold a series of RBD elements to fit the screen If the RBD diagram contains too many serially connected elements to fit the screen it may be split into two or more rows RED LONG_RBD for Project WERTREWGELFJDGEL Drive E 1 Ate Ht Hd Na w e Ho Hi Hi o H Y H 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 351 1 Select by dragging a rectangular selection region around the RBD elements you wish to move RBD LONG_RBD for Project WERTREWGEKLFJDGEL Dive C 13 2 9 3 To zoom in or out of an RBD You can zoom in or out of an RBD diagram to make the display larger or smaller From the View menu choose Zoom in or Zoom out 2014 ALD Software Ltd 352 RAM Commander User Manual 13 2 9 4 13 2 9 5 13 2 9 6 13 2 9 7 To copy an RBD element 1 Drag a rectangular selection region around an RBD element or group of elements to select it f 2 Press Ctrl C or choose Copy from the Edit menu 3 Select an insertion node by clicking on it and press Ctrl V or choose Paste from the Edit menu to paste in the copied element Update RBD Information This function updates an RBD elements data from the Product Tree using Reliability and Maintainability calculation results Only those RBD elements that are associated with elements in the product tree will be updated You can associate an RBD element with a tree elemen
248. com support php O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started NON search do cmd displayKC amp doc Type kc amp externalld 10100441 amp sliceld amp docTypelD DT TID 1 1 amp dialogID 16 7515003 amp stateld 1 200 2083914073 Use this link to download the Novell patch http www novell com support search do cmd displayKC amp doc Type kc amp externalld InfoDocument 2974113 amp sliceld amp dialogID 429358 16 amp stateld 0 200 2042943684 We suggest that only experienced network addministrator should install this update Problem 2 during the server installation after 61 of installation message appears Component transfer error File rra Solution 1 Run the installation and make sure that the option Hasp Drive see the picture is UNCHECKED exactly as it is on the picture InstallShield Wizard Select Components Choose the components Setup wall install select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to Install R 4DbC TR 85 91 Description Table Packed Project Telcordia Issue 1 UTE C 80 810 Pervasive Persie Reliability Toolkit 1995 fw FIDES s Space Required on L 132140 E Space Avalable on C be ae Te E z Back Cancel 2 Finish the installation of RAM Commander but do not run it 3 From the RAM Commander program group in the Start menu choose and run program HDD32 It will install HASP driver installation is described in RAM Commander installation
249. configurations using the existing product tree without needing to descend to the component level O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Reliability Growth Moa RAM Commander User Manual Reliability Growth RAM Commander s reliability growth module is based on the Duane method described in MIL STD 1635 Reliability growth analysis is appropriate when you have limited reliability data on your project In such cases you can use the limited data to extrapolate what the reliability data would be if the testing were conducted over long periods of time The Duane model is the most widely used method for reliability growth planning testing and tracking In this model as long as the effort to improve the reliability of electronic equipment continues the tested system MTBF is proportional to T where T is the cumulative operating time and a is the rate of growth The cumulative mean time between failures MTBF is measured during testing and then divided by 1 a to convert it to the current instantaneous MTBF i e the instantaneous MTBF MTBF is calculated as follows MTBF l g MTBF is plotted versus cumulative test time on Log Log paper where the growth regression is a straight line with slope coefficient The test time at which the growth line reaches the required MTBF MTBF p is the expected duration of the Reliability growth test Duane plot MTBF o TO FSS SO O A 8 0 MS E F A St ATT qH Htt E A aro E ai
250. cost function price weight volume and Availability Non Shortage probability The first type is used for stock computations for normal system support and the second used to get optimized stock quantities when you face a budget constraint Spare parts module uses data from other RAM Commander modules Product tree reliability prediction and maintainability data Both repairable and non repairable parts from the Product Tree are taken into consideration spare parts recommendation is given for all organizational levels levels of replace O I D etc To perform spare parts calculation optimization user should define a Scenario containing information about number of systems in the field prediction period operation hours day operation days year required Non Shortage probability and more Multiple scenarios may be created and stored in the database 16 1 Operation Modes The spare parts module performs evaluation in two modes regular operation and unsupported mission Regular operation During a regular operation normal spare part replace and repair activities are permitted The module takes into account each part s failure rate and level of repair The number of systems in the field operation hours per day operation days per year prediction period and repair turnaround time for Intermediate and Depot levels are taken into account for spare parts evaluation Unsupported mission During an unsupported mission no repair or supp
251. created profile 6 Intersection of profile column and house event row corresponds to event state in this profile Select the desired states for eac profile 7 Select desired profile cell right click choose Select profile from the popup menu Profile column willchange its color 8 Click the Calculate button in the lower part of the dialog the current fault tree will be calculated according to the selected profile and its house event states and calculation results dialog MCS results will appear Repeat steps 1 6 to create additional profiles Repeat 6 8 steps to switch between profiles perform calculations and work with the calculation results Importance Sensitivity Analysis Importance amp Sensitivty Analysis can only be performed after MCS analysis because it uses generated Minimal Cut Sets Importance analysis results help to select those fault tree events which contribute most to the system s unavailability Sensitivity analysis helps to choose those events where a relatively small change will lead to relatively large system unavailability changes Calculated values for each event are e Fussell Vesely importance FV Imp Fussell Vesely importance for basic event i FV i Sum of all MCS containing the event i sum of all MCS e Risk Decrease Factor RDF Risk Decrease Factor for a basic event i RDF i Sum of all MCS sum of all MCS taking into account that event i probability is O e Fractional Contribution
252. criptions will not be overwritten 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual Change description using Code and Name events gates Change Description using Code and Name eventz gates Pattern Description Code gt Use lt Descnption lt Name gt lt Code gt in pattern Change This option allows you to re write all descriptions of all events and gates by using some user defined pattern Pattern may contain 3 placeholders lt Description gt lt Name gt and lt Code gt For example if you specify the patter like Code lt Code gt Name lt Name gt then RAM Commander will apply this pattern to each gate and event and replace the placeholders with actual values of code and name For example if you have an event where Code field value U12DBL and Name field value is U12 Data Bit Loss and you run a global change using template Code lt Code gt Name lt Name gt then its description will be replaced with Code U12DBL Name U12 Data Bit Loss Set up the template and press the Change button Change basic event codes Change Basic Event Codes Pattern BE lt ID gt Use lt Din pattern Change This option gives you possibility to recodify all the basic events in your database using template The template may contain any symbols and also an lt ID gt placeholder which will be replaced by event s unique number by order in event s list For example with the default template shown above all
253. ct 1 Open RAM Commander 2 Close all RAM Commander child windows 3 Choose Components from Library menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd ellos wiew Help Access to the component library 4 In the Global library component list window select a Family Code and an Item type from the drop down lists Initially the global library is empty If you purchased the ALD library you should install it first see the Install Component Library in the Getting Started chapter for directions Note Only the System Manager may perform changes in the Global Component Library See Users Management paragraph for more information about defining Manager 9 2 3 Working with the Component Library The following illustration explains the Component Library window elements Control the display of the component library by selecting family and tem code Families are broad categories such as electronic or mechanical and item codes are tighter cuts of the family such as IC Digital or Resistor IS Global Library a2 Generic Name a 085N U 100101FA Uk O1O2FC F U 100114DG U 1100115PN AL 11001155N AL 1100131DN Ta 1001365N Aa 1100151FA IC Digital EERE A tick here means that the component Is selected for an operation ALD indicates that the component is a part of the ALD component l
254. ct manager owner or permissions administrator only Create a new project Rename Change the name of the project Copy Create a project copy on the same drive with different name Delete Deletes the project creating backup in TMP folder under RAM Commander installation folder Delete no Deletes the project without backup backup 2014 ALD Software Ltd 6 9 Select Deselect Toggle project state e or lock the project and become its manager or unlock the project and stop being its manager Delete all temporary files inside the project database Backup Create a compressed backup file of the project Restore project from the compressed backup file Select the desired project and choose one of the listed operations Project Translation to Different Languages Sometimes there is a need to translate project data failure modes descriptions etc to another language for example project is created in English but some reports should be provided in French language The RAM Commander project translation utility helps in performing this task The procedure of project translation contains 3 steps 1 Generate project dictionary 2 Translate dictionary from primary project language to another language 3 Generate translated copy of the project This process may be performed multiple times On the first process iteration you will get a dictionary from all RAMC modules and all textual fields found in the selected project A
255. cted air conditioning pack off L Maximum Tight altitude 25000 A i7600 mi Avoid icing conditions Explanation of the report columns System amp Sequence Column 1 Systems numbers are based on the Air Transport Numbers Association ATA Specification Number 100 or 2200 and items are 2014 ALD Software Ltd VA numbered sequentially Rectification Interval Column 2 Rectification Interval A B 3 days C 10 days D 120 days or TBD Number Installed Column 3 is the number quantity of items normally installed in the aircraft This number represents the aircraft configuration considered in developing this MMEL Should the number be a variable e g ce 3 passenger cabin items a number is not required a is then inserted in column Number required for Column 4 is the minimum number quantity of items required for dispatch operation provided the conditions specified in Column 5 are met Should the number be a variable e g passenger cabin items a number is not required a is then inserted in column 4 Remarks or Exceptions Column 5 in this column includes a statement either prohibiting or permitting operation with a specific number of items inoperative provisos conditions and limitations for such operation and appropriate notes 3 MMEL Detailed Report displays quantitative analysis detailed information for each MMEL candidate MMEL Quantitative analysis results JAA
256. ction connection choose Append or Insert Enter information in the Action Connection dialog box using steps 3 7 of the procedure on page 350 e To edit or replace an existing action connection select it and choose Edit Enter information in the Action Connection dialog box using steps 3 7 of the procedure on page 350 e To delete an existing action connection select it and choose Delete After each add edit or delete RAM Commander redisplays the Tasks Library Manager dialog box using the new data 11 5 3 Standard Tasks Times Library Reports You can generate on screen and hard copy reports of all standard tasks and standard times To generate a standard tasks times library report 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select Maintainability as the current processor 3 From the Library menu choose Standard Tasks library or Standard Times library 4 In the dialog box choose the Report button RAM Commander displays a window list containing a report of all the standard tasks or standard times Use the report management utilities described in Reports paragraph to scroll edit and print the report 11 5 4 To access the Maintenance Library 1 Select maintainability mode 2 From the Library menu choose Maintenance Library The Standard Times Library window opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd 322 RAM Commander User Manual 11 6 Maintenance Library Data Skills Support and Test Equipment Materials oe
257. ctive Action Decision Making is a tool for the assessment of preventive corrective actions which should be implemented to reduce risks and increase customer satisfaction by improving the design of a product or the process features There are two ways to enter Decision Making 1 In the Failure Mode Cause table click on the lt gt button in Recommended Actions column or 2 In the Insert Update Potential Cause of Failure dialog box press the Decision Making button The Corrective Action Decision Making dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd Recommended Actions Decision Making ltem name Prepare laminate Failure Mode Board not usable End Effect Product is unstable Bane Bad materials Controls Visual inspection rays analysis RPN Severity Decurence or Probability Detection Risk Priority Number RPM I Initial 7 gt de gt o co0000 E gt 252 Resulting 7 gt 2 la 0 300000 3 lla 42 Suggested and Selected Actions Potential solutions of a problem Acton Hame Action Description Advantages Disadvantages Sev Occ Det APN dRPN Feasibility different size ditter Mark different sizes with differ will let to decrease Error during color a d 105 147 1 color colors mistaces and increase marking fatal l speed installing air Increase concentration in 140 112 conditioning work area by installing air conditioning in production area surfaces cl
258. ctronic Mechanical Nonoperating 3 Maintainability Repar Replace Levels Derating Mict max Calculation based on MIL ADBR 472 Lognormal distribution 3 Derating D FMEA Phase Operation Default Method Reliability Calculation 227 Default Screen Nonoperating HM aintaimability Miscellaneous FECA MMEL JAA i E FIDES 2009 FIDES 2009 Pp T NPRD 95 Flectro Mechanical NPAD 95 gt Lancel 4 Press the button with default electronic reliability prediction method name 5 Mission profile manager will appear FIDES 009 Mission Profiles Ruggedising factor AF and HF process factor Phase name Operation fed Functioning Operation mobile Functioning Operation No fied functioning Operation Mo mobile Application Calendar Thermal and Humidity factor time h 7 T G 600 0 On 30 0 fe 60 0 On 30 0 43 15 0 15 0 0 5000 0 5000 0 5000 0 5000 0 5000 Thermal cycling On Off Amb temp Cyclic Ratio Relative humidity dT Cucles year Cycle duration Me 4i 3960 0 OF 200 NN J2 370 50 1650 24 000 z 15 0 200 0 6 000 al 10 0 200 0 18 000 e Cancel 6 See specific reliability prediction method handbook for more information about profile parameters O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 228 RAM Commander User Manual 8 2 1 2 4 FIDES 2009 RAM Commander categorizes all component
259. d by defining a fixed cost for all spare parts as follows k1 k2 k3 0 k4 constant For example it is generally supposed that the cost to send 1 kilogram into space is 10 000 A 1 kilogram reel of wire which may normally cost 5 in a retail store becomes extraordinarily expensive when orbiting the earth Take a look at the values in the Item Data Miscellaneous tab dialog box on page 413 and the ISLE Spare Optimization dialog box on page 415 The total cost for taking the particular item on the mission as a Spare part is as follows Cost k1 O price k2 1 weight k3 O volume k4 1 x 100 000 100 x 1 500 x 0 3 1 000 101 250 When computing optimal quantities RAM Commander makes sure that the total cost does not exceed a budget you specify O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis 397 16 4 3 Optimization Algorithm The optimization algorithm is based on convex programming as outlined in the flow chart below Define set of candidate spare parts Select part with largest contribution to objective function per unit cost Remove Candidate parts part from Adding part to stock remaining set of exceeds budget constrain candidates Adding part to stock brings part s criterion above 0 9999 Add part to spares kit saturation End Yes 16 4 4 Optimization Parameters Two sets of input parameters are required to define an opt
260. d event combinations upwards the tree structure Any combination of the fault tree events may be selected for each event you may specify its logical state to propagate TRUE indicating that the event occurs FALSE indicating that this event does not occur Then the propagation statuses are visualized on the diagram using red color for TRUE and green color for FALSE logical states For example the diagram below displays propagation of several events Antenna failure Receiver failure and Motherboard CPU Fail TRUE and Transmitter failure as FALSE 2014 ALD Software Ltd a2 RAM Commander User Manual Sample Fault Tree for project TUTORIAL according to project s Product Tree and FMECA A LES 7 rieni 1 i e MA Repairable FReG 6583 NIT REO 0333333 PS Keyboard Pow er Supply Total keyboard fail 7 fi a 0 A A Repairable Reparable Fepairable FReO 751307 FR 5 35 FFE3 4 MTTR 0354 MTTR 0 117667 MITRA 0333333 EE Alternate E transmitter faiure 1 Feparable Probability Repairable FRE 94667 g 0 011 FRE3 44531 MITT REO 127333 hITT REO 094r Memory Fail 7 Fae 3 7Ae ES Feparable FEparable FFL 235 FR 3 906 RTT Red 0946567 WT RAO IRG This function allows exploration of influence of different combination of basic events on higher level events and on the top event of the fault tree To use this function open the fault tree choose TRUE FALSE Propagation from the Calcul
261. d data 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 253 3 Library Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Ll e bE Library Report For ELECTRONIC IC Digital Generic e Package 4 of Theta MaxP Ti aglayan M nufact Die Feature ESD ideas Maturity Manufact name pe rs y pins joja dissipat max Process Areal Size sl oduct year year 34 g MOS 500 NHER_SMT 40 0 50 125 1988 1895 ca C 2153 Loaic peices E NHER_ShHT 40 oso 2sfro 2 bp pass tes Asado AAA A You can view and print the report using the report manipulation techniques described in Reports paragraph of RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter 9 2 5 Data Import Component Library may be imported from Excel file of predefined format and structure RAM Commander package contains formatted Excel template for electronic components data input RAM Commander Installation folder LIB subfolder CompLiblmport xls file The template contains separate sheets for each electronic component type IC Digital Resistor Capacitor etc with type specific fields on each sheet All relevant fields have lookup libraries drop down lists with all possible data values appear in these fields 2014 ALD Software Ltd File Edit view Insert Format Tools AutoTag Data Window Help Deh S26 Se Bol om 4 2 iit 483 100 2 a fa fa a Ala ge Ye Reply with changes End Review BE Gel i fal a e El e ti ce Favorites Gor
262. deleting the item Caution Use care when deleting an item There _is_no_undo facility to easily return_ the configuration to its original state To locate an item in a tree Right click on an item and in the pop up menu choose Locate in tree OR From the Item menu choose Locate in tree RAM Commander jumps to the relevant item in the Product tree view Note Copy and Paste are used as with MS Windows conventions To reorder items inside the Configuration New blocks are always added to the end of the list Order is important for RBD creation RBD elements will be positioned accordingly to their order in System Configuration To change items order use Drag amp Drop inside the configuration 1 Click an item you wish to relocate 2 While holding the left mouse button point the mouse to the item which should go after the first selected item 3 Release the mouse button The first item will be placed before the second selected item To edit an item 1 Right click on an item one level lower than a configuration select Edit from the pop up menu OR From the Configuration menu choose Edit OR Press Alt Enter 2 The System Configuration Item dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd System configuration item Mame Transmitter Reliability Model Serial Met Hrs 0 127 Luaritity M K jo Do not update from tree nea 3 Input the relevant data and click OK MTBF Hr
263. dicted 619047 4200 20 UNSWC 98 LE1 Mechanics FR user defined 0 Telcordia Issue 1 Telcordia Issue 2 FR field A Telcordia lesue 3 Siemens SN 29500 1 FR allocated 1 5101e Siemens SN 29500 2005 1 Stress Strength Analysis UTE E 90 81 0 Complesity for FA allocation 5 Press the large button with the selected reliability prediction method name 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 219 6 Reliability parameters data screen will appear for the selected component and selected prediction method IC Digital MIL HDBK 217FN 2 Ref dez E LIT 1 EMM GF Temp 431 Part name Mil num Cat num Generic name 74457055 VHSIC LS CMOS Manufacturing Type Gate Logic Arrays a Process Die rea Tech TTL Hofbits Featuresize H of gates 6 Range Yth Range B Hof Pins i Years in production Package ll Quality Pl a j a e Delta Tic E amp 9 Lead Configuration Distance et A Ss ie i oe HN Mn The screen contains all parameters used in calculation model and formulas of the selected reliability prediction method for the selected component type Each reliability prediction method has its own model and models differ between component types so each screen looks differently and has its own list of parameters These parameters will not be described in this manual please refer to the
264. dit To edit the highlighted item Delete To delete the highlighted item Print To print out the library item list Close To close the window 21 9 2 To update a library during FMEA data input 1 Run the FMEA module and select a diagram in the FMEA upper window 2 To revise an entry in the lower FMEA table and update the associated library click on the button with the three dots lt gt next to the relevant comment to open the appropriate selection box 3 The Select box opens offering 6 buttons 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 533 e Select To insert the highlighted item into the lower FMEA window e Cancel To close the Select box e Add To add a library item e Edit To edit the highlighted item e Delete To delete the highlighted item e Print To print out the library item list 4 Click on the Add or Edit button to update the library as required 21 9 3 To select a field value from a library During FMEA data input edit values can be chosen for most of the fields from the libraries 1 Press the lt gt button in the lower FMEA table beside the relevant table entry 2 The Select box opens 3 Choose the item and press the Select button 21 9 4 Tocopy libraries between projects Libraries may be copied from one open project to another 1 Open two projects in FMEA mode source and destination 2 Select source project FMEA diagram 3 Select Cop
265. dl dl dd dl db md d a Oty Opr FR 10 Status ATA Number fa PREG E ES 0 0000 28 00 00 28 10 01 28 10 03 28 10 04 28 10 05 28 10 06 28 10 07 28 10 08 28 10 09 28 10 10 28 10 11 28 10 12 28 20 00 28 20 01 28 20 02 28 20 03 28 20 04 28 20 05 28 20 06 28 30 00 In addition to system hardware breakdown definition system element functions should be provided If system element has single function it may be specified in Item Function field on the Item Data screen General tab O 2014 ALD Software Ltd MSG 3 973 term Data __Derating Miscellaneous Functional Blocks General Logistics Operating Nonoperating Maintainability Family Ref Des Fuselage tank ltem code les Pat name XY Yee Military number Quantity 1 Catalog number Manufacturer Generic name Remark Description ltem Function Fuel storage Background color Automatic LEN i i PARE Change ATA number 28 10 01 GetATA Number l If system element has several functions these functions should be specified as underlying functional blocks Ref Des Aircratt Fuel System MB Fuel Storage System Fuel storage Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar Ge vent wing tank in flight and during refueling Ge Allow Intercanection of wing tanks from both sides Fuel Distributio
266. down all items one level under the items selected by Level of Replace will be displayed in the report Lowest all items from the lowest level will be displayed in the report For a Fault Isolation report Report Selection Type Testability evinces Fait solaton A 4 ee Phase Operation Level of Replace Intermediate for System Level Depth from start tem 9 Level of Replace those items with the selected Level of Replace will be under analysis For System Level when selected the results will be displayed at the system level otherwise the results will be displayed according to the evel of replace selected above Note Both Level of Repair and Level of Replace must be defined in order for product tree items to produce Coverage and Fault Isolation reports Functional Blocks According to the explanations and examples in the previous paragraphs FMECA analysis is done on components assemblies level In addition the analysis can be performed on the functional blocks level Inside one assembly components can be grouped by functional blocks In a functional block functions are defined for a group of components You can enter more then one functional block FB 2014 ALD Software Ltd for each component In this way you can hide components and work enter FM gt NHE gt EE chains etc with functional blocks This significantly reduces the work required to enter Failure Modes for an as
267. driver HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ODBC ODBCINST INI Microsoft Access Driver mdb Driver C WINNT System Odbcjt32 dll Setup C WINNT System Odbcjt32 dll This will cause an error if the Odbcjt32 dll file is in the C WINNT System32 folder You can modify the registry key values to C WINNT System32 odbcjt32 dll to solve this problem Also verify that the Odbcinst ini file has the correct entries in the same way Any wrong value in HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE ODBC ODBCINST INI under the Setup key will cause this error Resolution for incompatible dll files problem Reinstall your current version of MDAC or install the latest version See the References section of this article for more information on reconfiguring an MDAC installation The latest version of MDAC can be downloaded from the following Microsoft Web site http msdn microsoft com dataaccess Problem 11 RAM Commander works fine for user with PC administrator access rights but does not work for another user Solution The reason is insufficient user rights to access system resources required for RAM Commander Grant full access rights to the user for the following resources O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 100 RAM Commander User Manual 3 11 4 Folders RAM Commander installation folder usually C RAMC32 Project folders on all local and network drives where user wishes to store his projects Registry branches HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Advanced Logistics Develo
268. ds usage you have to be a reliability engineer you have to obtain read and understand the specific reliability prediction standard book you are going to use Only then there will be a confidence in results you get from RAM Commander O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 213 Classification of reliability prediction methods and some short description for the most popular methods is given in the table below it may help to choose the required reliability prediction method for your project Method Supporte Features Description d compone nts LCATEL AA cece AAA Document reference TR NWT 000332 pon Based on CNET French reliability prediction method for commercial applications Operating ElectroniciMission The latest reliability prediction standard profile based created by FIDES Group a consortium of leading French international defense companies AIRBUS Eurocopter Giat MBDA and THALES m O O ys m w 09 C D O O D Q gt O m D O oF O 2 O O O ys Mm D Nm D O O D Q gt O m D O O gt O count stress 2 New stress New GPRD Operating All General Part Reliability Data suitable for and Non storage of temperature dependent failure rates operating see Specify known temperature dependent ER and also time to failure statistics and Weibull parameters calculation perating ElectroniciMission Published in May 2006 by Reliability profile Infor
269. dverse ettet or operati g capably lt 3 Bkeat B tk at Evtleat Hkkk Sar Y Operatbial Eo rome Satety oO Prepared by Date Workgroup Approval Revision Up date Date Page ALD 08 2309 RAMS John Smit 1 08 2309 4718 A orm TASK SELECTION Level 2 Analysis MST Number 28 10 00 ITEM Fuel Storage System Cause Reference 2A1a y e FEC 9 Hidden Economic Function 2 Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar Failure A Fails to allow flow inboard Effect 1 Loss of redundancy of fuel flow from outboard to inboard in wing tanks Other valves in wing allow fuel passage inboard Cause a Flapper valve failed closed Category Task Questions Explanation A A A A A s s a check to venty operaton applicable and Yes cK to s an inspection orfuncional check to deted N degradation of the function potential failure applicable and effective s a restoration task to reduce fhe failure rate applicable and effective s a discard task to avoid failures or to reduce N the failure rate applicable and effective s there a task or combination of tasks that are an Not applicable for category 3 e fights por OF Up chedk of the wing Wapper valves fights zm eres applicable and effective Approval Revision John Smi T Prepared by Date Workgroup Update Date Page 24 2 Structural Analysis
270. e bring the mouse cursor into the diagram press the left button move the mouse and release the left button You have created a state node This node is selected that s why 9 handles little squares are displayed The handle at the center of the node is used to draw a link The 8 others allow resizing the node If you want to move the node you bring the mouse cursor into the node press the left button move the mouse and release the left button State data screen will appear immediately for the new state To edit existing state data double click on it or select from menu Item gt Edit On edit dialog 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis 409 you can choose state node background color shape and assign bitmap picture See the State data topic 17 2 2 Draw a Transition Bring the mouse cursor into the handle at the center of the selected node press the left button move the mouse towards the other node When the mouse cursor is into the other node release the left button The transition has been created And it is selected since a handle is displayed at the center of this transition link Transition data screen will appear immediately for the new transition To edit existing transition data double click on it or select from menu Item gt Edit See Transition data topic O 2014 ALD Software Ltd o RAM Commander User Manual 17 2 3 State Data When you create a new state or double click an exis
271. e EE Description column Delete EE Deletes the current End Effect Testability Analysis Module TAM Testability Analysis Module TAM allows definition of detection methods tests for each failure mode Test indications and efficiency may also be specified With this information RAM Commander may provide the following e list of Undetectable Latent or Dormant events their probabilities and MTBF e calculate test coverage for system and system parts e generate ambiguity groups report e generate optimal fault isolation procedure with replace recommendations e and more The starting condition for this analysis is that there must be at least one test defined in the FMECA library Test types e g Visual BIT etc should be also defined before you start working with tests TAM information is always entered per failure mode To define tests for FM 1 Select the desired FM 2 In the Detection column press the lt gt button the Testability dialog box opens Left part of the screen displays tests library the right part of the screen displays tests selected for the specific Failure Mode O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Failure Mode Fails to Start Close FMECA Test Library Selected Test Data Level Code Name Subtest Efficiency Test received and stored packet integ Organizatio Noise receive test 1 00 CD ROM read test Organizatio sal 3 1 00 FOO read write test Organizatio E Noite receive test Organizatio Loop ba
272. e Pack to Box option to calculate failure rates for a given environment and a wide range of ambient temperatures for specific assembly in the product tree and then pack the results into a single part of the GPRD library To pack an assembly into a failure rate table 1 Set the current processor to the Operating or Non Operating mode 2 Highlight the source assembly in the Product tree view 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 271 TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 164 3903 E Communic 1 CNO 000 1 99 8937 WB Main Switch 1 CNOTFO04 1 50864 4 LM299 1 T gt 13 5 74L530 1 0 0367 F A1 10 E ALA 10 0 0890 FM 7 AN 2 0 0365 A30 34 8 AZ 5 0 0849 CCI 9 CE 1 0 0619 cc2 10 CK 1 0 0619 DE a a PA E CC4 CE p _ E Ll 13 CK 1 0 0614 FE L0 4 14 HLMP 2450 4 0 0144 F L5 b 15 HLMP 2400 2 0 0072 1 2 16 DP2 2 3 1361 3 Make sure that this assembly has defined unique Part Number 4 From the Library menu select Pack to box 9 In the Pack to Box dialog box select one or more environments and enter values for the Lowest Temperature and the Highest Temperature Pack to Box Environments Lowest Temperature 20 Highest Temperature 150 Lancel 6 Click OK 7 RAM Commander will recalculate the FR for the selected assembly by performing reliability prediction for underlying components for all the selected environments and temperatures and will insert the obtained results in
273. e all FMs Normalize Alpha Equalize Alpha Assign Selected Tests for all FM Mormalize Beta The table below explains these options Get from FM Library Opens the Failure Modes Library for viewing Select an FM from the Failure Modes Library to be inserted into the current FM cell Add to FM Library Adds the current FM to the Failure Modes Library Get from Retrieves all FMs corresponding to the current product tree item in the Component Library FMECA Component Library Note The FMECA Component Library consists of the standard failure 2014 ALD Software Ltd modes defined for the specific Family Item Code and Type of product tree item by default FMD 97 If one or more of the standard FMs in the FM list already appears in the FMECA grid it will be ignored Get from GPRD Retrieves all FMs corresponding to the current product tree item s Part Number in the GPRD Library Adds an additional NHE for the current FM Note A new No effect NHE is added by default If the FM already has a No effect NHE you may not add a new NHE until No effect is changed to the real effect In another words each FM can have only one effect defined as No effect Failure Cause For lowest level FMECA items LFI opens the Cause window for typing in required data For higher level FMECA Items HFI opens the list of causes from the lowest levels Delete FM Deletes th
274. e component record and select Delete option or select the Delete option from the Item menu 4 Confirm the deletion 9 2 3 3 To insert new component into the library 1 Activate the Component library component list 2 Select the required Family and Item type 3 From the Item menu choose Create or press F7 OR If you wish to create a component which is very similar to one of existing components select the existing component and choose Copy from the Item menu 4 In the Library Manager dialog box enter the relevant values You must enter a value for Generic Name 9 Choose OK RAM Commander enters the part in the component library 9 2 3 4 To find component Use Find option in the Item menu to find the component in the library by its Generic Number You may search by the exact generic number or by the beginning of the number The search is performed in the selected library project global and selected family Item type only 2014 ALD Software Ltd 252 RAM Commander User Manual 9 2 3 5 Transfer data from a project to global library 9 2 4 The system manager can transfer information from a project library into the global library To transfer data activate the project library window and from the Library menu select on of the options e Copy to Global All to copy all contents of the project library to the global library for all families ltem types e Copy to Global Selected Only
275. e current FM and corresponding unshared chains up to the EE Delete all FMs Deletes all Failure Modes of the selected product tree item and corresponding unshared chains up to the EE Maintenance RCM Open corrective and preventive maintenance procedures related to the selected Failure Mode see Maintainability Module for more information Show connected Displays a list of fault trees containing Basic Events linked to the selected Fault Trees product tree item and Failure Mode Normalize Alpha Normalizes alpha for all item FMs to a total of 1 The normalization works proportionally according to the current alpha s values Equalize Alpha Puts the same ALpha value for all Failure Modes so that their total sum is 1 Normalize Beta Normalizes beta for all NHE of current FM to a total of 1 The normalization works proportionally according to the current beta s values 18 5 2 2 Alpha Column Pop up Menu Options Calculator for Alpha Calculator Alpha ltem FA 4 5 FM FR 1 26 Cancel Alpha 0 28 Sum Alpha Displays total sum of Alphas for all FMs of the current product tree item 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander for windo BE A Sum Alpha 1 000 18 5 2 3 NHE Column Pop up Menu Options Get from FM Library Opens the Failure Modes Library Select an FM from the Failure Modes Library to be inserted into the current NHE cell Add to FM Library Adds the current NHE to the Failure Modes Library NHE List Open
276. e described by a long FM NHE EE chain for example Failure Mode A causes NHE B which in turn causes NHE C which in turn causes EE D FIM MHE NHE 2 EE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta IDN Description Beta Description Beta Severity oa D gt 1 000 It is up to the user to take a decision about the product tree level where Failure Modes are specified and how on which tree level and with which level detalization their consequences Next Higher Effects are defined The next paragraphs will explain how to define all the mentioned FM NHE EE definition cases A B C D 18 5 1 1 To define a single NHE 1 After the failure mode input NHE group of fields will become editable Fla MHE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta failure mode 1 000 123 Mo effect 1 000 2 The NHE IDN field will point to the direct parent item of the selected item 3 Enter the NHE description Select NHE Description cell and type in the text removing the default No effect text or Right click the NHE Description cell select Get from FM Library the list of failures from the FMECA Library Failure Mode page will appear Select one and press Ok or Right click the NHE Description cell select NHE List the list of Next Higher Effects already defined in the project and not in the library will appear Select one and press Ok 4 Now the End Effect group of fields will become editable you may proceed f
277. e drive letter for this folder For example map server s C APP folder as R drive O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started NON Map Network Drive Windows can help vou connect to a shared network Folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can p access the Folder using My Computer Specify the drive letter For the connection and the folder that you want to connect to Drive Folder Wald 190cdcF229b14PP Browse Example iserverishare Reconnect at logon Connect using a different user name Sign up For online storage or connect to a network server Finish l Then R folder on workstation will contain RAMC32 folder where RAM Commander Server was installed X App on ald 190cdcf229b R Fie Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help y Back ul wi P Search HE Folders FEE Other Places Details 3 Run RAM Commander installation package run installation file downloaded from our web site or RAMC setup exe file from RAM Commander installation CD 4 The Installation Wizard will go through a sequence of the setup screens asking the user to make the appropriate selections Press Next on the first screen O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Setup The InstallShield Wizard will install RAM Commander for Windows on pour computer To continue click Nest Cancel O Confirm the License Agreement Yes button InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read
278. e examples for one more illustration of this concept In the first image top item temperature is set to 35 Ret Des Temp Settin Resulting Cur Temp A ES l E E Delta 0 35 0 ai El Receiver Delta 10 3 45 0 Delta 10 46 0 E Main Switch Delta 0 45 0 Delta 0 45 0 Delta 0 45 0 Fined 40 40 0 Delta 0 450 23000 Delta 5 40 0 Delta 0 40 0 Delta 4 44 0 Fived 15 0 WR Delta 0 15 0 pu Motor Delta 5 20 0 a EB Bearing Dielta 0 15 0 Then it is changed to 20 degrees Ret Des Temp Settn Resulting Cur Temp CA ee ao UE Delta 0 20 0 EI E Recelver Delta 10 30 0 El Main Switch Delta 10 0 30 0 Delta 0 30 0 Delta 0 30 0 Delta 0 30 0 Fized 40 400 Delta 0 30 0 EN l El Transmitter Delta 5 25 0 EE C12 Delta 0 25 0 oe C35 Delta 4 29 0 bees an Antenna Delta 0 15 0 EB Motor Delta 5 20 0 AEB Bearing Delta 0 15 0 Pay attention to temperature change keeping relative deltas of items with delta temperature settings and no change for items with fixed temperature settings O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 174 RAM Commander User Manual 7 3 4 2 Standard Environments For Environment field you should select one of the standard environment codes defined in different reliability prediction methods The standard list of envronments appears below but some prediction m
279. e installed in two different modes Standalone and Client Server See Introduction paragraph earlier in this chapter for more information about these modes When the suitable installation mode is selected Standalone or Client Server the installation process may be started see next paragraphs in this manual section O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 30 RAM Commander User Manual 3 3 1 Check also Installation Reqiuirements before you start Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander Make sure RAM Commander users have full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder Installation Reqiuirements Hardware and Software Requirements for RAM Commander installation e Client Standalone OS MS Windows XP Vista 7 8 Both 32 bit and 64 bit processors and OS supported Hardware Desktop Laptop PC with recommended hardware configuration for installed OS version Generally it is o 3 GHz or higher Windows compatible processor Intel Pentium Celeron family i5 i7 or AMD K6 Athlon Duron o 4GB RAM o Free 100MB Hard Drive space for software installation only required capacity depends on expected database sizes o 1024x768 x 24bit colors video adapter and monitor o Keyboard and Mouse MS Word reports generation requires NET Framework 2 0 installed Charts generation requires NET Framework 4 0 Full installed Some
280. e it 6 7 Project copies revisions You may copy projects from one drive to another You may maintain multiple copies of the project in the same project list You may reuse previous project for the new system analysis if they are similar You may also create project templates and then create new projects by copying templates To copy project from one drive to another 1 Activate the Project list 2 Select the project you wish to copy 3 Activate another Project list on the drive where you wish to copy Destination list 4 Drag and drop the project you wish to copy from its project list to another project list Destination list RAM Commander copies the project and updates the destination Product tree view To create a project copy on the same drive 1 Activate the Project list 2 Select the project you wish to copy 3 Provide unique name for the new project If you create a new revision of the project add some revision index to the name of the project like X1 X2 X3 4 Press Ok RAM Commander copies the project and updates the Product tree view 6 8 Additional Operations There are multiple operations available from the Project menu Field Description Open Open project s product tree view Oveniew View the project overview screen with usage statistics and shortcuts to modules Edit Edit project properties description permissions FR unit Revision etc Advanced Manage project advanced permissions for proje
281. e of CL usually 90 or 95 falls between CLk and CLk 1 then Met CL CL Met CL CL Met a Chen CLy Performing Maintainability Analysis You may start performing the maintainability analysis only after the Preliminary Steps are done The primary goal of Maintainability Analysis in RAM Commander is MTTR and Mct max calculation Both parameters are calculated based on Mct of corresponding tree items For Mct calculation of each item you should define a list of corrective maintenance e g replacement procedure tasks with their times When these procedures are defined you may activate the calculation to get MTTR and Mct max values for all the system and different sub systems The paragraphs below explain the analysis procedure The calculated MTTR values may be used in other analyses like Reliability Block Diagrams Fault Tree Analysis Markov Analysis etc 2014 ALD Software Ltd 308 RAM Commander User Manual 11 4 1 To enter Mct data 1 Select the required item in the Product tree view 2 From the Tree menu choose Edit the Item Data dialog box opens Item Data General Logistics Operating Monoperating Maintainability Derating Miscellaneous FMECA F amily Ref Diez Main Switch Item type Part number DDD MET Prediction Settings Method selections default MIL 472 Procedure 54 Method MIL 472 Procedure 54 Replace Repair level settings
282. e project You may send the backup file by email or copy it to another media Later you may restore the project from the backup file To backup a project 1 Activate the Project list 2 Select the project you want to backup 3 From the Project menu choose Backup or right click and choose Backup from the pop up menu The Backup Project dialog box opens 4 Select the destination drive and folder where the backup will be created Note that the backup file name should be not longer that 16 characters only Latin alphanumeric characters are allowed 5 Choose Save RAM Commander backs up your project onto the designated floppy disk other data storage medium drive Note Be sure to back up your RAM Commander projects frequently Correct backup procedures eliminate the need to redo your work due to power failures disk crashes network faults or other computer problems To restore a project 1 Activate the Project list 2 From the Project menu choose Restore the Restore Project dialog box opens 3 Select the drive of the data storage medium 4 Select the project backup file you wish to restore Note that the backup file name should be not longer that 16 characters only Latin alphanumeric characters are allowed 5 Choose OK 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 153 RAM Commander restores your project and displays it in the destination drive s list If the project already exists enter your confirmation to overwrit
283. e report in a report window O 2014 ALD Software Ltd y Mission Profile Repot tor Project TUTORIAL Drive C Mission Profile report Project TUTORIAL Mission name TEST Start from TUTORIAL Total Mission Reliability 0 99965243 SUM 1 a FR 4 R MULTIRIt 0 99965242 0 000348 ic Alpha F R E 6 Rit o oloon 5340 5 Dl 3 443 25 883499 The report includes the following information Description of all mission phases Failure rate during each phase MTBF during each phase Failure rate 1 phase duration Reliability for each phase Unreliability for each phase Total mission reliability Total Failure Rate Formula The total failure rate for a mission containing n 1 phases is calculated as follows E As 1 Ott Ar l Cv A 7 total mission failure rate over n 1 phases As 1 ZADE A ty total mission failure rate for the first phase J A test coverage during transition from first phase to second phase a fraction in the range 0 1 where O means no testing and 1 means complete fault isolation between phases Ay total failure rate of the system for the first phase t duration in hours of the first phase 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Analysis 295 10 3 3 Summary In this chapter you learned about RAM Commander s mission profile analysis module Using this module you can build detailed models of a project s environmental conditions compute the
284. e users according to their groups see Project Definition in Chapter 8 Level is optional See Users Management paragraph later in this manual for more information about the user parameters definition 13 Windows Security Center Windows Firewall Warning message may appear press Unblock button message may appear on different installation steps or event when the installation is finished Windows Security Alert E To help protect pour computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Mame Database Service Manager Publisher Pervasive Software nc TAPP RAMT BIN Wy Sdbsmgr exe Eeep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections trom the Internet or a network IF you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it Wher should unblock a program 14 Choose Finish on the last installation wizard screen in the last screen of the Installation Wizard 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 43 InstallShield Wizard RAM Commander Setup Setup has finished installing RAM Commander for Windows on your computer 15 RAM Commander is installed on the server 16 Share selected installation folder e g C APP in this example for all RAM Commander users give full control permissions for this folder to all RAM Commander u
285. eaausasonee 457 Part 19 Fault Tree Analysis 459 TOE TA DaSIGS enia a eo ee a a a a aa 460 2 ETA Mod le MIAO ain a a E S NA 463 3 BUNGING FLA Diagram S eiii a a A ekaeee 464 creating anew Fault Tee asias dls 465 Define PVA DPrODErtIES niiina aa aaan ne AEN Ana UEN MA A AEN OUE EAE aE E EENEN AA A deca 465 FLACA DUNA E E Ea 467 A A A EA 469 EVEN US IDA avia a diia 469 Delete CLOT SINUS ai lato 470 COPAS RASO aaron ados a ade 471 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 12 RAM Commander User Manual 4 Part 20 Part 21 bb WO N Remarks aii Automatic FTA building ooocccconnnnccnoncnncoconcnncnnnnannnnnas Print preview Print ZOOM coocccccococccccnnocnnanoconarinananenons Export Diagram as Picture onncccconnnncccocncnccconnnnconennannonnanos Using Common Cause Failures ooonnncccccccnnccnancrnonnnnnnas GoObal Change vincia dai Importing Fault Trees 0ccccoonncccconncncononncnconnananconnnnanrennnnos Import FT from RiskSpectrUM ooocccccccccccccnccnnnccnnnoncos Import FT from isograph Ft ooooccccnnnccccnnccccnnncnnnnnnos IMPOR TT rom CAPTA it a a ue he dances Import FT from Aralia Simtree ccccccoooonnnccnnccccnonoco Analysis Calculation cccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Basic Event Types ccccooncccoccnnoocononnnnconnnnanronnananrrnnananernnnnos MCS Calculation cccccccssssssseceeccsssssseeeessceesseeeessseoenens Tree Unavailability calculation o Easar
286. ean before Always clean surfaces before welding Welding Maintain 6 mnths 1 Maintain machine every 6 blades 25 0 months 2 Set blades at 25 degrees Cover printed circuit Cover printed circuit with w Soldering resist mi Edit l Delete Select l Deselect Reject I Done Actions Taken Mark different sizes with differ colors Always clean surfaces before welding Document Link In the Decision Making functions you can enter an unlimited number of possible corrective actions with its advantages disadvantages comments person responsible etc You can then evaluate the possible actions and select some of them for implementation Selected actions with the help of the Select button On the basis of selected actions you can fill in the Actions Taken field and the fields for the resulting Occurrence and Detection Use the following criteria to evaluate a suggested action Severity S Occurrence O Detection D and RPN for every action in addition to S O D and RPN parameters per each Failure Cause and also ARPN RPN_initial RPN_ resulting Cost Duration Risk Additional criteria with their Efficiency which is calculated as ARPN Efficiency tt AAA RPN vio Cost Duration Risk Additional where ARPN RPN_initial RPN_resulting RPN Severity LU Occurrence 1 Detection Feasibility criteria F and ARPN ARON aR
287. ect Failure Mode Classification Cause Component Test Type Test Subtest ed a Design End Effect Description FMECA Severity Safety Severity Tesi Mee 1 Mission Degredation Marginal Catastrophic 0 000 0 000 4 Mission Loss Critical 0 000 0 000 4 Communication Loss Critical Catastrophic 0 000 0 000 4 Communication Degradation Marginal ES g 0 000 0 000 5 Maintainance Degradation Minor p tstrophic gt 0 000 0 000 E Performance Degradation Minor O 0 000 0 000 Phase Operation Cloze Report Apply Help You may switch between library pages and insert edit delete records in tables on each page 18 4 2 FMECA Libraries Definition You can access and change the FMECA libraries at any stage of working with a project However when working with your project for the first time the following three libraries must have at least one value defined for Phase Severity and End Effect The rest of the libraries are optional First Time Definition of the FMECA Libraries 1 Define add additional phases and duration time for each phase 2 Define enter at least one Severity category 3 You can define any number of Severity Categories later on in the project Important note The order in which the Severity categories appear in the Severity library is important The severity category appearing in the first line of the severity library is considered the most critical in the FMECA reports 4 Define
288. ect operations like backup rename copy etc even if you are project manager and have all the required permissions you have to wait while all users will leave the project Creating a new project To create a new project 1 Activate the Project list for a desired local or network drive 2 From the Project menu choose Create or press F7 The Edit project properties dialog box opens Project propertie Project name PROJECT Project Version 8 01 Project group Revision Description FR Units Access Rights Project Status Locked by user Create 26 08 2010 11 29 Update 26 08 2010 11 23 Owner Owner group a Size 1 Permissions Owner User Cancel Automatic tree recalculation 1 3 Enter the Project name and other optional information Field De scri Description gt name A project name only alphanumeric characters without spaces max length is 16 characters Project Optional Description Project Group Optional used to sort or arrange projects in the list hierarchically by groups Revision Optional project version name number Failure rate Failure rates are expressed as the number of failures per million hours or per units billion hours To express failure rates as failures per million hours use 10 To express failure rates as failures per billion hours use FIT MIL HDBK 217 uses 10 while Telecordia formerly Bellcore and French Telecom use FIT 2014 ALD Software
289. ect owner author will be able to change the permissions For the Advanced permissions case see related paragraph later in this chapter Advanced Permissions Advanced permissions is the most flexible type of project permissions allowing specifying a list of allowed operations and modules for each particular user or user group per project To enable the advanced permissions for project Note Only project owner author may switch advanced permissions on He should define security administration code for the project and any user may manage access control list for this project using this code Project permissions level may be also switched back to All or User level using the same administration code 1 Select the desired project in the list of projects 2 Open project data Right click on project and select Edit from popup menu 3 Select Advanced in the Permission drop down list only project owner may perform this operation 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 149 Access Fights Locked by user ALD Owner ALD Owner group Permisalonz Advanced Security Administration Code Please define the new code tor advanced project permissions administrators This code may be defined separately for each project or RAM Commander administrator may use the same code for all projects 5 The access control list will appear It contains list of users in the upper part of the screen and list of permiss
290. ected mode You may also customize the failure conditions table column names and define your own names to columns To change the failure conditions table column name 1 Right click the desired column header 2 Popup menu will appear Choose the Change column title option 3 Title dialog box will appear write down the new title and press ok 4 The failure conditions table contents will be refreshed and will display the new name Working with Failure Conditions You may define unlimited number of failure conditions for each function of the functional tree The table in the lower part of the screen displays all failure conditions of specific function currently selected in the functional tree To work create edit delete etc with failure conditions of the specific function at first select this function in the functional tree To create a new failure condition FHA mode 1 Select specific function 2 Select the first field in the table below and start writing the failure condition description 2 Functional Tree for Project TEST on Drive D EG TEST SE Control Aircraft Direction on the Ground Failure Condition Building the Funct 3 Press enter 4 Select relevant phases in the next field a Press the button phases list will appear b Select relevant phases from the list you may select multiple phases c lf required Phase is not found in the list add it to the library see Wo
291. ed later in this chapter 19 3 1 Creating a new Fault Tree 1 Initiate the FTA module 2 List of exiting diagrams will appear 3 Enter new diagram name and press Ok 4 New diagram screen will appear with only FTA top gate on the diagram 9 Define diagram properties 6 Build the diagram by adding gates events sub diagrams etc 19 3 2 Define FTA properties To define the diagram properties 1 From the FTA diagram menu choose Properties Or Double click an empty white space on the diagram 2 Define the following properties 2014 ALD Software Ltd ase RAM Commander User Manual pa pnan OOOO Automatically Select this check box if you wish the diagram elements to be automatically rearrange the tree rearranged after create delete operations Automatically Select this check box if you wish the diagram element font to be automatically adjust node font adjusted after creation or editing according to the size of displayed text Alignment Click either Central or Left balanced to define the tree alignment To select these options the Automatic Arrangement check box should be selected Show event details Select this check box if you want to view basic event details probability model FR MTTR etc for each basic undeveloped event Show codes Select this check box if you want the element code to be displayed in the element box Show Q mean Select this check box if you want the Qmean mean unavailability or
292. ed diagrams click the Locate E button on the toolbar for a hierarchical view of all the nested FMEA diagrams O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 516 RAM Commander User Manual 21 4 9 Print Zoom Undo From the Diagram menu you can print the diagram view the print preview zoom in or out on the screen and undo changes made to a diagram since opening the FMEA window e To display how the diagram will look when printed choose Print Preview from the Diagram menu e To fit the entire diagram on the printed page choose Zoom Fit to Printer from the Diagram menu before the printing e To revert the diagram to normal scale choose Zoom 100 from the Diagram menu 21 4 10 Export Diagram as Picture You can insert the FMEA diagram as a picture to another application Word Excel PowerPoint etc There are two options export to clipboard or to file e Choose Export to Clipboard from the Diagram menu The diagram will be placed in the Clipboard Enter another application choose where to paste the diagram and press Ctrl V or choose Paste from the Edit menu The diagram picture will be copied e Choose Export to File from the Diagram menu Then provide the file name and the diagram will be saved directly to file Windows Enhanced Metafile format is used which is compatible with Microsoft Office applications such as Visio Word Excel etc It contains vector components and diagram remains editable and scalable when imported to Visio or
293. ed mean time between failure MTBF is proportional to T where T is the Cumulative operating test time and a is the growth rate index On a log log plot the growth regression line is linear with slope a The cumulative mean time before failure MTBFc is normally measured during testing and then divided by 1 a to convert it to the current instantaneous mean time before failure MTBFi MTBFi is then plotted parallel to the MTBFc at an offset of 1 1 a The test time at which this line reaches the required MTBF is the expected duration of the reliability growth test RAM Commander uses Bootstrap a new statistical technology that enables the user to calculate accurate confidence intervals for the main parameters of the Duane model by obtaining a large number of samples Details of this method have been published in the paper Bootstrap Technology for RAM Analysis Z Bluvoand and L Peshes Proceedings of the Symposium on New Directions in Military Reliability Availability and Maintainability RAM Analysis Maryland USA 1993 Derivation of Model Equations According to the Duane formulation 2014 ALD Software Ltd where cumulative failure rate 2 H total test hours F failure during H hours K condition dependent coefficient a growth rate The original mathematical model was expressed in terms of cumulative failure rate However since equipment reliability is generally expressed in terms of MTBF the followi
294. edit box and click OK The FTA diagram screen will be displayed Then you may review or edit an existing diagram build a new diagram calculate analyze the fault tree and print required reports You may also delete rename and copy FT diagrams from the same screen with fault tree diagrams list Building FTA Diagrams Please note several important facts about RAM Commander FTA module e Each RAM Commander project may contain multiple unlimited number of diagrams e Diagrams may be connected to each other using Transfer gates each tree may contain Sub Trees which are referenced in the main tree using Transfer gates e All diagrams in the same project use the same basic events library After initiation of FTA module list of FTA diagrams appear Select an existing diagram or choose to create a new diagram and press Ok Then FTA diagram window will appear Each FTA diagram window displays single Fault Tree You may open several FTA windows simultaneously and switch between them O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 465 RAM Commander sample Fault Tree Sample Tree 5 76e 005 AND Connection failure Software failure A diagram consists of gates events and remark items you may create edit delete copy amp paste these diagram elements Use the available options scrolling Zooming opening sub trees etc to obtain the best possible view of the diagram A more in depth explanation of each option is provid
295. eet Classifications list from FMECA library Phase sheet Phases list from FMECA library sever Severities list from FMECA library SAF _ SEV Safety Severities list from FMECA library EE SAE Safety Severities for ENd Effects per phase from FMECA library This data may be used to export FMECA data to another software or to change the data in Excel and import it back to RAM Commander with function FMECA Import Please note that data format for import should be exactly as export format described above To Import data 1 Perform data export at least once to get a file of required structure 2 Change the received file or add information to that file or convert your existing Excel file format to the required format 3 Activate RAM Commander product tree vew FMECA mode 4 Select tree root or specific branch related to the FMECA data being imported 5 Select FMECA Export from the Tools menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd 456 RAM Commander User Manual 18 9 1 6 Import setup dialog will appear Import FMEA O FMECA Libraries End Effect Failure Mode Test Classification Severity Phase Safety Severity EE for Safety from Excel Cancel Select what do you wish to import Full FMECA data table or libraries only For the libraries option select which libraries you wish to import from the file 7 Press Ok Import process will be initiated There is also another FMECA data Export method u
296. elements with quantity and redundancy model serial parallel K out of N for each element Example below shows to different product configurations Gc List of configurations tor Project TUTORIAL on Drive Hame B Nor switching base configuration ei Main Switch Th Receiver Ht Transmitter FS 20 Control Ht Pedestal Receiver Receiver Ht Tranemitter EIFS 00 Control Ht Pedestal 7640 85 1135756 3 1634116 6 445033 4 113760 5 12633 3 Ooo 9 1694118 6 0699 2 1694118 6 445099 4 119760 5 122693 9 Oo 9 4 173E 002 0 125 0 154 0 127 0 118 1 667E 002 0 125 0 154 4 039E 002 0 154 0 127 0 118 1 667E 002 0 125 Reliability Model Parallel k out of H Serial Farallel Seral Serial kK out of H k out of H Serial Farallel Serial Seral 14 1 RAM Commander may build RBD diagram automatically and calculate MTBF Mct and MTBCF Then engineers may compare different configurations To open the configuration system list 1 Activate the project s Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu select System Configuration The System Configuration list opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd View Window Help Sc List of Configurations for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Mame Switching base configuration E Main Switch Receiver 28 Transmitter TIPS EH Control E Receiver El CT Non suntching base configuration ly Receiver 2
297. ement To perform the FMECA analysis you should define Failure Modes for each product tree element Then for each Failure Mode its conditional probability Alpha and possible consequences chain should be defined Next Higher Effects their Next Higher Effects and End Effects Each item may have multiple Failure Modes each Failure Mode may have multiple Next Higher Effects each Next Higher Effect may have multiple End Effects On the illustration below Failure Mode of Hard Drive Single sector data error cause NHE Next Higher Effects of System block Error in data processing which in turn lead to NHE of Control unit Wrong system control which in turn lead to several EE End Effects of the whole system level End Effects Communication Degradation Maintenance Degradation ext Higher Effects Pedestal Keyboard CDROM Total drive fail Single sector data error Failure Modes The RAM Commander FMECA module screenshot below displays FM NHE EE chains for the same situation explained above TUTORIAL project O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Ref Des ID Name ty Dpr FR 1 e Status E TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 1 187 0769 E Communic 1 2017000 100 2550 Control 2 CNO17334 1 75 4504 E Monitor 1 CH017012 8 0000 EA NOVO E SystemBlock 3 25017045 50 4954 HODO02 1 E CD ROM 2 COSA 1 14 4300 El Floppy 3 F99 a 12 5810 _ FM NHE NHE 2
298. ence designator element name Taken from product tree data If multiple elements have the same Reference designator Identical calculation and simulation recognizes them as identical and then assumes that it is a single equipment block even if it appears in multiple places in the RBD Remark For descriptive purposes only K N Element Configuration In addition to the general data you may define for all RBD elements described in the To enter data for an RBD element paragraph earlier you may define additional parameters for K out of N elements Switch If your K out of N element is switching between failed and redundant components and the switching mechanism is not 100 reliable you may take into account the reliability of the switch To do that open the K out of N element and click the Switch button Switch configuration screen appears define the switch reliability distribution and parameters and press Ok RBD Element K out of N Switch data Switch exists Gwich FR distribution Time independent FR distribution parameters Unrelability 0 00 Cancel _ i 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 347 Split elements By default K out of N element assumes that all N components inside are identical and have the same MTBF If it is not your case you may use Split function to define different reliability data for different components To do that right click your K N element and choose Sp
299. entation This commonality permits greater ease of learning and understanding for pilots and engineers alike The standard numbering system is controlled and published by the Air Transport Association The unique aspect of the chapter numbers is its relevance for all aircraft Thus a chapter reference number for a Boeing 747 will be the same for a Airbus 380 Examples of this include Oxygen Chapter 35 Electrical Power Chapter 24 and Doors Chapter 52 emperature fix See Environment and Temperature Definition emperature delta See Environment and Temperature Definition niti Standard environment code like GB GF GM etc See Standard Environments ATA Number R up source switch See Failure Rate source switch R Predicted R user defined R Field Duty cycle ield factor oper Reliability allocation weight See Failure Rate Allocation R Allocated A oJ 5 lt Sin ln 5 O o 2 c Saa gt O IO Q lt n 3 gt 2 D 5 Q gt yl 0D gt D o S Q jr D O o ulo O Q Ala ka 5 3 a ale O NiO N CN gt O mh 5 gJ O 0 dp 5 gt 2014 ALD Software Ltd CAP Applied current OOOO FRA Frequency Applied FRS Frequency SR A SS EE FRS FrequencySR SS PDI Power Dissipation PSR Power Stress ratio YO PRA Rated Power TJC Delta temp junctiontocase ambient VAP Applied voltage direct VDA Applied voltage drain source ___ ______________________ VD
300. eports and graphs available to output diagram data and calculation results Open Reports menu to see the list of available reports Diagram data report O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis ais 3 Diagram Details for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Markov Chain Information Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Relex1 States information sito aoso OO O feperatomaly 20 states tanao TO re a ooo o Transitions information ae Rate Source Destination Failure 0 0001 Statel Aok B State A failed ok Initprob 1 B ok Performance 20 Initprob 0 Performance 10 Repair 0 01 State A failed otatel Aok B B ok ok Init prob 1 Init prob 0 Performance 20 Performance 1 0 anit B Fallurel0 0002 State A failed State4 4 and B hd Transition Matrix Report Diagram Details for Project TUTOR Of xj na Markov Transition Matrix Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Relex1 Transition matrix transition matrix q ij is transition rate from state to state in transitions hour 1 fonoor jp oooz fo z pos jo fomoo2 3 poz fo f ooo sb b p J Fa 2014 ALD Software Ltd ne RAM Commander User Manual Steady State Calculation Results Y Steady State Mode Results for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Markov Steady State Mode Calculation Results Project name TUTORIAL Markov diagram Test_1 State probabilities for steady state
301. eports menu select Tree the Report Selection dialog box opens 3 In the Type list box select Storage and Cycling 4 Enter values for other fields as necessary and choose OK RAM Commander displays the report in a report window see sample on the next page 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 235 8 2 1 2 6 Notes on Environments and Methods Standard environments are listed earlier in this manual see the Standard Environments paragraph Information below provides detailed information about some environments and explains how they are interpreted by specific reliability prediction methods BRITISH TELECOM HRD4 GB Ground Benign Nearly zero environmental stress with optimum conditions for operation and maintenance Typical applications are in main exchange buildings envronmentally controlled remote exchanges or cabinets including Case Repeater Equipment and environmentally controlled subscribers premises The equipment is operated in a protected environment free from significant shock and vibration with the temperature of the air immediately surrounding the component not exceeding 55 C and relative humidity rarely exceeding 70 at 15 C GF Ground Fixed Conditions less than ideal with some environmental stress and limited maintenance Typical applications are manholes remote terminals and areas in subscribed premises subject to shock and vibration or temperature and atmospheric variations GM Ground Mo
302. er List of RAM Commander modules contains Reliability Maintainability RBD Fault Tree Analysis Event Tree Analysis Safety Assessment Spare Parts optimization Derating FMECA and Testability Analysis Process amp Design FMEA FTA and more This manual is designed as installation and upgrade guide for IT staff course in using RAMC for new users and ongoing reference to program functions for users already working with the software 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Introduction RAM Commander User Manual Introduction This chapter tells you about RAM Commander its purpose its history and useful features RAM Commander Reliability Availability Maintainability Prediction and Analysis is a 32 bit integrated LAN compatible Windows software package for e System structure definition graphical presentation and impact e Reliability availability and maintainability prediction e Reliability and maintainability allocation with user defined complexity factors e Reliability and maintainability parameter trade offs and optimization in accordance with multiple mission profile definitions such as environment temperature and phase times for operating and non operating phases e Building maintaining and evaluating functional reliability block diagrams using a graphical interface e Reliability and availability estimation for a multitude of graphically presented system configurations e A definition of derating guideli
303. er Kemet E PEA data CIEEF Click to select the Open method data screen check box for checking and editing of the component data before inserting it into the tree or leave it cleared if you wish to create the component without additional editing Click OK 2 BE C36 17 T4916105M03545 1 2 490 004 If the component is found in the Library or recognized it will be added to the Tree 7 3 4 Item data editing To edit item data 1 Open the product tree view 2 Navigate to the desired item and select it 3 Double click the item if it is component or right click it and choose Edit from the popup menu 4 Item data screen will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Item Data General Logistics Operating Nonoperating Maintainability Derating Miscellaneous FMECA Family Ref Dez Receiver ltern type e Part number ACO004 Environment Profile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Eftectwelnhented from parent item Environment Temperature Delta FR PredictionCalculation Settings Method s lection user defined Method sa Failure distribution Exponential Failure Rate Reliability Data ER Sace Pre TE Field factor ltem FR Duty cycle E de Belo FR predicted 00202975 FA user defined 0 FR field FR allocated 2 Mule Factor 4dd factor Lluantity 163 Ka spec
304. er computes MTTR and Mct using the items and libraries current data These results appear in the Product tree view 11 4 3 3 Fault Isolation and Ambiguity In most products a few components are responsible for most of the product failures while the remaining components tend to function perfectly throughout the product s life This behavior is similar to the Pareto principle discussed in Reliability Analysis chapter As a product undergoes the diagnostic phase of repair the technician will first examine the problematic components in an attempt to locate the fault as quickly as possible This effort can be modeled using fault isolation To define the fault isolation scenario you first define up to five groups of parts N1 N2UN5 Each group is a subset of the next group that the technician examines N1 includes the set of parts examined first N2 includes the parts examined in N1 plus the next set of parts and so on If all sets of parts N1LIN5 are examined then in effect the technician has examined the entire product tree Associated with each part grouping is a probability of fault isolation This is the probability that the faulty Component is a member of any one of the examined sets Suppose you group all the problematic components for the first set N1 Then the probability X1 that the fault will be detected while examining the set of parts in group N1 will be high If the fault is not detected while examining N1 then the
305. er configuration with common database located on server RAM Commander Database contains multiple projects where each project is a folder containing all available studies and analysis types reliability safety Fault Trees etc Deployment See Getting Started Introduction paragraph for more information about installation models See also Getting Started Installation requirements paragraph Connectivity Import Export data from to text CSV Excel Access Flexible import Wizard and Report Generator Web services SOAP connectivity to FavWeb FRACAS RAM Commander calls FavoWeb web services Special format for electronic components library import and reliability data import GUI Language English Russian Chinese Other languages are available on demand Licensing Multiple flexible licensing models floating network license computer locked hardware key computer locked software license and more See Getting Started Licensing paragraph for more information about different licensing models O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Introduction Technology used Database Pervasive SQL MS Access Application Windows application MFC Some modules use NET Framework 2 0 Some modules use NET Framework 4 0 2 5 What you need to know To effectively operate the RAM Commander as well as understand concepts presented in this manual you need to know the following e Intermediate user knowledge and skills of Microsoft Windows and Microso
306. er day each system operates at the customer site 2014 ALD Software Ltd 16 3 2 16 3 2 1 16 3 2 2 Days per year the systems operate at the customer site Elapsed scenario years Repair turnaround time Number of days required to repair a failed item at the intermediate Intermediate maintenance level Repair turnaround time Number of days required to repair a failed item at the service depot Depot Unsupported Mission Length of time during which no repair or supply of spare parts is Time permitted required only for unsupported mission mode Required No Shortage Probability that there will be no shortage of the spare part Probability T Minimum initial number of spare parts Regular operation or Unsupported mission Choose Save Working with existing Scenarios You may add new scenarios and edit delete and copy the existing scenarios To copy a spare parts operation scenario 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the Quick Spare Calculation dialog box select the source scenario from the Scenario list box Choose Copy In the Scenario Name dialog box enter a name for the target scenario Use a string of up to eight characters Choose OK Edit the new scenario s parameters Choose Save RAM Commander saves the new scenario To delete a scenario Select the scenario from the Scenario list box then choose Delete and enter your confirmation You can easily generate new operation scenarios by copying
307. er should be installed Then multiple workstations may be installed for this server RAM Commander software main components and databases are located on the server 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started o Workstation Workstation Standalone configuration is better when users mainly work with local databases and also work in disconnected mode with their notebook computers Network configuration is better when there is a large number of users which work with common database In addition to RAM Commander software itself license is required for both RAM Commander installation configurations There are 4 licensing models Local USB USB plug which should be inserted into the USB port of PC where RAM plug Commander is installed May be exchanged among users and computers but grants access to its current holder only Network USB plug which should be inserted into the USB port of PC which is constantly Floating available through the network to all RAM Commander client PCs License Server USB plug Network plug contains purchased number of licenses which may be used A simultaneously and concurrently by multiple RAM Commander users Requires installation of HASP Plug Driver and HASP License Manager Windows Service License Server may be installed on the same computer where RAM Commander Server is installed Requirements on the license server Windows XP 7 2003 2008 Real PC not virtual PC with USB 2 0 port Possibility to communica
308. eractive instructions The plug driver will be installed 4 Now you may run RAM Commander Updating plug configuration To request plug configuration update To request a plug configuration update new modules and permissions etc please don t forget to send us a plug number 5 digit number written on the plug Note For the local white plug all operations are performed on the local computer where the plug is connected For the network red plug all operations are performed on the plug server computer where the plug is connected it means operations performed physically logging into the computer not through Remote Desktop etc To update plug using plug update file 1 Ifthe file you received is a ZIP archive first extract it 2 Run the WelnCfg utility from A L D Engineering program group in the Start menu or run Wclintcfg exe file from your RAM32 BIN folder on the computer where the hardware plug is physically attached to the computer parallel or USB port and the RAM Commander or HASP License Manager is installed Do not use Remote Desktop utility for it 3 Choose Edit by file from the Configuration menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started Configuration 4 L D Software Configuration Help Display Edit by command line Edit by File 4 Browse to the required directory and select the received file Edit Plug Configuration by file E E x Input file name PLUG_OUT DAT Cance
309. eral Part Data The first section of GPRD is the General Part Data screen The screen appears when you choose Edit or Create from the GPRD menu The screen contains Part Number Catalog Number Price and other information about the part General Part Mame HOODOO Catalog number ENODOOS Manufacturer IEH Description Hard Drive disk ltem Function Data Storage Family ltem code Source ot FA Reliability HM aintamability a Repair Distribution Exponential MET hours 0 1 Monoperating Miscellaneous ILS Price 90 USD Condemnation Rate O Weight Kg Shelf Lite Volume 0 002 m 3 FME CA Failure Modes list Cancel O 2014 ALD Software Ltd _ RAM Commander User Manual FMECA data Click the Failure Modes List button in General Part Data dialog box to see or edit Failure Modes list of the specific part Fart Fh Fat Name HOGQOQZ Fi Description Fi Ratio E sector data error Delete FM Cancel These failure modes can be used during FMECA analysis Get from GPRD Library in the Failure Mode column You may fill in the data in this table just by selecting the desired cells and typing 9 5 4 Field Failure Rate Tables Very often a reliability engineer has to deal with the problem of unspecified failure rates The GPRD FR Tables utility provides an effective solution to the problem of unspecified failure rates If you have existing field data f
310. erent phases 22 4 Building the Functional Tree When the Safety Module in specific project is opened for the first time the functional tree is empty only the tree root element exists User should build a hierarchical functional tree Tree building is started by adding successors child items to the tree root Then successors could be added to the root successors etc To add a successor child to the tree element e Select the tree element and then right click Choose Create from the pop up menu 2 Functional Tree for Project TEST on Drive D Edit Alt Enter Insert CEE Or e Select the tree element and press the F7 key The function data screen is displayed Function data 3 xl Function Control Aircraft Direction on the Ground Ecion Control Aircratt Direction on the Ground Cancel description Product Tree Dependency ID Reference Designator 2014 ALD Software Ltd 544 RAM Commander User Manual It contains the following information Function Description Product Tree List of product tree items which affect the Dependency specified function Use Add and Delete buttons below to edit this list of linked items Fill in the data and press Ok button New function will appear in the tree Functional Tree for Project TEST on Drive D EGP TEST a Control Aircraft Direction on the Ground ES Continue the tree building procedure by selecting tree element and creating
311. ermissions for running NET applications from intranet locations Solution Grant FullTrust security level to local intranet zone or to R RAMC32 BIN folder on all workstations The best way to achieve this is to run the following command using command prompt or Start gt Run menu c windows microsoft net framework v2 0 50727 caspol exe cg Locallntranet_Zone FullTrust Confirmation message will appear answer Yes If you wish to grant FullTrust to the required folder only issue the following command c windows microsoft net framework v2 0 5072 caspol exe m ag 1 2 url file R RAMC32 BIN FullTrust Confirmation message will appear answer Yes Then try running R RAMC32 BIN WordRepGenerator exe from the network again it should work now If you wish to insert such command to batch login script etc use additional commands to switch the prompting off and then on CasPol exe pp off c windows microsoft net framework v2 0 50727 caspol exe cg Locallntranet_Zone FullTrust CasPol exe pp off 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started tor Problem 2 MS Word reports generation does not work message about required NET Framework 2 0 appears Solution Install Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 take the setup package from ALD Installation CD RAMC Tools dotnetfx20 exe or from Microsoft web site http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid O0856eacb 4362 4b0d 8edd aab15c5e04fo amp displaylang en
312. ers RAM Commander Hierarchy mode selection field selection Import Vizard Step 3 of 4 PEREO izard needs to know which RAM Commander field conesponds to each data column Tree hierarchy Plain plain list la field name from held list for each column Assembly on first line Start at row Depth RefiDlest Manufacturer Part Name Dept j z ElecBox EB E 0001 MotherBrd MB E 001012 C2 PHILIPS CA1 206 232 ES ANA CF25 1003 TR C4 LAL AM10 100CT c5 KOA CN244TE101 CE PHILIPS ACOSOSFADIUIKA C M2326909 2001 71 3576151 8386 U3 55416100FT 08053610424 7 24 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 d lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Data preview The mapping screen displays a preview of your import file In each column first row displays original column name in your import file if available second column provides selection with the list of corresponding RAM Commander fields and all the rest rows show the preview values from import file You need to go through all the columns and select a corresponding RAM Commander field from the list of fields in the second row for each data column Just click the drop down list arrow on each column s header in the table and then select the corresponding field The RAM Commander fields are grouped accordingly to the module they belong to e General Family Item type Part number description etc see ltem data editing for more information Operating Environment temperature
313. erts as their subjective evaluation of the situation This expert ranking gives much better results when multiple expert opinions are obtained and processed RAM Commander provides option to perform Severity Occurrence and Detection evaluation by team of experts storing opinion of each expert and calculating resulting mean media value W eam Evaluation Hame Print board Potential Failure Mode Bad assembly Cancel End Effect of Failure Product is unusable Potential Cause of Failure Lack of material Controls Computerized stock control prediction option Start Voting tat Vaina Start Voting Member Severity Occurence Detection Expert 2 Expert 3 O Mean 5 Median 5 Expert opinions may be collected manually by entering expert opinion in the table above using the keyboard and automatically when all experts are using special electronic wireless voting devices 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 525 SSunVote la Ze a de Se E To 8n g To use the team collaboration 1 Define the experts team 2 Start entering the FMEA data for each cause enter Team Evaluation mode and collect expert opinions manually or automatically 21 7 1 To define the expert team 1 From the Diagram menu Choose Team Definition team members list will appear 2 Enter team members names and other details 3 If you plan to use automatic data collection using voting devices enter also voting device ID
314. es srta i 403 Spares and Level of Repair Decisions o0oocccccccnnnccnncconoconananononnnonananoronnnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnrrnrrrnnnnnnrrrrrrnananarrnnnnns 404 7 SUMIMANY iaa 404 Part 17 Markov Analysis 406 INITAatindg MatkoOV MOQUIE nia A a A as a 407 2 Drawing the diagrami sia A 408 Daw aS ALG a E E N 408 Daw A Tans MO a erroneo osito arial 409 E AL e A leon sue acsaneeee 410 Trans Hion Datani a E a a A 411 Diagram data Raras 412 WOrKINO WIA Ann kaa aAa aaa ar eA EEAO 413 gt Calcula tiO Munic rr a a aa aaa Eai 413 O a a a E a e a a a a a a 414 2014 ALD Software Ltd Contents Part 18 FMECA 422 1 Initiating FMECA module cvrccaraca za viaria tU nnnm 423 2 FMECA Module BASICS sisia e a a 424 gt Configurating FMECA Modul viril 426 FMEA Or FMECA cu temee tants ad utdvsunsdvevet a A A 426 FMECA LIBrar y oi ie 427 FMECA Grid CUSTOM IZ ALION ri a a a Aia aaa a 428 Phase selechom sia a 429 A FMECA LIDA FGS morrones a a a a ts ets paces a sae sees 430 TO acces ss FMECA IDAS ci a a e Ea RA iS 431 FMECA Libraries Definition di EA A a add 431 G nerating a Library AAA am aeaa E AEE Eaa a aE E EPA AO Ean a ERa AKAAKA 432 Global Change of the End Effect Library ooooncncccccccnnnnncicococonananonononnnannnoronnnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnanannrrnnnnas 432 Copy FMECA Libraries Between Projects ccccccsseessseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeesseeeeseneaassaeeesseenaneneeessooes 432 9 Entering FMECA da
315. esistors 95 RF and HF SMD ceramic capacitors 2014 ALD Software Ltd 232 O O 3 3 D 5 Q D C D 5 2 FIDES type RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type RF and HF inductors Inductive RE ang PE inductors 97 RF HF Fixed Attenuator Miscellaneous Microwave Attenuator fixed RF HF Fixed load 50 Ohm Miscellaneous Microwave Load fixed 50 Ohm RF HF Fixed Filter Filter ICON ANE rele fixed 100 RF HF Fixed power divider Miscellaneous Microwave Power Divider fixed RF HF Variable attenuator Miscellaneous Microwave Attenuator variable Microwave 102 RF HF Variable tuneable filter Filter Tuneable Filter variable Passive Miscellaneous components 103 RF HF Passive components with ferrites O ferrites 104 RF HF circulator Circulator 105 RF HF isolator Isolator 106 RF HF phase shifter Phase Shifter 107 RF HF Surface wave filters Filter Surface wave filters 108 COTS boards Onboard electronic 192 195 PWB On Board functions Functions 109 Various subassemblies LCD screens el LCD Screens 110 Various subassemblies Hard disks IDE 209 Miscellaneous IDE hard disk Various subassemblies Hard disks SCSI SCSI hard disk 112 Various subassemblies CRT screens eae CRT Screens _ _ _ 113 Various subassemblies AC DC voltage 215 Miscelaneos AC DC voltage converters converters Various subas
316. ess the left button move the mouse towards the other node When the mouse cursor is inside the other node release the left button The link has been created and selected since a handle is displayed at the center of this link You may double click the link to open link properties dialog where you may change link text style width and color Multiselection You can select several nodes by clicking them with the mouse while holding the Shift or Ctrl keys You can also select nodes only or nodes together with links O 2014 ALD Software Ltd MI RAM Commander User Manual 21 4 4 21 4 5 21 4 6 Stretching a Link Bring the mouse cursor into the link handle press the left button move the mouse and release the left button You have created a new link segment It has 3 handles allowing you to add or remove segments The handle at the intersection of two segments allows you to remove a segment move it with the mouse so that the two segments are aligned and when these two segments are approximately aligned release the left button Drawing a Reflexive Link Select a node by clicking on it Bring the mouse cursor into the handle at the center of the selected node Press the left button move the mouse and release the left button when the mouse is still inside the selected node You have created a reflexive link i e a link whose origin and destination are the same Delete You can delete selected diagram element
317. ethods GJB FIDES IEC 217 Plus may provide different list atera peter O AUR arme Unas tack AUB aroame Unrate soms O puo Abome unan Gago mea arrean Missle Fight mee mite re iM missien O 7 3 5 7 3 5 1 7 3 5 2 Product Tree 175 Additional operations with items Deleting items 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Click on the item you want to delete OR Select multiple items using MS Windows standard line selection conventions 3 From the Tree menu choose Delete OR press the Delete button OR right click the item and choose Delete from the pop up menu 4 Enter your confirmation in the Attention dialog box select Yes for single item delete or Yes to all to approve the deletion of multiple selected items at once 9 RAM Commander updates the Product tree view and the database Caution Be careful when deleting items from the Product tree view There is no Undo facility to easily recover deleted items See also Organize procedure later in this chapter Copy Move items The RAM Commander Product tree view provides support of the drag and drop and copy and paste functions You can copy branches and individual items between projects or inside one project To copy items in the same project 1 Open the Product tree view 2 Select one or more items to copy using usual MS Windows item selection conventions 3 Choose Copy from the Item menu or press Ctrl C or click Copy on the toolbar 4 Select the
318. ety module uses FTA for failure probability calculation FTA in turn uses Reliability and FMECA for basic events probabilities calculation E Prasti TLITORAL MHEL on Gree E oe i Cement Anaki es D Hare Oty Op FAGE Siau j ir Comstitioning System i 1 aai 1013 ERELEED SvSTEM 1s 1 15 758046 MEA 1 iG CE PROTECTION STE a 1 HELENE diz EPAREENTAL COTA ovat a 1 22140 FLOW CONTROL VALVE Te E i PACH MLET FL pop 2 mna GJ FACE INLET E SKA A 3 i EN PALE INLET Ae SURE SENSO a 11 i a FH HHE EE Di Dergi Alpha Cane 20H Deponption Bets Descriptor fete Sev El Valve abr related HFC DI See component 13 Enoneous FIC ponton 100 Mo stent 1 000 FHEA tel naci n debeci d by IASC a 5 PRD SIMA Ho ingact on ECS operation bir lene 1 ad perforce SIS Wave aema radcabed FE 0 041 Sescompenent 1 3 Enoneout PCY posbon 1 000 Loss of ore Pack Leda of 1 000 he FHEA fref ndca on detecten te ASC one Bleed TEC LL FROG PCY detected linked af CRIT a MEL 6 has 11 Lowa of auocialed Paci Loss ol sepccupted Bleed THC El eu ER Furtboral Tree dr Preeti TUTORIAL HMEL on Orie E 14 a tne Pack ECS cooing UUI Ha eect inai Nare Desompiion PADE AT ASEH Catan postha comio pester CPCS F abae Condition Phaea Eiez Charni stii Aggera Anmuncisted bhla absence al nrunciabsd sbeenos ofan mapa Mar nunca bull st 0 of a puppay lo a i a corn en PO 1 conditioning tem wra ricino pubs Mo a pupplp do cn
319. everity to get a list of severities The list contains possible categories of failure severity on the whole system operation level By default there are 6 severity categories from Catastrophic to No effect To create a new category just find the last empty table line select the first cell Category and type in the name Press enter switch to the next field and type description Press enter and type rank one or two symbol code like IV or B in the last field Working with End Effects Switch to the page of the screen called End Effect End Effects EE library contains the list of all possible consequences of different failures on an overall system operation O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis osa To create a new EE just find the last empty table line select the first cell EE Description and type in the phase name Press enter select the next table field FMEA Severity and choose a severity for FMECA calculations Select Safety Severity cell and choose a severity for Safety module Then enter S R objective and Design objective S R objective is a maximal allowed probability of specified End Effect defined by safety authorities Design objective is a maximal allowed probability of specified End Effect defined by internal safety reliability department Design objective is lower than S R objective Please note that End Effects may have different safety severities and different objective probabilities for diff
320. ew projects based on previous ones e Context sensitive help Press F1 at any time to view online help about a dialog box menu or window e Multiple windowing You can open several windows simultaneously allowing easy access to information in different sections of one project or in different projects e Network operation You can run RAM Commander under LAN allowing you to install the software on one computer and making it available to all network users e Variable access privileges System managers assign various access levels to RAM Commander users You can protect sensitive information and provide the flexibility for easy information flow between users e Product tree presentation Navigating through a project is very similar to navigating through any commonly used hierarchical structures such as exploring folders in MS Windows e Operating data grids Many of the RAM Commander features use a grid displaying only the most important fields that allows editing essential data directly on the grid e Automatic tree recalculation option There is an option of automatic recalculation when defining the project properties to ensure that the RAM Commander output is based on the latest updated data e Report Generator e Documents Generation using MS Word templates Technical Overview RAM Commander is a 32 bit MS Windows Application which can work in both standalone mode on a single computer with locally located database and in client serv
321. ew End Effect line will appear in the grid Edit this line using the same procedure that was used for the first EE creation If more than one EE for a single FM NHE is specified conditional probability Beta should be specified for each EE Sum of Betas for End Effects coming from single cause FM NHE should not exceed 1 and usually is equal to 1 8 Specify Detection methods if required see Testability Analysis Module paragraph later in this 2014 ALD Software Ltd chapter 9 Provide additional information Remarks Compensating Provisions Actions etc directly typing the data into corresponding cells of the FMECA data table Fl WHE EE l Detection Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta Description Beta Seventy Bearing Failure 4 80 1 3 Mo movement 1 000 Communicatic _ 14 000 II Visual Inspection i Loss au Fall Aun fter Strt 0 230 1 3 No movement 1 000 Communicatic _ 4 000 Il Visual Inspection AS Loss a Fails to Start 0 780 1 3 Mo movement 1 000 Communicatic 4 000 II Mole receive Loss test gt Winding Failure 0 310 1 3 Wrong movement 1 000 Cormnunicatic 1 000 Ill Degradation 7 10 If you need to enter additional information and FMECA grid does not contain relevant fields for it see FMECA Grid Customization paragraph earlier in this chapter Repeat the procedure above to enter all Failure Modes of all relevant Product Tree items 18 5 1 Entering Next Higher Effects During the FMECA analysis
322. ew selects a more suitable airport Critical 518 Aircraft Fault Crew notifles emergency ground support Tree procedures for and prepares occupants for landing of normal and overrun Crew uses spoilers and thrust reserve modes For Help press F1 Functional tree may have unlimited hierarchy depth For each function user may enter unlimited number of potential failures For each failure user should provide information about relevant phases end effect on the whole product end effect classification severity and other details depending on selected standard approach System Safety Assessment or Probabilistic Safety Assessment requires quantitative evaluation of failure probability for each failure condition Evaluation can be performed using RBD FTA or Markov chain User should select at least one safety assessment mean RBD FTA Markov diagram to each failure condition RBD calculation result unreliability FTA calculation result probability of tree root occurrence or Markov chain calculation result unreliability will be taken as failure probability During the SSA System Safety Assessment these calculated probabilities will be compared to the Safety Reliability S R objectives and Design objectives to make sure that the designed system meets the requirements 2014 ALD Software Ltd 540 RAM Commander User Manual The picture below illustrates linkage between Product tree FMECA FTA and Safety FHA modules Saf
323. existing scenarios and editing individual fields 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis 395 16 3 2 3 To edit a scenario Select the scenario from the Scenario list box enter your changes and choose Save 16 3 3 Generating Spare Parts Reports After defining scenario you can generate a report detailing the following data for each spare part e Recommended stock that provides the required No Shortage Probability e Achieved No Shortage Probability To generate a spare parts report 1 Compute reliabilities in Operating mode see Chapter 10 2 In the Quick Spare Calculation dialog box select a scenario from the Scenario list box 3 Choose Calculate the Spare parts Report Options dialog box opens Spare parts Report Options Report tems replaced ir M Organizational Cancel To Intermediate Depot Report depth E 4 Set the Organizational Intermediate and Depot check boxes to include parts replaced at these levels in the report 9 In the Report depth field enter the number of product tree levels to be included in the report 6 Choose Prepare Report RAM Commander displays the spare parts report in a window You can manage the spare parts report using the techniques described in Chapter RAM Commander Fundamentals Reports 16 4 Spare Parts Optimization Rarely can you purchase or ship spare parts in unlimited quantities Budget constraints require the optimization of spare par
324. f Des field value identical calculation assumes that it is the same block Monte Carlo RBD is computed using simulation techniques employing the distributions specified for each element MTBCF and R t Calculates the RBDs mean time between critical failures and builds R t graph To calculate an RBD 1 Activate the RBD window 2 From the Calculation menu choose the type of computation RAM Commander calculates the RBD e The Calculated Reliability and Steady State Availability are displayed in the status bar for analytical and identical calculations For Help press Fl U4 26049e 00 R 0 999996 e Automatic analytical recalculation if possible occurs after an element s data has changed or after a mission time change use RBD Configuration option from RBD menu to change mission time e MTBCF and Monte Carlo calculation results are displayed on separate additional windows which will be explained later in this chapter 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 355 13 3 2 Formulas The next paragraphs provides details on RBD calculation formulas You may find the information about reliability and availability calculations of individual blocks Reliability Distributions Availability Distributions Calculation of basic configurations like serial and parallel connection between blocks is described in the Basic calculations paragraph K out of N blocks calculation is explained separately by paragraph
325. f redui closed from outboard to inboard in flow from out wing tanks Other valves in inboard in wi a Wing allow fuel passage valves in wir inboard passage inbi Fails to prevent flow outboard 0 500 Flapper valve failed 1 1 1 Possible shift in fuel distribution 1 000 Possible shifl during maneuvering open in wing during maneuvering distribution ir Maneveninic b See chapter 18 FMECA for information about FMECA analysis module Additional possibility in FMECA analysis required for MSG 3 is specification of multiple causes of Failure Mode All possible causes of a single failure mode should be specified in the Cause column Put double backslash delimiter between different causes to perform MSG 3 analysis step 5 separately for each of the causes If Cause column does not appear in FMECA grid switch it on using the FMECA Grid Customization options 24 1 2 4 Step 4 Failure Effect Categorization The purpose of this step is categorization of failures MSG 3 document lists 5 failure effect categories 5 Evident Safety 6 Evdent Operational Evident Economic 8 Hidden Safety 9 Hidden Economic The current MSG 3 step provides decision making diagrams for selecting appropriate category for each failure effect 1 Select top element or highest manageable MSI item in the product tree 2 Choose 4 Failure Effect Categorization MSG 3 step in the button bar 3 List of failure effects will appear only main
326. f you selected Multi Environment in the Type list box make one or more selections from the Environments list box e If you selected Multi Item in the Type list box choose the Delete button to remove items from the Item list or choose the Add button the Select Tree item dialog box opens Select an item from the tree and choose OK Repeat to add more items O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Analysis 287 6 In the Result field select F R for failure rate or MTBF for mean time between failures In the Output field select Text or Graph 8 In the Lowest Temperature and Highest Temperature fields enter the lowest and highest temperatures to be included in the report 9 Enter the number of temperature points in the of points field The number of temperature intervals equals the number of points minus 1 10 Choose OK N The text or graph versions of the Temperature curve report will appear the example below shows Multi Envronment FR curves for GB GF and GM environments between 0 and 100 degrees Temperature Curve Temperature C 10 2 Pareto Pareto reports display items in order of contribution to overall failure For example if an assembly contains two components a diode failing at a rate of 5 0 and a capacitor failing at a rate of 0 5 then the assembly s overall failure rate is 5 5 The diode contributes 5 5 5 100 91 while the capacitor contributes 0 5 5 5 100 9 In a Pareto analysis the diode
327. failure modes of product tree items should be specified For each failure mode it s consequences should be specified Next Higher Effects and End Effects See FMECA Basics paragraph for more explanations and examples For one failure mode multiple NHE may be specified for each NHE the affecting assembly should be specified RAM Commander FMECA allows very high flexibility of FM NHE EE chain definition and supports the following cases A simplest case Failure Mode has a single effect NHE on a single higher level assembly which in turn has single effect on the whole system level EE for example FM A causes NHE B which causes EE C FM NHE EE Description Alpha Cause ION Description Beta Description Beta Severity A 1 000 1 3 E 1 000 C 1 000 Il B Failure Mode affects an assembly other than the parent assembly for example some failure of hydraulic system affects some assembly power engine system or for example you wish to specify that component failure affects the whole system without specifying all the effects on the block assembly subsystem etc of that component C a single Failure Mode has multiple consequences NHE for example failure mode A may 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual cause NHE B or NHE C or NHE D each with its own conditional probability Flv NHE Description Alpha Cause IDM Description Beta A 1 000 1 3 B 0 3 1 5 L 0 7 D Failure Mode consequences ar
328. ffect on operating capability Categorization Results Failure Effect Category FEC Remarks l Cancel FEC Description Evident Operational Yes the occurrence of a Functional Failure will be evident to operating crew during the normal No the Functional Failure or secondary damage resulting from the Functional Failure will not have Not applicable for category 6 Yes the Functional Failure will have a direct adverse effect on operating capability 5 After decision for all items is taken the items list will display the results 2014 ALD Software Ltd 578 RAM Commander User Manual 6 Press Ok to close the failure effects list 24 1 2 5 Step 5 Task Selection The purpose of this step is selection of appropriate maintenance type types for each failure cause taking into consideration failure effect category FEC and other factors MSG 3 document provides maintenance type selection guidelines for each FEC The current MSG 3 step provides decision making diagrams for selecting appropriate maintenance type 1 Select top element or highest manageable MSI item in the product tree 2 Choose 5 Task Selection MSG 3 step in the button bar 3 List of failure causes will appear only maintenance significant items effects will appear MSG 3 Step 5 Task Selection ATA ltem Function Functional failure Failure Effect Failure Cause FEC FEC Name Tasks Selected Tasks Defined 28 10 00 Fue
329. for and prepares occupants for landing of normal and overrun Crew Uses spoilers and thrust reserve modes For Help press F1 4 1 8 Stage 8 Additional Analysis Types RAM Commander contains also additional analysis types like Stress analysis Spare parts RCM MSG 3 MMEL Dispatch Reliability Weibull and more 4 1 9 Stage 9 Next steps recurrent analysis After all the required analysis types are done in RAM Commander all the required reports are printed out your product is designed analyzed and certified as reliable and safe RAM Commander may do for you the following 1 Export product data to product monitoring failure reporting system like ALD FRACAS 2 Export product data to life cycle cost decision making software like ALD DLCC 3 Reuse the project data for next versions revisions of your product or for similar product system analysis 4 Perform recurrent analysis on the same system based on some new requirements or field data coming from failure reporting system for example import real field failure statistics and perform reliability analysis FMECA safety analysis etc based on real MTBFs instead of predicted ones 2014 ALD Software Ltd ta RAM Commander User Manual 4 2 RAM Commander Data Flow The diagram below provides illustration to the RAM Commander process and explains the data flow between different available analysis types and software modules Field data BOK Yendor Data l
330. for each team member and give them the corresponding voting device with the specified ID Keypad ID for each participant may be set manually or automatically If keypad ld is known FMEA facilitator may ust enter it into the Keypad ID field near the corresponding person name If keypad Id is unknown facilitator should select specific person in the list press Assign selected keypad ID button and ask the selected person to press any button on his her keypad Its ID will be stored in the table 4 Press Ok 21 7 2 To collect rankings manually 1 While working with FMEA grid on the main FMEA module screen Right click on FMEA table line with Failure Mode and Cause data and choose Team Evaluation form the pop up menu 2 Team evaluation data screen for the specific Failure Cause will appear 3 Let each team member evaluate the criteria and enter the ranking into the corresponding column and row of the table If a team member is absent or doesn t have a value leave symbol 4 After all members values are obtained you may choose mean or median method of averaging and press Ok to place the resulting data into the FMEA table 2014 ALD Software Ltd 526 RAM Commander User Manual 21 7 3 To collect rankings automatically 1 Right click on FMEA table line with Failure Mode and Cause data and choose Team Evaluation form the pop up menu 2 Team evaluation data screen for the specific Failure Cause will appear The screen contai
331. for elements see Multiselection above Select Delete on the Item menu or Right click the mouse and select Edit from the pop up window 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 515 21 4 7 Copy 4 Paste You can copy paste a selected diagram element for elements see Multiselection above inside the diagram or between different diagrams Simply select items links and nodes then select Copy from the Item menu OR press Ctrl C OR right click the mouse and select Copy from the pop up window Then choose a diagram to insert items into select Paste from the Item menu OR press Ctrl V OR right click the mouse and select Paste from the pop up window Note that diagram items are copied with all the corresponding data in the data table FM s Causes etc 21 4 8 Sub diagrams FMEA sub diagrams are similar to sub RBDs an unlimited number of nested sub processes or sub parts may be created for each diagram element part or process Open FMEA diagram Right click a diagram item Choose Sub FMEA from the pop up menu A EL J Edit Alt Enter Delete F Failure Modes d eT The item s sub diagram is displayed on the screen or if a sub diagram was not created previously for the item a new empty sub diagram is displayed You can work with it the same way as with the basic diagram The number of nested diagrams is unlimited For better orientation between nest
332. ft Office e Fundamentals of reliability and maintainability prediction modeling e Depending on module selection you need to know also theory and practice of such analysis types as FTA FMECA be familiar with specific standards MIL STD 1629 SAE ARP 4761 etc With this background you can start using RAM Commander in a quick and efficient manner 2 6 Getting Help There is a number of different sources of information on RAM Commander software In addition to this manual you can also access online knowledge base for registered customers only contact ALD Software Technical support for link and access details online manual at http www aldsoftware com download ramc UserManual html index html and ALD Software Technical support Information about software updates hot fixes and service packs is available on our website at http www aldsoftware com download ramc RAMC_Updates html Direct email support is available from the ALD Software Technical Support team at support ald co il Find more information visiting our websites www aldservice com www aldsoftware com Please tell us what you think about out software and services using ALD Software Feedback Form ALD provides training for software products general and specialized at ALD headquarters or at customer s location e RAM Commander basic training e RAM Commander advanced training e Module specific training o Reliability Prediction and Analysis o Failure Analysis F
333. g Start vatra Start voting H Member Severity Occurence Detection 1 Expert 1 3 E J Expert 2 g M 3 Expert 3 A 4 El 4 Expert 4 p a Mean 7 E Mediar 7 5 SunVote company hardware is used for that purpose The required set of hardware consists of USB receiver and a number of voting keypads with 10 voting keys unos unos unos h A amp b 3 h 3 de 5 gt k amp amp d amp gt i E B i E b i E A wa 0 wa wa Me AAA Voting system hardware is not supplied with standard RAM Commander delivery and should be ordered separately Voting system software components are not installed with the standard RAM Commander installation too see the next paragraph for detailed installation instructions 21 7 4 1 To install and configure the Voting Syste m Pre installation requirements e RAM Commander 8 1 or later version installation CD 1 SunVote USB Receiver PVS 3000 O e Number of SunVote W50 or W52 keypads with active CR2032 batteries e PC with CDROM and free USB 2 0 port Installation procedure 1 Install RAM Commander During the installation select FMEA Voting API checkbox on the Select Components screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Select Components Choose the components Setup will metal Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to install Description J Space Required on D 3020 K Space Available on D oo OF K
334. g folder ALD Licensing Server Specify the path to ALD Licensing Server shared working folder License erveraorkingF older Browse Specify full UNC path or path to mapped network dive and folder ou should have full access nghts to this folder SavebClose Cancel 6 Press the Browse button and open the license manager shared working folder on the license server select the ServerLicense cfg file which should be located in this folder and press Ok Then 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started press the Save amp Close button to finish the configuration Now you may start working with RAM Commander software 3 5 Running RAM Commander When RAM Commander is installed and license is installed and configured you may start using the software New Start menu program group will be created by RAM Commander Installation Wizard called ALD Engineering yr 4 L 0 Engineering RAM Commander Ma Tools a Configuration Report re E Hasp Plug Driver 3 Hasp Plug Manager _ Licensing Wizard pa User Manager Six new icons will be added to your shortcuts in the ALD Engineering program group as the result of the installation process RAN User Manager Configuration Hasp Plug Hasp Plug Licensing Commander Report Driver Manager Wizard e RAM Commander click to run RAM Commander Application e User Manager click to change the name of the system manager e Licensing Wizard used to conf
335. g modes However reliability calculations are made for the current analysis mode That is if you are in operating mode RAM Commander performs the reliability calculation for operating mode only it does not perform the calculation for non operating mode To compute reliability predictions for non operating mode you must set the current analysis to non operating mode see the Selecting Current Analysis paragraph If you entered all your tree data in operating mode you can use the Translate function to migrate the relevant data to non operating mode Choosing suitable Reliability Prediction Method RAM Commander supports more than 30 different reliability prediction methods Different methods use different calculation models and assumptions use different input data and may give different results for the same component Some metods are suitable for mechanical components only some for electronic some methods can t provide prediction results for some temperature ranges some old methods do not provide results for new component types like 64 bit microprocessors in old MIL 217 etc All these characteristics should be taken into consideration during the method selection ALD Ltd does not invent the reliability prediction methods we just implement and computerize the calculation models described in officially published standards That s why RAM Commander user manual does not provide help and detailed instructions to specific reliability metho
336. g module s pecific information To edit top item data 1 Open product tree view 2 Select the highest level tree item for the newly created project it will be the only item in the tree 3 Right click the item and choose Edit from the popup menu 4 Item data screen will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Top item MM aintainability Reference designator TUTORIAL Description Communication System Level of repair Organizational Fault lsolation to Al Quantity NI 1 1 Catalog number ND Part name Communication System Operating Nonoperating N3 Environment Environment a ee eee RE GF GF NA Fixed Temp 35 E Fixed Temp 25 e Ambiguity Factor Current Environment GF Eur Temp FR predicted FR allocated Moe 1 Current Environment GF Cur Temp 25 Cur Ne E FR predicted FR allocated MTTRa hours Confidence level MTTA hours Mict max hours D 70 0 374304 0 518208 0 374304 OK Jj Cance Burn in Temperature FC Burn in Time Hours The table below provides explanations for dialog fields abbreviations ield Description ur Temp Actual current temperature R allocated i i Allocated failure rate Takes effect only if FR source is Allocated Number of on off cycles per 1000 hrs Current number of on off cycles per 1000 hrs set to parent s Nc if in Nc field Level of repair Inapplicab
337. ge Probability and the minimum number of spare parts you want to keep on hand 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis 393 16 3 1 To add an operation scenario 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu select Spare Parts then Quick Calculation the Quick Spare Calculation dialog box opens Guick Spare Calculation Scenario name ET E n Scenario Mo of systems in the field Operation hours per day Copy Operation days per pear m Delete Prediction period years 10 A 20 Save Repair turnaround time Intermediate days Repair turnaround time Depot days BU Close Repair turnaround time Supplier days BU Calculate Repair turnaround time Manufacturer days 30 Unsupported Mission Time days Md 365 Calculation request Required No Shortage Probability NSPREG 03 Minimurn spare parte quantity MINATY Mode Unsupported mission Optimization Select point by Criterion NSP Budget 300000 of points 10 Cost orice U weight L volume U 3 Choose Add 4 In the Scenario Name dialog box enter a name for the scenario Use a string of up to eight characters 9 Choose OK 6 In the Quick Spare Calculation dialog box enter the necessary changes to scenario s parameters in the Scenario and Calculation request group boxes No of systems in the Number of actual systems in operation field Operation hours per day Hours p
338. go MMH go SC MMH py MMH yy MMH cay MMEypy MMH oy AS _ jel MA O a Ay j l 2014 ALD Software Ltd MMPICAL average calibration MMH MMP VER average verification MMH MMA sy average Start up MMH number of replaceable items on the next lower level of the product tree failure rate of the jth replaceable item ambiguity factor The value of the ambiguity factor S is used in calculating the MTTR for an assembly 11 2 6 Maintainability Allocation Maintainability allocation for each i child of the current item is computed according to the formula as LA san y Y Sor Met son MPL item Wa son AAA son Lesom Oy son where Met son allocated Mct of i child weight factor for maintainability allocation quantity of identical lower level items failure rate of i child 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 303 11 3 Preliminary Steps Before Maintainability Analysis stage you have to provide the following information using other RAM Commander modules e The Product Tree Bill of materials e The failure rates associated with each replaceable item using the reliability prediction module Then you may switch to Maintainability mode to start working with maintainability libraries and perform maintainability calculations To switch to the Maintainability Mode 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Configuration 3 In
339. grams e There can be an unlimited number of diagrams in the project e All diagrams in the same project use the same events library To edit an existing diagram select it in the list and click OK To create a new diagram enter it s name in the edit box and click OK You will get an ETA diagram screen RAM Commander for Windows Event Tree Explosion for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C i l a x Event Tree Item Calculation Reports Library Tools view Window Help x AER NR DAX 4 SH S a Initiating event Start of fire Sprinkler system does not function Fire alarm is not activated Outcome Fire alarm is not activated True Sprinkler system P 0 001 does not function True SE ire alarm is no gt ge a cam 005 Start of fire True 8 P 0 Explosion TE Damage P 0 01 Sprinkler system P 0 001 P 92e 006 does not function False as ire alarm is no Damage activated False 999 P 0 00791208 Start of fire False Minor damage P 0 002 For Help press F1 NUM Diagram consists of events vertical columns and gates The first event is initial event the event which consequences should be analyzed The last rightmost vertical column is consequences column which contains all possible outcomes Between them regular events are situated 2014 ALD Software Ltd Event Tree Analysis 499 A variety of available options scrolling zooming etc help you to view the diagram in the best
340. graph earlier in this chapter 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 275 9 5 4 6 Failure Rate Table Formulae When using a failure rate table enter the reliability data actually observed at specified temperatures RAM Commander then extrapolates failure rates for temperatures outside the specified domain and interpolates failure rates for temperatures within the specified domain The Interpolation and Extrapolation works differently for Electronic Electro Mechanical and for Mechanical parts Pay attention to Family selection in the GPRD library General data screen seneral Part Reliability Data General Part Name HODOU Catalog number CNOUOUS Manufacturer IBM Description Hard Drive disk ltem Function Data Storage Source of FA Interpolation and Extrapolation for Electronic Electro Mechanical parts Interpolation and Extrapolation is performed using RIAC Reliability Toolkit formulas for compound electronic equipment GPRD Operating Part Marne HDDO02 Environment F Uze for conversion Tmas 150 SOLUCE User Defined Temperature MTBF MTBF lisi 0 0 10 0 30 0 35 0 81000 00 ad gun Delete 60 0 70 0 Edit 80 0 AE ai Cony to Envy 100 0 Redraw 110 0 Tic 120 0 0 30 40 0 i W 30 w 100 110 120 130 140 1 130 0 140 0 FR or MTBF interpolation extrapolation it done according to provided FA temperature points For electronic family componen
341. grated with Product tree Reliability Maintainability FMECA modules Safety assessment module performing tasks required by safety standards like SAE ARP 4781 MIL STD 882 and others FHA PHA SSA SHA O amp SHA analysis Integrated with Product Tree FMECA and FIA modules Master Minimum Equipment List MMEL is a document which lists the equipment that may temporarily be inoperative subject to certain conditions whilst maintaining an acceptable level of safety as intended in the applicable documents MMEL analysis is required for all aircraft manufacturers to certify aircraft safety in different aviation authorities such as FAA EASA etc RAM Commander integrated MMEL module supports Master Minimum Equipment List generation using Reliability FMECA FHA Safety and FTA modules All the modules are integrated into single software package and stored in a single database Each RAM Commander project database is a briefcase of different analysis types performed by the modules stated above for specific product device or system Project Overview Project Information Reliability Analysis Failure Analysis A a Mame TUTORIAL Reliability Block Diagrams Open FMECA pen Available with Testabilit Available 6 diagrams ity Revision 1 Te Markov Analysis Open Fault Tree Analysis Open Description Sample Communication System Available diagrams Done 3 trees i i re Mission Profile Event Tree Analysis Open E Availab
342. h Entry dialog box do the following e Open the product tree navigator by choosing Tree Location Navigate through the product tree and select the item you want to perform the reliability growth analysis on Choose OK or e Manually enter a reference designator in the Ref Des field the project name is default 9 Enter a value for Cumulative Test Time time since the testing was started and till the specific failure occurred and optionally remarks about the failure and failure date 6 Choose OK RAM Commander updates the reliability growth list with the new values The next step is to compute the reliability growth planning parameters To compute reliability growth planning parameters After failures are inserted into Reliability Growth table you may specify the required MTBF and calculate a Required Test Time by known Growth Rate a or b Growth Rate a by known Test Time To perform the calculation 1 From the Reliability Growth menu choose RG Planning the RG Planning dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Growth 385 RG Planning Initial Time 100 OK Initial kT BF 1500 Cancel 3000 Required MT BF Reg Test Time 215443 Growth Fate 0 030303 2 Enter a value for the required MTBF 3 Enter value for one of the two following fields e Required Test Time e Growth Rate see formula in the next paragraph 4 Move the cursor to another field RAM Commander computes a
343. h MHE EE Description Alpha Cause IDK Description Beta Description Beta Severity 1 4 1 000 123 E 1 000 No effect 1 000 123 No effect 1 000 MEE if a 5 Somme eee 4 Edit the NHE description as described in earlier in the To define a single NHE paragraph and change the IDN if required as described in the To select affected assembly paragraph 5 Enter conditional probability Beta for the new NHE Total sum of Betas of effects of a single failure mode is usually equal to one 2014 ALD Software Ltd 438 RAM Commander User Manual 18 5 1 4 Fh MHE EE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta Description Beta Severity 1 A 1 000 123 E 0 300 D 1 000 1 2 3 C 0 700 E 1 000 11 You may use the Normalize Beta function right click the FM description and select Normalize Beta from the popup menu to change all Betas so that their sum is equal to 1 6 Enter End Effect information of this new NHE as decribed in Entering FMECA data for Item paragraph 7 Proceed with steps 3 4 to enter all possible consequences of this Failure Mode with conditional probability of each one of them To define NHE for NHE When the product tree depth is more than 3 levels the FM NHE EE consequences chain may be longer See the following example Ref Des ID Name ty E Aircraft 1 1 System 1 subsystem 1 1 El Assembly 1 Block 1 MM Component Fle HHE Description Alp
344. ha IDN Description 1 failure 1 0 500 1 1 1 1 1 No effect gt failure 2 0 500 1 1 1 1 1 No etherct You may specify how failures of Component affect Block then how these effects affect Assembly then how these effects affect Subsystem etc till the End Effect on Aircraft level You may also omit some product tree levels and for example specify the effect of Component failures on Block then jump over some levels and specify directly the influence of block failures to the whole System level It will reduce a number of work required but will not allow generation of FMECA reports on skipped levels Assembly Subsystem in this example To define NHE for NHE 1 After the failure mode input NHE group of fields will become editable FM MHE Description Alpha IDN Description Beta A 0 500 111 11 No effect 1 000 2 Create the first NHE as described in paragraph To define a single NHE earlier in this chapter The O 2014 ALD Software Ltd first NHE B in this example will appear FM Description y ipti z Description A 17117 1B O00 eee EE 3 To enter the first NHE B consequences and effect on next higher assembly right click the NHE description cell B and select Add NHE from the popup menu The second NHE will appear Ret Des ID Mame LJ bp Opr FR 10 6 Status El Aircratt 1 1 0 0000 System 1 1 0 0000 Subsystem 1 1 0 0000 El Assembly 1 1 0 0000 El Block 1 1 0 0000 MN Component O
345. handbook standard of the selected method for more information However this manual provides some information for some implementation specific or special cases see next paragraphs 7 Fill in known parameter values For parameters left undefined some typical default values T junction will be taken You may review these default values by pressing the INE button See Calculation Defaults paragraph for more information about these default values 8 Instead of filling the required parameters manually you may use Component Library You may search component library by component s generic name and retrieve it s data from the library You may also insert new components and their data to the component library See Using Component Libraries in Reliability Prediction paragraph for more information See also Part Number Recognition paragraph and all the Reliability Libraries and Defaults chapter 9 After known parameter values are provided press the Ok button 10 RAM Commander will calculate the Failure Rate and it will be displayed on the item data dialog 2014 ALD Software Ltd 220 RAM Commander User Manual 8 2 1 1 Failure Rate Reliability Data Some Pr E Field factor Iter FR Duty cycle h ult Factor 4dd factor 0 FA field D Luantity 1 te FR allocated 0 237625 Ka sper 7 Check O K hie Cale TOE kb spec O Complexity for FR allocation 1 11 You may p
346. he Cross Reference library by XRef button on the prediction method data screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 261 IC Digital MIL HOBK 217FN2 50 Ref des U12 OTy 1 EN GF Temp 25 iE ok Part name AA 123 359 a Mil num Cat num Help Generic name C 39043 VWHSIC 7 WLSI CMOS O ana g es Pl Type Gate Logic Arrays ee lt _4 Die Area 7 Tech CMOS 7 E of bits CT Feature ize H of gates 51 Range vio Range Hof Pins 16 a a fears in productor Package SMT Nonherm N T junction ig Pl a Uh if a La JB Pu el aay a Delta Tic or A a A E 7 E A 05 o wo H a a Ble w Of owl Ol owl ttl x Lead Configuration e Distance rile ED 54F280 n ES Te ler O esse C Specify PN CN or MN any one of them and GN field values and press the XRef button the new record will be added to the Cross Reference Library 9 3 1 Using Cross Reference Library in Reliability Prediction During product tree building and reliability prediction you need to specify the following information in order to get component data from a library e Reliability prediction method e Family e tem type e Generic Name RAM Commander then searches the component library for the specific generic name and retrieves the component s reliability data required for the give
347. he Project component library is accessed first and then the Global component library e Searches for generic names are keyed by family and ltem type If RAM Commander does not locate the generic name pattern within the family and Item type you entered in the Item Data Operating dialog box it issues a message indicating that no such parts exist 9 2 6 2 Load from Library Component data required for the reliability prediction that depends on the reliability method can be quickly and accurately loaded using the data stored in the Component Library and GPRD failure rate library for all product tree items at once To load component data from libraries into the project 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Library menu choose Load from Library 3 The Load from Library dialog box opens Load From Library Search for Al parts al aoe Shed i SE TUTORIAL 1 Communicator System El Comas Component library High Priority GPRD Low Priority i T _ a dd to PJ i Pan Fat P L Component Library PN Recognition Ie Use automatic PN recognition algorithms _ E without manufacturer name PH Partial Match Allow match of generic PN in BOM to more specific PN in library Product tree BOM Librar L Number of trailing PN symbols which may not match 15 MOMOTOO1 ED561 MeM01001EDS61 JF Product tree BCl Librar L Number of trailing PN symbols which may not match 0 MROUS2417 5044 TR
348. he list has its state indicated by color and icon They are important especially when the projects list is located on a shared network drive and multiple users are working with that list simultaneously see Multi user access paragraph later in this chapter 6 1 1 Working with the project list You may sort filter and group projects in the list Sorting Click on column header in the list of projects to sort the list by this column Click the same column again to change the direction of sorting Filter Open the Filter option from the View menu and choose the filtering condition List of projects will be updated and will show only the projects satisfying the filtering condition 2014 ALD Software Ltd taa RAM Commander User Manual 6 2 Grouping Each project has a setting called Project Group Project group may be anything that unifies different projects of the same product customer year version etc Hierarchical projects view puts each project group to the separate tree branch providing more convinient operations with multiple projects from different products Select Tree View option from the View menu in Projects List window to use this option Mult iuser access RAM Commander allows simultaneous work of a number of users on the same project The project should be located on a shared network drive with Full Control access permissions for all users Some of the users may perform Reliability analysis while o
349. he site code file to your software vendor and he will create and supply a valid license file locked to your PC and containing purchased software options and modules To initiate the license file 1 Click the Start menu choose Programs and then A L D Engineering 2 Open Tools submenu run Licensing Wizard utility Select Computer Locked License File option press Next id ALD Software Licensing Wizard Workstation x Welcome to the ALD Software Licensing Wizard fou must obtain and configure a walid license to start using your software ALD Software provides a plenty of different licensing models please choose a suitable licensing model below Each software copy is protected by a license file linked to the specific computer User have to generate site code file send it to the software vendors Yendor will provide a computer locked license file Network floating license file ALD Licensing Server ALD Licensing Server should be installed and configured You have to specity a path to the server on each workstation Local HASP Plug Aladdin USB HASP Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of this workstation computer ou do not need to do anything except connecting the plug Network floating HASP Plug Aladdin USB NetHASP Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of licensing server and HASP License Manager should be installed on the server You do not need to do anything on a workstation
350. hm iia 562 2014 ALD Software Ltd 14 RAM Commander User Manual To activate quantitative analysis A aa diia 563 5 2nd step MMEL Five Column Format Report Preparation ooococcccccocccnncocccancnnananonnos 565 0 MMEL Mod le REDOINS visir a a oo coda 566 E SUMMA Made 569 Part 24 MSG 3 571 1 Systems and Power Plant Analysis viii aa dais 571 Initiating MSG 3 Module saree cscisscrccisacsces ci ccc wcscsgvsncenecncsacecuedcadaaveien wow oansaiatncduadasanssadeneaauanenunnenaadenaccdesuceusatved 572 MSG 3 Proc dure SIC OS ossai lenta coseno ee tens ae a a a a aeaeaie aiaa aaa o Ee iaae oenar Aaa 572 Step t System Do f a 10 9 ieee eee eee re eer O ee eee Pe 572 Slep 2 MS Sele CUON bse ee ee el et 573 Sip MECA ed dd dea 575 Step 4 Failure Effect Categorization cccccccocococnconococonancnononocononcnnnononononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnannnaninnnonos 576 Ss o e ne ere eee one ee eee ee ee eee 578 SOPO Tas teva dl tl da o 579 P7 MIO ROPO y A CE PROCE ER a cnet cece ose aennaescecoaaneenetenceicn eariseas 580 Z SMuctural ANAIYVSIS a Ad 582 3 ZONal ANAIYSS ssbsiccactaactsactbnaas vereaaesadebanvaascanadasctepaasantnsicaadaendusanenagdcacieogenantergccatebaiesaceen 583 A O seen eM E A A EEN cenit 584 Index 986 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Welcome to RAM Commander EN RAM Commander User Manual Welcome to RAM Commander RAM Commander is the pioneering Reliability and Safety software for re
351. hours 4349 34 Hei E er e F RAK Qty Contrib to i CNO17009 Transmitter 0 003183 0 003183 1 36434E 003 The following basic functions are available from the report viewer Search press Ctrl F or choose Find from the edit menu Text selection just select the required portion of report with your mouse Press Ctrl C to copy the selection to the Clipboard Printing press the printer icon in the toolbar or choose Print from the Report menu Page and Printer setup choose appropriate options from the Report menu Save report file choose Save as option from the Report menu provide file name and location Open report in MS Word Excel Internet Explorer Choose the appropriate option from the Report menu Open report inside MS Word template 1 choose Publish with MS Word template option from the Report menu 2 Document parameters dialog will appear provide information which will appear in report header and footer if it does not appear press Cancel and choose Template Page Setup option from the Report menu Fill the data and press Ok 3 Templates list will appear Select template and press the Select button 4 The same report will appear inside the templated document with required headers and footers The template may be customized you may write your own header footer put your organization logo etc You may also customize reports appearance and view previously generated report
352. ht hand corner of the dialog box 2 In the Tasks Library list box select a task RAM Commander takes the task description and time displayed in the Total Time field from the Tasks Library 3 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Maintainability RCM dialog box with the updated task 11 4 2 2 4 To define a task s maintenance data 1 Switch to Skills tab 2 Choose from the Maintenance Library types of skills required to perform the task enter number of workers for each skill Maintainability Task Data E xj General Skillz STE Materials Task Start_up Task E Description Power On Description of Persons a Quality Engineer 3 Switch to STE Support and Test Equipment and enter by choosing from the Maintenance Library all the equipment required to perform the task Maintainability Task Data E x General Skil STE Materials Task Start_up Task E Descriptors Power On Cancel Apply Help 4 Switch to Materials tab and enter by choosing from the Maintenance Library all the materials required to perform the task O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 315 Maintainability Task Data i x General Skils STE Materiale Task Start_up Task H E Description Power On Jzolation Tape nt 1 000 m gt 0500 m ater g 0 330 Cancel Apply Help 11 4 3 Mean Time To Repair MTTR Before comput
353. ialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd 332 RAM Commander User Manual Derating value definition List of parameters TE Type a Dependent Derating Curve 0 Walet O Zo Waluemax 175 Valuez U z ok conventional Cancel derating curve for capacitors Example of a 6 To apply the parameter values to the specified type check the Enable check box to allow RAM Commander to ignore parameter values for the specified type clear the Enable check box 7 Enter values as required and choose OK RAM Commander updates the guidelines with the new parameter values You can set parameter values for specific item code types This is useful for specifying different derating curves for various component types To define derating curves by item code type 1 Activate the Derating list 2 From the Item menu select Create or press F7 the Derating value definition dialog box opens 3 Enter values as required and choose OK RAM Commander applies these values to the type instead of those defined for the entire item code Select Edit or Delete from the Item menu to modify or delete any record in the Derating list Many guidelines may be defined for one project Use the following table to manage multiple guidelines ro sete Create a new guideline New from the Guidelines menu Open another project guideline Open from the Guidelines menu Delete a guideline Delete from the Guidelines menu C
354. ibraries Data Manipulation Using Lists Using the various lists you can add edit and delete RAM Commander s databases records To add a record using a Component Library list 1 Activate the Library list 2 From the Item menu choose Create or Press F7 or Press icon in the Toolbar 3 Enter information in the dialog box and choose OK 4 RAM Commander redisplays the Library list with the new record To edit a record using a Library list 1 Activate the Library list 2014 ALD Software Ltd 12 RAM Commander User Manual 5 5 2 Double click the item or From the Item menu choose Edit or Press Alt Enter or Right click and choose Edit from the pop up menu 3 Modify the information in the dialog box and choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the Library list with the updated record To delete a record using a Library list 1 Activate the Library list 2 From the Item menu choose Delete or Press Del or Right click and choose Delete from the pop up menu or Press X icon in the Toolbar Caution Be careful when deleting records There is no undo facility to restore data to a previous State 3 Enter your confirmation in the Attention dialog box RAM Commander redisplays the Library list without the deleted record Projects RAM Commander Project is a separate database for a single analysis case It contains all information you enter or calculate for single analysis case for all the pos
355. ibraries Tools View Window Help gt g Es D FX E Els eP Computer Potential FM End Effect of Failure Severity Cause Occurence Controls Detection APN a Users report often system Impossible to work 9 Hardware is not stable 3 10 ero gt Testi crashes uu ma mu mu Operating system is rot 4 10 360 gt Choo stable mo ner Ae on E 05 configuration is invalid 10 630 gt Defin Users report often phisical Equipment is not reliable The equipment is rot Check armor 1 fall gt Armor damages anp 245 ee armored iis T For Help press F1 System block RAM Commander s Process Design FMEA is an interactive module for Process Design potential Failure Mode and Effects Analysis lt has been designed for reliability professionals and design engineers and is suitable for both Design and Process FMEA The software fully complying with QS 9000 PFMEA requirements is a powerful tool with the following features e Process flow or design elements diagram easily built and easily exported to MS Word PowerPoint etc e Fully visible Failure Mode 0 Cause U Effects sequence e FMEA data management e Automatic calculation of Risk Priority Numbers e Automatic FMEA report generation e Full support of the FMEA based decision making with multiple criterias e Extensive set of FMEA libraries e Fully documented process establishes an organizational procedure for process design FMEA e Team collaboration in decision making and Severity Occurrence and Detec
356. ibrary 8 Choose OK All data from the component or failure rate table libraries for the requested components is loaded into the current project If RAM Commander cannot find project items in either library it displays them in a log file RAM Commander will run the recalculation automatically to take updated component parameters into consideration and display the updated failure rates 9 2 6 3 Load to Library You can copy all the components inserted into the Product tree view to the project library as a group This feature saves you time when you wish to save several components into the project library To load the components from the entire project into the project library 1 Open the target Product tree view 2 From the Library menu choose Load to library 3 RAM Commander loads all the project s components from the Product tree view into the project s component library 9 3 Cross Reference Frequently developers must cope with a variety of part identification schemes when designing products Part numbers can be based on a variety of numbering schemes including military catalog number and internal part numbers RAM Commander provides a flexible cross reference between generic names used as a key for search in Component Library and other component identifiers To activate the Cross Reference Library Activate a project window and choose Cross Reference from the Library menu In the Cross Reference window first column RA
357. ibrary L Indicates that the component was added or changed by a user Components Generic Name key used for search can be Part Number Catalog Number etc 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 251 You may edit insert rename and delete components in the library perform search and global change operations 9 2 3 1 To edit component data 1 Open component library global or project 2 Find and select the desired component Select the Family and Item type scroll the library use Find option 3 Double click the component record or right click it and choose Edit or choose Edit from the Item menu or press Alt Enter 4 Component data screen will appear 5 Perform the required changes and press Ok You will not be able to change the Generic Name field value in the edit procedure use Rename option in the Item menu instead 9 2 3 2 To delete component from the library 1 Open component library global or project 2 Find and select the desired component Select the Family and Item type scroll the library use Find option If you want to delete more than one component at a same time click on each record and press the asterisk key on the additional numeric keyboard or right click the item in the list and choose Select Deselect from the pop up menu As you select components the V icon appears in the left column of the Library Manager window 3 Press Del key or right click th
358. ica ist TEE oE Tat 233 Notes on Environments and Methods oococcccocccncccoccnnccnoncnncononcnncononcnnonnnncononnnnrononnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnncanes 235 ESS SOMO AAA PPP AE O AE A T EA T T 236 yord and SUBS ACS ua A 238 SeA KNOWN D Co ER ii dades 239 Specify known temperature dependent FR ccccsessceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeesseeaeseeeeesseeeaeneeessooes 240 Fallure Rate Allo Cation iii aa 241 3 Proje RE CalCula On dde 242 DO ONG east a 243 A REDONS insta 243 Part 9 Reliability Libraries and Defaults 246 1 Global and Project Librarie S ud A ident etree 247 2 COMPONE INE LID sonion E aa ie EE Eaa a SE 248 To view the project component library ccconnnnccconnnncoconconconennoncononnnnrononnnnronnnnnnrornnnnnrrrnnnnnrrrnnanarernnanns 249 To view the global component library occccoonnnccconncnnoconccncononnoncononnnnrononnnnronnnnnnrornnnnnrornnnnnrrrenannrernnnnns 249 Working with the Component Library ccooonnnnnccccccncnnncconocnnnnannroncnnnnnnnnrorornnnnnnnnerrrnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnanennrrrrrnnanans 250 Toca compone tada dase cose on Remco theteat plantation eee eieerteeatines 251 To delete component from MEAN A ee 251 To insert new component into the library ooccccoconncnccconnoncnnonconnnnnnnononnnnnononnnnrnnonnnnronnnnnnnennrnnnnennnnnos 251 TOATMIGSCOMMOMICI ea a e tl e lala oo do 251 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Contents Transfer data from a project to global library
359. icensing Wizard any time later to configure your license gue 3 The following dialog box appears O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 65 a License Manager SD x Generate Site Code To get computer locked software license for this computer you have to perform the Generate operation Site code an encrypted information with unique data about your computer will be generated Please send this Information to ws Generate site code Generate software license report o IF you wish to change your license conditions wish to get information about pour license options or have some troubles with the software licensing please generate a license report and attach it to pour ernail Generate license report Delete license Use Delete license option if you wish to stop using our software on this computer wish to transter license to another computer or if you were requested to do it by software distributors A Special file will be generated please send this file to software distributors as confirmation of the operation Delete license 4 Click Generate license report You will receive the message providing you with the file name containing your license report 9 Send this file to your software vendor or Support ald co il together with your problem description 3 4 4 Network License File Network License file contains purchased number of licenses which may be used
360. ier for each item This multiplier is the ratio of the first year failure rate to the steady state failure rate 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Maintainability Prediction Maintainability Prediction 297 11 Maintainability Prediction Components that fail must either be discarded or repaired RAM Commander provides you with a flexible module for developing and performing maintainability prediction and analysis Maintainability is a measure of how long a product is not available for use When components are being maintained they pass through a sequence of repair tasks that transform them from failure status to available status Such tasks typically fall into the categories of disassembly diagnosis repair and reassembly RAM Commander allows you to build your own time and task libraries Standard times are times you define for performing a particular activity A standard task is a sequence of standard times You can use standard time and task libraries to compute maintainability times for your system RAM Commander allows you to build libraries of skill types equipment items and material types You may use these libraries to specify skills equipment and materials required to perform each maintenance task From Maintenance Tasks Analysis report you may get a prediction of work load for each skill type and equipment and usage of materials RAM Commander s maintainability prediction module is based on the recommendations in MIL HDBK
361. if possible O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 485 Parameter name Description Po Recalculation ignores previous calculation results Approximation type Type of MCS sum calculation and approximation Easary Prochan formula default selection see Easary Proschan Formula paragraph for more information F1 F2 more exact and slow F1 F2 approximation Automatic this approximation type will select the most appropriate approximation type for the current fault tree Simple sum will just calculate top gate probability as a sum of probabilities of all MCS Recommended for fault trees with very low probabilities of MCS lower than 1e 10 Independent probabilities formula top gate probability Ptop 1 1 Pmcs1 1 Pmcs2 1 PmcsN where PmcsN is probability of minimal cut set N Does not take into consideration common events between all MCS in contrary to Easary Proschan formula Probability Calculation The difference between the two calculation options only top and top and Level intermediary gates is that the first option calculates unavailability for top tree event only while the second option calculates the unavailability for the top tree event AND each intermediary gate Ignore CCF Groups CCF Groups will be ignored during the calculation if this option is selected Timet Time for Q t calculation Cut off parameters See FTA Properties for more information Calculation cancel Option to set up calculation inter
362. ighlight the assembly to which the new components will be structured 2 From the Tree menu choose Massive Entry the Massive Entry list window opens MM iassive Entry for Project TUTORIAL Drive E MIL 217F 2 P stress ELECTRONIC IC Digital al Ref Des Generic Name ul F4HCO4 74451035 U5 7ALS123 U3 78001 3 The list initially shows all components belonging to the selected product tree assembly for the specific prediction method family and Item type 4 Change the method Family and Item type selection to view other components 5 Press the E icon to the left of the method selection to select another product tree assembly and view its components 7 3 5 4 2 To add new items in a Massive Entry list Massive Entry offers four options for adding new items to a project e Creating a new item e Copying a single item e Creating multiple copies of an item N copy e Quick create To create a new item 1 Open the Massive Entry list 2 Make selections for prediction method family and Item type in the list s list boxes 3 From the Item menu choose Create OR Press F7 4 The component data entry window opens 9 Enter component data and choose OK 6 Repeat steps 2 4 to add more components To copy a single item with the Massive Entry list To copy an item within the Massive Entry list click on it and select Copy from the ltem menu RAM Commander appends the new item to the end of the list and
363. igure license create a site code for computer locked licensing etc e HASP Plug Manager use when you need to update the USB plug configuration e Configuration Report click to create a RAM Commander configuration log send it to RAM Commander support team if you report a bug or problem e HASP Plug Driver USB plug driver it is installed automatically but sometimes there is a need to re install it manually You may copy the RAM Commander icon to your desktop to create a convenient shortcut for running the software To run RAM Commander 215 1 From the A L D Engineering program group choose the RAM Commander icon EHEILFY the Login dialog box appears O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 74 RAM Commander User Manual L Reliability Availability Maintainability FMECA FIA ETA Safety Process amp Design FMEA Markov MMEL MSG 3 JN RAM Commander version 8 0 f Copyright 1995 2010 A L D Ltd ALD ww aldservice com 2 Enter your user name and password DL r Password k Cancel Login 3 Choose OK RAM Commander welcome screen appears Welcome to RAM Commander Welcome to A amp M Commander Choose one of the quick access options below Open DEMO TUTORIAL project Open project list on drive C Mew RAM Commander Help Topics Open one of the most recently used projects DATUTORISL DATUTORISL FTA CATUTORIAL_MSG3 LATOTORISL_DISPREL C5 18_AlRCRAFT Close this windo
364. ilability Calculation for Periodical Tests 2014 ALD Software Ltd 19 4 2 q 1 q 1 1 ATi 1 exp ATi q 1 g 1 exp ATi MTTR Ti Table 3 Mean Unavailability Calculation for Periodical Tests Formula Mean Unavailability Qmean MCS Calculation MCS Calculation is the default Fault Tree calculation method in RAM Commander To calculate the tree 1 Choose MCS calculation from the Calculation menu 2 Calculation parameters dialog will appear See the table below for information about possible calculation options and parameters FTA Calculation Parameters Calculation type Aproximation type O Recalculate All Automatic Probability calculation level Ignore CCF groups C Only top event tree root Top event and intermediary gates Time hours for Q t calculation Calculation mode FTA MES calculation Cut Off parameters Start cut off if number of MOS more thar Relative Cut off value default value 12 6 Relative Cut off order el Note MCS Cut Off is used to reduce calculation time and esclude cut sets which has very small influence on top gate result Calculation cancel conditions Mode Prompt for cancel Cancel after 5 minutes or 200000 generated MCS Cesta Canal Easary Proschan Formula FTA Calculation parameters explanation Parameter name Description Calculation type Quick calculation uses previous calculation results
365. ility Calculation 231 RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type 159 Coaxial Connectors for supports ybrids 162 Hybrid Hybrid ulti Chip Modules 162 Hybrid Multi Chip Module etal case ceramic substrate 163 Substrate Metal case ceramic substr 163 Substrate Ceramic case ceramic substr 163 Substrate Glass epoxy with moulding 163 Substrate Glass epoxy without moulding Deposited only 17 i undo Hybrid 183 IC Analog Power amplifier 183 RF and HF Mixed 183 RF and HF Digital 186 RF 8 HF PIN 186 RF 8 HF Schottky 186 RF 8 HF Tunnel 186 RF 8 HF Varactor 186 HF Trans A ES Bipolar 186 HF Trans ac rae Bipolar 186 RF amp HF Si MOS sGa Low power 186 RF amp HF AsGa sGa Power 186 ial AsGa a RF and HF SMD resistors ceramic FIDES type 72 Coaxial Connectors for printed circuits and similar 74 Component supports o o lt 11 lt 78 Ceramic case ceramic substrate 79 Glass epoxy substrate with moulding Glass epoxy substrate without moulding 8 Dh Deposited capacitor RF and HF Analogue Circuit Power amplifier RF and HF Mixed circuit RF and HF Digital Circuit RF HF PIN Low power RF HF Schottky Low power 3 4 85 00 00 T 8 RF HF Tunnel Low power 00 RF HF Varactor Low power Silicon bipolar Low power amp Power SiGe bipolar Low power 1 ilicon MOS Power O O 00 00 NN N N N oO 3 gt 94 RF and HF SMD r
366. ill search second user PC and try to access Pervasive Database Engine network service If second user can t find other user PC DNS sub net VPN etc or can t access other users Pervasive Engine Firewall then the connection attempt will fail Solution 1 Check and ensure that all RAM Commander users may ping each other computers by computer name 2 Check and ensure that Pervasive Database Engine is included into the list of exceptions on all RAM Commander user computers and that Firewall exceptions are not disabled Pervasive Database Engine is usually added to the Firewall exceptions list when RAM Commander is installed Setup procedure gives Windows Firewall Unblock question Windows Security Alert Ed P Windows Security Alert e Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Tt To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Windows Firewall has blocked some features of Database Service Manager on all public and private networks Do you want to keep blocking this program Name Database Service Manager E Publisher Pervasive Software Inc Name Database Service Manager Palle aa Publisher Pervasive Software Inc CARAMC32 BIN Ww Sdbsmor exe Allow Database Service Manager to communicate on these networks Y Private networks such as my home or work network Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later F Public networks such as those in airports and
367. illing other fields for this failure Mode FI NHE Description Alpha Cause IDK Description Beta Description Beta Severity failure mode 1 000 1 23 effect of the falure mode 1 000 No effect gt 1 000 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd FMECA 437 18 5 1 2 To select affected assembly 1 Click on the IDN selection button lt gt to the right of the FM the NHA selection window opens Flv MHE Description Alpha Cause IDK Description Beta 1 1 000 123 o effect 1 000 2 From the NHA Selection window select the affected assembly 3 Choose OK Note There are some limitations in IDN selection any item with already defined inherent failure modes cannot be selected also any IDN that may cause a loop in the FM NHE EE chain cannot be selected 18 5 1 3 To define multiple NHEs for a single FM 1 After the failure mode input NHE group of fields will become editable Fi MHE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta failure mode 1 000 123 Mo effect 1 000 2 Create the first NHE as described in paragraph To define a single NHE earlier in this chapter The first NHE B in this example will appear FM MHE EE Description Alpha Cause IDN Description Beta Description Beta Severity 1 A 1 000 Liza B 1 000 No effect 1 000 A H 3 Right click the related failure mode description cell A in this case and choose Add NHE from the popup menu A new NHE line related to the same FM A will appear F
368. imited number of new RBD diagrams open rename copy and delete existing diagrams zoom in out export change color and update diagrams You may perform calculations and print out necessary reports See next paragraphs for more information about these functions 13 2 1 To create a new RBD diagram 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu choose RBD The list of all available RBD diagrams in the current project will appear From this list you may open create new delete rename and copy RBD diagrams Name Standard Standard SWITCHING Weibull 3 In the Name edit box enter the name of the new RBD diagram and press Open 4 RAM Commander will display an empty RBD diagram in a new window like the one shown below 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams EJ RBD EXAMPLE for Project TUTORIAL Drive Mial E i Y The diagram contains only an input node output node and one insertion node Insertion nodes are used to create new RBD diagram elements blocks Now you may start adding nodes to your diagrams see next paragraph for more information 13 2 2 To change an RBD configuration 1 Activate the RBD window 2 Choose RBD Configuration from the RBD menu the Edit RBD Configuration dialog box opens Edit RADO Configuration RBD title ABD mission time houra Cancel Display on upper line Reference designator Upper font Display on lower line FR parame
369. imization problem e item data e operation scenario data You may create a scenario with spare parts optimization scenario data in the Spare parts module see To add an operation scenario paragraph earlier in this chapter You specify item data in the Product Tree item data dialog General Maintainability and Miscellaneous pages see Product tree data paragraph earlier in this chapter 16 4 4 1 To set operation scenario parameters 1 From the Modules menu select Spare Parts then select Optimization from the submenu the Spare Optimization dialog box opens See also To add an operation scenario paragraph earlier in this chapter O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Scenario Mo of systems in the field Operation hours per day Copy Operation days per pear Delete Prediction period pears 10 A Repair turnaround time Intermediate days al P salis Repair turnaround time Depot days BO Repair turnaround time Supplier days E Repair turnaround time Manufacturer days 31 Unsupported Mission Time days 365 Lalculation request Required No Shortage Probability NSPREG 03 Minimurn spare parts quantity MINGTY Optimize Mode Unsupported mission Optimization Select point by Lost Criterion NSP Budget 300000 of ports 10 I Cost orice weight 0 volume 0 2 In the Mode list box select Regular operation or Unsupp
370. in FMECA When the Criticality Analysis check box in the Project Configuration dialog box is not checked you can only choose non quantitative reports The list of reports in this case is FMEA and the Fault Tree When the Criticality Analysis check box is checked you can choose any of the existing reports There are different parameters for each report that define which information will be included in the report See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 18 9 Import Export RAM Commander allows FMECA data import and export to and from fixed MS Excel file format Export and Import file contains product tree items Failure modes with FM NHE EE chains Testability data and FMECA libraries 2014 ALD Software Ltd asa RAM Commander User Manual To Export data 1 Select tree root to export all tree or specific branch to export only this branch s FMECA data 2 Select FMECA Export from Tools menu and choose file name for export 3 Excel workbook will be created with multiple sheets in it FMECA sheet failure modes and effects This sheet has the following structure o ItemiD string hierarchical ID of tree element o Depth numeric depth of tree element in tree or in branch o RefDes string Reference Designator of tree element o Qty numeric Quantity o FROper numeric Operating Failure Rate o DutyCycle n
371. in the textbox choose the background and foreground colors font and a picture BMP format graphics file 4 Click OK The Remark box is placed on the diagram You can select it and then resize it and or change its location 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 473 19 3 9 Automatic FTA building RAM Commander allows you to automatically build FTA diagrams from other modules FMECA FMEA and RBD Choose Build Fault Tree from the Tools menu in both of these modules Then you will need to provide the name of the new fault tree and this new fault tree will be created 19 3 10 Print preview Print Zoom Use the FTA menu options to view print preview print the tree or zoom the diagram on the screen and keys on Numeric keyboard also act as Zoom in Zoom out keys The following is a list of the FTA printing options in RAM Commander e Print The whole tree is printed on a single piece of paper Use this option when you have a normal size tree with no sub trees e Print tree sub trees The whole tree is printed as well as all of its sub diagrams Each tree is printed on a separate piece of paper Use this option when you have a normal size tree with average size sub trees e Print the selected branch only Use this option to print only the selected branch without the rest of the tree Branch parent gate should be selected e Print automatic separation to pages Use this option when you have a large tree
372. in your product tree you should 1 Create ltem in the product tree Family Electronic ltem Code Hybrid no special data needed on the method screen this screen doesn t exists 2 Under Hybrid create Substrate Family Electronic Item Code Substrate and on the method specific screen enter all information about the substrate Note under one Hybrid user may create more then one Substrate 3 Under Substrate add all components placed on this substrate See illustration below for a hybrid structure example Ref Des Qty Opr FR 10 6 Ex4MPLE 1 0 0995 amp Hybrid 1 0 0995 Substrate 1 0 0995 Ci 1 0 0005 1 0 0351 pu 8 2 2 Specify known fixed FR lf component or assembly failure rate is known provided by manufacturer by third party database field usage failure analysis testing QA failure analysis you may specify it in the FR u user defined or FR f FR field data fields on the item data screen Be sure to set correct FR source switch To specify user defined FR 1 Open item data screen 2 Set FR source switch to User defined and specify your FR in the FR u field Failure Rate Reliability Data FR Source User defined FR predicted FA user defined 18 35 A teld LW FR allocated O 3 Press Ok to return to the product tree To specify field FR 1 Open item data screen 2 Set FR source switch to Field and specify your FR in the FR f field O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 240 RAM Co
373. ing MTTR for an item you must e Enter all the maintainability information on the item s children e Perform reliability calculations See Chapter 10 for reliability calculation procedures 11 4 3 1 To compute MTTR 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Calculation menu select the desired computation method RAM Commander redisplays the Product tree view with updated values for MTTR and Mct 11 4 3 1 1 To calculate MTTR and Mct in Quick mode 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Change the Current Analysis if necessary using the corresponding icon on the Product tree view button bar 3 Choose OK 4 From the Calculation menu choose Quick Note There is an option of automatic recalculation when defining the project properties to ensure that the RAM Commander output is based on the latest updated data See Adding a new project Chapter 8 RAM Commander computes MTTR and Mct for the entire product tree These results appear in the Product tree view 2014 ALD Software Ltd ae RAM Commander User Manual 11 4 3 2 Recalculate All This function is the same as Quick Mode but it also recalculates Mct for all items with the latest data from the maintainability library 11 4 3 2 1 To calculate MTTR and Mct in Recalculate All mode 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select the Current Analysis using the Product tree view button bar 3 From the Calculation menu choose Recalculate All RAM Command
374. ing VWLOOKUP function and libraries mapping P PS Se eS Ss Sf Ss J Sf Se Ea Er D0 A ed When the data transformation input in the excel file is finished switch to the first sheet named Main and follow instructions Intermediary text file will be created this text file should be used in RAM Commander Component Library data import RAM Commander Component Library Import Template Version 8 0 Prepare data tr import all sheets DIRAM Commander for Windows For more information about the Component Library and ImportvExport facilities see corresponding User Manual chapters For questions and support please contact supporti ald co il Www aldservice com weww aldsottyare com In addition there is also ASCII file import procedure contact ALD Software technical support for more information about this option 2014 ALD Software Ltd E RAM Commander User Manual Using Component Libraries in Reliability Prediction During the product tree building and reliability prediction you have to provide component s details from the component technical data sheet It is done using the prediction method data screen like the screen shown below IC Digital MIL HDBK 217FN 2 Ref des LIT 1 EMM Part name Mil num Cat num Generic name L299 VHSIC Z YLSI CMOS dla Type GateLogic Arrays an ae Die Area Tech CMOS Hofbits Features ize of gates 1200 Range Yth R
375. ion it done according to provided FA temperature points For electronic family components or assemblies Familp calculation i done according to RAC 300 0 Reliability Toolkit formulas For mechanical and electro mechanical Family components linear interpolationextrapolation is used Delete H 1 2 E 4 A E T a 3 Copy to Env 9 5 5 Copying GPRD Library between projects You may copy GPRD library from one project to another to reuse the data See Copy libraries between projects for instructions System manager may also transfer parts from the project to the global GPRD library Use Copy to global option from the Library menu of GPRD library 9 5 6 Reports You can generate several types of reports for GPRD library parts In the Reports menu of GPRD Library window select one of the following Current part FR FR tables for the selected part data All Library FR FR tables for all parts data Selected FR table for the selected part and selected environment environment FR data General part data List of all parts in the GPRD library with their general data PN family Item type description etc 2014 ALD Software Ltd Failure Modes Failure Modes for all parts in GPRD library PN Failure Mode Alpha 96 Calculation Defaults RAM Commander provides defaults for all component information required for reliability predicti
376. ionary Eommnication Change to Communication Suggestions Ignore Ignore All Change All AutoCorrect Options Undo last Suggest Cancel To work with cumulative list of failures FMEA module screen displays failure modes causes and Effects table for selected process step or design element only You may work with the cumulative list of all failures in your FMEA diagram using the following procedure 1 Select FMEA Data Table from the Item menu 2 Choose failure modes filtering conditions 3 List of all failure causes according th selected conditions will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 521 FMEA Data Process Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Prepare laminate Print board Print board Print board Print board Print board Print board Print board Print board Drill holes Drill holes Drill holes Drill holes ane Fh Board not usable Board not usable Bad assembly Undefined failure Wrong component Uncomp Wrong component uncomp Bad air Bad assembly Excessive heating Excessive heating Power loss Power loss Power loss Short circuit Wrong component Bad assembly Short circuit Board not usable T EE Product is unstable Product i unstable Product is unusable Product is unstable Product
377. ions data report o Results export to Excel Word HTML formats O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis 407 17 1 Initiating Markov module 1 Run RAM Commander 2 Open project 3 Go to Modules menu choose Markov Chains 4 Each project may contain multiple Markov Diagrams The list of all diagrams in the current project will appear Choose existing diagram or enter name of a new diagram and press Oper button Markov Module Diagrams List yy xj Name Description Delete JEBES Rename aaa aaa Save as Test Tes _10_0_ 010 Tex 10 0 5 Test_Absorbings Test NoAbsorbingS 9 Selected or new Markov Diagram will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 17 2 17 2 1 Unit 4 Failure Rate Rate 0 0001 Unit B Repair rate Rate 0 02 Unit B Failure Rete Rate 0 0002 Unit 4 Failure Rate Rate 0 0001 For new or existing diagram you may use diagram properties dialog to set up diagram calculation time visual display details and other information see Diagram data paragraph Drawing the diagram Each Markov diagram contains number of states and transitions between states Diagram may contain any number of states and transition between them Below you will find procedures for creating or editing states and transitions Once the diagram is created you can freely move and resize state nodes change elements shapes colors and other properties Draw a state Draw a transition Draw a state To draw a stat
378. ions for the selected user in the lower part of the screen Selected blue permissions are granted not selected permissions are denied for the selected user Advanced permissions forthe project Users and Groupes Permissions for the selected user EProject Open Project Backup Project Ovensnte using Restore Project Delete Project Rename Project Cop Product Tree Reliability Maintainability FMELA RED Reliability Block Diagrams Markor Chans FTA Fault Tree Analysis PETA Event Tree Analysis Process Design FMEA Safety MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List Libraries Component Library Libraries GPAD Libraries Calculation Defaults Libraries Cross Reference a Canes 6 Press Add user button to add more users to the list You may select users from the list or enter user name manually in square brackets group name Specific user permissions always override group permissions so if user A is a member of group B and the list of users and groups contains both permissions for A and B permissions set for A will be taken into consideration 7 Press Ok New user group will appear in the list 8 To delete specific user select user in the list and press Remove user button 2014 ALD Software Ltd 150 RAM Commander User Manual 6 5 9 To view or set permissions for specific user select user in the list above and his permissions
379. ions related to high temperature low temperature difference in temperature severe humidity mildew salt vapor and chemic gas etc GM GM1 Equipment installed on vehicles which moved smoothly With strike and vbration conditions such as special vehicle running on highroad carriage of train ARW GM2 Equipment installed on tracked vehicles With violent strike and vibration conditions related to violently moving and with restricted control of ventilation temperature and humidity MP Equipment manually transported in field environment With poor maintenance conditions NSB Typical conditions in submarines NS GS1 Include sheltered or below deck conditions on surface ship which travel smoothly Unserious exposed to salt vapor and water vapor Such as air conditioning cabin of large cargo ship traveling near coastal waters and ship traveling in freshwater NH GS2 Sheltered conditions without exposed to weather conditions but often with violent strike and vibration Include sheltered or below deck conditions on surface ship NU Typical conditions in board of ship Unprotected surface ship borne often with violent strike and vibration exposed to weather conditions and immersed in salt water AIF Typical conditions in fighter which can be occupied by pilots Without high temperature high pressure and violent strike and vibration AUF Severe conditions of high temperature high pressure and violent strike and vibration etc such
380. ir groups see Project Definition in Chapter 8 Level is optional See Users Management paragraph later in this manual for more information about the user parameters definition 11 Windows Security Center Windows Firewall Warning message may appear press Unblock button 2014 ALD Software Ltd E Windows Security Alert do i To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Mame Database Service Manager Publisher Pervasive Software Inc CARAMESABIN W Sdbsrigr exe Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network IF you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock t Wher should unblock a program 12 Choose Finish on the last installation wizard screen InstallShield Wizard RAM Commander Setup Setup has finished installing RAM Commander for Windows on Your computer 13 RAM Commander is now installed on your computer 14 Install and configure the RAM Commander security plug or license file see Licensing paragraph later in this chapter 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started Network installation involves two steps RAM Commander Server Installation and RAM Commander Workstations Installation 3 3 3 Network Installation First step is the Server Installation Then valid li
381. irst screen O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Setup The InstallShield Wizard will install RAM Commander for Windows on pour computer To continue click Nest Cancel O Confirm the License Agreement Yes button InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Fress the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Product License Agreement Rev 01 90 2001 1 0 GENERAL GRANT OF LICENSE Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement 4 L 0 hereby grants to Licensee a nonexclusive license to use Favow eb Product solely for Licensee s internal business purposes the enclosed software program s including any Ink time and runtime modules any hardware key that may be furnished user documentation andor documentation oil Do you accept all the termes of the preceding License Agreement IF you choose No the setup will close To install RAM Commander tor Windows you must accept this agreement No 6 In the Setup Type Selection box choose Server Network Installation 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 39 InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Selection Please select a setup type 1 Single User Installation Description 2 Server Network Installation Use this option to install RAM 3 Workstation Network Installation Commander on a network server lt Back Cancel 7 Specify the RAM Commander installation folder
382. is file with Notepad j Find section NHS_ SERVER line 12 find key NHS_ADAPTER_IP remove comment sign from the left site and write network adapter data like is shown in comments lt IpAddr SubMask gt lt IpAddr SubMask gt Network administrator should assist you k save the file reboot the server lf after steps from a to you still have the same message about plug not found there could be problems with server ports You should consult the network administrator about specific ports In the file nethasp ini there are key NH PORT NUMBER exactly after the key NH SERVER_ADDR we modified in paragraph 3 Remove from the left side and set the TCP IP port number This is optional The default number is 475 2014 ALD Software Ltd oa RAM Commander User Manual 3 11 3 Access to Data Problem 1 RAM Commander user can t access network drive with projects sometimes Fatal error when other user s are already working with it If nobody else is working with drive user may access it Additional symptoms Network drive is shared with full access rights lf user is first on the drive he enters successfully May appear sporadically depending on the first user who access the network drive For some user combinations may work for some user combinations may not work Reason Second user connecting to the network drive will try to use Pervasive Database Engine of the first user connected to the drive It w
383. is no undo facility to easily return the mission profile to its original state 1 In the Mission Profile dialog box select the phase by clicking on its number under the column 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Analysis 293 2 Choose Delete Phase 3 Enter your confirmation in the dialog box RAM Commander displays the updated Mission Profile dialog box 10 3 1 4 To copy a mission profile 1 In the Mission Profile dialog box Choose Save As 2 Enter new Mission Profile name and press ok Copy of your Mission Profile will be created under new name 10 3 1 5 To delete a mission profile Caution Use care when deleting mission profiles There is no undo facility to easily restore the mission profile 1 In the Mission Profile dialog box Choose Delete MP 2 Enter your confirmation in the dialog box RAM Commander displays the updated Mission Profile dialog box 10 3 2 Mission Profile Calculation After defining a mission profile you can obtain reliability estimates for the product Note Recalculate the product tree before computing a mission profile See Reliability Calculation chapter for reliability calculation techniques To compute mission profile reliability 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu choose Mission Profile the Mission Profile dialog box opens 3 Select the mission profile from the MP Name list box 4 Choose Analyze MP button RAM Commander displays the mission profil
384. is unusable Product is unusable Users avoid to use Product is unusable Product ie unstable Product is unstable Product ie unstable Product is unstable Product it unstable Unstable Product is unstable Unusable Unusable Mot functional Increased time of pr 5 Cause T Designers error e Bad materials 3 Designers error al Bad materials 4 Designers error 4 Ungualified worker T 4 Lack of material T Climat disaster 7 Design eror Y Design eror T Poor cleaning T Bad materials A Design errar Y Bad materials a 3 Designers error 1 Designers error 1 Old equipment Controls 4 Visual inspection 6 Visual inspection 2 3 Visual Inspection 8 Computerized stack 3 Switch off the AC 2 Voltage measurement 3 Obligate inspection 2 Visual inspection 8 Quality control befor p Rape expectior 3 Visual inspection 4 Visual inspection 4 5 Visual inspection MA 0 00 mm 0 O wo Esport to Exc 4 You may sort the list by clicking table headers export it to Excel edit and change failure cause importance use popup menu appears when you right click on specific failure cause 21 6 Selecting Critical Failure Causes One of the most important FMEA tasks is selecting critical important Failures and deciding which causes are the most important for the improvement of the system priority tasks Causes are ranked in importance according to their
385. istics Developments Ltd A L D The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or non disclosure agreement The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the ALD Software Ltd agreement lt is against the law to copy the ALD Software Tools on cassette tape disk or any other medium for any purpose other than Pazgaz Building the purchasers personal use Entrance D 2nd Floor 46 Maccabim Road Copyright 1995 2014 by Advanced Logistics Developments Ltd Rishon le Zion 7535986 Israel Phone 972 3 7913200 MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Fax 972 3 7913210 Corporation E mail support ald co il Web www aldservice com Any other references to a trademark and or copyrighted material are www aldsoftware com unintentional Generated by EC Software HELP amp MANUAL tool Contents Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part 1 Welcome to RAM Commander 16 Part 2 Introduction 18 1 RAM Commander HISTOIRE ernie 19 2 MOGUIES Overview ado eo ln alo ibe o o 20 3 USC Features o o 21 4 Technical OVCIVICW dois 22 9 What VOU NECO TO KNOW ic aa 23 6 Gening Heloisa a 23 Part 3 Getting Started 26 INTOAUCUON aura e ian 26 Z Edo Sirocco cnica 29 3 INSta lla ON ii IS 29 Installation ReqiuireMentS inccconncccconnnocenennnoconnnnnnconnnn ancora arena a RENE n NR RRE n NR RR RNN NR RRRNN NR RRRNnR nr rrrnnnnrrrraaaarennas 30 Standalone IAS Tallado lata dais 31 Net
386. ith FTA calculation Second Worst Failure in Second Worst Failure 2nd failure in flight according with Fussell Flight Vesely Importance criterion Prob after second per Expected probability of the Failure Condition after the second worst FH failure according with FTA calculation See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 23 7 Summary In this section you learned about RAM Commander s Master Minimum Equipment List MMEL module Using this module you can perform quantitative MMEL analysis and generate standard five column format report See more about relevant to MMEL RAM Commander modules FMECA and FTA O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter MSG 3 MSG 3 971 24 MSG 3 MSG 3 Scheduled Maintenance Development Analysis is divided into 4 main sections Systems and Power Plant Analysis Structural Analysis Zonal Analysis L HIRF Analysis Lightning and High Intensity Radiated Field Analysis RAM Commander supports all 4 analysis methods and provides computerized multi user way of performing the analysis while all input data is stored in the database and printed out using customizable MS Word reports All 4 types of analyses use the same database share common information and supplement each other however any type of analysis may be performed separately Next paragraphs of this document will provide more detailed explanation of each type of
387. itial RAM Commander screen choose Archive O 2014 ALD Software Ltd ae RAM Commander for vvindows Drive Administration View Help Components y E Archive Location Repair Component Library i Table Library a l l Standard Tasks Library O Restore with overwrite Standard Times Library Cross Reference Defaults for Calculation Derating Definitions 0 Restore with merge 4 Select the Backup option button 5 In the drop down list select the libraries you want to back up 6 The Backup library path dialog box opens 7 Select the destination file path GLOBAL RMW by default 8 Choose Save Enter your confirmations in the dialog boxes as the backup procedure progresses Keep the back up data in a safe place To restore archived global libraries on a whole record basis follow the prevous procedure In step 3 select the Restore option e Choose Restore with overwrite for RAM Commander to replace your current libraries with the version stored in the archive file e Choose Restore with merge to leave the original global library data intact only adding those records that do not already exist Should the record already exist in the existing global library you will be prompted to either overwrite or skip duplicate records 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Reliability Analysis 286 RAM Commander User Manual 10 Reliability Analysis After the primary reliability prediction is done it is possible to anal
388. ive 2 Antenna Failure 2 Antenna failure 2 Keyboard 2 Keyboard 2 Antenna Failure 2 Main Switch 2 Mother Board CPU Fail 2 Antenna failure 3 Alternative transmitter Failure 3 Alternative transmitter Failure 3 Alternative transmitter Failure 3 Alternative transmitter failure 4 Mother Board Memory Fail 4 HardD rive 4 Keyboard 4 Mother Board CPU Fail Event 2 Mother Board Memory Fail Main Switch Receiver failure Receiver failure Mother Board Memory Fail HardD rive Main Switch Receiver failure Keyboard Mother Board CPU Fail Receiver failure Mother Board CPU Fail Mother Board Memory Fall HardDiriwe Keyboard Mother Board CPU Fail PS 1 PS 1 PS 1 PS 1 Event 3 ES 4 Transmither failure Transmitter failure Transmitter failure Transmither failure PS 2 PS 2 PS 2 PS 2 Settings Order by 8 Probability 5 Cut Set Order Only top 100 Limit None 5 By order By probability MES will be shown on the screen Event Data Element type Event type Only top 1000 Print MCS by 8 Aow D Column MES will be shown printed in report Fiter Refresh Report Log The tree diagram will be also updated with the new probabilities You may view filter sort and print out MCS list using the FTA calculation results dialog Calculation re
389. ject Sub tree More than 30 different calculation methods standards are supported like MIL 217 Telcordia FIDES GJB299 217 Plus NPRD 95 and more 2014 ALD Software Ltd I Digital MIL HOBE 21 FFA Ref des US EN Part name Mil num Cat num Generic name 80089 VHSIC YLSI CMOS Manutactuning 7 ro Process A Type Microprocessor x Die Area Tech NMOS H of bits 16 Features ize H of gates Range Yth Range E of Pins 40 fears in production Package DIP Herm wSolderWeld Seal Quality S_ Pl q 1 a cA a e af rl rl Bl Pl el af TS US E Lead Configuration x Distance 5HHCOO 54HF230 A ME O EEE 4 1 4 Stage 4 Reliability Analysis T junction Delta Tic RAM Commander displays analysis and prediction results in a wide variety of reports and graphs You can export these reports to such programs as MS Word or spreadsheet programs like MS Excel for a customized analysis You may find components with largest contribution to product MTBF examine system behaviour under different environment conditions and temperatures analyse product mission reliability and more 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Concepts a RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View Window Help
390. jet pump 23 10 11 ing tank transfer jet pump No O Ves C E No 7 i No O Mes O O 23 10 12 Transfer inline check valve No John Smit 2014 ALD Software Ltd CHEDULED MAINTENANCE DEVI PIVIEN ATA N Form 6 Level 1 Analysis MSI Number 28 10 00 ITEM Fuel Storage System Function 2 Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar Failure A Fails to allow flow inboard Effect 1 Loss of redundancy of fuel flow from outboard to inboard in wing tanks Other valves in wing allow fuel passage inboard FAILURE EFFECT CATEGORIZATION Questa 1 E the cocar ofa Finca lFaltre evkk att the operathg crew du rig the perfomance of thelr somaldites Ques tha 3 Does the combhatbiota Hkkk A Faactbaal Falure aac ore al hora Ita lre ofasystem rele dor Question 2 Does the FirctioralFalkre or secondan damage rest Mag trom the Feactbaal Falk re have adbectadve pe g N Answer pe YA 3 Explanation No he occurrence of a Funcional Failure wall no be evidentto the operating crew during the normal performance of their duties back up function will not have an adverse effect on operating safety A mA Not applicable for category bak p Tacto have an adverse e tect ettecton ope ratings atety i oaopratgsatet Remarks elected Failure Effect Category 9 Hidden Economic Ques tha 4 Does the Farctonal Falh re have adbecta
391. kow Chain for the Two Engine Example 2 21 Left ok 1 Right 1 controller failed 4 1 1 Right 1 3 0 0 both engines controller failed Left 1 and all controllers are controller failed Hi failed 1 2 Left 1 controlle failed Right ok Consider a two engine system left and right engines where each engine has bwo controllers The system fails when the functionality in all four controllers is lost 5 atte 9 The system is functinalle degraded when one or more of the controllers are dead It may be in a hon dispatch state as per regulations when both controllers for one engine are lost In this diagram non dispatch states are marked with yellow and red colors For Help press F1 RAM Commander Markov is a powerful tool with the following features e Up to date intuitive and powerful Markov Chain diagram interface with possibilities of full control over the diagram elements location colors styles zooms etc e Convenient ways of diagram printing and simple Copy amp Paste transfer to other applications e Calculation of Steady State Mode e Calculation of Time Dependency Mode e Calculation of Availability Unavailability Failure and Repair rate and frequency MTBF MTTF MTTR Reliability Unreliability Downtime Performance Ratio and other system parameters e Results output o System parameters for selected times as table or graph o Steady State results report o Transition Matrix report o States and Transit
392. l 9 Click OK The Plug configuration is updated To update plug using plug update data received by FAX 1 Ifthe file you received is a ZIP archive first extract it 2 Run the WelnCfg utility from A L D Engineering program group in the Start menu or run Wclintcfg exe file from your RAM32 BIN folder 3 Choose Edit by command line from the Configuration menu Configuration A L D Software Configuration Help Display Edit by command line Edit by File Exit 4 Enter the line from the file and click OK 9 Ifthe file contains additional lines repeat steps 3 and 4 for the next lines The Plug configuration is updated 3 4 1 2 Reporting plug configuration To report current plug configuration Note For the local white plug all operations are performed on the local computer where the plug is connected For the network red plug all operations are performed on the plug server computer where the plug is connected it means operations performed physically logging into the computer not through Remote Desktop etc 1 Run the WelnCfg utility from A L D Engineering program group in the Start menu or run Wclintcfg exe file from your RAM32 BIN folder 2 Choose Display from the Configuration menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd Configuration 4 L D Software Configuration Help Display Edit by command line Edit by File Exit 3 The following screen appears Chent Sof
393. l Number TA Numbe Examples of this include Oxygen Chapter 35 Electrical Power Chapter 24 Repair turnaround Time days required to send the failed part for repair and get it back repaired time Used in Spare parts calculation optimization MR Code ao 5 character Source Maintenance Recoverability code used for ILS isti port calculation optimization optimization Miscellaneous page contains additional optional parameters consumption consumption A r The ATA Chapter numbers provide a common referencing standard for all commercial aircraft documentation This commonality permits greater ease of learning and understanding for pilots and engineers alike The standard numbering system is controlled and published by the Air Transport Association The unique aspect of the chapter numbers is its relevance for all aircraft Thus a chapter reference number for a Boeing 747 will be the same for a Airbus 380 Burn in Burn in temperature in degrees centigrade see Burn In Report for more Temperature information Burn in Time Burn in time in hours see Burn In Report for more information PI FY Result from burn in calculation First year multiplier ratio of the first year failure rate to the steady state failure rate Integrated Logistics Support user defined fields You may change both field name and field value to specify additional information which does not fit the predefined Item Data dialog fields For reliability predic
394. l Storage Syst Fails to store fuel Fuel leakage Fuel tank leakage 6 Evident Operational 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Fuel storage Fails to store fuel Fuel leakage Drain valve leakage 6 Evident Operational Yes No 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Fails to interconnect l Inability to balance Interconnect switc 6 Evident Operational Yes 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Loss of redundant int Fuel tranfer is slow Interconnect valve 6 Evident Operational Yes 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Fails to indicate interc Crew unaware of i Lighted indicator fa 6 Evident Operational Yes Close 4 For each failure cause in the list perform the following steps a Press Task Requirements Analysis button or double click on the effect b Decision diagram will appear Select appropriate Yes or No answers for each question by clicking yellow boxes with answers MSG 3 Task Selection 28 10 00 Enable fuel flow in tank from outboard wing inboar Task Selection for Failure with Hidden Non Safety Effects FEC 9 9A IS A LUBRICATION OR SERVICING TASK APPLICABLE AND EFFECTIVE LUBRICATION No vor SERVICING QB IS A CHECK TO VERIFY OPERATION APPLICABLE AND EFFECTIVE No 9C IS AN INSPECTION OR FUNCTIONAL CHECK TO DETECT DEGRADATION OF FUNCTION APPLICABLE AND EFFECTIVE INSPECTION Yes FUNCTIONAL CHECK 9D IS A RESTORATION TASK TO REDUCE FAILURE R
395. l selection in Philosophy and Assumptions paragraph In addition to these three fields you must also make a selection for the source of Mct In the list box just under the maintainability parameter fields you can select one of the following three values 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 309 Predicted The computation is made according to the selected maintainability prediction method RAM Commander displays the result in the Mct c field User defined You explicitly enter a value in the Mct m field Allocated Select this value when you want to use the result of the maintainability allocation See also Maintainability Allocation paragraph The lower part of the dialog box includes information required for the MTTR calculation of the current item as an assembly Here you define the following parameters Level of Repair Select Discard Unapplicable Organizational Intermediate Depot Supplier or Manufacturer See more on level selection in Philosophy and Assumptions paragraph Confidence level Select a percentile used for calculating Mct max Define also the Fault Isolation and Ambiguity data see the next paragraph 11 4 2 MIL HDBK 472 Procedure 5A If you selected default for Method of Mct Calculation and MIL 472 Procedure 5 was selected as the default maintainability prediction method in the Project Configuration dialog box then choosing OK in the Item Data Maintainability dialog box displa
396. lation Click one of the options below Modify Select new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup E Remove all installed components InstallShield Back Lancel 9 Choose the desired option and follow the Installation Wizard instructions 3 9 Install Component Library After installing RAM Commander install the component libraries purchased optional There are two Component Library installation modes e Overwrite Library use this mode if you are a new user The existing library for a new user a default empty file is overwritten with the library from the enclosed disk Once you start the library installation process you will not be able to recover your original library e Merge Library use this mode if you already have a library of your own The library from the enclosed CD is appended to the existing library in your RAM Commander package In this case the information in your current library is not erased To install libraries 1 Run RAM Commander If RAM Commander is already running close all windows 2 From the Library menu choose Archive a RAM Commander for Windows Drive Library View Help Components QM e Ee e sk Y T GPRD A Archive Location Archive global databases 2 3 The Backup Restore Data dialog box appears 2014 ALD Software Ltd 3 10 B
397. ld Type of ambient temperature If Fixed temp is set the item s temperature is equal to the value entered in the adjacent C field If Delta Temp the item s temperature is equal to the value in the adjacent C field plus the parent s a default to use reliability prediction methods defined in Project Configuration Project Configuration set user defined to set specific reliability prediction selected component 2014 ALD Software Ltd 8 2 1 Reliability Calculation 217 Method Selected reliability prediction method MIL 217 NPRD FIDES etc Failure distribution i istributi nential Weibull Time inde pe Expo pendent Source for failure Source of failure rate selection predicted user defined field or allocated rate FRp IPredicted calculated failure rate FR u User defined failure rate Takes effect only if FR source is user defined see above Rf Failure rate from field data or from field data FRACAS Takes effect only if FR source is Field Allocated failure rate Takes effect only if FR source is Allocated See Failure Rate Allocation Complexity for FRa Complexity factor for reliability allocation This parameter is valid if you selected Allocated failure rate jield factor uty cycle dd factor Computed failure rate value of current item Item FR base FR FR predicted FR user defined FR field or FR allocated according to FR source switch Field factor Duty Cycle Mult
398. ld L HIRF protection systems have been identified to develop a dedicated maintenance The intent of this maintenance is to reduce the possibility that a single failure cause such as a lightning strike and the occurrence of a common failure cause such as ED or AD across redundant channels of L HIRF protection could impact aircraft airworthiness This section contains guidelines for development of scheduled maintenance tasks for aircraft L HIRF protection systems Each L HIRF protection system item is evaluated in terms of its susceptibility to degradation from environmental deterioration and or accidental damage The L HIRF protection system maintenance tasks are developed in support of the aircraft type certification and MRB report development L HIRF maintenance relies on adequate protection provided by both external and internal L HIRF protection components In order to perform the L HIRF Analysis you need to have Zonal tree and may have Product Breakdown tree built in RAM Commander See Zonal Analysis for more information 2014 ALD Software Ltd L HIRF Analysis Parent Radome Properties Element Mame Lightning Diverters one Name Radome Related Protected WECMIEETEME keris Analysis 1 Are characteristics of the protection components susceptible to Accidental Damage Yes Justification 2 Are characteristics of the protection components susceptible to Environmental Deterioration Ho Justification 3
399. le rganizational Intermediate Depot Discard mbiguity factor Co MTTRa Allocated Mean Time To Repair Conf Level Confidence level 70 75 80 85 90 95 98 99 99 5 99 9 i c Jo Z O lt Maintenance Corrective Time Mean time to repair Mct Calculation result for a given confidence level Fault isolation to N1 N5 parts with probability 1 5 User defined non negative integer values Probability of fault isolation to N1 N5 parts User defined integer between 0 100 4 2 A Level of repair Z Z l oS For Environment field you should select one of the standard environment codes defined in different reliability prediction methods see Standard Environments Select the environment describing operating or storage for non operating mode conditions of you product system Set also an ambient operating temperature for your product O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 167 9 Change the required parameters and press Ok 7 3 3 New item creation There are two ways of new item creation e Insert Inserts an item above the item that was highlighted To add or insert an item into the Product tree 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select item in the product tree which will be parent item for the newly created item Create or next item in the same level for the newly created item Insert 3 From the Tree menu choose Create or Insert or right click the selected item
400. le Import Export to and from Excel Report Generator Testability analysis Comprehensive testability analysis and reports are integrated within the FMECA module FMECA Standard Reports FMEA MIL STD 1629 FMEA GJB 1391 92 FMECA FMEDA Failure Mode Effects and Diagnostics Analysis Criticality Analysis MIL STD 1629 Criticality Analysis GJB 1391 92 End Effects Criticality Numbers Criticality Matrix Fault Tree NHE Critcality Test methods BIT Detection Coverage Fault Isolation Resolution 2014 ALD Software Ltd What you need to know To effectively operate the FMECA as well as to understand the concepts presented in this manual you need to know the following e Basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows e Fundamentals of Failure Mode and Effects Analysis e Probability concepts such as frequency and conditional probability e Reliability module of RAM Commander With this background you can start using FMECA in a quick and efficient manner 18 1 Initiating FMECA module To initiate the FMECA module 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Click on Current Analysis in the button bar in the RAM Commander project list 3 Click the FMECA icon The FMEA grid is displayed in the lower part of the product tree view a Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Current Analysis Fef Des ID Name Qty Op FA 10 6 Status MTBF TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 07685 9345 330 El Communic 1 COMMO01 100 2550 9974 567
401. le 1 mission profiles Done 1 diagrams Edit project properties A a eee SA P FMEA o Maintainability ILS Maintenance do erie _ Open r i Available nai Maintainability prediction Open gt k 6 ea Design FMEA _Open_ Product Tree Available Reliability Prediction Done MTTR 0 374304 h d Operating mode Open IC Available Done FR 127 077 li Spare parts Safety Non Operating mode Open Available 1 scenarios safety Assessment Open Done FR 15 4465 Available 3 failure conditions Derating Stress analysi ee de 2 i g ysis Open RCM N MSG 3 MMEL Available 3 scenarios Customer may purchase license for any subset of available modules 2 3 Useful Features In addition to the modules and features covering all the scope of RAM analysis RAM Commander is supplied with the following useful features e Extensive set of component libraries RAM Commander is equipped with an extensive set of 2014 ALD Software Ltd 22 RAM Commander User Manual 2 4 libraries for more than 60 000 standard components You can easily locate devices in the library and insert them directly into your project e Importing files from external applications Do you have an existing product tree on another application Use RAM Commander s import wizard to safely and completely migrate all the data into RAM Commander s database e Copying data between projects Use RAM Commander s copy utilities to quickly build n
402. le Pylon Frame Spar Rib 54 11 00 Nacelle Pylon Bulkhead Firewall 54 12 00 Nacelle Pylon Plate Skin 54 14 00 Detailed guide on this module is available on demand from ALD Zonal Analysis Zonal Analysis Procedure permits appropriate attention to be given to electrical wiring installations Thus as well as determining zonal inspections the logic provides a means to identify applicable and effective tasks to minimize contamination and to address significant wiring installation discrepancies that may not be reliably detected through zonal inspection These dedicated tasks may subsequently be included in the Systems and Power Plant tasks In order to perform the Zonal Analysis divide the aircraft externally and internally into zones as defined in ATA iSpec 2200 Major zones sub zones areas Each zone can include multiple elements Those elements can be a structure element or L HIRF element or any other aircraft element located in this zone O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 584 RAM Commander User Manual MSG 3 Zonal Analysis for Project AAA on Drive D Mame Zone Description Analysis Type Inspector Level BP aircrart Not Defined Not Defined Lower Hall of Fuselage to Aft Pressure Bukhead 100 HH4HAA NONOBHHA POSES Standard and Enhanced Not Defined Upper Hal of Fuselage to AR Pressure Bulkhead 200 Net Defined Not Defined Upper Hall of Fuselage Flight Compartment 210 PE Not Defined Not Defined BP Figh
403. le in RAMC32 LIB folder 9 Copy the template file to another file name in the same directory LIB 6 Open the newly created file in MS Word and perform the required changes in document design MS Word Template is a regular MS Word document with RAM Commander specific fields T Save the template 8 Return to RAM Commander MS Word Template Selection dialog 9 Press Add button template definition dialog will appear MS ord Template Information Report type Safety Assessment Template file name Template Description a tae 10 Select the newly created template file in LIB folder using the Browse button and provide the new template description 11 Press Ok 12 Template will appear in templates list and may be used for report generation 13 Select it and press the Select button to initiate the report generation To add user defined template created by another user 1 Copy the template file to RAM Commander installation folder LIB sub folder 2 Choose the appropriate item in Reports menu of required module 3 Available report templates list will appear 4 Press Add button template definition dialog will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 137 Ms Word Template Information Report type Safety Assessment Template file name Browse Template Description OK Cancel 9 Select the newly copied template file in LIB folder using the Browse button and provide
404. le which should be previously prepared inside the Isograph Fault Tree software using the Export feature To perform the export of the fault tree from Isograph Fault Tree software 1 Open Fault tree 2 Choose File gt Export option 3 Create Excel template with FT Events FT Gates and other application tables O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 479 Export Untitled E Selecta table fromthe 4pplcation Tables listand then select gt to export this table Select gt gt gt to export all tables t i Data in the selected tables is nov available for export to the selected output file Application Tables Output Tables FT Markov Mipdels FT Events FT Event Gro FT Genenc Models 1 FT Generic Model Groups FT Gates FT Consequences FT Bitmaps FT System FT Gate Lifetime Results FT Consequence Lifetime Results FT Selected Gate Importance Ex eee FT Common Cause Failures FT Selected Consequence Importance FT Risk Importance FT Event Results FT Gate Sensitivity Results FT Gate Confidence Results FT Consequence Sensitivity Results FT Consequence Confidence Results FT Gate Time Profile FT Consequence Time Profile FT Markow Time Profile 3 2 Previous Next s gt Cancel The tables you need to include are e For Isograph FaultTree version 10 FT Events FT Generic Models FT Gates FT Common Cause Failures e For Isograph FaultTree version 11
405. lement 1 Select the tree element and then right click Choose Add Element from the pop up menu or Select the tree element and press the F7 key The FTA element data screen is displayed FTA element data Element type SANS Negated Code IPS Name Fower Supplies 3 parallel Description Visual representation Border style O Solid Background Foreground Font Calculation parameters Frobability FR 10 6 h Logical state a el FA Multiplier Probability q Event type Frequency F MTTR hours Test interval Tih Time to first test TEA Mission time Hours Unavailabilty Oft 4 4046 7e 019 Mean unavallabilty El 0 Connection with Product Tree FMECA Product Tree ltem ID FMECA FM number Common Cause Failure Group CCF Group Code Cancel 2 Select FTA Gate Event type Relevant fields on the data screen will be enabled 3 Specify gate event code name and description For Event basic undeveloped or house specify event probability calculation type and parameters See the list of parameters in the table below Enter the element code in this text box This should be unique for the diagram Events with the same code are considered as identical during the calculation For a gate enter its code For an event enter the code for the new event or choose it from the list if 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander
406. liability professionals and design engineers developed by the ALD Reliability and Safety Solutions RAM Commander combines ingenuity of approach calculation accuracy convenience of use Designed by reliability engineers RAM Commander covers the entire scope of engineering tasks related to reliability of electronic electro mechanical and mechanical systems A RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View Window Help ETA ERA BE O eet Project TUTORIAL on Drive C gm FTA Tutorial for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C Current Analysis pet Des ID Name a S TUTORIAL 1 Communi Sample Fault Tree for project caiman d GIB Communic E TUTORIALS eoording tovproiec s aia Main Switch 1 5w888 AA DUE A gt Du10 3 80031 Pa is DO bi a Y Du 5 74L530 a 1 478 005 en 183005 Non Operating A1 10 6 ALA F R1112 7AN R30 34 8 RZ Rec her PS hk d CC2 10 CK 22247 98200 2700 98200 1 132007 a Graph Generator for RAM Commander version 3 0 o ms a 7 epa habe Repalabe Re k P6553 8 35 2 SING E a Repalabe FR 8 35 MTTR 0 117667 MTTR 0 117657 ss 0333333 Taim iter Bilere 256 007 325 4007 37300 Reps ae e Repalrabk 07 P 3 453 MTTR 0 354 RBD Standard for Project TUTORIAL Drive C D Capacitor D Antenna D Switch D IC Digital Ea Motor Oth
407. lit option from the menu Alt Enter Del Range 1 3 Exponential 120742 000 Using the Change range button create new ranges and split your K N elements into separate lines with different reliability values like in the example below where first element is different from the second and third 2014 ALD Software Ltd Split K out of N Range FR Distribution FR Param FRA Parana 7 7 Exponential 120 42 000 223 Exponential 1200000 000 13 2 6 To create a SubRBD Note SubRBDs are in rectangles with rounded corners which represent nested RBD diagrams 1 To insert a SubRBD highlight an insertion node 2 Right click on the selected insertion node and from the Item menu or the pop up menu choose Add SubRBD 3 A SubRBD element is inserted into the diagram 4 Double click on the SubRBD element 5 The SubRBD Parameters Definition dialog box appears SUBREAD parameters definition EXAMPLE RBD NON SWIT STANDARD Element type REGULAR ST T CHIN E out of N WEIBULL 6 Select an RBD name 7 Press Ok 8 Sub RBD block will be inserted into the current RBD diagram 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams NES To open a SubRBD select it and from the RBD menu choose Open Current SubRBD An RBD diagram of the SubRBD opens in a separate window Sub RBDs nesting levels are not limited main RBD may have multiple sub RBDs each of them may have its
408. lity is different if event 1 is true and if event 1 is false Probability source Set up probability calculation method User defined Calculated Calculated using Product Tree FMECA data 2014 ALD Software Ltd Using FTA Basic Event pick Linked to FTA Basic Event button and click on arrow in FTA Basic Event In the opened FTA Events Library select FTA Basic Event Using FTA top event gate pick Linked to FTA Gate Top Event button click on arrow in FTA tree and select required tree Click on arrow in FTA Gate Top event and select the gate or event from tree selected before Background color Background color of the element Foreground color Foreground color of the element Font of the element Load from Library Press the button to update event s data from the library library should contain event with the same Code Load to library Press the button to save event s data in the Library Automatically update from Check the checkbox if you wish to update event s data from the event s library automatically when library record with the same Event Code is changed To edit event double click on it or right click on it and choose Edit from the pop up menu Data screen described above will be displayed If you choose to use calculated probability you have to press Calculate button and enter calculation parameters FR Failure rate failures per million or billion of hours depends on project settings P
409. lity prediction method data screen for each particular component 2014 ALD Software Ltd Ref des U10 AT 1 EMM GF Temp 25 E Fart name Mil num Cat num Generic name SOC Pl Type Logic al Tech H of gates S000 Package Nonhermetic Lali CommercialHot Screened Pl q K Cycling 4 Using RAM Commander s Default Manager you can change the default values for the K multiplier for each component type and not for each particular component as above To modify default K values 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu select Default Manager the Default Manager list opens 3 Make selections in the Item type list box 4 Click on a specific component type in the list and from the Item menu select Edit the processor dialog box opens 9 Enter a default multiplier value in the K Cycling field 6 Choose OK RAM Commander normally applies the default value when computing cycling reliability for components of the selected technology If you enter a specific value in a component s processor dialog box RAM Commander uses it instead of the default Cycling Reliability Reports RAM Commander uses the value in the K Cycling field to compute cycling reliability This reliability value appears on a special report which you can produce using the following procedure To report cycling reliability values 1 Recalculate the project 2 From the R
410. lization period hours ESD Susceptibility v E to 74FCT8238N Fanout rated Quality AL FAFCTOZADA l las a 74FCT824SN ee a d E Inia FAFCT 25 Freq rated i roma 7 a TAErfTaove h FAFCTS2BON J 1 E AN oo Ly 74ECTS25SN Mount Method 1 7 Pp 7 4FCTO27DM Learning factor 4 E 7 E ZAFCT827SN E F AL F4FCTR28DN amp COCINE FTE 4 mi Lead Configuration P Distance For Help press Fl ID 1 NLM Component Library contains only general technical information about each component and does not contain project specific information like stresses For example for Resistors the library may contain Power Rated but does not contain Power operating because Power operating is specific for each installation of the component and is not part of component data sheet RAM Commander provides two types of component libraries e The global library consists of generic component information to be used in various projects You may purchase component library with more that 400 000 active and passive electronic components from ALD You may build your own libraries manually using import from other data sources copying components from multiple project libraries e The project library consists of components that you can save in the library during project 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 249 development All users can view update insert
411. ll appear Go through the MSG 3 procedure selecting one step after another performing required actions on each step lf required prevous steps may be activated to edit add required information MSG 3 Procedure Steps The following paragraphs will explain each step of the seven MSG 3 procedure steps Step 1 System Definition During this step user has to create a system definition in RAM Commander build import system product tree and provide additional information required for MSG 3 reports MTTR supplier manufacturer name failure rate item functions part numbers ATA numbers etc See chapter Project Building for more information on system definition 23 Project TUTORIAL_MSG3 on Drive C Current Analysis Fat Das CIF YEN SSA 7 1 Fuel System MSG 3 Fuselage tank Refueling pilot valve Drain valve Center tank collec Pressure refueling adapter Check valve flapper Interconnect valves Ewing drain valve E Wing float vent valve Center tank transfer jet pump Ewing tank transfer jet pump Transfer inline check valve Fuel Distribution System Boos Jet Pump Electric Standby Pump Feed Inline Check Valve Engine Fire Shutoff Valve EJ APU Fire Shutoff Valve Fuel Pressure Switch Fuel Dump System 1D Name i E Fuel Storage System 1 P 2 KYY ZO LE 3 RRYVZZAK ZZ 4 Y ZOK 5 VY ZORK ZZ E YY ZOX ZZ F AAVV ZAR LL 8 YY ZOK 9 KYY ZORK ZZ b b b b b b b dl dl dl dl dl
412. ll get an ETA element data screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd Event Tree Analysis sor Code Start of fire Mame Description Visual representation Background Foreground Font Event type Event logic Tme False gt Probabilities in different aoe avent tree branches The same probabilities in all branches Calculation parameters Probability source User defined Probability q jae Calculated Probability q JO Caleulate Linked to Product Tree ID FM H fo Clear E Tree FMECA Probability q jo Calculate cr Linked to FTA FTA Basic Event es gt Basic Event Linked to FTA FTA Tree O gt E ed op FTA Gate Top NA ven E vent C Not Applicable Resulting probability jus Events Library Load from library Load to library Automatically update from library Cancel The following data may be entered Event logic Success Failure choose if the event s outcome is described in Success or Failure True False choose if the event is a failure which may occur or may not Custom choose if event s logic is not binary for example North wind South wind West wind etc Probabilities in different The same probabilities choose if event probability in different branches sequences is the same Different probabilities choose if event probability differs and depends on previous events for example if event 2 probabi
413. ll these dictionary terms should be translated and then the translated copy of the project will be generated On the next stages you will have to translate only new terms which were added to the source project since the last translation The translation process works only in one direction it means that all changes to the translated copy project will be lost on the next translation iteration All changes should be applied to the source project and then they will be copied to the translated project copy after the next translation To use this feature select the source project in the project list and open Translation item of the main menu 2 RAM Commander for Windows List of Projects o i Drive Project Translation view Window Help E aenerate dictionary Edit dictionary Generate translated copy Select Generate dictionary item first When the dictionary is generated select Edit dictionary item and translate all dictionary terms 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 155 E RAM Commander for Windows dictionaryamdb Item Prima la Jage Fal Rur After Sirt Fal Oper on Demand Faled Dif Failed On Fads to Open F lg to Stat Fads to Tip Failure of ilem Arena ID 1 3 4 Signal Lesk age Fale of iem Hardie ID 1 22 1 Total dive fal Falure of item Keyboard ID 1 2 1 Total keyboard fal F alre of them Mothebrd ID 1 2 2 4 CPU Fail Falure of item MotheBrd 10 1 2 3 4 Data bit l
414. ll version Student Version and Demo Version See the comparison matrix below for more information about differences Feature Full Version Student Version Commercial version for Educational purposes Evaluation purposes professional reliability availability maintainability and safety analysis None unlimited None unlimited Only 4 prediction methods supported MIL 217 Telcordia 1 GJB299B None unlimited Limited per project 20 product tree items 5 FMECA failure modes per 2 FMECA failure modes per item item 10 Fault Trees 3 Fault Trees 20 Gates per FTA 15 Gates per FTA 10 Event Trees 3 Event Trees 6 Events per ETA 4 Events per ETA 7 functions in Safety 5 functions in Safety 5 hazards failures per 2 hazards failures per function function 10 Markov diagrams 3 Markov diagrams 8 states per Markov diagram 5 states per Markov diagram 10 elements per FMEA 5 elements per FMEA 8 failures per FMEA element 3 failures per FMEA element Activity Unlimited Semester 6 months Unlimited period Availability Download after purchase Download after purchase or Free from web site contact sales agreement contact sales The entire manual relates to all available editions Installation Your RAM Commander software kit includes e Installation CD e Security Plug optional e User Manual Installation package and User Manual available also online please ask your software vendor for URL and access code RAM Commander may b
415. ls i i Electro Mechanical Cancel When you start a new project there is one default phase called Default with duration of 1 hour change the phase definition duration and add additional phases if required into FMECA Library 18 4 FMECA Libraries After the first time initialization of an FMECA project you should define the settings of the FMECA Libraries The RAM Commander FMECA module comes with a number of predefined libraries The purpose of the libraries is to simplify and standardize the FMEA data input You can enter data in the following fields with the help of these libraries e Phase at least one Phase should be in the library at the moment of FMEA initialization e Severity at least one Severity category with its rank should be in the library at the moment of FMEA initialization e Criticality Groups A B C D E groups for Criticality Matix e End Effect at least one End Effect with its rank should be in the library at the moment of FMEA initialization e Failure Mode e Cause e Component FMD 97 by default e Test e Subtest e Test Type at least one test type should be present in the library before you may create tests O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 4 1 To access FMECA libraries From the Library menu choose FMECA Library The FMECA Library data window opens with Phase library displayed Safety FMECA Library Data xj Phase Severity Safety Severity Criticality Groups End Eff
416. ltage stress ratio VSR Rated Voltage Rated Voltage gate source Rated Voltage drain source Rated Current Rated Power Frequency Applied Frequency SR Each component type Item type has its specific list of stress types it could have See the matrix below for the list of all Item types and their relevant stresses split into two tables Part IC memory Hf transistor IC IC IC Resist Poten Capac Switc Relay Lf diode L Hf diode Hf Stress memo analo digita or tiometer itor h transistor transistor parameter ry g S LE O O CO O O O O IC A pp MA Fla ll fo f f O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Bubble cis Indu Fuse Laser Diode SAW Lamp Filter da Stress memory ctive S A O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 205 Bubble Conn Indu Fuse Laser Diode SAW Lamp Filter eas Stress parameter electronic memory ector ctive 7 4 1 6 7 Search in Library Search in library column is used in case when a single column contains more than one type of following item identifiers e Generic Name component library key e Catalog Number Cross reference key e Military Number Cross reference key special military parts library e Part number key in automatic recognition Cross reference key Map such column of your import file to Search in library column For example some specific BOM file may have single identification field named ID and for some records it may contain P
417. lure Modes Effects and Y f Criticality Analysis FMECA Process Design FMEA Fault Tree Analysis FTA Testability Event Tree Analysis ETA Stage 7 Safety Analysis Stage 8 Additional Analysis Types Perform SafatyHazard analysis required by differant a i standards PHA SHA FHA SSA AFO SAE ARP RCM MSG 3 MMEL Derating Stress Spare Farts 4761 MIL B82 using Safety Module i Dispatch Reliability Reliability Growth Weibull Stage 9 Next steps Recurrent Analysis Export data to FRACAS Export data to D LCC for Reuse analysis datafor Perform recurrent for field failure collection product life cycle cost next revisions or similar analysis based on the and analysis analysis systems field data FRACAS Next paragraphs provide detailed explanation of the process stages 2014 ALD Software Ltd EE RAM Commander User Manual 4 1 2 Stage 1 Project Creation Project is the major information unit in RAM Commander Project is a sort of a briefcase containing all the information available analysis types and cases diagrams calculations predictions and reports for specific system product or equipment unit This way different analysis types may be conducted separately or benefit from the integrated environment and common database sharing data between them e List of Projects on Drive Description Owner Owrergrmup LockedBy Date Project group FAMC PRJ_OVERY ALD 2010
418. lure sublevel Calculate Selected FTA 1 Enter name of the new failure condition to be added to the selected group 2 The new failure condition appears inside the group Failure Condition Partial loge of Deceleration Capability 3 Fill in the information in all other fields of the new failure condition To edit an existing failure condition data You always can change any failure condition data by clicking the required table cell and writing the 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 5a new data or clicking the button and selecting different phases or End Effects To delete a specific failure condition right click the failure condition in the failure conditions table and select Delete from the popup menu To create a new failure condition AFO mode 1 Select specific function 2 Make sure to switch to the AFO mode in View menu 3 Select the first field in the table below and enter the failure condition number Functional Tree for Project TUTORIAL on Drive D Hame Description E TUTORIAL E Communication a Transmit O E Homep OTkasa HadimeHobaHHe PUAEUHAOHanbHOFO OTKASA BosmMoxHble MPHHHHEI TR aa Tan non ra AaparTep NPOABNEHHA OTK dd q f 1 Press Enter 2 Fill Failure condition name in the next field 3 Specify Safety Assessment Method FTA as described in To create a new failure condition FHA mode section earlier in this document paragr
419. ly components linear interpolation extrapolation i used Delete H 1 2 3 4 z E f E co Copy to Enw L CI ey Py ea A ee D 0 ee to Pi Then you have this part in your Bill Of Materials in device used in GF conditions under 50 degrees 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation m temperature Using GPRD library and GPRD reliability calculation method you may get the FR calculated for specific project environment condition and temperature See GPRD paragraph for information about using GPRD Library and Using GPRD Library in Reliability Prediction paragraph for using GPRD reliability calculation method 8 2 4 Failure Rate Allocation You may be faced with a situation where the system or a particular assembly must satisfy a given MTBF or FR To achieve this reliability goal you must assign a certain reliability value to the items within the assembly thus ensuring that these values participate in the reliability calculation This approach is called a top to bottom reliability allocation Special fields in the Item Data dialog box are reserved for reliability allocation FRa Allocated or required failure rate Complexity for FRa Weight for reliability allocation Failure Rate Reliability Data FR Source Allocated FR predicted o FA user defined 0 FR field FR allocated orr rg Complexity hor FA allocation Use the Item Data dialog
420. ly of spare parts is permitted The only way to restore a system to operating condition is to replace failed parts from existing stock at the operational site Examples of unsupported missions include submarines at sea aircraft in the sky or space shuttles in orbit The number of days during which replacement of spare parts is impossible and the number of systems participating in the mission are taken into account for spare parts evaluation 16 2 Product Tree Data Spare parts calculation optimization module uses product tree information during the calculation Product tree supplies data about replaceable parts their part numbers their failure rates replace level and other information You should build the product tree and define the following information for each product tree item before you may use Spare parts module 2014 ALD Software Ltd 392 RAM Commander User Manual 16 3 1 Part Number or other identifies like Catalog Number Generic name etc 2 Quantity 3 Operating reliability data Failure Rate using prediction FR temperature curve in GPRD library or just specifying fixed user defined or field failure rate 4 Maintainability data Level of Repair and Level of Replace 5 ltem minimal and maximal spare parts quantity condemnation rate and turnaround time if necessary and if part values differ from general settings in spare parts scenario see General tab of ltem data screen Repair turnaround
421. ly to Processor Method Family E tem code 2 In the Global Change dialog box do one of the following To make changes to RBD elements that satisfy the selection criteria select the Use Condition check box To make changes to all RBD elements do not select the Use Condition check box 3 Choose OK The Element parameters definition Conditions dialog box only opens if the Use Condition check box in step 2 above was checked 4 Enter search criteria 9 Choose OK The Element parameters definition New Values dialog box opens 6 Enter new values for RBD elements Choose OK Note appearing in a field in the Conditions dialog box means that each field changed from to another value will participate in the Global change conditions O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 354 RAM Commander User Manual 13 3 13 3 1 Note appearing in a field in the New Values dialog box means that each field changed will result in a corresponding parameter change for all items depending on the conditions in Conditions dialog box during the Global Change RBD Calculations RAM Commander computes the reliability and availability of an RBD using one of the following methods Analytical RBD is computed using analytical techniques when possible Identical This calculation is necessary when the RBD has elements that appear more than once in the diagram if multiple diagram blocks have the same Re
422. mander User Manual 7 4 1 2 4 Select file form import Press the Browse button select the file and press Open 5 Press Next button The next step of the procedure differs for different types of input file see Step 2 Text files Step 2 MS Excel Access files or Step 2 Mentor Graphics files Step 2 Text files 1 Step 2 text file import dialog will appear Import Wizard Step 2 of 5 The test import wizard needs to know the format that best describes pour data Format Be lal E Test qualifier is E a Comma C E a none Fixed width O Space 6 NE Label on first line Preview file a 30 40 aU BU RR ER RR ERE RE EREERRREEREERRRE RR Kn o a a QtySoaour ceMTBF PricelfRepair lRepl aceDe 1 o o ra T D c A 2 7 La D rr a a A a L a OO a 0 o oO chi AS LL UU q t T Co ha hae oo Cea aI gIgISs ME eye oe a Eo roo ZOMOTO hoo et To co MN O PO O a w anm m o o a o e a a l l l l l l l md l mb l EEEa E ap E up E u E a E up E a E aa E a Je Ye Ye de Ye Ye de de Lo 1 OSO ee ee ee ee ee a e oe oe oe ee eee ee ee e Jo a o a e ar G ar nr A oOo Ea o eee DOC oo mmmmmMmMMMMMZ DZ 000 20 6 E Foon aman 4 O E MM hwo 500 Mm Se PO DO E L O ti Dido onnaa aSa Nm E a 4 4 4 El 4 4 A 4 4 ie e Fr lt m Back Next gt Cancel J Help 2 Select the text file format type e Delimited
423. mander to support all necessary iterations and to produce all required outputs is the easy accurate and timesaving way to perform the safety assessment RAM Commander Safety Module implements tasks of qualitative and quantitative safety assessment required during system development e Generation and verification of safety requirements e identification of all relevant failure conditions e Consideration of all significant combinations of failures leading to failure conditions e Calculation of expected probabilities for all failure conditions e Generation of output reports starting from the stage of Functional Hazard Analysis FHA PHA and ending with the System Safety Assessment SSA verifying that the design meets safety requirements RAM Commander s easy to use modules Reliability Prediction RBD FMECA Markov and FTA are the basis and the heart of the Safety Module Safety Module Basics Safety Analysis requires to build a functional tree of the product and to provide information about potential failures for each product function There multiple Safety Hazard analysis standards approaches available FHA SHA SSA PSA etc the required standard may be selected in the View menu of Safety module O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 539 AIRCRAFT on Drive we Tree Calculation Library Reports Tools Window Help ej KX E Toolbar w Status bar Hame a 619 AIRCRAFT Expand all Tree
424. matically renumber the item numbers as you delete items from an assembly The sequence in the Product tree view can therefore have jumps in it like 1 2 5 6 8 etc To reset the item number sequence e g 1 2 3 4 5 6 you must organize the level or the whole tree To organize a Product tree 1 Activate the Product tree view 2014 ALD Software Ltd 184 RAM Commander User Manual 2 From the Tree menu select Organize 3 RAM Commander displays the Product tree view with a continuous sequence of item numbers 7 4 Import Export RAM Commander has customizable product tree data import and export facilities You may import product tree data from various data sources Excel Access Text etc using Import Wizard and Export product tree data into customizable Excel files see next paragraphs for more information 7 4 1 Import Wizard One of the several techniques of populating the product tree is to import components from the BOM Bill of Materials or other information sources such as ERP systems commonly used Reliability Data Bases etc The Product Tree Import Wizard builds the entire product tree importing data such as Ref Des Qty Catalog Number or Part number etc from various formats like MS Excel MS Access and Text lt may import also thermal analysis results and stress information However it does not import component technical data provided by manufacturer such as resistor type capacitors capacitance IC Digital nu
425. mation Analysis Center RIAC based New RD5 TELECOMM OperatinglElectronid Ls 5 IEC 62380 Operating RDF 2003 New version of UTE C 80 810 orofile based 5 TALTEL IRPH93 IA AS 1 P A ME i Department of Defence USA stress icount O 2 O I MES A 2H wim Win Y gt ogo Y msn aS El E 5 m MS Mim A m NISN 0 ni Ala Glo NI N N NI Jlo IJO Oo O o 7 Wi Wl B 0Olr lT wm uj U ia 1 OJO JO lt O B O O D Q 5 de m D O 3 2 o T T O gt Operating ElectroniciMission New version of FIDES 2004 Edition A profile September 2010 based New Cc UU N O O U O O 5 Pe O O D o 5 O m D O O 3 O O 2 gt D a D T L J U A X N U C 0 X Jl m U N N TI U 2014 ALD Software Ltd Method Supporte Features Description d compone nts stress count stress aggregated non electronic components under various perating Mechanic al historical environments The source of this data is the O O A library of failure rates for a large number of document NPRD 95 Non electronic Parts Reliability Data released by RAC Part category which provides a rough classification of parts e g actuators batteries pumps etc should be selected for each device Next the user selects a certain subtype e g for batteries Carbon Zinc Lithium etc US NAVY Carderock Division of the
426. may contain multiple projects located on multiple local and network drives project libraries and global libraries Each project contains data for performed analysis types reliability FTA Safety etc Each project contains it s own libraries reliability FMECA FTA Events etc All project share common Global libraries component reliability data cross reference calculation defaults etc The diagram below explains the RAM Commander database organization Cross Reference j Product PA Tree l BOM 4 LA Calculation A f defaults Libraries Components FMECA FTA Evants 44 Summary In this chapter you saw the basic RAM Commander process from product tree building and data management to output reporting O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter RAM Commander Fundamentals RAM Commander Fundamentals 117 5 RAM Commander Fundamentals This chapter deals with the basic tools repeatedly used in accessing and navgating through RAM Commander data list of projects the product tree view project data lists report etc As these tools are used throughout RAM Commander a familiarity with them will allow you to work quickly and efficiently RAM Commander provides maximum flexibility for best exploiting the time devoted to reliability and maintainability studies The extensive library structure combined with window and graphic interfaces ensures productivity efficiency and consistency The next
427. mber of gates or bits etc For this information import you should use Component Library data import see the Reliability Libraries and Defaults chapter for more information The Import Wizard facilitates the import of the tree data saved in one of the following file types e Text e Mentor Graphics e MS Access e MS Excel Import wizard is customizable and allows mapping of your source file fields to RAM Commander database fields To run the Import Wizard 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Tools menu choose Import Wizard 3 The import wizard Step 1 window will appear see next paragraphs for further instructions O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 185 7 4 1 1 Step 1 1 Step 1 dialog of the import procedure will appear after the process initiation Import wizard Step 1 of The wizard needs to know the import fle name and type S Import file type Text Use existing script Import file name E aaa bet Hest gt Lancel Help 2 Select the desired file type from the list of choices e Text for Text ASCII files with comma semicolon or tab delimiters or with fixed with fields Suitable also for CSV files e Mentor Graphics for Mentor Graphics BOARD STATION COMPONENTS FILE FORMAT 2 0 e MS Access for MDB files e MS Excel for Excel files XLS XLSX If the file type is Excel you will have additional options to choose the M
428. me Ay Op FREIO 6 Status TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 0765 4 Communic 1 COMMOO1 100 2550 Main Switch 151888 Operating 1 gt i s T gt 10 Q puz 4 LM299 gt u3 5 74L530 Non Operating P110 b ALA R112 7 AN f ab RH 8 AZ t Sk CC JCK A 10 CK Maintainability E 003 11 CK ame Dade o 0 0607 CC5 13 CK 1 YE L0 4 14 HLMP 2450 Y L5 b 15 HLMP 2400 1 2 16 DP2 El Receiver 2 ACOD4 82 8214 El Transmitter 3 TR987 001 0 3419 El E Control 2 Control Unit El Pedesta Modules ACM MSG 3 For Help press Fl ENE theta the the During the product tree building phase enter or import the product tree Using a top down process you decompose the system into a tree of assemblies subassemblies and components For each element in the tree define all required parameters such as environment reference designator part number and quantity RAM Commander increases your productivity by allowing you to retrieve data from various external sources such as e Import of CAD files of most commonly used file types such as ASCII MS Excel MS Access Mentor Graphics etc e Predefined sets of default values e Component libraries Stage 3 Reliability and Maintainability Calculations RAM Commander performs reliability and maintainability calculations You can allow the calculation to span the entire product tree or restrict the calculations to a particular item component or block or part of a pro
429. me list box select a field 7 In the Width field enter a field width If a floating point field is selected enter the number of decimal places Make sure to provide enough space for your numeric values For example width 10 and decimal places 3 will give output like 12 345 However if the number is smaller 2014 ALD Software Ltd 132 RAM Commander User Manual than 1e 3 and it is not possible to display the most significant part of it using 3 decimal places this number will be displayed in engineering form like 1e 4 8 If required change the column name to the desired column name you wish to appear in table header of the report 9 To define the current field as a sorting key choose First or No to set the sorting priority 10 Choose OK 11 Repeat steps 3 10 to add more fields to the report 12 Choose Generate 13 RAM Commander displays your customized report in a window Since RAM Commander automatically saves the report definition it can be used during subsequent sessions Report Generator supports calculated fields where user may define a formula and report will display calculated values In order to create calculated field add a field with Group CA and Field Formula in the Report Generator Then select this newly added field in the list and press Edit button Field data dialog will appear with the formula field available You may enter formula manually however it is recommended to use formula editor instead
430. menu 3 Settings dialog will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started configuration Cross Reference file DO SAAMIOSASLIBMSAREF DAT Select mu Create Global Library file DARAMES2ALIBALIBRARY DAT Select Create Project files folder AAMC IPR Select GPRD tile DARAGMESALIBAGPRO MOB Select Create 4 For each corresponding library type use Select button to point to another existing library file or Create button to create a new empty library file at the new location 9 Change Project files folder location if required 6 Press Ok and restart RAM Commander 7 Repeat this procedure for each RAM Commander installation workstation or standalone Note you should have read write access rights to Windows registry HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE Advanced Logistics Developments branch in order to change these settings Additional application settings RAM Commander contains additional application settings stored in RAMC321BINtramc ini file such as e User Interface Skin o RAM Commander software look is customizable Users preferring the standard MS Windows look may switch the skin off by removing comments from the line Skin NONE in RAMC32 BIN ramc ini file o Advanced users may also select another look by providing MS Windows skin file msstyles put the file to RAMC32 LIB folder and set Skin parameter in RAMC32 BIN ramc i
431. meters which should be defined to enable LDAP authentication AuthType Authentication type Set LDAP for LDAP or RAMC for build in users database default is RAMC LDAPPath The full LDAP path to Active Directory for example LDAP lt server address gt port By default ports are 389 for regular connection and 636 for SSL LDAPSSL LDAP Connection encryption O regular or 1 SSL LDAPCheckGroup Group Check if set to 1 login will be allowed only if user belongs to the Specified group AllowedUserGroup Group name login will be allowed only if user belongs to the specified group Case sensitive DomainSuffix Constant Domain name suffix the defined string will be added as suffix to user domain DefaultUserNameMode Possibility to offer current MS Windows user name as default in RAM Commander login dialog O no user login field is empty 1 Windows user name 2 Windows domain user See the sample part of ramc ini file with authentication set to LDAP with SSL Authentication AuthType LDAP LDAPPath LDAP DC001 NorthWoods com LDAPSSL 1 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started os LDAPCheckGroup 0 AllowedUserGroup RAMCUsers DomainSuffix NorthWoods DefaultUserNameMode 1 Please note that you need to take care of projects and permissions before switching to LDAP It is possible that the same person has different user name in RAM Commander that his her user name in LDAP Then if this person has projects with
432. minate or reduce the chance of the potential failure occurring and c document the entire process FMEA is an integral part of any QS 9000 compliant quality system FMEA Process The FMEA process involves the following activities e Identification of functions elements of your process product e Identification of possible Failures for a function element e Identification of possible Effects of the Failure e Determination of Severity of the Failure e Identification of possible Causes of the Failure e Determination of Occurrence of the Cause e Identification of control methods used to inspect function element for failures e Determination of Detection e Calculation of RPN Risk Priority Number e Prioritization of failures selection of Critical and Important failures as candidates for Corrective Actions e Identification of corrective actions to reduce the Risk Corrective Actions CA are actions aimed at the process product improvement by reducing risk and increasing responsibility e Determination of improved rates of Occurrence Detection and calculation of the resulting RPN e Process repetition to achieve better results At every step results should be documented in a standard tabular FMEA Form The fundamental purpose of the FMEA is to recommend and take actions that reduce risk Actions taken should result in a lower Occurrence or Detection rating Adding validation or verification controls can reduce Detection Design or proce
433. mmander User Manual 8 2 3 Failure Rate Relability Data FR Source Field gt FR predicted O FR field 0 30 A allocated 3 Press Ok to return to the product tree For both cases you may provide explanation about the FR source in the Source of FR text field Both Failure Rates User defined and field may be imported using Import Wizard Specify known temperature dependent FR Known Failure Rates for specific environments and temperatures may be placed into GPRD library Field Failure Rate Tables and then GPRD calculation method may be used to calculate FR for the selected component using existing FR data For example manufacturer provided FR data for some part with PN GA89723 for GB environment and temperatures 20 and 80 degrees These data may be entered into the GPRD library under specific Part Number GPRD Operating Part Mame GAS9723 Environment GE Use for conversion Project FR 0e6 Tmin 0 Tmas 75 Source User Defined Temperature Fe M FE 1e 6 1061 0 0 5 0 in 15 0 20 0 20 E Add 25 0 30 0 35 0 E Edit 40 0 45 0 50 0 Redraw 55 0 l 60 0 65 0 70 0 FR or MTBF interpolation extrapolation le done according to provided FA temperature points For electronic family components or assemblies Family calculation ls done according to RAL 20 0 Reliability Toolkit formulas For mechanical and electro mechanical fami
434. mmander product tree export to MS Excel see Export paragraph of this chapter To perform update using Import Wizard 1 Open product tree view 2 Select top item or required branch assembly 3 Proceed with the standard import wizard procedure see Import Wizard paragraph earlier in this chapter Export RAM Commander Report Generator allows custom report definition and generation Then such reprot may be saved in Excel file This way you may export product tree data into Excel file and have the excel file created with only columns you need in order you need etc To perform product tree data export to Excel 1 Open product tree view 2 Select top item or any branch assembly you wish to export 3 Open Report generator and create your report export format definition See the Report Generator paragraph for more information Typical export example is shown below O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 9 Report Generator Report Definition Report A Scan method w O by level gt E Generate Esport to D LEL Add Delete Separate levels Depth 9 Setup Title Include tems Items Project Drive Current Date C Project name Column Mame Sort Order Depth Mo Ref dez Part name Part name MTBF selected MTBF MET i MCT Level of repair Level of repair Level of replace Level of replace ltem price Price Ad Delete Edit Move Up Move Down 4 Ge
435. modules require MS Office MS Word and MS Excel installed e Server if client server configuration is used not required for standalone OS Windows XP Vista 7 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 Server Both 32 bit and 64 bit processors and OS supported Hardware Recommended hardware configuration for installed OS version Generally it is o 3 GHz or higher Windows compatible Dual core processor Intel Pentium Celeron family or AMD K6 Athlon Duron 15 17 o 4GB RAM o Free 1GB Hard Drive space for software installation only required capacity depends on expected database sizes Some modules require NET Framework 2 0 installed Requirements listed above are minimal requirements for running the software Optimal recommended requirements depend on the nature of projects and calculations planned to perform size of product trees complexity of fault trees number of products being analysed etc Better processors and larger RAM size will improve the calculation speed O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 31 3 3 2 Standalone Installation Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander Make sure RAM Commander users have full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder 1 Run RAM Commander installation package run installation file downloaded from our web site or RAMC setup exe file from RAM Commander installation CD
436. n System E J Moe oo rn Ee a See Chapter FMECA Functional_ Blocks paragraph for more information on working with functional blocks 24 1 2 2 Step 2 MSI Selection The purpose of this step is decision making and selection of system items which are significant from the maintenance point of view and which will be analyzed in the next steps of MSG 3 procedure as candidates to preventive scheduled maintenance 1 Choose 2 MSI Selection MSG 3 step 2 List of system items will appear only items which have function functions defined and have ATA number defined will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 10 Fuel ERA System 28 10 01 AAVV ZZ Fuselage tank 28 10 03 SOY VEZ ZZ Refueling pilot valve 28 10 04 YY ZZ ZZ Drain valve Center tank collector box 28 10 05 AAVV ZZ Pressure refueling adapter 28 10 06 ORY VLR ZZ Check valve flapper 28 10 07 HOY LORA LLE Interconnect valves 28 10 08 ONY VELL ZZ Wing drain valve 28 10 09 SOY VEZ ZZ Wing float vent valve 28 10 10 YY ZL ZZ Center tank transfer jet pump 28 10 11 AAVV ZZ Wing tank transfer jet pump Transfer inline check valve Determine ltem Maintenance Significance Set Remarks and Highest Manageable MSI 3 For each item in the list perform the following steps a Press Determine Item Maintenance Significance button or double click on the item b Decision diagram will appear Select appropriate Yes or No answers for each of 4 question
437. n option to copy libraries from one project to another Global libraries are used by all projects and shared between all network users in case of client server installation Usually all users may update project libraries and only Administrator Manager may review approve and copy data from project libraries to the global library otherwise global libraries will turn into garbage collection due to uncontrolled data input from multiple users Component Library One of RAM Commander s powerful and time consuming features is its Component Libraries containing component information used in reliability prediction Each component has its own set of parameters usually taken from the component s data sheet supplied by manufacturer a RAM Commander for windows Global Library lo e 3 m Library tem Reports View Window Help gt gt E X y Re ELECTRONIC CDi qital Library Manager Il DIGITAL Generic Mame Generic Name 4FCT S250 Package Type Logic g NHER_DIF Technology CMOS bi Humber of pinz Pd max Pu No of Gates 84 54 Ho of bits Ti max PC Theta jc 36 PEW Z AFCT64G asa SUL Be Subtype Mp 74FCT805 dd max E Pp 74FCTOO7 WHSIC and VLSI AL FAFCTSO7BT Years of production Manut Process e E rg FAFCT821 a DN Maturity pear Die rea em 2 AL FAFCTS215N Manufacturing year Feature Size Microns He Uti
438. n prediction method If you do not have the Generic name and use other identifiers Part Number Catalog Number etc you hawe to use the Cross Reference library to define a translation between Part Number or Catalog Number and it s corresponding Generic Name The following procedure illustrates RAM Commander s library retrieval process using some component example 1 User creates a new component in the product tree and provides the Part Number 2014 ALD Software Ltd Functional Blocks General Logistics Operating Monoperating Maintainability Family ELECTRONIC Ref Des U12 ltem code IC Digital Part name RR 123 355 E I Digital e Dd Ref des U12 aTY 1A Eny GF Temp 35 iE Part name AR 123 355 Mil num Cat num VHSIC YLSI CMOS bd arnotartarnan 0 2 User opens prediction method data screen MIL HDBK 217 in this case and presses the Retrieve from library button FR p Generic name 3 Generic Name which serves for search in the component library is not defined but the Part Number is defined so RAM Commander uses the Cross Reference library to translate the Part Number into corresponding Generic Name and then finds the corresponding record by the Generic Name in the Component Library IE Digital MIL HOBR 27 FFAS Ee Ret des UTZ Ty 1 EM GF Temp 35 Part name AR 123 355 Cancel MM Cross Reference Manager Cross Reference Mame Generic Mame
439. nd Failure Worst Failure There are also several buttons Button Button description Calculation Activate quantitative analysis for current item Set Cut off parameters for quantitative analysis Five Column Generate five column format report for current item report Detailed Generate detailed report with results of the report quantitative analysis Print Print Basic Event Code in the detailed Code report 2014 ALD Software Ltd 23 4 23 4 1 Button description Print Print Basic Event Name in the detailed Name report Set Worst Manually select Next Second Worst Failure Failure Reset Reset manually selected Next Second Worst Failure The analysis is divided into two steps 1 Quantitative MMEL analysis 2 Five Column Format report preparation 1st step MMEL Quantitative Analysis Each candidate to MMEL list affects system safety if the candidate is inoperative RAM Commander may help in candidate element failure safety effect evaluation and prove this candidate element inclusion into MMEL list RAM Commander has all the necessary data for such a quantitative analysis and may generate report to support the decision making about each candidate inclusion into the MMEL list See the decision making algorithm explanation in the MMEL Module Quantitative Analysis Algorithm paragraph See the decision making quantitative report example in the To activate quantitative analysis paragraph The re
440. nd displays the second parameter 5 Choose OK You can review and edit the required mean time between failure values for each item in the Reliability growth list 1 From the Reliability Growth menu choose the MTBF required MTEF Required Cancel MTBF Required 3000 2 In the MTBF required dialog box select the reference designator whose required MTBF you want to set 3 RAM Commander displays the current value in the MTBF required dialog box 4 To modify enter a new value and choose OK to close 2014 ALD Software Ltd 386 RAM Commander User Manual 15 5 Reliability Growth Formula Growth Rate is calculated as follows ee log MTBF gt log MTBF log T log T where a growth rate MTBFR required MTBF MTBFi initial MTBF TC cumulative test hours Ti initial test time Assumptions Tr 100 OIMTBF for MTBF lt 200 O5MTBF for MTBF gt 200h 15 6 Reliability Growth Reports RAM Commander directs reliability growth reports to the regular text window and graph viewer Two reports are available e Reliability Growth Information Report or graph e Reliability Growth Planning Information 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Growth 387 15 6 1 To generate reliability growth reports 1 Activate the Reliability Growth list 2 From the Reports menu choose RG Info the Reliability Growth Report dialog box opens Reliability Growth Report Type Graph O K
441. nd evaluation methods This system wide environment provides simplicity in that global changes are instantly available to all users The RAM Commander system environment includes global component library cross reference library GPRD Failure Rate tables Library Calculation Defaults Whoever installs RAM Commander automatically becomes the System Manager During the installation process use the Edit user parameter dialog box to assign a user with system manager capability The system manager s password and group may be changed at any time You can use the User Manager external utility to change the system manager Only RAM Commander System Manager may manage users and global libraries The next paragraphs explain how System Manager may add users change their permissions backup restore projects and more 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 83 3 10 1 Users Management The system manager may create additional users change their passwords group assignments and levels of expertise To review users and their definitions 1 Open RAM Commander close all windows and list of projects to leave only the main application frame a RAM Commander for Windows Drive Library 2 Select User Administrator from the Administration menu 3 RAM Commander displays the User Administrator list User Administrator em x Name Locked Wich l ch 42 g wis ALL A da ALEXD Id B1 lid B2 The list display
442. nd generate reports Working with existing configurations You may edit existing configurations and their blocks delete blocks and configurations reorder blocks update blocks information by updated information in the Product Tree MTBF Mct and more next paragraphs will provide more information about these operations To update RAM info Each configuration block which was created by drag and drop operation or selection from the Product tree stays linked with the related product tree element but block s MTBF and Mct data are not updated automatically if reliability maintainability calculation of related Product Tree element are changed Update RAM info function synchronizes the entire configuration with a product tree that has been updated 1 Right click on a configuration or item and in the pop up menu choose Update RAM info OR From the Configuration menu choose Update RAM info 2 RAM Commander automatically updates the entire configuration Note Those items for which the Do not update from tree check box is checked will not be updated O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 14 4 2 14 4 3 14 4 4 14 4 5 System Configuration 375 To delete an item Right click on an item or select a group of items using the usual MS Windows conventions and in the pop up menu choose Delete OR From the Configuration or Item menus choose Delete OR Press the Del key RAM Commander prompts for confirmation prior to
443. nd national characters Hebrew Chinese etc 3 Run RAM Commander s installation package on this server PC choose the Projects Network Service option InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Selection Please select a setup type Description 1 Single User Installation 2 Server Network Installation 3 Workstation Network Installation 4 Projects Network Service z Back Cancel 4 Map this folder as network drive on all RAM Commander client computers use the same letter for all mappings 9 Each RAM Commander user will be able to open this mapped network drive and create or open projects on this drive RAM Commander supports multiple users access to the same project 2 E Network bi Metuork D Network HA Network RAM Commander should be installed to the same folder on all client computers If it is not possible it is required to set the same RAM Commander working folder on all computers use Library gt Location gt Project files folder option of the main menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd 52 RAM Commander User Manual 3 3 5 Multiple versions RAM Commander does not support 2 different versions running on one PC by default RAM Commander installation always upgrades the older version already installed so that you can t use both versions simultaneously If you really need to have multiple standalone versions for testing or compatibility purposes there is a way to perfo
444. ndancy models serial parallel and K out of N and calculating reliability availability and MTBCF w RED Edit tem Calculation View Window Help For Help press F1 UA 25049e 007 R 0 999996 2014 ALD Software Ltd KN RAM Commander User Manual Markov module allows system states and transition between states modeling with calculation of availability reliability downtime uptime performance etc a RAM Commander tor vindows Markor Diagram Two engines _two_controllers for Project S18_AlIRCRAFT on Drive C E Diagram tem Calculation Reports Library Tools Wiew Window Help eS 2A DAX eE 2G Gl SAE ARP 4761 Page 131 Markov Analysis Markov Chain hor the Two Engine Example 2 1 Left ok 1 Right 2 7 1 0 Left one 1 controller failed comal ialed y 4 1 1 Right 1 3 0 0 both engines controller failed Left 1 i 2 and all controllers are controller failed Hi failed failed Right ok Consider a two engine system left and right engines where each engine has two controllers The system falls when the functionality in all four controllers is lost Satte 9 The system iz functinally degraded when one or more of the controllers are dead It may be in a non dispatch state as per regulations when both controllers for one engine are lost In this diagram non dispatch states are marked with yellow and red colors IT For Help press F1 Both RBD and Markov modules may use pr
445. ne of the previously saved import scripts on the first step of O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 7 4 1 8 7 4 2 Product Tree 207 Import Wizard process Choose Load from Library option if you wish RAM Commander to find your components in the reliability data component library and load their information for reliability prediction calculation See the Load from Library paragraph in Reliability Libraries and Defaults chapter for more information on this function You have to select Load from Library option to import stresses like VSR PSR etc successfully Then press Finish to start the import process RAM Commander will load the data and will present the updated product tree Using Import Wizard for tree update Import Wizard may be used not only for the product tree initial building but also for automatic data update in the existing product tree File used for update should contain field with exact item product tree item identifier which will be used for finding the corresponding item in existing product tree lt could be e Reference Designator if it is unique in product tree or imported branch e D hierarchical ID like 1 2 3 4 You may export product tree from RAM Commander to MS Excel perform required changes in Excel and import this file back to RAM Commander updating the existing information You need to export product tree to Excel if you with to use unique ID identifier option listed above For more information about RAM Co
446. nerate the report 5 Select Public with MS Excel option from the Report menu 6 Excel file fill be created and open in Excel Reports You may generate different Product Tree reports using Standard reports or Report Generator For standard reports 1 Select top item in the product tree 2 Choose Standard Kit from the Reports menu 3 Select required report type like Tree diagram sub type and parameters 4 Press Ok 5 The generated report will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 209 Tree Diagram Report Froject name TUTORIAL TUTORIAL MTBF 3423 23 Oty 1 1 Communic MTBF 10010 64 Caty 1 1 Main Switch MTBF 2276790 64 Qty 2 Receiver MIBF 121277 06 Qty 10 3 Transmitter MIBPF 255 594 1 Oty 1 PS MTBF 119760 47 City 1 2 Control MIBF 13245 55 QNS 1 Monitor MIBP 125000 00 City 1 1 CRT MIBF 142357 14 Q Contr Card MIBFR 1000000 0 Qty 1 Keyboard MIBF 38673 33 Oty 1 3 SystemBlock MTIBF 19803 60 Oty 1 1 HardDrive MT TBF 87075 00 Cty 1 2 CD ROM MTBF 69300 00 City 1 2 Floppy MTEF 79485 00 Qty 1 MiotherErd MIBF 33333 33 Qty 1 3 Pedestal MIBF 111096 30 Qity 1 L4 weijotu weiotu ow MTBF Qty 1 See RAM Commander Fundamentals Chapter Reports for more information For Report Generator Report generator allows designing your own customized reports See the Report Generator paragraph for more information and instructions 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter
447. nerator for BOM reliability maintainability FMECA ILS and more Reliability Block Diagram analysis module for reliability modelling of serial parallel K out of N partially loaded with without switch with without repair redundancy configurations Monte Carlo simulation MTBCF calculation Markov Markov chains analysis for steady state and time dependent mode Maintainability Maintainability analysis according to MIL STD 472 Procedure A maintenance Prediction analysis RCM Module MSG 3 Spare parts Spare parts calculation and optimization based on two cost optimization criteria Total No Shortage Probability amp Availability Integrated with Reliability and Maintainability modules Derating Stress Analyze overstress of components under current temperature conditions The Analysis module provides a tool to define Derating curves and identify overstressed components e those working under stress exceeding the specified rating value O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Introduction Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis according to MIL STD 1629 and other standards Hardware and functional FMECA Testability Analysis Potential Failure Mode and Effects Analysis FMEA described by AIAG QS 9000 SAE J 1739 IEC 60812 JEP 131 and other standards sometimes called automotive or AIAG Automotive Industry Action Group Fault Tree Analysis builing Fault Trees Minimal Cut Sets generation and Unavailability calculation Inte
448. nes and an analysis of the overstressed components e Spare parts quantity estimation and optimizations Failure modes and effects criticality analysis FMECA Testability analysis Process and Design FMEA Fault Tree Analysis e Event Tree Analysis Markov Chains Analysis e Safety Analysis including FHA SSA PHA MMEL SHA e MSG 3 Analysis Automatic data validation and correction Generating professional reports The partial list of RAM Commander customers is provided below 2014 ALD Software Ltd Introduction NOS f SA a it EA com A O wise and Space Administration Ela SES lt ALSTOM SIEMENS Y DO ia Federal Aviation Administration UnitedGroup Limited 2 1 RAM Commander History In 1988 ALD released the first DOS version of reliability software called RPTB In 1992 RAM Commander for DOS was released followed by the Windows version in late 1995 In 1998 Spares Optimization derating modules and Monte Carlo simulation modules were added Since then RAM Commander has quickly become the world s leading software in the area of reliability and maintainability prediction with the fully integrated FMECA and design process FMEA You will not find another R amp M software package providing all the modules options interface and quality documentation that RAM Commander does RAM Commander history milestones 1995 RAM Commander 6 0 for Windows replaces
449. nfiguration or and set different method for each particular component see Item FR Calculation paragraph later in this chapter ltem FR Calculation FR calculation should be performed only for the lowest component level of product tree elements Assembly FR will be calculated then as a sum of failure rates of underlying components There is a number of ways to calculate components Failure Rate 1 Performing reliability prediction using one from more than 30 reliability prediction methods such as MIL HDBK 217 Telcordia Siemens FIDES NPRD 95 etc Specifying manually or importing fixed Failure Rate received from manufacturer or from field use failure statistics 3 Specifying known Failure Rates for known temperatures and environments using the GPRD library 4 Allocating failure rates from assemblies down to the components assign a required FR to an assembly and have RAM Commander allocate the required FR to each of its children See next paragraphs for more information about each of these methods For any of these methods you will need to open item data screen and switch to Operating or Non Operating tab To open the item data screen in Operating or Non Operating mode 1 Open the product tree view 2 Navigate to the desired item and select it 3 Double click the item if it is component or right click it and choose Edit from the popup menu 4 Item data screen will appear 9 Switch to Operating or Non Operating
450. nformation for components is used during reliability predictions RAM Commander Import wizard allows importing multiple types of actual stress values There are two possibilities for stress import in Import Wizard e If it is constructed of semicolon delimited abbreviation value pairs like TJC 5 VSR 0 4 use field Stress Information in Operating group e f each stress like VSR PSR etc is located in its own separated field in the import file select field names from the Operating group according to stress type After successful import you will see imported stress parameters on each component reliability prediction method data screen Resistor E FFN2 Ref des F1 10 QTY 10 EMV GF Temp 49 E Part name Tiii Mil num l l Cat num Help Generic name RLR pa Style ALA Fixed Film Insulated Est Rel Poper PSR 0 4 Frat 1 Note Stress information is imported and taken into consideration only if all the conditions below are 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 203 true a Default reliability prediction method was defined for the project see Project Configuration b Load from Library is selected on the last Import Wizard step see Step 4 5 Finish c Load from library for part was successful part was found in library automatic PN recognition etc See the table of available stress types and their abbreviations in the table below CON CTN VSR VSR Vo
451. ng expression is more frequently used MTBF MTB E where MTBFR required MTBF MTBFI initial MTBF ti time at which initial data point is plotted preconditioning time Ti time at which the instantaneous MTBF of the equipment under test will reach the required MTBF Differentiating the equation with respect to time we receive AT 7 OF A i A Mt 1 a KH 1 0 O Thus the current instantaneous failure rate is 1 a times the cumulative failure That is the instantaneous MTBF is 1 1 a times the cumulative MTBF The instantaneous MTBF may be interpreted as the MTBF that the equipment under test would exhibit if we stopped the reliability growth and continued testing Thus on a logarithmic plot instantaneous or current status curves are straight lines displaced a fixed distance from the cumulative plot by a factor of 1 a The cumulative MTBF MTBFc is normally measured during testing and then converted to the instantaneous or current MTBF MTBFi by dividing by 1 a that is O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Growth 383 MTBF MTBF l 0 15 2 To view reliability growth data 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu choose Reliability growth Duane RAM Commander displays the Reliability growth list containing list of failures with information about system and cumulative time since start of system testing for each failure SEA AO A Drive
452. ng model below Computerlocked license file Each software copy is protected by a license file linked to the specific computer User have to generate site code file send it to the software vendors Vendor will provide a computer locked license file ALD Licensing Server should be installed and configured ou have to specity a path to the server on each workstation Local HASP Plug Aladdin USB HASP Plug should be connected to the USE or Parallel port of this workstation computer ou do not need to do anything except connecting the plug Network floating HASP Plug Aladdin USB NetHASP Plug should be connected to the USE or Parallel port of licensing server and HASP License Manager should be installed on the server ou do not need to do anything on a workstation No thanks already have my license configured Tou may return to the Licensing Wizard any time later to configure your license gue 4 Select the option Network floating license file 5 Press the Next button the next wizard step will appear ALD Software Licensing Wizard Workstation ALD Licensing Server x ALD Licensing Server should be installed and configured Workstation should be configured to use this license server full path to license server shared working folder should be set Licensing Server contains License file and shared working folder All workstations should be LA configured to use this EA shared workin
453. ni file to skin file name e Regional Settings e Results formatting options e User authentication mode built in or Active Directory LDAP e and more Please see ramc ini file or contact RAM Commander technical support for more information 2014 ALD Software Ltd os RAM Commander User Manual 3 10 4 1 User authentication using AD LDAP RAM Commander supports two user authentication modes e Internal built in Users are stored in the internal RAM Commander Database and administrator may manage users add remove password change etc using RAM Commander It is the default authentication mode e Active Directory LDAP Users are stored in the internal RAM Commander Database but authentication is performed by Microsoft Active Directory RAM Commander authenticates user against the Active Directory using LDAP protocol API with optional SSL encryption The Active Directory authentication advantage is that this mode ensures that users have the same RAM Commander login credentials as they have in corporate Windows network and that organizational security policy rules related to passwords password strength password regular change etc are enforced By default RAM Commander uses built in users database for authentication In order to switch to LDAP authentication ramc ini file located in the RAM Commander installation folder BIN sub folder should be updated The Authentication section of the file contains authentication related para
454. nieae ecu dawiey eSuacds ceva thadu vides Taaa EA aaa 516 Export Diagram dS PICTURES a a seinen eeouaseeraerive 516 Inserting nodes from Product Tree uri a 516 5 Failure Modes Causes and Effects oococcooococconccnocanconcrnncancanornnrancannrnnrancrnarancanarans 516 To create a new Failure Mode cccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeseasseseeeesneeeeeessesesensseessoasseessonsees 517 To create a new Failure Cause aiii 518 To edit or delete Failure Modes cocccconnonccconccncoconconcononnnnrononnnn coreana corran nrrrnnnnnrrrrnnn arena nrrrnnnnnrrrrnnarernnnans 519 ado ac os i oireann aaea a EE E oudeusanecueteasbiasveauccucsstsand Goparostestnatteusarysaeeee sates 519 SS TCG A ce rece asec E eusceac va suasanrcuetcctseanens ncasseneuccsuacuses samt cuctven tacusecasusseuaasoc 519 To work with cumulative list Of failures ooonncccccccnnnnncnnccococnccnnncnonnnnnannnoronennnnnnnornrnnnnnnnnrrnrrrnanannrrrrrnnanans 520 6 Selecting Critical Failure Causes 0ooocococccccccoccncocococecacannnannnrnrarararnrarannnrnrnrarnrnrararananenes 521 t Team Collaboration aaa cn ii 524 TO define tho EXpPertle aa au dt 525 TPO c llectrankings manually aos 525 To collect rankings AUTO MAC dia 526 Voting System Installation ai A A A dd A TACA 526 To install and configure the Voting SM sas 527 Making Decisions on Corrective Action ooocococococccccococoncncocococananannnnnrarararnrnraranrnrarannnns 529 LEV 0 gcd ee
455. nnn cone n nn rr rn nn RENE n nn ERRE n nn ERRE Rn RENE arena rrrrnnnrermnnnas 393 Working with existing Scenarios ivonne dci rita essences 394 To copy a spare parts operation scenario cccocoonccnccconncnnccnonononnnnnnnnononcononnnnnonononnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnrnnnrenennnns 394 TO EEE ASC MN o al le es eS 394 TO CAES O NI e do de 395 Generating Spare Parts Reports iin oi ode pie 395 4 Spare Parts Opti Zain oscene der suse eceseeteesasd a a a aa 395 Optimization CriteriaThe spare parts module supports the computation of two optimization criteria AA A ented aE a aaa a A T a a a E a A A E aa A Ea Aa Eaa aE 396 Optimization AGO FAM uta aci 397 Optimization Patam eters still A aE aa Aaaa a aa aa e aAa EE aaia 397 To set operation scenario paramMeters oooccccccoononcccoononeconononononnnonononnnnnonnonnnnonnonnnnnnnonnnnennnnnnnennannnneninos 397 Gen rating Optimization Reports ui daa 399 To generate an optimization report oooccccccoonnnccconnoneccnononenononononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnenonnnnnnnnnnnnenonos 399 To review optimal spare part quantitiesS ooccccononccncoconnonnononnnnonnonconnnnnnnnnnnnonrnnnnnnnrrnonnnanennnnnnnennnnnns 401 5 Spare Parts Analysis Formulae ooocococococccccococoncocococeconnnanannnrnrarararnrnrannnrnrarnrnrnranananenas 403 6 Possible Important Applications ooocooccccccoccccnnccccncnncncancncnnnnnnnrannnnnnrnnnnrnnnnranranannnnnn 403 Compound Operation Mod
456. ns 3 Start Voting buttons for each parameter Severity Occurrence and Detection Start Woting Stark Voting Start Voting Member Severity Uecurence Detection am SAE E A 3 3 gt E pi 3 DR AAA 5 a 3 3 Expert 3 E 3 2 3 Team facilitator should press Start Voting button for each parameter and wait while participants are voting using their keypads Voting results appear immediately on the data screen 4 To stop voting for the specific parameter team facilitator press Stop voting button of currently processed parameter or Start voting button of the next parameter 5 When all parameters are processed team facilitator presses the OK button and continues working with FMEA Notes e Each keypad may vote multiple times during one parameter voting only last vote will be accepted e Votes from keypads which are not identified not linked to specific team member will not be considered e Voting for the same parameter may be initiated multiple times new values override the old values 21 7 4 Voting System Installation Process Design FMEA module allows Team Work using audience response system since RAM Commander 7 7 version Team members use keypads to provide their Severity Occurrence and Detection rankings SSsunVote la Za a de Se Ge 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 527 Team facilitator starts voting and team members provide rankings which are stored in the database Stop Votin
457. nt items lf environment of some assembly differs from parent items change it s Environment see Standard Environments lf temperature of some assembly differs from parent items there are two options e Delta Select Delta temp and set the difference if there is some relative temperature change on some assembly In example below we have 5 degrees temperature raise from 35 degrees of parent assembly to 40 degrees on current assembly Environment Frofile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Effectiveinhented from parent item Environment GF Temperature Delta 5 E 40 E Please note that if parent assembly temperature will be changed the temperature of this sample assembly and all its sub levels will be recalculated automatically keeping the relative raise of 5 degrees e Fixed Select Fixed temp and set the fixed temperature on assembly if you have some block with controlled constant temperature which does not depend on whole product s operating temperature for example aircraft operating at 50 degrees but having cockpit temperature 15 degrees In example below we have fixed temperature of 15 degrees set for some assembly which parent assembly has temperature of 35 degrees Environment Frofile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Effectiveinhented from parent iter Environment EF Temperature Fined 15 E 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 173 See several product tre
458. o Project and Calculation Defaults option buttons 2014 ALD Software Ltd 9 7 9 7 1 Direction 9 Project to Global Transfer D New ltem Defaults Calculation Defaults D Derating Definitions O UTEC Mission Profile O FIDES 2004 Mission Profile IEC Mission Profile C 217 Plus Mission Profile O FIDES 2009 Mission Profile 9 Click OK RAM Commander updates the project defaults When you reopen a Default Manager window RAM Commander displays the new defaults You have to run Recalculate all to get your calculation results updated using the updated default values Managing Libraries You may copy between projects backup restore and create new project and global libraries Copy libraries between projects You can copy libraries from one project to another This feature saves you time when you have made changes to one project library and you want to make them available to other project libraries To copy project libraries 1 Open the target Product tree view 2 Activate the source Product tree view 3 From the Library menu choose Copy libraries 4 In the Select Target Project for Copy dialog box select the target Product tree view 9 Select data you wish to copy from the source to destination project O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 283 Select Libraries GPRO Library Defaults for Calculation ILS custom field names
459. o perform the Generate operation Site code an encrypted information with unique data about your computer will be generated Please send this file to your software vendor to get the license Use Delete license option if you wish to stop using our software on this computer wish to transfer license to another computer or if you were requested to do it by software distributors Special report file will be created please send this file to your software vendors Use Generate License Repot ag a ee ech a aa License report file will be generated send this file to your software vendor with your problem descriptio The licensing service should be restarted if you change settings or change license file Use Start and Stop buttons for service maintenance and restart Make sure that there no users curently connected to the server before stopping the service ALD Software Ltd Phone 972 3 7913200 upport ald co il Reliability Software Safety and Quality Solutions Fac 972 3 7913210 www aldservice com 9 License manager service will communicate with RAM Commander workstations using shared folder placed on the license server Working folder By default it is C ALDLicenseServer This folder should be shared visible and available for writing for all RAM Commander users Change this working folder if required press the Browse button select the desired folder or just enter the folder name in the Working folder field and press Sa
460. od Stress Strength E l AN a Stress Strength Failure distribution ANS AA Then press method button method screen will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Stress Strength Analysis le a probabilistic analysis of structural mechanical components and systems determines the probability of failure based on the probability of stress exceeding strength Calculate by Strese Strength Values Stress Strength values Stress Distributiors Mormal Mean D Standard Deviation D Strength T Distributiorr Normal Mean A Standard Deviation a O Stress Strength Yariatior Strese Strength Variation Distribution Normal Factor of Safety Coefficient of Wanation of Stress Coefficient of Varation of Strength O Enter Stress and Strength data using either Values data or Variations data Press Ok The Unreliability UR will be calculated and saved to the item data 8 2 1 2 8 Hybrid and Substrate This section describes reliability prediction of a integrated circuit dice mounted in a hybrid package A hybrid is normally made up of one or more substrate assemblies mounted within a sealed package Each substrate assembly contains of active and passive chips with thick or thin film metallization mounted on a substrate which in turn may have multiple layers of metallization and dielectric on the surface 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 239 To model the hybrid device
461. oduct Tree Navigation Product Tree window displays product tree and vertical button bar Vertical button bar Current Analysis section buttons allow switching the product tree from one analysis type such as Reliability Maintainability or FMECA to another Modules section buttons allow opening additional windows for other analysis types such as RBD FTA Safety etc Product tree viewer displays the bill of materials Initially it displays the first level only but user may open all its sub levels hierarchically by pressing and buttons Product tree items may be created edited deleted copied to another location or another project User may search for items perform global change operations copy values from one field to another and more Product Tree consists of Items components and assemblies Assemblies are those items to which children or other components can be added Components are items that cannot have children added to them In the Product tree vew RAM Commander displays a icon next to assembly items For component items RAM Commander displays the relevant component icon The next paragraphs of this section will explain the navigation in the product tree Selecting Current Analysis There are 5 analysis types based on the same product tree Analysis Description Examples Result Operating Reliability prediction for equipment Airplane in flight in operating mode communications board operating loperatino Reli
462. oduct tree data and reliability maintainability analysis results 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Concepts 141 4 1 6 Stage 6 Failure Analysis RAM Commander contains multiple failure analysis methods FMECA MIL STD 1629A GJB 1391 GJB 1392 etc with Testability Analysis as Project POR on Drive ID Name Oy Opr FA 10 6 Status MTBF Temp TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 0768 045 398 35 0 El Communic 1 COMMODI 100 2550 9574 567 35 0 8 rE corto 2 Control Unit 75 4953 1 3E 004 25 0 El Monitor 1 MONDOT 8 0000 1 3E 005 25 0 ln o Ekebo 2 BOE A A pa a El SystemBlock 3 MBEb5 BO 4953 DE 004 25 0 jS a El HardDriwe 1 HODOOe 11 4844 8 7E 004 25 0 a CD ROM 2 CO984B1 14 4300 6 9E 004 25 0 E MotherBrd 4 MBOUSEY 12 0000 8 3 004 25 0 1 ANT 555 6 6583 35 0 A IMOTSFE 45000 Derating E 3 BOSSE 35 0 E 158 A Detection Description Alpha Tora DN Description Beta Description i Beta Severity FMECA Beating Failure 0 280 7 a No movement T O00 Communication 1 000 ir Visual Inspection Operation 1 ais Loss Fal Run After Str 0 230 Ho movement 1 000 Communication 000 1 Visual Inspection J se wa Loss jaa oe Fails to Start 0 180 2 No movement 1 000 Communication 1 000 Noise receive test uss Loss al gt Be Winding Failure 0 370 2 Wrong
463. of this gate like event D in this example PA PS He 1 00e 001 A 2008 00 Lo 3 006 001 A 1 008 001 A 4 008 001 Occurrence 1 out of 2 of this event in FT Repeated When you point to the red repeated event Indication tooltip appears with mare Indication of a repeated event first number snows occurence number by order second number shows count of occurrences Information about this event To remove the repeated events and transfer gates indications open Analysis menu expand the Repeated items choose Clear 19 5 Reports Reports The FTA module offers the following reports Minimal Cut Sets MCS Calculation results report Available from the Reports menu of from MCS calculation results window Tree diagram Plain tree diagram Available from the Reports menu Basic events List of all basic events with their data Available from the Reports menu Tree gates list List of all tree gates Available from the Reports menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 495 Tree output Graphical tree output Choose Print from the FTA Diagram menu There are different options available Tree may be printed as is tree may be printed with all its sub trees tree may be printed on multiple pages suitable for large trees Importance_ Sensitivity List of all basic events from the selected tree with their sensitivity Analysis and importance ratings Available from the Reports menu Unav
464. ojects is physically located to have RAM Commander server installed See Server Installation or to have RAM Commander s Projects Network Service installed see Standalone Installation Common Network Database Problem 3 RAM Commander installed but user login name and password were not defined during the installation Solution 1 Run UserMngr utility from Start gt Programs gt ALD Engineering menu group 2 Choose New manager button Manager password dialog will appear just press Ok 3 Edit user parameters dialog will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started Edit user parameters ino Password Lancel Group Level Beginner 4 Enter desired user name password and group fields are optional and press Ok 5 Close User manager utility 6 Start RAM Commander and enter the user name you ve just defined Problem 4 Error message with code 3105 after starting RAM Commander Does not happen when starting RAMC with administrative privileges Reason 1 Pervasive Database Engine network protocols are set to support not only TCP IP but also SPXIl and NETBIOS Solution Manually change Pervasive Database Engine network protocol settings to contain only TCP IP protocol without SPXIl and NETBIOS using Windows Registry Editor as shown below Open the key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive Software MicroKernel Workstation Engine Wersion 7iSettings value name Supported Protocols and change
465. olyte Liquid electrolyte aluminum O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 230 RAM Commander User Manual FIDES type RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type 48 Aluminium solid electrolyte Capacitor Solid electrolyte aluminum 9 Wet tantalum capacitor Capacitor Wet tantalum 50 Dry tantalum capacitor Capacitor Solid electrolyte tantalum Eh Low current wirewound inductor 52 High current or power wirewound inductor Inductive oo Multi layer ceramic chip inductor Inductive Low power transformer Inductive High power transformer Quartz Crystal dl Low current wirewound inductor Inductive O1 oO O IOIO IOIO ar Ol AA IO INIJ gt Inductive Multi layer inductor 54 Transformer Low Power or Low Level 55 Transformer High Power 56_ Quartz resonator o 57 Quartz oscillator Quartz Crystal C YSta quartz oscillator 138 140 140 142 142 142 142 144 144 8 Electromechanical relay 146 Relay Electromechanical 9 Limit switch 151 sit 151 Toggle 151 Switch Toggle 161__ Switer 151 Switon E E O EC 151 Switon Rotaty Encoder wheel 151 151 151 155 159 159 67 Momentary push button monostable Ql Switch Encoder wheel Switch Momentary push button Permanent push button bistable Switch P push Printed circuit board PCB PWB 70 Connector 71 Rectangular 15900 Connector Rectangular w i is a is is is ce e 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliab
466. omnMm mocowwom Ga et ane a If other text file format was selected during the Step 2 the Step 4 will be initiated 2 Follow the instructions on the dialog to set field limits 3 Press Next to go to the Step 4 7 4 1 4 Step 2 Mentor Graphics The importing procedure for Mentor Graphics files has only 2 steps After you have browsed to locate the Mentor Graphics import data file the import procedure takes you to the last stage of the import see step 5 of the text file import 2014 ALD Software Ltd 188 RAM Commander User Manual 7 4 1 5 Step 2 Excel Access files 1 Step 2 Access Excel file import dialog will appear Import wizard Step 2 of 4 Select a worksheetstable you d like to import Stress Analysis Thermal Analysis Hest gt Cancel Help 2 Select the required table worksheet and press Next to go to the next step Note Your excel file sheet names should start with Latin letter and should not contain spaces or special characters only letters and digits Your worksheet used for import should contain column headers in the first line and data range should start from the second line without additional sections empty lines etc See the next paragraph for Excel file import troubleshooting 7 4 1 5 1 Troubleshooting Q Not all the worksheets from my Excel file appear in RAM Commander Import Wizard what should do
467. omponent s operating data to derating data 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Stress Analysis 335 2 Activate the Product tree view and navigate to a component derating data is to be entered for 3 From the Tree menu select Edit the Item Data Derating dialog box opens ltern Cata Family TEE Per Des 110 ltem code IC Digital Part name Temperature A Delta Temp 3 C Cur fag T Stress Data Remark Description M Quantity 4 Enter values in the fields as required and press the Stress Data button the Derating analysis dialog box opens Capacitor Derating Ref des CCZ aTr 11 ENY GF Temp 47 Fart name Miil num Cat num Generic name CE Style CK Vide app Vac app Y rated 0 3 br AA X O O O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 336 RAM Commander User Manual 9 Enter actual stress values such as VSR The stress parameters change depending on the item code 6 When entering data for ICs use the following additional procedure to compute power dissipation a Press the Formula button b The Power Dissipation Calculation dialog box opens Power Dissipation Calculation a Formula oss Cancel H of Output Pins 0 H of Input Pins U lec 0 s Delta lcc 0 A Pd Calculation Duty Cycle 10 n Capacitance Load 0 Yoo 0 w Internal 0 Freg MHz c Enter values as required Output Pins Icc capacitance etc
468. omponents are distributed equally to all functions to which this component belongs according to the selection If component does not belong to any function its failure rate is distributed equally to all functions You need to perform the recalculation of a product tree to see failure rates of all functions In addition to default function failure rate calculation described above there are two additional options for function FR calculation the selection of desired option is performed by Functional block FR source selection on Item Data screen Item Data General Logistics Operating MM aintainabilit Functional Blacks Family fe Ref Des Keyboard ltem code B Fatname KBOO3 Functional Blocks FR source Current ltem custom FR ratios Underlying components custom FA ratios Data y Current Iter custom FA ratios Keyboard 0 500 0 000 ltem 2014 ALD Software Ltd The available options are e Underlying components proportional FR ratios default option illustrated above Component FR is distributed equally to selected functions it belongs to e Underlying components custom FR ratios Component FR is distributed to functions according to specified ratio Total ratio for each component should be equal to 1 Option allows to specify for example that FR of some component is distributed to functions as 0 3 FR for the first function and 0 7 FR for the second function e Current item custom FR ratio
469. on See Item Data Editing paragraph later in this chapter for more information about the available fields 9 Choose OK The product tree view will show the newly created item New item defaults One way to speed manual data entry is to set defaults for all new items When you set such defaults RAM Commander uses them in the corresponding Item Data dialog box fields during item creation To set new item defaults 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 169 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu select New item defaults 3 Enter default values into the Item Data dialog box See Item Data Editing paragraph later in this chapter for more information about the available fields 4 Choose OK Next items created in the product tree of this particular project will have predefined values taken from the New item defaults 7 3 3 2 Quick Create Quick Create is used for the fast creation of the component in the Product Tree when the component is located in the Component Library or when the Part number and Manufacturer is recognized by the Part Number Recognition algorithm In the Product Tree choose Quick Create from the Tree menu Enter the information about the component Generic name GN for search in the Component Library Part number PN and Manufacturer for use of recognition algorithm etc Quick Create E x Ref Des C3 aTe Ii PA T4918105M03545 CH GH 0 Manufactur
470. on RAM Commander uses these default values for reliability prediction in all places where the necessary data was not entered See below some sample resistor s MIL STD 217 reliability prediction data screen Resistor MIL HDBE 21 SFA Ref dez OTY 10 ENW GF Temp 43 Fart name Mil num Cat num Generic name RLR Style ALA Fixed Film Insulated Est Rel Luality S rick Lead Configuration hese Distance roils S4HCOO 5HF280 rg mn mul SqHcosho 4 68000 20 eee Za Ea fi gt ON 20386 Note that only several parameters are defined and other parameters have undefined value marked with red color However reliability prediction method still needs values for these undefined parameters These undefined parameters values will be taken from the calculation defaults library It reduces prediction accuracy but allows to deal with situations when not all values are known and available You may review calculation defaults which will substitute undefined parameters values from the prediction method data screen by clicking the View defaults button O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 279 Resistor MIL HDBE 21 SFA Ret des A1 10 OTY 10 ENW GF Temp 43 Part name Mil num Cat num Generic name BLE pr Style ALA Fixed Film Insulated Est Rel Poper 2 5e 00 Prat
471. on Engine Version 7iSettings then change value names DBNames Directory lt RAM Commander installation folder gt for example C RAMC32 Home Directory lt RAM Commander installation folder gt BIN for example C RAMC32 BIN Trace File lt RAM Commander installation folder gt BIN MKDE TRA for example C RAMC32 BIN MKDE TRA Transaction Log Directory lt RAM Commander installation folder gt BIN MKDE LOG for example C 2014 ALD Software Ltd 98 RAM Commander User Manual RAMC 32 BIN MKDE LOG Problem 5 Error message with code OPER 100 while working with large project Solution Problem with Pervasive database engine settings allocated cache size is too small increase it to 4000000 Perform the following changes 1 Press Start button Choose Run Type regedit and press ok Open HKEY LOCAL MACHINE group then Software Pervasive Software Microkernel Router Version 7 Settings key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive Software MicroKernel Workstation Engine Version 7 Settings Double click on Cache Size key in the right part of the window Change key value to 4000000 hex Press Ok Restart the PC and continue working this does not help try increasing the value up to 40000000 E OUN CO Y O Ol Problem 6 Error message with code 1022 or 1032 after starting RAM Commander Solution Problem could appear on Windows 95 98 on RAM Commander workstation
472. on Tree Optimal isolation tree troubleshooting diagram with optimized sequence of tests and replace recommendations 2014 ALD Software Ltd FMECA 447 Report subtype ae Diagram Viewer for Project TITORIAL on Drive LE Loop back transmitter recever Moize receive test Isolation Tree per End Optimal isolation tree troubleshooting diagram for specific End Effect Effect To generate a Testability report From the Reports menu choose Tree When the Criticality Analysis check box is not checked you may choose only a non quantitative report The list of reports in this case is Testability Information and Testability Data When the Criticality Analysis check box is checked you can choose any of the existing reports Different TAM reports can be defined by selecting the Testability report subtype These parameters delineate which information will be included in the report A desired set of tests may be selected for all reports This selection will be the superposition of the Tests Test Levels and Test Types In addition EE under analysis may be selected through Severity For a Coverage report 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 7 Report selection Subtype Cancel Phase Operation Level of Replace Organizational a M One Level down Intermediate Depot WI t Supplier i ee Level of Replace all items with the Level of Replace selected will be displayed in the report One level
473. on folder and file name is MSG3_ Template Main doc 6 Provide links word documents containing a system breakdown and functional description O 2014 ALD Software Ltd b system design features description Contents of these documents will be embedded into the relevant positions of final MSG 3 report 7 Press Generate Report button and the final MS Word report will be opened see some page examples below ALD Ltd MSG 3 Analysis FOR MSI 28 10 00 Fuel Storage System Effectivity Xwing Fighter Spaceship Revision 1 Date 08 23 09 MSI Number 28 10 00 ITEM Fuel Storage System Selection Cntena Could failure ba Could failure Could Failure Could ATA Undetectable Affect safety on have Failure Highest inii or not likely to Ground orin Significant have o Number Description ba delnca dy Fih Mdudng Operational Sim noant S poe Remarks the operating Safetwemergency Impact Economic eve crew during System or Impact nomal duties Equipment zeo Fu Storage System vs Ne o ve peon PE10 01 Fuselage tank No Neves No ves prono Ss on Refusing poa o to of A A A CC CI AI INS 28 10 09 Drain valve Centertank collector box 23 10 05 Pressure refueling adapter 25 10 06 Check valve fapper No ves ves peroo OT 7 n Yes o h ves ves poo 28 10 07 Interconnect valves ans a E Ves o ves poo 23 10 09 ing float went valve 23 10 10 Center tank transfer
474. on paragraph for more information Environment and temperature 2014 ALD Software Ltd zs RAM Commander User Manual selection affect predicted failure rate 3 Make sure that FR source switch is set to predicted FR PredictionCalculation Settings Method selector default Method MIL 217F 2P stress MIL 217F 2P stress Failure distribution Exponential Failure Rate Reliability Data as Predicted wi Field factor 1 ltem FR Duty cycle 1 6 1904 7e 002 FR predicted E 130480012 Mult Factor 1 FR user defined 0 ttidd factor 0 a Stat FA field D Quantity A ET FR allocated 1 5101e 002 eee 7 ee WE O Cale JOE Eb spec O Complexity hor FA allocations 1 5699e 01 Source of user defined FR 4 Select prediction method e To use default prediction method for the selected family choose Method of FR p calculation default FR Fredicton Calculation Settings Method selection e To use prediction method other than default select Method of FR p calculation user defined and choose required method from the Method drop down list FR Fredicthon Calculation Settings Method selection user defined Method MIL 21 7F 2 P stress Failure distributiors ITALTELIRPASS MIL 217E 1 P stress Failure Rate Reliability Dat MIL 217F 1 P count AM 7 1 E stress MIL 217F 2 F count Predicte MIL 217F 2 P stress FR Source FR pre
475. on procedure is provided below 1 Choose Plug Server PC 2 Connect Network plug to the USB port of the Plug Server computer 3 Run HASP License Manager Setup utility Run the program Imsetup exe from the RAM Commander installation CD HASP Servers folder with the latest version number in folder s name You may also download the License Manager Setup from our website http www aldsoftware com download download HASP_LM_setup zi 4 Choose option to install it as Windows Service see the picture below e Installation Type E de S P Do vou want to install HASP License Manager az an i application or as a service f Application shsrws2 exe Aladdin lt Back Cancel O Proceed with the installation selecting default options 6 Choose to start the HASP License Manager immedeately 2014 ALD Software Ltd HASP License Manager has been successfully installed Do pon want to start it now NOTE HASP key must be attached to the system in order to start the HASP License Manager Aladdin 7 After the successful installation License manager service will be installed and started automatically RAM Commander users may run their software using network plug 8 Install Plug Monitor Optional If there is a need to monitor real time plug status how many active users connected who exactly is connected etc the Plug Monitor software may be installed run the setup from RAM Commander installation CD HAS
476. ondition end effect in the next field a Press the button in the End Effect column End Effects list will appear b Select relevant EE from the list you may select only one EE c If required EE is not found in the list add it to the library see Working with Safety FMECA Library later in this document 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 551 d Press Ok 4 Fill in other fields in the same table line Indication Actions etc 22 7 Probability Calculation When the FHA analysis is performed and each failure condition is linked to Fault Tree in order to get expected failure probability you may initiate the calculation To calculate probability for selected failure condition SSA AFO mode 1 Select specific function 2 Select failure condition 3 Choose Calculate selected FTA from the pop up menu Result of the calculation will be displayed in SSA AFO report and in failure conditions table on the screen To calculate probability for multiple failure conditions SSA AFO mode 1 Select specific function top function to calculate all specific function to calculate only FTAs linked to failure conditions of this function and nested child functions 2 Choose Recalculate Assessment Means from Calculation menu Result of the calculation will be displayed in SSA AFO report and in failure conditions table on the screen Probabilities comparison Both screen and report will show expected probabilit
477. onditional probability The fraction of the part failure rate FR Mode Ratio related to the particular failure mode under consideration shall be evaluated by the analyst and recorded The failure mode ratio is the probability expressed as a decimal fraction that the part or item will fail in the identified mode If all potential failure modes of a particular part or item are listed the sum of the Alpha values for that part or item will equal one Next Higher Assembly product tree item related to the Next Higher Effect Assembly NHA Next Higher Effect The consequence s a failure mode has on the operation functions or status of the items in the next higher indenture level above the indenture level under consideration Failure Effect probability Beta conditional probability that the failure effect will result in the identified criticality classification given that the failure mode 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 3 18 3 1 Fied Description MIL STD 1629 Pocus E The consequence s a failure mode has on the operation function or status of the highest indenture level D normal system operation or can be discovered by the maintenance crew by some diagnostic action Severity The consequences of a failure mode Severity considers the worst potential consequence of a failure determined by the degree of injury property damage o and validated to correct the cause of failure or design deficiency Provisions the effect of a f
478. ons from the Type list e Tree to change product tree Item Data e Processor to change the prediction method in Item Data 6 Choose OK 7 If the Use Condition check box in step 3 was selected enter search criteria in the Item Data Conditions dialog box 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 183 8 Choose the source and destination fields to copy data from the drop down lists Copy data between fie Copy data from field GN Ref designator r to fielt G Generic name 9 Choose OK 7 3 5 6 Marking with Colors You may use color selection for product tree items as a convenient way of item status importance responsibility or approval indication Ret Des ID Name Ly Communication System El Communic 1 CN017000 Main Switch 1 CMO 004 T gt 13 5 74530 1 gt iii E ALR 10 F A11 12 7 AN 2 A30 34 a AZ 5 CC1 9 EK 1 E 02 10 C 1 T EE m FER s C05 13 CK 1 FE L0 4 14 HLMP 2450 4 F L5 6 15 HLMP 2400 2 To mark product tree items with different colors 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select one or more items to mark using usual MS Windows item selection conventions 3 Right click and choose Color and then choose a color using color picker 4 Click OK The items change their color 7 3 5 7 Organize Each product tree item has its number by order in its level This number is given automatically by RAM Commander during the tree building However RAM Commander does not auto
479. opy a guideline Save As from the Guidelines menu In the dialog box enter the name of the requested guideline and choose OK RAM Commander updates the guideline listing 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Stress Analysis 333 Use the following procedure to make the derating data available to other RAM Commander users on the network To transfer project guidelines to global guidelines 1 Close any open Derating lists and activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Transfer the Transfer dialog box appears Transfer Direction Project to Global ei Global to Project Cancel Transter D New ltem Defaults D Calculation Defaults O UTEC Mission Profile O FIDES 2004 Mission Profile IEC Mission Profile C 217Plus Mission Profile O FIDES 2009 Mission Profile 3 Select the Project to Global and Derating Definitions option buttons 4 Choose OK RAM Commander transfers the project s derating data to the global library All new projects will use this information A derating study may also be initialized or refreshed using the global settings To do this use the previous procedure but switch Project and Global in step 3 12 1 2 Print Derating Guidelines There are two types of guideline reports parameter listing and derating curve parameter Use the following procedure to generate a listing of parameters and their associated values
480. or all combinations of these parameters RAM Commander attempts to find the failure rate using two sets of data Automatic search and Manual selection You can tell RAM Commander how to perform the search e Automatic search only e Automatic search then manual selection if not found e Manual selection only On the NPRD 2011 screen you need to define the appropriate Part Description which describes in the best way your specific part Then you need to select the Quality level After all this selections according with Part Description Environment Quality RAM Commander search for FR in NPRD 2011 database Two scenarios may occur a the FR exists in the NPRD 2011 for selected set of data b there is not FR for selected set of the data because NPRD failure rates are not given for all combinations of these parameters To solve situation for scenario b you need to use the Secondary Choice where you can define similar part description quality level envronment not exact as you have in the system but as close as possible Secondary Choice also exists to support situation when NPRD 2011 contains FR for conditions specified for example for environment GB scenario a but when you change environment in the product tree settings e g to GF you may come to situation where NPRD 2011 does not contain exact FR for these new settings any more scenario b and then RAM Commander may take data according to the Secondary choice if defined
481. or Windows Setup The setup program will copy ASM Commander files into the following directory A new program group will algo be added to the Program Manager Destination Folder EXARAMmE32 Browse InstallShield Cancel 6 Proceed with the next screens of installation procedure clicking Next 7 New version will be installed 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started Network installation consists of server and workstations Server should be upgraded first then all workstations 3 6 2 Network Configuration Upgrade Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander Make sure RAM Commander users have full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder I Server Upgrade Server upgrade procedure should be run from the server PC 1 Log in into the server PC with administrative privileges Server upgrade procedure should be run from the server PC 2 Make sure that all RAMC users are disconnected there are no running RAM Commander workstation instances on user computers 3 Check installation folder of the current RAM Commander version Usually it is C APP RAMC32 where C APP folder is shared for all workstations 4 Run installation package of the newer RAM Commander version 9 If it displays dialog offering to Modify Repair Remove the previous version choose Remove proceed with
482. or reliability prediction and analysis you can store them in a failure rate table You can then apply the observed failure rates to tree items and thus override the results based on the standard prediction method The GPRD FR Table utility allows you to define separate tables for different envronments and temperature failure rate combinations O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 269 GPRD Operating Part Hame CD984B1 Environment GF Use for conversion W Project gt MTBF 10e6 Tmax 150 Source User Defined Temperature MTEF MIEF lis 0 0 1 gt 10 0 3 120 0 4 30 0 5 E 7 a 40 0 63000 00 50 0 60 0 70 0 Edt g 800 10 90 0 41 100 0 20000 00 Redraw 12 110 0 Tit 13 120 0 n 10 20 30 40 0 0 70 20 amp 100 110 120 130 140 150 14 130 0 45 140 0 FR or MTBF interpolationextrapolation le done according to provided FA temperature points For electronic family components or assemblies Family calculation is done according to RAL 16 150 0 Reliability Toolkit formulas For mechanical and electro mechanical family components linear interpolation extrapolation i used Delete Copy to Eny Note The GPRD field FR table allows you to avoid inaccurate temperature curves or mission profile analysis reports when failure rates are entered manually for a specific temperature failure rate combination RAM Commander extrapolates
483. ord and select Open in the popup menu or just press F2 The RAM Commander Product Tree view for this project will appear Then you may switch to the desired analysis mode or open the desired module using the Modules menu or vertical button bar to the left of the product tree view 27 RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C 222 Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View pli i xX Curent Analysis Get Des Qty Op FA 10 6 Status El TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 0768 Communic 1 COMMOO1 100 2550 E Main Switch 1 5888 Operating on 3 80031 E 4 LM299 E i A 5 r4L530 E ALA AN a RAZ 9 ER 10 CE 11 ER E E 0 0607 13 CE 14 HLMP 2450 15 HLMP 2400 2 16 DP E 0 Mon Operating 1 J 1 0 E z 1 1 1 El Receiver 2 ACODA 1 El Transmitter 3 TR987 001 Eje co 2 Control Unit 75 4953 02 0214 0 5413 Modules ACM MSG 3 For Help press Fl ID 1 1 1 12 This way is the best if you are working mainly with the product tree See also the Product Tree View paragraph earlier in this manual b Double click the project Project overview window will appear lt provides shortcuts to almost all the available analysis types and modules and also provides module usage statistics in this project Click the corresponding module analysis type Open button to go directly to this module 2014 ALD Software Ltd 152 RAM Commander User Manual
484. orted mission 3 From the Criteria list box select NSP or Availability Criteria serves as an objective function for the optimization RAM Commander can optimize two criteria availability and No Shortage Probability If you select Availability for the objective function RAM Commander determines the combination of spare parts that gives the highest availability within the given budget constraint If you select NSP as the objective function RAM Commander determines the combination of spare parts that gives the highest NSP within the given budget constraint When selecting availability as the objective function RAM Commander makes computations at the end of the mission period not at any instantaneous time during the mission Therefore as your mission gets longer its availability declines everything else being equal However for steady state situations common in regular operation mode when all parts are repairable availability approaches a constant level 4 In the Budget field enter the maximum amount of money you can allocate to spares purchases Specify a budget constraint a limit on the amount of money you can invest in spare parts during a particular mission Generally the value of a spare part is its cost multiplied by its quantity In specific circumstances you can also specify costs associated with the part s weight and volume 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis 399 9 Enter the number of evaluation points
485. oss Faure of em Motor ID 1 3 2 Fails to Start Fake lndication False Response Fatigue Flash Response 4 After the translation choose Generate translated copy menu item define new project name and the translated copy of the project will be generated Perform this process again when the source project is changed and you wish to have the translated copy updated 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Product Tree Product Tree 157 7 Product Tree Product tree building is the second stage after Project Creation in RAM Commander Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety analysis process Product Tree represents full hierarchical product system structure from main subsystems to the smallest blocks and components like springs capacitors and resistors with detailed information about each block or component 2d RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C cro Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View JIP me Ga 7 af E ren ener et Des Gty Opr FR 10 6 Status TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 0765 4 El Communic 1 COMMOO1 100 2550 E Main Switch 151888 Operatina D ai TD iz TA gt 1110 3 80031 a T gt 1112 4 LM299 amp gt 13 5 FALS30 A110 E ALA F A11 12 7 AN x ai R3034 8 AZ t CC 9 CK n a 10 CK Maintainabilty CC3 11 CK E IST E 0 0607 13 CK FE L 4 14 HLMP 2450 FEL5E 15 HLMP 2400 SW 2 16 DP2
486. other user will be able to become a manager of the project Project states Each project may be in different accessibility state depending on the permissions and other user operations as explained earlier The table below provides description of different projects states and available operations for each state Project line is red No permission to access the You cannot open the project Ask project owner or RAM Commander S TUTORIAL administrator to grant you the access see permissions selection in project settings Project line is gray Project is not selected You may open the project and become project manager position is project manager A TUTORIAL empty maybe other users are working on the project Project line is green You have selected the project You may enter the project change you are the project manager ofjdefault settings of the project rename backup copy and delete the project if there are no active users currently working TUTORIAL Project line is yellow Another user selected the You may enter the project and work on project and he is the current it but you cannot change default 5 TUTORIAL project manager See calculation methods and delete Manager field to see current rename backup or copy the project manager name 2014 ALD Software Ltd e RAM Commander User Manual 6 3 If there are other users working currently in the project you will not be able to perform global proj
487. ours depending on project settings FR multiplier Enter a value for Failure Rate multiplier FR used in unavailability calculation is item FR FR Multiplier Enter a value in hours for the Test interval time between periodical tests Q t Calculated value for the Unavailability Q t probability of failure at a given time point Q mean Calculated value for the Probability or long term steady state average unavailability Q Tree ID For events ID of linked element in Product Tree Press the Select button next to the field to pick up product tree item from the product tree 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 469 FM number For events number of FMECA Failure Mode of linked element in Product Tree Press the Select button next to the field to pick up specific failure mode from the list of linked product tree item s failure modes CCF Group Code of Common Cause Failure Group the basic event belongs to Use Select and Clear buttons near this field to add remove it from the CCF Group 4 Press Ok Newly created event or gate will appear on the diagram To edit tree element double click on it or right click on it and choose Edit from the pop up menu Data screen described above is displayed 19 3 4 Transfers Transfer gates are used to connect diagrams and create nesting inside FTA diagrams With Transfer gates a large diagram may be divided into smaller trees or a sub tree can be inserted
488. out RAM Commander s versatile reliability block diagram module Using this module you can model complex systems and perform reliability computations You can use analytical identical or simulation techniques to compute reliability availability values See more about automatic RBD diagram building from Product Tree elements in System Configuration chapter RBD diagram building 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter System Configuration 14 System Configuration 371 System Configuration System Configurations module is unique and innovative RAM Commander function that allows producers of several blocks of a product that can be combined in various configurations to compare the reliability of the different configurations using the existing product tree without needing to descend to the component level Utilizing the already created product tree with reliability and maintainability calculations performed user can easily create an unlimited number of configurations where system blocks appear in different quantities and in various combinations of reliability models The system configuration function allows the comparison of reliability data of an unlimited number of different configurations built from new or existing blocks in the product tree The function allows the creation of new configurations inserting new or existing blocks changing values and then transforming it into an RBD Each configurations contains a sequence of system
489. owing 1 Set Item MMEL status to Candidate Select Rectification Period from the list Enter rectification interval for category A if such category selected Enter number quantity of items normally installed in the aircraft Enter minimum number quantity of items required for operation So se ee A Enter Remarks or Exceptions usually they contain Operational O and Maintenance M limitations and requirements which arise when the selected item is not operational To generate Five Column Format for the current item report press MMEL button To view Detailed Quantitative Analysis for the current item report press the Detailed button Note The view is available only if a quantitative analysis has been already performed 2014 ALD Software Ltd 566 RAM Commander User Manual 23 6 MMEL Module Reports To create MMEL reports 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select FMECA as current analysis 3 Navigate to a desired level in the Product Tree 4 From the Reports menu choose Standard Kit the Report Selection dialog box opens Report Selection E Type MMEL xl da oh Subtype REE Phase all W Print Code Depth from start item E i Print Name Cancel 9 Select the report Type MMEL 6 Select the report Subtype Candidate List Five Column Five Column MS Word or Detailed 7 Choose OK RAM Commander generates and displa
490. own nested RBDs etc To view the structure of nested Sub RBDs Click the gt El icon on the menu bar 13 2 7 To delete an RBD element 1 Click on an RBD element 2 From the Item menu or the pop up menu choose Delete 13 2 8 Saving and Opening Reliability Block Diagrams You can create many RBDs for a project and save them under different names To save an RBD activate its window and choose Save As from the RBD menu In the Save RBD with new name dialog box enter a standard file name and press OK Once the RBD window is displayed you can use it to display the project s other diagrams From the RBD menu choose Open Select the name of an RBD and choose OK RAM Commander displays the selected diagram in the RBD window 13 2 9 Working with Diagrams There are lot of additional convenient options and functions you may use while working with RBD diagrams see next paragraphs for more information 13 2 9 1 Elements Color You can customize an RBD s appearance by changing the color of its elements to create even more beautiful and effective presentations 1 From the View menu in RBD window choose Elements Color the Color selection dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd 350 RAM Commander User Manual 2 Select desired color and press OK You can also create your own colors by choosing Define Custom Colors from the Elements Color dialog box Enter settings and choose Add to Custom Color RAM Commander adds the customized
491. p menu OR From the ltem menu choose Create Delete or Edit To make global changes to a Massive Entry list Select Global change from the Item menu See Global change paragraph for more information O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree ter To select multiple items in a Massive Entry list Use the gray asterisk key or right click and choose Select Deselect from the pop up menu to toggle item select Use this facility to copy or delete several items at once To find the tree location of an item in a Massive Entry list From the Item menu choose Tree Location The Select Tree ltem dialog box opens displaying the item s location in the product tree 7 3 5 4 4 Count Parts Utility Using the Count Parts utility from the Massive Entry menu you can view the number of parts by Item type in the current Massive Entry list display Count Parts Number ltem Code IC Digital Resistor Capacitor Optoelectronic This can be useful since the Massive Entry list displays only one Item type at a time To invoke the Count Parts utility activate the Massive Entry list and from the Massive Entry menu select Count Parts To view the Item type in the Massive Entry list select it and choose Go to 2014 ALD Software Ltd 182 RAM Commander User Manual 7 3 5 4 5 Massive Entry Reports 1 Activate the Massive Entry list 2 Choose Report from the menu bar 3 The Massive Entry table report window opens Mas
492. ped as R on workstations enter R RAMC3z2 in this field InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Type full pathname to RAM Commander in Hetwork AARAM C32 Browse Back Lancel O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 48 RAM Commander User Manual 8 Select Start menu folder where RAM Commander icons will be located and Click Next InstallShield Wizard Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icone to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders L D Engineerini Existing Folders Administrative Tools ames Startup Back Lancel 9 Press Next on the Review settings dialog InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files fF you want bo review or change any settings click Back If you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Setup Type 3 Workstation Hetwork Destination Directory RARAMC3 Program Folder A L O Engineering Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started KO 10 The Installation Wizard will copy necessary files 11 Windows Security Center Windows Firewall Warning message may appear press Unblock button
493. pen for editing and extension 11 5 1 To access the Standard Times Library 1 Select maintainability mode 2 From the Library menu choose Standard Times Library 3 The Standard Times Library window opens Only the system manager can edit add or delete information in the Standard times library You can generate a report of the Standard times library by choosing Report from the Maintainability Standard Times Library dialog box 11 5 1 1 To add or edit a record in the Standard Times Library 1 From the Maintainability Standard Times Library dialog box choose Edit or Add 2 In the Standard Times dialog box enter the new time and description 3 Choose OK RAM Commander updates the Standard Times Library list O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 320 RAM Commander User Manual 11 5 1 2 To delete a record in the Standard Times Library 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 11 5 2 2 1 Select the record you wish to delete 2 Choose Delete from the Maintainability Standard Times Library dialog box Caution Take care when updating the standard times library There is no undo_facility to easily return the library to its previous state To access the Standard Tasks Library 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select Maintainability mode as the current processor 3 From the Library menu choose Standard Tasks Library The Tasks Library Manager window opens Only the system manager can edit add or delete data in the Standard tasks library
494. permissions level set to Owner or projects locked by that person he she will not have access to these projects after changing authentication mode to LDAP because now he she will have different user name now So before switching to LDAP all users should review their projects and unlock projects which are locked green background color by using the Select Deselect option from the project s popup menu and also change permissions level of their projects projects where user is an Owner to All 3 10 5 User Activity Log RAM Commander records major user activities in the central application activity log file to give system manager better control over system use and information access Among logged events are login into the system log off project operations backup restore delete rename data access open project open FTA open RBD open Safety module open Library import export operations For each operation exact time computer name user name target project name and operation description are stored Only System Manager may view the User Activity Log Here are two options to view the user activity log 1 Open RAM Commander close Welcome window choose User Administrator from the Administration menu and select User Activity Log option from the User menu 2 Run User Manager Utility from the Start Programs ALD Engineering menu and press User Activity Log button Then the user activity log will appea
495. pied elements and then 4 Choose Paste from the Item menu Or Press Ctrl V Or Right click and choose Paste from the pop up menu 5 Copied items will appear at the target location Another Paste option Special Paste allows you to paste tree elements automatically by changing their codes To use this option perform steps 1 and 2 as described above In step 3 choose Paste Special instead of Paste The dialog allowing for automatic changes of events and gates codes appears Select the required options and press OK O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 19 3 8 Remarks Remarks clarify the fault tree diagram by allowing you to add descriptive text and pictures ZA RAM Commander for Windows FTA Tutorial_RBD for Project TUTORIAL on Drive C FTA diagram tem Calculation Reports Library Tools View Window Help cZeaOROtX OH BON i RBD Tutorial RBD Standard Power Suppllies 3 parallel 3 53e 007 Repairable FR 0 927236 MTTR 0 380667 Wing nacelle tank 9 83e 007 9 83e 007 Repairable Repairable Repairable FR 8 35 FR 8 35 FR 8 35 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 11 7667 MTTR 0 11 7667 mr For Help press F1 To create a remark 1 Select any tree element gate or event right click 2 Choose Add remark from the pop up menu The Remark dialog box appears FTA remark text Cancel Background Foreground Font Picture Clear picture 3 Enter the remark text
496. pments HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive Software Problem 12 RAM Commander workstation can t start error 94 or can t access network drive Also server alias is used FQDN or CNAME server OS is Windows Server 2003 SP1 Solution Do not use FADN CNAME from workstations but use full not aliased server name instead lf you still wish to see alias see the next paragraph This problem occurs because Windows Server 2003 SP1 includes a new security feature named loopback check functionality By default loopback check functionality is turned on in Windows Server 2003 SP1 and the value of the DisableLoopbackCheck registry entry is set to O zero The loopback check functionality is stored in the following registry subkey HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control Lsa DisableLoopbackCheck Set this key value to 0 in the registry on the server Then reboot the server Reporting Problem 1 MS Word reports generation does not work in Client Server installation Additional fault isolation Try running WordRepGenerator exe application in RAM Commander installation folder BIN subfolder from the client PC If RAMC server has shared folder with RAM Commander installed and this folder IS mapped as network drive e g R on client PC then run R RAMC32 BIN WordRepGenerator exe If it does not run copy it to local drive C and try running it again If it runs now and program screen appears the reason is insufficient security p
497. ppear The screens are different for top item and for regular components assemblies Regular components assemblies data dialog contains multiple pages The page which is related to the currently selected analysis type Operating FMECA etc is active by default See more about item data editing later in this chapter Top Item Definition paragraph and Item Data Editing paragraph Search You may search items in the product tree by combining conditions 1 Activate the Product Tree view 2 From the Tree menu choose Search 3 Enter search criteria in the Item Data Conditions dialog box O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree ter tem Data Conditions Family E Rel Des 4 ltem code E e e Environment ane ur ast HEN E Cur MEE Method of FR p calculation nus Method st Failure distribution si al w Field fact ltem FR Duty cycle oe hult Factor 4dd factor Luantity Status Check Calc ane Complexity for FA a Ra spec Eb spec Source of FA u 5 You may put desired filter values in multiple fields using wildcards value in the field indicates that this field will not participate in the search filter 4 Press Ok 5 The search results are displayed in a separate list Ret Des A11 142 R30 34 Recelver CAM M6 Close 6 You may browse the list and use Locate button to get the position of the item in the tree Press
498. pping Vy he Setup m Safety Assessment Results Summary Dormant Latent Failure Assessment AFO 3 Select the required report from the list 4 Generated report will appear 5 Generated report can be printed saved exported to MS Word or Excel etc 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 553 6 Close the report window to return to the Safety Module To get a report based on MS Word template 1 Select required functional tree element function tree branch or tree root 2 Open Reports group of the main menu 3 Select the required reports group Safety or SHA 4 Select the required template report from the list of templates MS word Template Selection Please select MS Word Template document for the report Report Safety Assessment Available templates File Mame Description 5cope Safety FHA Template doc Safety FHA Report Built in o Safety FHA Template _FRus doc Safety FHA Report Russian Built in Safety 554 Template doc Safety System Safety Assessment Report Built in Safety SARS Template doc Safety Safety Assessment Results Summary Report Built in Safety 4FO Aesults_ Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard AF0 Pesynetatel aHanusa H pacyera Built in Safety AFO_FailuresList_ Template doc Safety AFO Report Russian standard AFP None nepeyeHb BHO otas Built in Select Cancel Page setup ad Edt Delete 5 Press Page setup b
499. pplication choose where to paste the diagram and press Ctrl V or choose menu item Edit Paste The diagram picture will be copied Delete Rename Copy diagrams choose Manage diagrams option from the Diagram menu Diagrams list will appear Use Save as Delete Rename Create buttons for corresponding operations 17 3 Calculation Two calculation modes are available Steady state and Time dependency Steady state calculation mode 2014 ALD Software Ltd aa RAM Commander User Manual 17 4 This mode calculates and displays system parameters state probabilities system availability reliability etc for a Steady State Steady State is state where time t is approaching infinity and state probabilities are approaching final probabilities It is assumed that final probabilities exist and that they do not depend on initial state probabilities Calculation is based on linear equations solving To run this calculation mode choose Steady State Calculation from Calculation menu Time dependency calculation mode This mode calculates and displays system parameters state probabilities system availability reliability etc for time points from Start time to End time see Diagram properties Calculation is based on fourth order Runge Kutta method for differential equations To run this calculation mode choose Time Dependency Calculation from Calculation menu Reports There are a number of different r
500. product tree or to items that satisfy a search condition The global change applies from the selected tree item down the tree Making Global Changes to a Product Tree View 1 Activate the Product tree view containing the items you want to change 2 From the Tree menu choose Global Change The settings dialog will appear O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 177 Type Tree Cancel Apply to Current Level Processor Method Family B ltem code 3 In the Global Change dialog box do one of the following e To make changes to items that satisfy the selection criteria select the Use Condition check box e To make changes to all product tree items down from the current item do not select the Use Condition check box 4 Select one of the following options from the Apply to list e Current level one level down from the item selected e All sub tree all levels down from the item selected 9 Select one of the following options from the Type list e Tree to change product tree item data like Part Number temperature LCN level of repair etc e Processor to change the prediction method specific data like resistor type PSR Quality level etc 6 Choose OK 7 If the Use Condition check box in step 3 was selected enter search criteria in the Item Data Conditions dialog box The condition is a logical AND between values entered in the fields For instance in the illustration below
501. program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you en Cancel Browse 15 Browse to locate the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Advanced Logistics Developments and select the key O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 55 ai Registry Editor Registry Edit View Favorites Help E S Mw Computer H E HKEY_ CLASSES ROOT E HKEY_CURRENT_USER Er y HKEY LOCAL MACHINE ES HARDWARE ee Sam z Y SECURITY E 1 SOFTWARE H C Adobe Advanced Lo gis stics Dey velopments E a RAM Commander for Windows ee eae i settings E ie Apple Computer Inc JE My ComputeriHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Advanced Logistic 16 Choose Export Registry file from Registry menu 17 Enter the file name for example ramcwYY and choose the RAM Commander folder which you created in step 1 on your Desktop as the place where you want to save the file 18 Click Save Now two RAM Commander versions are installed You have RAM Commander folder with two icons for each RAM Commander version on ne Aa 25 AM Commander File Edit View Favortes Tools Help 4 objectis 2 06 KB Ll My Computer 5 NOTES e Before any operation run uninstall service pack installation etc you should run the corresponding version s configuration icon and confirm the changes click Yes and then OK Only after doing this can you run or update RAM Commander e Do not use the Start gt P
502. ption field and choose Get from FM Library to pick the description from the FMECA library or c right click the Failure Mode Description field and choose Get from Component Library to get a list of standard Failure Modes from FMD 97 library FMECA library Component Library page according to current item s Family and Item Code or O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual d right click the Failure Mode Description field and choose Get from GPRD Library to get a list of Failure Modes from GPRD library according to current item s Part Number 3 Alpha Cause and other fields will become editable and Next Higher Effect NHE column opens with its default display of No effects description FI MHE EE Description Alpha Cauze IDN Description Beta Description Beta Severity 1 The failure description 1 000 1 3 No effect oo El O00 4 Provide Alpha value for Criticality mode Use Alpha calculator right click on Alpha cell choose Calculator for Alpha if you have Lambda of failure mode and need to calculate its ratio alpha Note that sum of failure mode alphas for specific product tree item should be equal to 1 5 Provide Cause description if required a type directly a Cause in the Cause column and press Enter or Tab key or b right click the Failure Mode Description field and choose Get from Cause Library to pick the description from the FMECA library 6 Select Next Higher Assembly and
503. puted during the optimization The following table describes the lookup logic Select point by Result used Highest cost less than or equal to the entered value Lowest NSP availability greater than or equal to the entered value O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis 403 16 5 Spare Parts Analysis Formulae Recommended spare stock is calculated interactively using Poisson distribution by finding the smallest n for which the following inequality is true n n G ty VP Y qu AD gt NSP i 0 1 where tis a repair turnaround time TAT for repairable items or total expected operating hours during prediction period for discardable items For very large stocks f gt 720 the following formula based on normal approximation is used Zp Z2 4aT A s 11 where Z is a fractile of the cumulative normal distribution corresponding to the required NSP Achieved NSP is calculated as the probability corresponding to the fractile Z of the cumulative normal distribution A A T L EA 16 6 Possible Important Applications The RAM Commander spares module can be used to analyze a variety of mission scenarios Two possible applications are described below compound operation modes and level of repair decision 16 6 1 Compound Operation Modes In many practical applications a system operates under a combination of regular operation and unsupported mission modes lt is usually difficult to formulate one
504. r version 3 0 a a OA Reliability Growth Duane a pa 5 Lam 5 5 fe k 5 D T aa cn o Po a oo fe 5 k 4 fx D o BI Ol o Hue E MTBF required MTBF cumulative MTBF current Scatter Planning Time hours 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Growth 389 where Time axis scale is Log10 time MTBF axis scale is log10 MTBF MTBF current is Instantaneous MTBF Scatter is a line connecting actual times of failures provided Another reliability growth report is the reliability growth planning report This report displays the values displayed in the RG Planning dialog box To generate this report choose Planning from the Reports menu See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 15 7 Summary In this chapter you learned how to use the reliability growth module With this module you can produce reliability estimates for products that have undergone limited field testing 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Spare Parts Analysis Spare Parts Analysis 391 16 Spare Parts Analysis RAM Commander s Spare Parts Analysis module provides an analysis of the required quantity levels of spare parts for all project items Two types of optimization are available e optimization of spare parts for the required Non Shortage Probability NSP e optimization using two criteria
505. r Test Level Organizational O Intermediate I Depot 0 A ID For Test Type All Test Types E For Tests All Tests EA Assembly Name Communic IDN 1 1 Description Rx Tx sy FM Fu EM FM mp Item FM IV Marginal Il Critical pia End Effect zake Test Name omit Undetected Detected Undetected DetectedlU IDN 1 1 2 1 No output 1 000 Communication 82 82 Noise 82 821 e Degradation receive test 5182 4 h e The following paragraphs explain reports and graphs usage and generation basics Text Reports RAM Commander displays text reports inside a report view window This display makes it easy for you to position a report next to another RAM Commander window and perform on screen analysis To generate a report use Reports menu of currently selected required RAM Commander module Choose the required report specify report filter and conditions and wait for the report generation Then the report window will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 127 3 Assembly Composite Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Assembly Composite Report Project name TUTORIAL Assembly Ref Des TUTORIAL ID 1 Description Communication System Environment GF Temperature 35 00 C F R xE 6 309 08 MIBF hours 3235 37 CNO17000 9 9 CNO17334 cNot7eso Pedestal fear fear rs Assembly Ref Des Communic ID 1 1 Description Rx Tx system Environment GF Temperature 35 00 C F_R xE 6 229 92 MIBF
506. r more information about report options O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 536 RAM Commander User Manual 21 10 1 To print the report From the Report menu choose Print See also Reports paragraph in the RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter for more general information about reports 21 11 Summary FMEA is an advanced software tool for potential failure mode and effects analysis It includes many specialized features not found in any other FMEA programs FMEA provides you with powerful analysis techniques to identify potential failure modes before you start manufacturing through to shipping and also allows you to find better corrective actions after encountering a failure Using FMEA results in better products and more satisfied customers O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Safety Analysis RAM Commander User Manual 22 1 Safety Analysis RAM Commander Safety Module is a safety toolkit implementing safety tasks defined in the various safety assessment standards recommendations RAM Commander Safety module implements the requirements and tasks of e SAE APR 4761 e recommendations from MOC 2 Russia e SHA and O amp SHA according to MIL STD 882E and more The safety assessment process has fundamental importance in establishing appropriate safety objectives for the System under Analysis SUA and determining that the implementation satisfies these objectives The safety assessment process is iterative by nature using RAM Com
507. r on the screen in Notepad You may clear it periodically if it becomes too large 3 11 Troubleshooting This topic provides solution to common problems The following sections will describe different problems symptoms and solutions grouped by problem types lf you are not able to solve a problem using this troubleshooting guide and need our assistance please see the instruction below about how to report about your problem How to report about troubles with RAM Commander lf all these advices did not help you and you still have problems with RAM Commander give us more 2014 ALD Software Ltd 90 RAM Commander User Manual 3 11 1 information about your RAM Commander configuration 1 Run Configuration report utility Run the Configuration report utility from Start gt Programs gt ALD Engineering gt Tools menu a Configuration Report y RAM Commander E Hasp Plug Driver o l 3 Hasp Plug Manager 2 Licensing Wizard pa User Manager rr 4 L 0 Engineering m Tools or Run ConfRep exe program located in RAMC321BIN folder 2 The program generates file RAMC32 BIN ramcconf txt containing information about system parameters and RAM Commander parameters You may see the exact file name on the Configuration report utility dialog E RAM Commander Configuration Report x Bahi oronandernconfqurabornncepor file was created D NAAM LS2 BIN Sramecont tst A Please attach this file
508. r replace the contacts Append Inzert Delete Move Up Move Down _ Close 6 Preventive Maintenance RCM report generation 11 8 Summary In this chapter you learned about RAM Commander s extensive maintainability prediction tools Using these tools you can conduct a detailed analysis on the length of time for repairing or replacing a system and calculating such parameters as MTTR and Met 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Derating Stress Analysis En RAM Commander User Manual Derating Stress Analysis The Derating module is used to analyze the overstress of components under current temperature conditions Stress Derating Policy The module provides a tool to define Derating Guidelines and identify overstressed components i e those working under stress exceeding the specified rating value Rating or maximum rated stress is the specified value of temperature power voltage or current that define the absolute maximum stress limits Exceeding these values creates a high probability of part damage failure The maximum rating is specified in the part specifications or in standard for this type of part It is a well known practice in many companies to define limit values of stress for various components as a function of temperature These limits Derating Guidelines are part of the company policy of component usage In a derating study in most cases each type of component and stress must be specified using a derating cu
509. r warning messages from ALD Software like Plug not found or License expired To generate the license report 1 Click the Start menu choose Programs and then A L D Engineering 2 Open Tools submenu run Licensing Wizard utility Select Computer Locked License File option press Next id ALD Software Licensing Wizard Workstation x Welcome to the ALD Software Licensing Wizard ou must obtain and configure a valid license to start using your software ALD Software provides a plenty of different licensing models please choose a suitable licensing model below Each software copy is protected by a license file linked to the specific computer User have to generate site code file send it to the software vendors Vendor will provide a computer locked license file Network floating license file ALD Licensing Server ALD Licensing Server should be installed and configured ou have to specify a path to the server on each workstation C Local HASP Plug Aladdin USB HASP Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of this workstation computer ou do not need to do anything except connecting the plug Network floating HASP Plug Aladdin USB NetHASF Plug should be connected to the USB or Parallel port of licensing server and HASP License Manager should be installed on the server ou do nat need to do anything on a workstation No thanks already have my license configured Tou may return to the L
510. ral times if service status is not switching to green On the license server monitor screen you may find also other useful information like number of available concurrent licenses number and full list of currently connected users number of unique users etc You may use the ALD Licensing Service Monitor utility on the licensing server to monitor license status see number of connected users see list of currently connected users Connected users button and perform maintenance of the license report license status delete license etc 15 Now the server is configured The next step is to configure workstations to use ALD License Manager This configuration should be done on any one of workstations in case of client server installation or on each PC with RAM Commander installed as standalone application To configure workstations to use ALD License Manager 1 Log into PC with RAM Commander installed in Workstation or Standalone Single user mode 2 Select Licensing Wizard from Start gt Programs menu ALD Engineering group Tools folder 3 The Licensing Wizard utility screen will appear It will help you in license configuration 2014 ALD Software Ltd 72 id ALD Software Licensing Wizard Workstation xl Welcome to the ALD Software Licensing Wizard ou must obtain and configure a valid license to start using your software ALD Software provides a plenty of different licensing models please choose a suitable licensi
511. rating Mict mas Calculation based an ee MIL HOBE 4 72 Lognormal distribution Derating FMEA Phase Operation Default Method Assembly te Electronic MIL 217F 2 P stress AAA Mechanical NPRAD 33 7 E Electro Mechanical NPRD 95 Cancel 4 See each specific module chapter for more information about module specific settings For reliability prediction you should set required default reliability prediction methods for each family of components except Assembly as shown on the screen above see Configurating Reliability Module paragraph For FMECA you should select phase and criticality see Configurating FMECA module and FMECA Grid Customization paragraphs For Maintainability you may select different calculation methods and customize levels of replace repair see Customize Organizational Levels and Set Mct max Calculation Method paragraphs 7 3 2 Top item definition Top item is the top level product tree item representing the whole system device or product Top item contains definition of environment conditions and temperature for the whole product Product subsystems assemblies and components inherit this information from the top item Assemblies and components may also have their own definition of temperature and environment Top items contains also information about Failure Rate allocation to subsequent elements and Maintainability information See relevant module chapter for settin
512. rating values for project components e Generating derating reports 12 1 Defining Derating Guidelines A derating guideline is a set of parameters and associated values applied to Item types In addition parameter values to individual types within an Item type For example a default derating curve may be specified for PSR for all IC Digital components and a different derating curve for IC Digital components with CMOS technology Another way to customize derating guidelines is to disable the parameters for individual types The Derating Value definition dialog boxcontains the Enable check box which indicates that the Specified parameter values are compared with actual values If the check box is cleared RAM Commander ignores the specified derating parameter In this way individual types can be filtered out from consideration in the derating analysis The figure below illustrates how the Derating list reflects the way in which various derating parameters apply to different Item type types 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Guidelines SCEMOO1 for Project TUTORIAL Drive E ELECTRONIC IC Digital Parameter Techn HA D Disabled in the second column indicates that RAM Commander ignores the Tj and Fanout parameters for all components in the IC Digital Item type E Enabled indicates that RAM Commander uses the VinSR stress parameter on all IC Digital components except for the TTL technology A dash in the Techn col
513. rau 3CIeen Operating Operating Monoperating Maintainability Derating Miscellaneous Nonoperating HM aintainability Repair Replace Levels Met mas Calculation based on MIL HOBR 4 Lognormal distribution Derating f FMEA e Enticalito Analysis MMEL Phase Operation Table Setup JAA Default Method Assembly Electronic Mechanical Flectro Mechanical 3 4 Press Ok The FMECA grid is displayed in the lower part of the product tree view containing alpha amp beta You can now enter the FMECA data By checking and un checking the Criticality Analysis check box in the Project Configuration dialog box the user can control the alpha amp beta display Alpha amp beta values are normalized for the entire project every time the user switches between FMEA and FMECA 18 3 2 FMECA Library FMECA module contains comprehensive library allowing customization of the module and saving time during FMECA grid data entry In the FMECA library you may enter and customize Phases Severities Criticality groups test types and other information specific to your particular FMECA standard language or product See FMECA Libraries paragraph later in this chapter for more information FMECA analysis may be performed for several product life cycle mission phases separately You may define required phases and their durations in the FMECA Library Then you may choose the current FMECA analysis phase and switch
514. re It is used to determine various combinations of hardware software and human error failures that could result in a specified risk or system failure System failures are often referred to as top events A deductive analysis using a Fault Tree begins with a general conclusion or hazard which is displayed at the top of a hierarchical tree This deductive analysis is the final event in a sequence of events for which the Fault Tree is used to determine if a failure will occur or alternatively can be used to stop the failure from occurring The remainder of the Fault Tree represents parallel and sequential events that potentially could cause the conclusion or hazard to occur and the probability of this conclusion A fault tree is a graphical representation of a logical structure representing undesired events failures and their causes You create the logical structure by using gates and represent undesired events by using basic events Reliability parameters are assigned to the basic events Widely used in system reliability studies fault tree analysis offers the ability to focus on an event of importance such as a highly critical safety issue and work to minimize its occurrence or consequence The probability of the top level event can then be determined by using mathematical techniques The resulting fault tree diagram is a graphical representation of the chain of events in your system or process built using events and logical gate configurations
515. re used Crew uses available wheel Document Nr Fage At 5S icm Ln4 Coll REC TRK EXT OVR Russian Ru LY 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter MMEL 556 RAM Commander User Manual 23 23 1 The Master Minimum Equipment List MMEL is a document which lists the equipment that may temporarily be inoperative subject to certain conditions whilst maintaining an acceptable level of safety as intended in the applicable documents Each MMEL is specific to an aircraft type RAM Commander s MMEL module main features 1 Compliance with MMEL requirements JAA RRJ 2 Interconnectivity with aircraft Reliability and Safety analyses 3 Candidate Item selection 4 Calculation s of Expected Probability before and after failure 9 Automatic identification of the next first in flight and second worst failures 6 Reports generation Standard MMEL Five Column Format presents the standard MMEL report Detailed Quantitative Analysis presents results of analysis on which MMEL selection has been made Prerequisites for MMEL generation using RAM Commander MMEL Module In order to generate an adequate MMEL you need to perform Reliability FMECA and Safety analyses prior to initiating the MMEL Module Performance of MMEL quantitative analysis utilizes the following information which is the results of Reliability FMECA and Safety analyses 1 Product tree ltems data a Item Name Ref Des b Item ATA Num
516. reliability values and perform analysis An important result of the mission profile module is the probability that the project will complete the mission 10 4 Burn in Report Burn in is the operation of a component under severe temperature and stress conditions to stabilize its performance Burn in reports may only be generated when using the Telecordia formerly Bellcore Bellcore Issue 5 or 6 reliability prediction methods Before selecting the burn in option from the Reports menu define the burn in time and burn in temperature for the desired items as follows To define global burn in time and burn in temperature 1 In the Product tree view navigate to the top of the product tree 2 From the Tree menu choose Edit OR right click the mouse and select Edit 3 In the Tree level item dialog box enter values for e Burn in Temperature in C and e Burn in Time in hours 4 Choose OK To define specific burn in time and burn in temperature To define a burn in time and burn in temperature for a specific item component or assembly 1 In the Product tree view navigate to the required item 2 From the Tree menu choose Edit OR right click the mouse and select Edit 3 In the Item Data dialog box Miscellaneous tab enter values for e Burn in Temperature in C and e Burn in Time in hours 4 Choose OK To view a Burn in Report From the Reports menu choose Burn in the Burn in report window opens with a first year multipl
517. ress Ok on item data dialog to close it and return to the product tree where you may open the next component and perform the same procedure again The procedure described below is the most basic procedure You do not have to enter each component screens one by one and set reliability parameters You may save a lot of time by using advanced procedures like e Import the product tree using Import Wizard then perform Load from Library procedure then run Recalculate all see Project Recalculation all components will be retrieved from the library and calculated e Use Quick Create for manual but quick creation of single components These methods will be useful only if you have Component Library and all or many of components you are using in your Bill Of Materials may be found in your libraries Special Fields in the Prediction Method Screens 8 2 1 1 1 Junction Temperature Junction temperature is computed as follows TJ TC 0 cp where T worst case junction temperature C T c case temperature C Oc junction to case thermal resistance C watt P power dissipation When computing delta junction case temperatures RAM Commander provides three input parameters 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 221 T junction O Delta Tic or e Delta junction case temperature dT jc e Thermal resistance e Power dissipation If you enter a value for delta junction case temperature dT Jc
518. rious repair times distribution assumptions Users may now choose one of the following methods of the Mct max calculation 1 MIL HDBK 472 Lognormal Distribution Mm Oo Cy In diet z i M y GEF In Met a A Tm gt Diy Mr gt N y Cy Tm Met ae EXPN MTTR Z P Cnr 2 Weighted Lognormal Distribution This is similar to the MIL HDBK 472 based on lognormal distribution but takes in the account the failure rates in the standard devation calculation 2014 ALD Software Ltd f N 2 gt A dnMet 6 4 InMet 1 i as RARRG ey 2 4 gt 4 i l i N gt A In Met el Meta E Z P Onr ae As i 3 Normal Distribution The standard deviation calculation is based on the hypothesis of the repair times normal distribution N HN E J Y AMi OA Met i l del N N a YA QA i 4 Empirical Distribution Does not use any distribution assumption and is based on the predicted repair times The implementation algorithm consists of several steps Z p oa A histogram of Mcti and corresponding pi is built where pe P A gt A el i 2014 ALD Software Ltd 11 4 Maintainability Prediction 307 cumulative Mcti in ascending order distribution histogram is used to define the confidence level CL for each value of Mct ir p 100 CL i Mctmax is calculated by the linear interpolation of Mctk i e if the required valu
519. rited from higher level items e Level of replace repair e Failure Rate source switch selection e MCT MLH source switch selection The bill of materials being imported may contain hierarchy There are several options for hierarchical BOM import which you may choose using the Tree hierarchy drop down list e Plain there is no hierarchy all the file is imported as plain list of parts e Depth the hierarchy is based on the Depth field See for example the Depth field in the import file below and the corresponding tree structure er Output E E System 1 Depth Refles Cty El Gl Assembly 7 Fra System l l 3 2 Assembly 1 1 El Part 1 1 4 3 Part 1 1 1 E Part 1 2 5 3 Part 1 2 El Assembly 2 6 2 Assembly 2 1 El Part 2 1 El 3 Part 2 1 1 El Part 23 B 3 Pan 2 2 ID the hierarchy is based on item hierarchical identifier like 1 2 3 4 where each number corresponds to the number by order of the element on each level This format is useful for importing data which were previously exported from RAM Commander and updated outside of RAM Commander e g in Excel file See for example the ID field in the import file below and the corresponding tree structure Input Output System RefDes Oty E Assembly 1 System E Part 1 1 Assembly 1 1 1 Part 1 1 1 El Part 1 2 1 2 Part 12 1 El Assembly 2 p Assembly 2 1 El Part 2 1 2 1 Part 2 1 El Part 2 2 22 Pat22 e LCN the hierarchy is
520. rking with Safety FMECA Library later in this document d Press Ok 5 Select failure condition end effect in the next field 2014 ALD Software Ltd Safety Analysis 547 a Press the button in the End Effect column End Effects list will appear b Select relevant EE from the list you may select only one EE c If required EE is not found in the list add it to the library see Working with Safety FMECA Library later in this document d Press Ok 6 Fill in other fields in the same table line Verification Remarks Detection Action etc 7 Specify or create a safety assessment method for this failure condition a Right click the failure condition pop menu will appear Faure Condition Phases Loss of Deceleration Capability Tasi Landing 1 Roll Rejected Takeott ATO a Unarnunelated loss of deceleration Landino Roll kh Annunciaterd Delete Failure If b select Safety Assessment Definition from the popup menu assessment definition screen will appear Safety Assessment Definitions Function Failure i Unannunciated loss of deceleration capability Condition Lancel Phaze Landing Roll Rejected Takeoft ATU Effect Crew is unable to decelerate the aircraft resulting in a high speed overrun Safety Assessment Means Type Name Description FTA Unannunciated_Loss_ot All whell_Br Unannunciated Loss_of Al whell_Breakmng gt Open Add ABD Add FT
521. rm such an installation If you have for example RAM Commander version XXX installed in C RAMCXX folder and you wish to install RAM Commander Y YY to another folder C RAMCYY use the following procedure to install a new version while preserving the old version 1 Create a folder Ram Commander on the Desktop Place the RAM Commander X XX shortcut icon in it you may copy it from ALD Engineering group in the Startup gt Programs folder and change the shortcut s name to display software version wnat SIRAM Commander Elle Edit View Favortes Tools Help Back 8 ser Fe Folders A La as pS ey Bes Norton Antivirus E RAMO A 51 2 Click Start button and choose the Run option 3 Enter regedit in Run dialog box and click OK Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open Cancel Browse 4 Browse to locate the key HKEY_ LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE Advanced Logistics Developments and select the key O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 53 a Registry Editor Registry Edit View Favorites Help E S Mw Computer H E HKEY_ CLASSES ROOT E HKEY_CURRENT_USER Er y HKEY LOCAL MACHINE ES HARDWARE ee Sam z Y SECURITY E 1 SOFTWARE H Reche l ar RAM mandan Rees A i settings E JE Apple Computer Inc El ili 9 Choose Export Registry file from Registry menu
522. robability or long term steady state average unavailability Q For events ID of linked element in Product Tree FM number For events number of FMECA Failure Mode of linked element in Product Tree New event will be created with its gates for each sequence O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Event Tree Analysis 503 Initiating event E Event 1 7 son A e Event 1 True P 0 3 Initiating event P 0 Event 1 False P 0 7 Any number of events may be added to the diagram Then you may define all outcomes Code Name and Description and calculate the probabilities of consequences 20 2 1 Events library Events data may be stored in the events library To store event s data in the library press Load to Library button on event s data screen To open the library select Events item from the Library menu ETA Events Library xl Mame Description Fire alarm is not activated Sprinkler system does not function Start of fire El Add Edit Delete Print Close 2014 ALD Software Ltd 504 RAM Commander User Manual 20 2 2 20 2 3 20 2 4 20 3 20 4 Use Add Edit and delete buttons to change library items Use Print button to print report with events data Note that data of events in the tree will not be updated from the library immediately but only after the tree recalculation Only events which are set to be automatically updated from the library will be updated Delete To dele
523. rograms menu icons to run RAM Commander e To transfer a project from an older version to a newer version use the Backup and Restore modes 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 Licensing There are 4 licensing models Local USB plug Network USB plug Local license file Network License file You may find comparison and overview of these models in the Introduction paragraph earlier in this chapter The next paragraphs provide installation procedure for each of these licensing models Local USB plug Local USB plug should be inserted into the USB port of PC where RAM Commander is installed It may be exchanged among users and computers but grants access to its current holder only Before running RAM Commander ensure that the local plug is connected to the USB port of your computer If not then switch off your computer connect the plug and switch on again The plug driver is installed automatically during the RAM Commander installation If plug problems appears after the installation you can install plug driver manually To install a local plug driver manually 1 Run the program HASPUserSetup exe from the RAM Commander installation CD HASP Driver HL folder with the latest version number in folder s name You may also download the drivers setup package from our web site http www aldsoftware com download download HASPUserSetup exe 2 Choose the Yes button to install 3 Follow the int
524. rom manufacturer or from field use failure statistics 3 Specifying known Failure Rates for known temperatures and environments using the GPRD library 4 Allocating failure rates from assemblies down to the components assign a required FR to an assembly and have RAM Commander allocate the required FR to each of its children Each way has its own advantages and disadvantages and is appropriate in particular conditions O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 212 RAM Commander User Manual 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 Configurating Reliability Module There is a number of prerequisites and a number of options you may set up before starting the reliability prediction 1 Create project See the Creating a new project paragraph Pay attention to FR units selection it will affect your resulting FR display 2 Build the Product Tree See the Product Tree Building paragraph Pay attention to specifying the temperature and environment for the top item and also to the assemblies and components if required 3 Choose the analysis mode Operating or Non operating See the Operating vs Non Operating Mode paragraph 4 Select default Reliability prediction methods See the Project Configuration paragraph and Choosing suitable Reliability Prediction Method paragraph Then you may start components reliability data input and calculation Operating vs Non Operating Mode RAM Commander supports reliability calculations for both operating and non operatin
525. rovides export of CAF files to FRE files You need to perform this export before trying to import the fault tree into ISA Tool To prepare CAFTA fault tree for import into ISA Tool 1 Open Fault Tree in CAFTA 2 Select File gt Save as 3 Choose FRE format 4 Specify FT file name 9 FRE file will be created To import CAFTA fault tree into RAM Commander 1 Open the desired project 2 Open the list of fault trees create a new or open any FT 3 Choose Import from CAFTA option from the Tools menu 4 Input parameters screen will appear FTA Import Tree trom CAFTA File with tree structure PRE TEST _FAULT_TREE fref Browse LAF TA Database file RA TEST_FAULT_TREE AR Browse Load basic events of the current tree only Override the existing basic events OK Cancel 9 Select the required RR and FRE files and press Ok 6 Fault tree will be imported and you will get message about import result O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis a Note that the imported fault tree is not exactly the same as it was in CAFTA Events types are changed and tree may be composed of multiple sub trees in case that the original CAFTA tree had repeated gates 19 3 14 4 Import FT from Aralia Simtree RAM Commander may import single fault trees from Aralia Simtree Import is performed from DAG file Sim Tree compatibility file V2 1000 which should be prepared using Aralia software before importing in to
526. rs 1 From the Report menu choose FMEA Analysis The FMEA Report generation dialog box opens showing the different reports that can be generated and some radio buttons for sorting and filtering 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 535 FMEA report generation Report type FMEA Data FMEA Before Decision Making FMEA After Decision Making Pareto Analysis Diagram Data Scree Plot Graph Scree Plot Report FMEA Improvement Summary Corrective Actions Checklist LCause Fe Matris LCause FM Matris percentage Severity Likelhood Matrix FMEA Standard M5 Word template Sorting by 5 No sorting Elements APN All elements 5 Resulting APN 0 Selected diagram elements only _ O All elements Sub FMEA Type a All types Selected type only Failure Cause Importance OK Cancel Sorting by Sort the report by RPN by Resulting RPN or unsorted Elements Contents of the report will display either all the Process Design elements or selected diagram elements only see Diagram Basics Multiselection on page 460 Type Contents of the report will display either all the Process Design elements or elements of selected type only Only Critical Contents of the report will display either all the failure causes or only causes marked as Critical Causes 2 Choose OK to finish The report will be shown in a report window for preview See Reports paragraph in RAM Commander Fundamentals chapter fo
527. rt from text Access and Excel files 9 5 4 3 1 Import from ASCII file RAM Commander provides a facility to import failure rate table data from ASCII files Each line in the ASCII file must have the following format Part Number String User defined User defined maximum 31 Environment S text See values in Top item definition paragraph Temperature Integer User defined numeric from 273 to 1000 degrees default 4 centigrade O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 273 FR or MTBF Floating point User defined Any positive floating point number default 8 The fields must appear in the order noted above The ASCII file name can have any extension but defaults to a dat extension To import a failure rate table 1 From the Library menu choose GPRD the GPRD library opens 2 Choose Import from ASCII from the Library menu 3 The FR Table Import dialog box opens FR Table Import Field Mame width Default Values Part Name 3 Environment Temperature Falure Rate 4 Enter values for field width and default values for environment and temperature so that these values will be used as a default if no values are provided in the ASCII file that is being imported 9 Select Failure Rate or MTBF depending on the type of data in your import file 6 Click OK 7 In the Open dialog box select the ASCII file containing the data to be imported 8 Click OK RAM Commander impor
528. rt of fire User Probability q 0 8 defined Sprinkler system 0 01 User Probability q 0 01 does not defined Fire alarm is not 0 001 Ser Probability q 0 001 activated defined Outcome Damage Probability P 7 428 006 Event Logical Event Probability Reliability Calculation 1 Explosion 0 01 Ser Probability q 0 01 defined 0 8 Pi Start of fire True e Tree diagram displays the tree structure O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 20 5 e RAM Commander for Windows ETA Tree Diagram for Project TUTORIAL Drive C o 2 Report Edit wiew Window Help _ G SS OR DEX S El EO i ETA Tree Diagram Project name TUTORIAL Tree Explosion Explosion P 2 3151fe 213 start of fire True P 2 3151fe 213 sprinkler system does not function True P 2 3151fe 213 Fire alarm is not activated True P 2 3151fe 213 L___critical damage P 2 31517e 213 Fire alarm is not activated False P 2 3151 e 213 Major damage P 2 3151fe 213 Sprinkler system does not function False P 2 3151fe 213 Fire alarm is not activated True P 2 3151fe 213 Damage P 2 3151fe 213 Fire alarm is not activated False P 2 3151 e 213 LC Damage P 2 315178 213 start of fire False P 2 3101fe 213 nta na L Minor damage P 2 31517e 213 For Help press Fl Part 1 1 Page 1 1 IT e Events report is available from the Library screen e Tree output to the printer is available from the ETA Diagram menu select Print See also Reports p
529. ruption conditions may be useful when conditions dealing with large trees with long calculation times Set up cancel conditions to stop calculation in case that calculation time or number of generated MCS will be too large 3 Set the calculation parameters and pres Ok FTA Calculation will be started Minimal Cut Sets calculation will be performed basic event probabilities calculated Minimal Cut Sets list generated and diagram Mean Unavailability or Unavailability t calculated see Tree Unavailability Calculation paragraph for more information 4 When the calculation is finished results dialog appears O 2014 ALD Software Ltd FTA Minimal Cut Sets Result for top event Minimal Cut Sets 0 5 23 5251 4e 007 FTA Name Number of MES Tutorial 2 Order of MCS Min 1 Max 4 N aft 3 5251 8e 007 1 33523e 01 3 1 15122e 013 1 0061e 013 0 67452e 014 0 39584e 014 T 23001e 014 4 00029e 01 4 3 01 424e 014 2 51535e 014 9 6233e 015 r 2512e 015 6 05106e 015 1 416839e 015 1 22535e 015 4 25091 2 016 1 02262e 016 3 007d4e 025 3 093488 025 1 07493e 025 2 5099e 026 Oo D On E 0 M pA 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Order Event 1 1 PS 2 Main Switch 2 HardDniwe 2 Mother Board Memory Fail 2 HardDr
530. rve Below is a conventional derating curve for capacitors The derating VSR function is a constant S4 in the range O t then drops to S Over the range ty VaR t ta For parameters that are not dependent on temperature a maximum value may be defined RAM Commander uses this information to generate exception reports for all components and indicates which components are overstressed O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Stress Analysis 329 Features and Results The user can define more than one set of Derating Guidelines for general use and for particular applications For each type or style of electronic component e g RLR RCR styles of resistor its own Derating Guidelines can be defined Derating value definition List of parameters Peak PSR Type Dependent Derating Curve T1 e Walet 80 Zoo Value max T2 150 Yaluez 0 Example ofa Mi conventional derating curve for capacitors Fal Enable A report created by the Derating module includes all components in the selected part of the system or only overstressed ones The overstressed components are appropriately marked in the report The user can also run Spice software for automatic stress calculation and then import spice results for derating evaluation Derating Analysis in RAM Commander There are three basic steps in a derating study using RAM Commander e Defining one or more derating guidelines e Entering de
531. rver installation Note RAM Commander upgrade procedure does not require license upgrade all installed licensing components should continue working after RAM Commander update without any changes 3 6 1 Standalone Configuration Upgrade Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander Make sure RAM Commander users have full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder 1 Check where the current RAM Commander is installed Usually it is C RAMC32 2 Run installation package of the newer RAM Commander version 3 If it displays dialog offering to Modify Repair Remove the previous version choose Remove proceed with the removal procedure and run the newer version installation package again Removal procedure will not remove your data just the older software modules 4 Choose Single user installation on Setup type selection screen 2014 ALD Software Ltd 76 InstallShield Wizard a 3 x Setup Type Selection Please select a setup type Description Use this option to install AM Commander on a stand alone computer 1 Single User Installation 2 Server Network Installation 3 Workstation Network Installation InstallShield Back Cancel 5 Choose the same folder where the previous version was installed on the next screen InstallShield Wizard E X RAM Commander f
532. rviceSetup to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browge Folder jc Program Files 4LDE ngineering4LDLicensingServery Browse Disk Cost Install ALD License MngrService Setup for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer Evervone Just me cet cin He 2014 ALD Software Ltd es RAM Commander User Manual 6 Press Next on the next screens Press Close on the final screen 2 ALDLicenseMn gr5e rviceSetup Installation Complete Lance 7 ALD License Manager Windows Service and ALD License Manager Monitor will be installed 8 ALD License Manager Monitor will be started immediately O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started KO B ALD Software Licensing Service Monitor f Ioj x Licensing service status Service status Not responding Licensing Service does not respond The service is not running or working folder settings are inconsistent incorrect License status Service start time Working folder CALDLicenseServer Maximum allowed number of connected users Real maxumum number of simultaneously connected users Number of currently connected users Total number of rejected license requests Total number of unique users Total number of logged exceptions Connected Users Working folder CAALDLicenseServer To get computerdocked software license for this computer you have t
533. ry ccccccocconcncnnnnonononononnnononananonnnos 313 To retrieve a standard task from the task liDrary oooooocccncccooconnncnnncononanoconnnononananonnnononananonnnos 314 To define a task s maintenance data ccccccccecssseccceeeeseseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesssaeeeeeeeeess 314 Mean Time To Re pall WT UR ii A Sa aat 315 To conpute MITE 2d A aaa 315 To Calculate MTTR and Mct in QUICK MOUE oconccncnncnccccccccconconcnncnconononononnonnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnononononnnnonzanenenos 315 PREC IC UALS A E EON Er a EA ARE EE EE ES 316 To calculate MT TR and Mct in Recalculate All mode ooocccccconconcccocconccnoncnncononcnnnononcnncnnnncononnnnos 316 Fault ISOlAUOM ana AMDIOMY ata AA 316 Maintaimapbp lity AMOCAtION ina a a 317 To perform maintainability allocation ooooonnccnnnconoconnnnnnconnnonncnnnnnonononcnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononannnos 317 To copy maintainability tasks data to other ifemMS ooococonccnccconcnnccnnnnoncononcnnonnnncnnonnnncononnnnranonnnnos 317 gt Mailntalnablllty LIDFATIOS iii id a a 317 TO access the Standard Times LIDIA adidas 319 To add or edit a record in the Standard Times Library ccoooonnccnnccococonononnnononanoconnnononanaconnnononananos 319 To delete a record in the Standard Times Library ooooocccnnnccccccnncnnncocononoconononononononnnnnononarnnnnononananos 320 To access the Standard Task
534. s see next paragraphs for more information 2014 ALD Software Ltd 128 RAM Commander User Manual 5 7 1 1 Customization You can customize the appearance and columns width of your RAM Commander reports The customization settings are stored for each RAM Commander user separately To customize report appearance 1 Activate the Product tree view or another module view 2 From the Reports menu choose Setup Appearance the Report Style Setup dialog box opens Report Style Setup for User ALO Report Group As Default Orientation Box Style Thin C Portrait Landscape Title Font Text Font Title Text Arial Arial IP Italic 4 Bold 34 IF Italic Bold 140 RA Header Font Table Font Header Table Arial Arial IP italie Bold a I italic C Bold 3 3 In the Report Group list box select the report group you are customizing 4 Select Thick or Thin from the Box Style field 9 Make font selections for Title Text Head and Table the selections are displayed in the Report Style Setup dialog box 6 Choose OK These settings are effective for future reports Previous reports generated are not affected by the new settings To customize report columns 1 Activate the Product tree view or another module view 2 From the Reports menu choose Setup Columns the Report Columns Setup dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 129
535. s Used when the item under analysis has functions but does not have underlying components So the FR of the item itself is distributed to functions with Specified ratios 9 Click OK to store the data 18 7 2 Working with Functional Blocks There are two product tree vew modes for FMECA module Normal View with components and Functional Blocks View with FB displayed instead of assemblies To switch from one mode to another use View menu Normal Functional Block View mode The example below shows the same assembly in two different vew modes B E Receiver Normal View Functional Blocks View After choosing Functional Tree View select the functional block and enter FMECA data in the same way as for components as it was described above in the Entering FMECA data paragraph NOTE For a specific assembly only one mode of FMECA analysis is allowed either per components or per Functional Blocks For different assemblies within the same project both modes are allowed simultaneously 18 8 FMECA Reports FMECA module provides more that 30 different reports divided into several groups FMEA Item information FM description Next higher effect End effect 2014 ALD Software Ltd Severity Detection method Compensating provisions Remarks Failure cause Caused by item Criticality analysis Item information FM description FM ratio alpha End Effect Severity Fail effect probability beta FM criticality
536. s e Interactive graphic editor with Drag and Drop feature providing intuitive display and convenient O O O Or manipulation tools for creating of any RBD configuration e Simple and fast transfer of reliability and maintainability item data to the RBD module by selecting the target and source items on the graphic RBD screen e Flexible zoom color palette direct printing of any RBD configuration e Database for each element includes o identification parameters ref des part number description etc o type of time to failure distribution and corresponding parameters e g MTBF Sigma etc o type of time to repair distribution and corresponding parameters 2014 ALD Software Ltd 13 1 Reliability Block Diagrams 341 RBD Basics RAM Commander displays each RBD in a separate window RBDs are graphically composed of the following elements Parallel section A redundancy section containing n items Parallel sections fail when all its items fail at the same time Parallel branch A series of elements in parallel with other elements or a group of elements SubRBD A collapsed representation of an RBD Regular item Any item with reliability data k out of n section A parallel section with n items A k out of n section is functional when k or more of the n elements are operational The section fails when n k 1 items fail at the same time A place to insert new RBD elements Parallel section You add elements
537. s the component s reliability data required for the given prediction method lt searches in the project library first and then searches in the global library If you do not have the Generic name and use other identifiers Part Number Catalog Number etc use the Cross Reference library to translate Part Number or Catalog Number into Generic Name You may use the component libraries during product tree building and reliability prediction in different ways 1 Retrieve Save single component data from the library 2 Load data for all components in the product tree from the library Load from Library 3 Save data for all components in the product tree to the library Load to Library See next paragraphs for more explanations Retrieve or save single component data During the product tree building and reliability prediction you have to provide component s details from the component technical data sheet lt is done using the prediction method data screen or Quick Create option s dialog Use the button bar in the lower part of the data screen to find and retrieve component data from the component library The following options are available E A A A Retrieve data from Retrieve component data from component libraries libraries Show defaults Review defaults for the selected component type RAM Commander displays default values for the particular reliability prediction method and component type During calculations RAM Commander uses defa
538. s K out of N With Repair and K out of N Without Repair Equivalent Lambda FR MTBF according to RIAC Reliability Toolkit is explained in paragraph Equivalent Lambda MTBF 13 3 2 1 Reliability Distributions The following table lists the probability distributions and associated reliability functions used in computing reliability of a single RBD block Distribution Reliability Function Probability Density Function Parameters R O 1 FO Exponential l e e Weibull e Normal lt u lt L o gt 0 Log normal F gt 0 Erlang ra Ni gt 7 gt 0 D N K positive Time independent Constant O for e T lt 1 fort To 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander User Manual 13 3 2 2 Availability Distributions This paragraph provides formulas used in calculation of an availability of a single RBD block In general unavailability UA is calculated using the following equation UA MCT MTBE MCT where MCT a is equivalent maintenance corrective time and MTBF sa is equivalent MTBF MTBF sq and MCT are calculated differently for each failure and repair times distribution type see tables below Equivalent MTBF calculation for different failure time distributions Exponential MTBF Weibull a T 0 1 2 a gt 0 scale where is gamma function b gt 0 shape gt
539. s Library iria laca 320 To add a new task to the Standard Tasks Library oocccccccccccnnncononoconococonnnonononncnnnnononnnnncnnnononananos 320 To delete a task from the Standard Tasks Library cccccccconncconncocononoconocononanocnnnnononanncnnnnnnonananos 320 To edit a task in the Standard Tasks Library ooooocccnccconccoccncnnnconononncnnnnononnnncnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnonananos 321 Standard Tasks Times Library Reports cccccoooncccnccococononanononononananononnnnnannneronnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnnnnnnrrrrrrnannnnrrnnnnns 321 To access the Maintenance Library dada 321 Nailntainability Reports 0d E A 322 ROM Mod Busca as o E 323 SUMMA Mar dis 326 Part 12 Derating Stress Analysis 328 T Detining Derating GUION isa dali 329 To define Derating Guidelines cccccccnnnncnnccccccncnnnnoconnnnnannncnonnnn nana ner n nena nana enn rnnnn nn nn rr rrrrnnnnnnrrrrrrnnnnarrrerenanans 330 Print lee A cuties neck enetsceateascedecsauyenckne Siesteskinkeccec she denechd CustuastincGesessuecseececseeteaves 333 Entering Actual Stress Value S usina ines 334 DETAUNG IRE DOMS cicle 336 SUMMA iia 338 Part 13 Reliability Block Diagrams 340 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Contents 9 T RBD BASICOS utili ECU sit 341 2 Drawing the DIAGKaAM rta 342 To create anew RBD diagramei aaa 342 T change a RBD configuration ci dida dede 343 To add n element to an RBD iii iaa 344 Toenterdataf r n RBD element scrierea a 344
540. s better wen RAM Commander administrator or any person who manage permissions is not defined as project manager To switch advanced project permissions off 1 Open project data Right click on project and select Edit from popup menu 2 Change the value of Permission drop down list 3 You will be asked for administration code enter administration code defined before when the advanced permissions were switched on and configured for the first time 4 Project permissions setting will be changed 9 Press Ok button to save the changes Please note that advanced permissions definition is stored inside the project database and is still effective after project backup and restore even if it is restored in completely different envronment in another network with different list of RAM Commander users Opening project Each project may contain multiple analysis types Reliability FMECA FTA Safety etc Some of them are based on the product tree Reliability for operating and non operating modes stress analysis Maintainability and FMECA and some of them are not FTA ETA Markov etc There are multiple was to open the project in the desired analysis mode To open the project 1 Open the list of projects for the desired drive see Projects list O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 151 2 Select the desired project in the list of projects 3 Use one of these three options a Right click the project rec
541. s by Item types listed in the Item type abbreviations paragraph FIDES 2009 classification of electronic components is different from RAM Commander classification The table below provides all FIDES 2009 component types and their corresponding classification in RAM Commander It will simplify the search of correct component Item types and types in RAM Commander FIDES type RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type 115 115 115 115 _ FPGA CPLD FPGA Antifuse PAL 115 IC Analog 115 IC Analog Digital Linear IC Analogue circuit Hybrid circuit Microprocessor 115 Microcontroller 115 DSP Flash EEPROM EPROM SRAM 115 115 IC Memory FLASH 115 IC Memory EEPROM bh _ 116 115 115 115 IC Digital ASIC simple function IC Digital ASIC complex function O1 Digital circuit Digital ASIC simple function N 9 Digital ASIC complex function 9 Analogue mixed ASIC 9 9 Signal Low power PIN Signal Low power _ Schottky Signal Low power 2 3 24 Varactor Signal Low power 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rectifying Low power amp Power 1 1 1 23 23 23 23 23 23 1 C ono ooo fram C org 222 frma z memes meene ose 2 Fen ooo i eeenon o few oo mf 2 r fosas iia renta 7 potes comic tion o itp mesas 19 sat PN Sige impor a_ Sey Gra Longo vec yr Longo Retin oe Pone org aw pvr 8 Pa Zener regulation Low power amp Power
542. s by clicking yellow boxes with answers MSG 3 MSI Selection MAINTENANCE SIGNIFICANT ITEM SELECTION MSI a Could failure be undetectable or b Could failure affect safety on not likely to be detected by the ground or in flight including operating crew during normal safety emergency systems or duties equipment c Could failure have significant operational impact Please provide answers to all four questions clicking the relevant Yes or No boxes Selected answers are marked by green background color C Press Ok when done d Press Set remarks and Highest Manageable MSI button e Remarks dialog will appear provide remarks on your decision and select highest manageable MSI item for the current item it is subsystem system for which separate MSG 3 report will be generated 2014 ALD Software Ltd MSG 3 975 MSG 3 MSI Selection Mal Data Part Number RA e i ATA Number 20 10 03 Ref Des ing float vent valve Description MAINTENANCE SIGNIFICANT ITEM M51 Remarks Highest Mi bl E E E a e 28 10 00 Browse l Clear Cancel 4 After decision for all items is taken the items list will display the results MSG 3 Step 2 Maintenance Significant Items MS Selection Item 28 10 00 Fuel Storage System ATA Number Part Humber Ref Des Description MSI Highest Manageable MS Remarks 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst es 28 10 00 1 28 10 01 PATA EZ
543. s list on a network drive Additional symptoms Initially network drive works fine and then this problem could suddenly appear Could be accompanied with error message OPERR lt 116 gt in X RAMC32 BIN DRIVE DRV The drive drv file exists project folders exist access to the network shared folder is available with full access rights to all users Reason Users connecting to the network drive try to use Pervasive Database Engine of the first user connected to the drive If the first user s Pervasive Database Engine on PC in general is stuck the described problem will appear This stuck user s PC should be restarted Solution 1 Try to restart the Pervasive Database Engine which is stuck a Open the folder where the projects you can t access are located for example X RAMC3 PRJ b Try to open the X RAMC3 PRJ PVSW LOC file using Notepad Windows Explorer locate file right click open c You will see a computer name of a PC which acts as Pervasive Gateway and which has problem with Pervasive Database Engine d Restart this computer e Delete the X RAMC3 PRJ PVSW LOC file f Try opening the list of projects again 2 If the previous recommendation did not help please restart the RAM Commander database server and try again 3 If the previous recommendation did not help please ask all the engineers working with RAM Commander to restart their computers In addition it is recommended that the PC where the network drive with shared pr
544. s than the Max time Then you just match the Max time and Step When after some tries you get necessary Max Time you may reduce the Step to get more accuracy 8 Choose Close to exit To generate RBD reports follow the procedure in the next section 13 3 4 Monte Carlo Simulations RAM Commander employs a Monte Carlo event driven simulator to evaluate RBDs You can customize the simulator parameters and report output to generate the report you need Use the Monte Carlo when there is no analytical solution for the RBD you have defined This 2014 ALD Software Ltd 366 RAM Commander User Manual includes the following cases e Complicated reliability structures including complex redundancy e For a k out of n block when the failure distribution of an item is not exponentially distributed or K out of n from different elements e Derivation of availability curves in a non steady transient state e RBD contains identical elements e Studying the impact of periodical inspection strategy on reliability and availability Set up Monte Carlo parameters usign Monte Carlo Configuration dialog and then run the simulation from Calculation menu see next paragraph To initiate Monte Carlo simulation for more information 13 3 4 1 To initiate a Monte Carlo simulation 1 Activate the RBD diagram window 2 From the RBD menu choose Monte Carlo configuration Monte Carlo Configuration Start time E Conf level 80 led
545. s the NHE list corresponding to the current IDN e lists all FMs of the Next Higher Assembly NHA only for this NHA When the current NHE is the last before the EE adds an additional column to the FM NHE EE chain If the NHA corresponds to the first level in the product tree then the NHA Selection window opens When the current NHE has its own NHEs more than one NHE column adds the additional NHE to the current NHE The new NHE will always be defined as No effect Note When the NHE already has an NHE defined as No effect you cannot add a new NHE until No effect has been changed to the real effect In another words each NHE can have only one effect defined as No effect Delete NHE Deletes the current NHE and corresponding unshared chains up to the EE 18 5 2 4 End Effect Column Pop up Menu Options EE List Displays End Effects library Select EE from the list to be inserted into the current EE cell Adds an additional End Effect to the NHE Note A new End Effect is always defined as No effect When an NHE already has an End Effect defined as No effect you may not add a new End Effect until No effect has been changed to a real end effect In other words each NHE can have only one end effect defined as No effect 2014 ALD Software Ltd 18 6 18 6 1 Add to EE List Adds a new End Effect to the End Effect list Note The new End Effect will be copied into th
546. s users with level name and group of each user An icon appears to the left of each user name showing the user s expertise level A AA Fr AA A Beginner S To create a new user 1 Open User Administrator window 2 From the User menu choose Create The Edit user parameters dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Password Group Level Beginner 3 Enter the user name password group and level Name and Password should be alphanumeric characters Group is used later for permissions assignment e g all group members may get permissions to use some project User level is currently not used 4 Choose OK The new user will appear in the User Administrator list To edit an existing user 1 Open User Administrator window 2 Double click on a user s row in the User Administrator window the Edit user parameters dialog box opens 3 In the Edit user parameters dialog box change the required information except the name 4 Press OK RAM Commander updates the user list If a user s level is changed RAM Commander displays the corresponding icon in the User Administrator window To delete user 1 Open User Administrator window 2 Right click the user s row in the User Administrator window popup menu will appear 3 Choose the Delete option confirm the deletion After deletion RAM Commander displays the updated User Administrator window To create a new System Man
547. select a program folder Setup will add program icone to the Program Folder listed below ou may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders L D Engineer Existing Folders ALI S Ones Administrative Tools Lames Startup Back Cancel 8 Press Next on the Review settings screen InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files IF you want to review or change any settings click Back fF you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Setup Type 1 Single User Destination Directory CARAMES2 Program Folder A L D Engineering Cancel 9 The Installation Wizard will copy necessary files 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 35 InstallShield Wizard Setup Status RAM Commander for Windows Setup ls performing the requested operations lnstalling Cancel 10 If this is the first time Ram Commander is installed on the computer the Edit user parameters dialog box is displayed Enter your User Name and Password optional and click OK Edit user parameters ne Password Lancel Group Level Beginner Password is optional Groups are used by RAM Commander to control access privileges Access to the projects may be denied for the users according to the
548. semblies DC DC voltage 215 iscetaneous DC DC voltage converters converters md md D 15 Various subassemblies Lithium batteries 217 Lithium batteries Various subassemblies Nickel batteries 217 Nickel batteries 117 Various subassemblies Fans 220 Rotating Fan EN O 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 206 209 212 215 215 220 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Calculation 233 FIDES type RAM RAM Commander Commander type Item type 118 Various subassemblies Keyboard 223 Switch Membrane keyboard 119 Various subassemblies Keyboard board Keyboard board 8 2 1 2 5 Non Operating MIL HDBK 217E Nonoperating Prediction Using MIL HDBK 217E RAM Commander supports a modified version of the computation methodology defined in MIL HDBK 217E Notice 1 draft The modification is that for Item types not listed in 217E RAM Commander uses data from RADC TR 85 91 Calculations using this method produce a storage nonoperating failure rate and a cycling failure rate Cycling reliability for a component is computed as a function of storage nonoperating reliability using the following formula A KUA cycling storage where K is a multiplier The table below presents default values for K for the following Item types Item type K 7 Item types not appearing in this table have a default K value of 0 You may change default values on the reliabi
549. sembly with a large number of small and insignificant components The Failure Rate of the functional block is equal to a total FR of all components included into the block 18 7 1 To create functional blocks 1 Select an assembly SM Receiver 2 CNO1 016 1 CKA 2 Right click on the assembly and choose Edit from the pop up menu 3 From the Item Data dialog box choose to the FMECA tab The Functional Blocks table is displayed Item Data E General Logistics Operating Nonoperating Maintainability D erating Miscellaneous Functional Blacks Component E Elisa UAT URZ UW 114 U2 U5 U3 LE Cancel Appl Help 4 Right click on the table header and choose the Add functional block option from the pop up menu 5 In the Item Function dialog box enter a name and a description of the function 2014 ALD Software Ltd a50 RAM Commander User Manual 6 Click OK Item Function e x Function name Receive Cancel Description 7 Repeat steps 3 5 to enter all the required functional blocks 8 To group components by functional blocks click on the corresponding check boxes which are the intersection of the specific component and functional block FB Component AAR N Receive Transmit Signal 212 3 5 LAI URZ 117 U4 Uz U5 U3 LO ls Lk kK le e 00000088 al E GG E A Each component may be attached to more than one functional block Failure rates of all c
550. sers a Enable folder sharing APP Properties _ x General sharing Security web Sharing Customize ou can share this folder with other users on pour network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder Do not share this folder Share this folder a o aaa Share name APP Comment User lirit Maximum allowed b Give Full Control permissions to all RAM Commander users 2014 ALD Software Ltd 44 RAM Commander User Manual Permissions for APP x Share Permissions Group or user names ti Ewerpone Add Remove Allow Permissions for Everyone Deny Full Control im Change O Read se 17 Now that you have installed RAM Commander on the server the next steps are to install RAM Commander on workstations and install configure software license Note You cannot run RAM Commander on the server 3 3 3 2 Workstation Installation Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander Make sure RAM Commander users have full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder 1 Log in into the workstation PC with administrative privileges 2 Map RAM Commander Network server s shared folder C APP for example where RAM Commander server components are installed on the network drive All workstations should use the sam
551. sible analysis types you use Reliability Maintainability RBD FTA etc Each local or network drive may contain one list of multiple RAM Commander projects 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 121 fe List of Projects on Drive Description Owner Ownergrmup LockedBy Date Project group R mMC_PAJ_OWERY ALD 2010 03 01 518 AJACRAFT Safety Assessment Process Example SVETA ALD 2010 06 01 Tutorial SAFETY NEW gwelon to gwernu iol qweru iofwern iolwenm ALD 2010 06 17 TANK_S4MPLE MOTI 2010 03 01 Tutorial TUTORIAL Communication System ALD 2010 06 28 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL_DISPREL Dispatch Reliability testing and demo ALD 2010 05 24 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL _MMEL Sample project with MMEL analysis SVETA 2010 06 23 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL M5G3 Sample project with MSGS analysis example ALD 2010 06 01 Tutorial TUTORIAL NOKIA ALD 2010 06 22 TUTORIAL VALE ALD 2010 06 14 TUTORIAL VALVES RAFI 2010 06 01 To open a RAM Commander project list 1 From the Drive menu choose Open E RAM Commander tor vWwindows Library Administration views Open Welcome screen Exit 2 The Open Drive dialog box opens Open Drive Ea D Local EE Local Cancel E Network SM Network O Network A Network 3 The Open Drive dialog box displays a list of the drives to which your computer has access both local and network drives 4 Select the drive where your projects are or will be located 9
552. simultaneously and concurrently by multiple RAM Commander users Network License file should be placed on the computer which is always connected to the network and available to all other RAM Commander user computers ALD License Manager software Windows Service should be installed and running on this computer Before the installation select a computer to act as the license server The License server does not need to be the application server any other server or workstation will do The only requirement is that this PC must be switched on whenever someone is using RAM Commander License server and RAM Commander network server could reside on the same PC Notes a Only an authorized network administrator should perform this installation procedure b License Manager installation requires administrative privileges c If you install License Manager on a Virtual Machine set MAC address to Static not Dynamic before LM installation 2014 ALD Software Ltd ee RAM Commander User Manual Microsoft Virtual Server 2005 R2 Navigation kl Network Adapter Properties Master Status Specify the virtual network for each virtual network adapter you want to connect Each virtual ma virtual Server Manager gt Virtual network adapter 1 Remove Virtual Machines lei Connected to External Network Broadcom BCM5 70 Create Ethernet MAC address Dynamic Add Configure Virtual Disks la Add Network Adapter gt gt The li
553. sing the Report Generator Create customized report of required format with needed product tree and FMECA fields Then you may generate the report and use Publish in MS Excel option of the report viewer to export the report to MS Excel Functional Blocks Import In addition to exporting and importing the FMECA data there is also an option to import the functional blocks of a specific single assembly together with mapping of components by functional blocks The file should have the following structure u Switching B Scrambling Scrambling ocrambling ltemRetDes 7 Lg 1170 173 L0 4 L5 6 al z Lio Wie 173 It should have a worksheet called FB with two columns ItemFBRefDes with function name and ItemRefDes with component reference designator All the referenced components should be present under the selected assembly and assembly should not have underlying functions with names which are present in the Excel file To import this file 1 Select the desired assembly 2014 ALD Software Ltd FMECA 457 2 Prepare the Excel file 3 Remove the existing functions of the assembly 4 Use the the Tools gt Import functional blocks option to import the file Then you will be able to open the assembly and see the functional blocks with their relationships with components Component an Receive Transmit Sigrial C1 2 C35 LA UR 117 U4 Ue LIS U3 LD1 ls Lk le le le ke 00000088 al O O 18 10
554. sis 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 Select FMECA as current analysis 3 Navigate to desired candidate item in the product tree 4 Activate pop up menu and select MMEL option the MMEL dialog box opens O 2014 ALD Software Ltd MMEL ATA Number 36 11 01 Standard Ref Des HIGH PRESSURE WALWE L Statue Five Column Period for 4 Installed Required Oty Oty 1 Rect Perad Remarks 2 i0 Switch the affected air conditioning pack off Masimum flight altitude 25000 ft 7600 mi Refer to AFM for additional limitations Avoid icing conditions Secure falled valve in closed position May be inoperative provided 1 APU works normally AND 2 LOY works normally AND 3 Ram air ventilation works normally Failure Details H 1 O amp M Next Worst Failure rid Failure Condition Loss of bleed air supply to engine starter Failure Mode External bleed air leakage ves PASOV EL Set Worst Failure Reset The dialog include following fields JAA Candidate Cancel Calculation Reports Five Column Detailed Print Code Print Hame 2014 ALD Software Ltd a rta Po Five Column Table D 120 days or TBD Po Failure Details Table Failure Condition Failure Condition connected to current Failure Mode Next Worst Code of the Basic Event selected as Next Worst Failure Failure Second Worst Code of the Basic Event selected as Seco
555. sive Entry Report for Project TUTORIAL Drive C Method MIL 217F 2 P stress ELECTRONIC IC Analog A E Application Fof Active SS 21 2 Meta Power Fe 26LS32 Linear 88 DIF Nonh ELECTRONIC IC Digital FiRef des Techn Type i pee Package EEL Gual Les Power elements production j ja dissipat F4HCO4 CMOS GATEILOGIC SMT Custom 40 0 ARRAYS Nonh BLA 74451035 TIL GATEILOGIC ARRAYS US F4L 123 BIC e PI 16 SmMT ojos zeo mos _ icraPracessoq Je ELECTRONIC Resistor BURA RR P O e uR RR E o bh bE 7 3 5 5 Copy between fields Use this option to copy values from one field to another for the entire product tree or for some branch in the product tree or for some items within the defined condition For example you may copy values from Reference Designator to Generic Name field To use this option 1 Activate the Product tree view containing the items you want to change 2 From the Tree menu choose Global Change 3 In the Global Change dialog box do one of the following e To make changes to items that satisfy the selection criteria select the Use Condition check box e To make changes to all product tree items down from the current item do not select the Use Condition check box 4 Select one of the following options from the Apply to list e Current level one level down from the item selected e All sub tree all levels down from the item selected 9 Select one of the following opti
556. sment severity and information about these events and failure conditions AA Word template PA A template templates Reports view could be customized colors fonts column sizes See RAM Commander Fundamentals Chapter Reports for more information Almost all reports in the Safety Module take only the currently selected functional tree item or branch into consideration For example if specific branch is selected before executing the report then only this branch will appear in the report Several reports in Safety module are generated directly to MS Word as final documents using customizable MS Word templates See RAM Commander Fundamentals Chapter Reports by MS Word template for more information To get a simple report 1 Select required functional tree element function tree branch or tree root 2 Open Reports group of the main menu 24 RAM Commander for Windows Functional Tree for Project 19_AlIRCRAFT on Drive Calculation Library Toole ies Window Help HAR Functional Tree Diagram Functional Breakdown Mame Functional Hazard Assessment FHA 318 AIRCRAFT System Safety Assessment 55A GP Control Thrust BP Control Flight Path Cl Determine Orientation Cl Determine Position ard gt _ __ _ __ GP Control Aircraft onthe E Safety Reports by MS Word Template Determine air grour SHA Reports by MS Word Template eal Decelerate arca gt imple page 178 Sto
557. specify the Next Higher Effect s and it s conditional probability Beta The NHE IDN field points to specific item in the product tree which is affected by the Failure Mode By default an FM affects the direct parent assembly which is why the parent assembly ID will appear in the NHE IDN column The NHE Description field should describe the effect of the Failure Mode on the affected assembly IDN See more about specifying Next Higher Effects in the Entering NHE paragraph later in this chapter 7 Specify the End Effect s and it s conditional probability Beta a Press the button right to the End Effect field in the desired row The popup window with list of all End Effects in the library will appear choose the desired End Effect and double click it or b right click the EE Description field and choose EE List to pick the description from the FMECA library or c right click the EE Description field and choose Add to EE List to add a new End Effect which is not located in the library New EE dialog will appear provide EE description and severity level and press Ok The severity rank of the EE is displayed Note that the Severity of each specific End Effect is defined in the library and is always the same no matter what is the reason of this End Effect FM NHE To enter more than one End Effect for a single NHE enter the first EE as described above then right click the first EE choose Add EE from the popup menu N
558. ss 90 Licensmog and PIUIGS as 92 Access tO Da I O 94 O E 100 General ProDIe M S oan er E E E E 101 12 SUMMaATY lol a 101 Part 4 RAM Commander Concepts 103 1 RAM Commander ProGe SS susi do idol 103 Stag 1 Project Creation da ld aat 106 Stag 2 Prod ct Tree BUIN ii cc 106 Stage 3 Reliability and Maintainability Calculations ooccccccnnnnccnccncocnccnnnononononananonononnnannncrnonnnnnnnrrnnnnns 107 Stage 4 Re lla abilhty Analysis rnici aaan aaa la n 108 Stage 5 Reliability and Availability Modeling ccccoconncnniconococcnonoconcconananonononnnananornnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnannnnrrnnnnns 109 Stage Gi Failure Analysis a aa a aaa E a Aa a aa a Eaa a ENA aa K aA aE Aa SEARA AAA aba KAA KASE 111 stage 7 Safet AN al YSIS in 113 Stage 8 Additional Analysis Types 20 a a dai 113 Stage 9 Next steps recurrent analysis cornisa 113 2 RAM Commander Data FIOW atascada aa e ea 114 RAM Commander Data Organization ooccococococccccccococcncoconocanananannnrarararnrnrarannnrarannnns 114 SUMMA odon a oe 115 Part5 RAM Commander Fundamentals 117 NAVIA COWS arica oso 117 2 TOCINA a E 118 A A O 119 Mee MNS A O 119 9 PTOS a 120 6 Product TREC VIEW acacia aacas 122 Le REDONS a A ad 126 TEX REports una daa ENVE 126 CUSTOINIZ AUOM oia a rta a 128 VIEW Stored REDONS O E V aes 129 Report Gener ator arcada DA Add 130 Reports bY MS Word Template soriana a e a O Ea e E aiai aria 133 GRADS iare Ourania a A A AN EAE E AE A E E O 137
559. ss revision may result in lower Severity and 2014 ALD Software Ltd so RAM Commander User Manual 21 2 Occurrence ratings The revised ratings are documented with the originals on the tabular FMEA form If no action is recommended the decision not to act should also be noted FMEA module initiation 1 Enter the RAM Commander Product tree view 2 On the Product tree view toolbar click Modules Click the icon corresponding to Process FMEA or Design FMEA orf From the Modules menu select Process FMEA or Design FMEA The FMEA window will appear The FMEA window consists of two parts the process design flow diagram in the upper part and the failure modes data grid in the lower part Every diagram item presents a step of a process in process FMEA or product elements in design FMEA Links between items show relations between process steps or design elements The lower part of the screen presents FMEA data for the currently selected diagram item RAM Commander allows multiple users to edit the same FMEA analysis case Only one first of the users has exclusive access to diagram itself picture elements their position colors etc but all users have a free access to FMEA data analysis table in the lower part of the screen Now you may 1 Define the basic properties of your FMEA project 2 Draw the diagram process flowchart or design schema 3 Define FMEA data failure modes their effects detection methods
560. ssists you in pinpointing the source of the computation error The log file retains the results of previous reliability computations To review the log file from the Calculation menu choose Log File Reports After the FR definition or calculation for all product tree components is done and project total calculation is performed a number of different reliability reports may be generated Tree basic structure List of all tree assemblies and components Assembly Composite All tree items by levels with FR MTBF FR contribution to assembly s FR for each item Assembly Ref Des TUTORIAL ID 1 Description Communication 3 Environment GF Temperature 20 00 C F_ R xE 6 X 64 09 MIBF h 11891 86 ao o oe fra fre 13 jenoweso Pedestal j1 11331132 Applied values Component name and all the input data used in reliability prediction O 2014 ALD Software Ltd ch Capacitance VSR CSR Processor FR data Intermediary prediction results and Pies for all components Assembly Ref Des Receiver Resistor All tree reports start processing from the item selected in the Product tree view For most of the reports you may define report depth items type tree traversal order and more Report selection Type Assembly composite Scan method w D with separation by level Sort on level by Io a Include tems Both Go under Hybrid Starting level item Depth from start tem
561. stly on economic factors the alternative with the lowest life cycle cost is preferred To incorporate life cycle costing into spare parts analysis results from the RAM Commander spares module can be exported to ALD s DLCC life cycle costing software The optimization module supports the calculation of spare parts for various maintenance concepts One example is stocking whole units such as entire computers versus stocking modules printed circuit boards This approach facilitates Level of Replace Analysis Summary In this chapter you learned how to define operation scenarios to calculate quantities of spare parts You also learned about RAM Commander s capability to optimize spare parts stocks in the face of budget constraints Using the results of these analyses you can determine the stock levels required to support a desired No Shortage Probability or availability 2014 ALD Software Ltd Chapter Markov Analysis a RAM Commander User Manual 17 Markov Analysis The Markov chain analysis technique and its mathematical model have been demonstrated over years to be a powerful tool to analyze the evolution performance and reliability of physical systems a RAM Commander for Windows Markov Diagram Two_engines_two_controllers for Project 518_AIRCRAFT on Drive C all rf Diagram tem Calculation Reports Library Tools Wiew Window Help gt amp E X el ls WP o SAE ARP 4761 Page 131 Markov Analysis Mar
562. sults are stored in the database so that you may get the same results again without recalculation using View MCS option from the Calculation menu However if the changes were applied to the tree new gates events changed probabilities times failure rates etc you have to run the tree calculation again Press Close to close the results dialog and return to the FTA diagram screen After the calculation is performed you may do also Importance amp Sensitivty analysis use Unavailability curve print calculation results for all phases and use other available FTA Reports NOTES e The tree recalculation process should be started again manually as explained above to get correct results if the tree was changed if the basic events parameters were changed the tree structure was changed or the tree time was changed e lfthe current tree consists of sub trees these sub trees are recalculated too e If the Q t calculation is performed and tree contains sub trees the tree time for sub trees O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 19 4 2 1 19 4 2 2 Fault Tree Analysis 487 calculation is taken from the current tree Tree Unavailability calculation Basic method for Fault Tree unavailability calculation is Minimal Cut Sets generation and then unavailability calculation using Esary Proschan formula Two main types of tree result can be calculated e Mean Unavailability Q long term steady state average unavailability or e Unavailability
563. sults quantitative analysis results for each element should be manually compared to the safety requirements maximal allowed failure probability per each severity classification and expert takes a decision about element inclusion into MMEL If the decision is positive the element should be selected as Candidate and the 2nd analysis step 5 column report should be performed MMEL Module Quantitative Analysis Algorithm MMEL Module Quantitative Analysis Algorithm In order to cover all MMEL generation requirements RAM Commander MMEL module implements two algorithms 1 Algorithm based on JAA MMEL development guidelines 2014 ALD Software Ltd MMEL System under analysis Candidate MMEL item For each Failure Mode of Candidate bIMEL iterm s part of the 554 development process all failure conditions FC classified as hazardous or catastrophic should be highlighted Corresponding fault trees are developed ta demonstrate that Catastrophic failure conditions are no more frequent than Extremely Improbable lt 10 9 per FH Hazardous failure conditions are no more frequent than Extremely Remote lt 10 7 per FH If the candidate MMEL item is part of the fault trees of CAT or H Z FC tts failure probability shall be assumed as 1 and the applicant shall produce evidence that No catastrophic single failure can exist and An acceptable level of safety is maintained Acceptable level of safety is maintained after nex
564. t critical failure Relevant item is not The item is considered as MMEL candidate MMEL candidate and repair Interval category Is 2 Algorithm implementing RRJ 95 75 guidelines Decision making algorithm for inclusion of assemblies equipment in MMEL 2014 ALD Software Ltd 562 RAM Commander User Manual Relevant system Relevant inoperative item of the system assembly function indication No Relevant inoperative item failure information Yes All following conditions are met 1 This failure does not lead to increase of existing probabilities more than allowable for Catastrophic Hazardous Major Minor events OR Performing 0 and M procedures leads to total neutralization of this failure effect or to compliance of allawable probabilities AMD In case of this failure occurrence there is no single failure as further failure in flight that can lead to Catastrophic or Hazardous events AMD Component malfunction does not lead to Incampliance with other requirements of Certification 1st failure in flight does not lead to increase of existing probabilities more than allowable for Catastrophic Hazardous Major events Yes 2nd failure in flight does not lead to increase of existing probabilities more than allowable for Catastrophic and Hazardous events Yes Pelevant item is not The item is considered as MMEL candidate MMEL candidate and repair Interval category ls assigned
565. t Compartment Lett 211 Not Defined Not Defined O Fight Compartment Right 212 Not Defined Not Defined Upper Half of Fuselage Forward Vestibule 220 Not Defined Not Defined es Half of Fuselage Passenger Cabin 3 Mot Delmed Hot Defined Upper Half of Fuselage Aft Vestibule 240 Not Defined Hot Defined a Empennage and Fuselage Tail 300 Met Defined Not Defined BD Powe Plants and Pylons 400 Not Defined Not Defined Bett Powerplant 410 Not Defined Not Defined Left Powerplant Engine 411 Mot Defined Not Defined ar Powerplant Inlet 412 Not Defined Hot Defined Left Powerplant Fan Cowls 413 Not Defined Not Defined a Powerplant Thrust Reverser Cowles 414 Mot Defined Not Defined O Let Powerplant Mixed Flow Nozzle 415 Not Defined Not Defined Right Powerplant 420 Not Defined Not Defined Left Pylon 430 Mot Delmed Hot Defined Right Pylon 440 Mot Defined Not Defined Left wing 500 Not Deheved Not Defined Right Wing 600 Not Defined Not Defined 5 Landing Gear and Landing Gear Doors il Not Defined Hot Defined BP Pressunzed Hatches and Doors 200 Mot Defined Not Defined DP Pressurized Doors of Service Compartments 810 Not Defined Not Defined Cargo Compartment Doors 820 Not Defined Mot Defined Left Passenger Compartment Doors 2830 Not Defined Not Defined all Right Passenger Comparment Doors 240 Mot Delred Not Defined Detailed guide on this module is available on demand from ALD 24 4 L HIRF Analysis Lightning High Intensity Radiated Fie
566. t box select one of the following e Max Time and enter the time after which the tail of function R t is cut off e Epsilon and enter the cutoff value for the function R t where delta becomes less than epsilon R Tn R tn 1 lt epsilon e Mission time 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 365 to calculate MTBCF for a non continuous mission and enter the mission time MTBCEF in this T Rtt MTECF _ 1 R T a case is calculated by formula 0 where To is Mission Time 4 In the Step field enter the integration step Start with 10 of the Max Time and then reduce it after each calculation to the point where MTBCF shows no significant change Larger Max Time smaller epsilon and smaller integration steps lead to better results yet longer computation times 9 Choose Calculate RAM Commander displays the MTBCF and R t graph MTBEF for RBO STANDARD Max Time 1e 006 Step 1000 MTBCF 134101 44 MTBCF 13413 Report Print Export graph 1 Lon AA O0 Q s 101530273037 40 45 5055 60 697077 305 50 5 100 1004 Close 6 Choose Print to print out the graph generated choose Export to save graph as Windows Metafile You may open it from the MS Word later 7 Repeat steps 3 5 to review different graphs for different field settings The general rule is to start with the Max time which is about 10 times of the expected MTBF and the Step 100 times les
567. t by dragging and dropping a tree element into the RBD element To update the RBD choose Update RAM information from the RBD menu Export to MEADEP RAM Commander supports export to MEADEP Markov Chains software by SoHaR In RBD diagram you can now create export files compatible with MEADEP software and export RBD diagrams and corresponding calculations results to MEADEP To export data 1 Activate the RBD window 2 Choose Export to MEADEP from the RBD menu 3 Choose file name for exported data the new file with corresponding name is created You may now use it with your MEADEP software Export to MS Word Excel etc You can export an RBD diagram to Windows standard format Windows enhanced metafile a file name with an emf extension which is recognized by such Windows and MS Office applications as Word Excel etc O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Block Diagrams 353 1 From the RBD menu choose Export to metafile The Save As dialog box opens 2 Enter a new file name select a folder and click the Save button 3 In the receiving MS Office application from the Insert menu choose Insert Picture or Insert from file option to import the saved metafile diagram into your file Tip We recommend folding long RBD diagrams see above before exporting them 13 2 9 8 Global Changes 1 From the RBD menu choose Global change The Global Change dialog box opens Global Change x sa Type Cancel App
568. t quantities so that a maximum NSP or availability is achieved In addition to the parameters discussed in the previous section spare parts optimization requires the following information e Optimization criteria e Constraints O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 396 RAM Commander User Manual 16 4 1 16 4 2 Optimization CriteriaThe spare parts module supports the computation of two optimization criteria The spare parts module supports the computation of two optimization criteria e Total No Shortage Probability applicable for unsupported missions e Availability applicable for regular operation and unsupported missions During computation the module maximizes the selected criterion subject to a cost constraint described below Constraint The cost for each spare part is computed as follows Cost k1 O price k2 U weight k3 O volume k4 This approach makes it possible to solve spare parts optimization problems for a variety of mission applications When the only consideration is the actual price of the spare part and weight and volume have no cost impact then the cost coefficients are defined as follows k1 1 k2 k3 k4 0 These are the module s default settings lf the primary restriction is weight such as for fly away kits then the coefficients would be k1 0 k2 1 k3 k4 0 In early stages of analysis when pricing data are not available rough calculations can be obtaine
569. ta TOMO ico ci 433 Entering Next Higher Elie Cts cunda ira AA 435 Toden a S ng leNHE ciganan e EE in 436 To Select affected ASS CMM ieii recisi aE er a e a aa e a aitaa i e eE ved 437 To define multiple NHEs for a single FM ococccococncnnccccccconcnnnnnoconanocnnnnononnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnononannrnnnnononananos 437 Todenne NHE TOLNA E peie Aa iio tio 438 Additional operations in FMECA grid occcccononcnoninccccncccnncononnnnnannrononnnnnnnnrrronnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnrrrrnrnnnnnnrrrrrnnanans 440 FM Column Pop Up Menu OptONS iicrcicscinirnc citen 441 Alpha Call Pop up Menu OPINAS A 442 NEE Column Pop Up MENU OPONS s aser an ine ii 443 End Effect Column Pop Up Menu Options occcccccocccnccconccnccconcnncoconcnnnononnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnonnnnnennnnonnnnss 443 6 Testability Analysis Module TAM 0 oooococccccnccncococococococanononcncoranorannrannnnnrarararanaranananenes 444 To GeTine tests tor EM ceseieccnceescecadeiatcteuuecciaada vous a a a aa 444 Testability Analys iS Reports diia 446 TFUNCUONal BlIOCKS unica lil Aa a 448 To create functional DOCKS E a a eaa a Ea aa a ra E aa aii 449 Working with Functional Blocks ccoooonccccononicocononococoncnncononnnnrononnnnronnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrrrnnnnrenenaanes 451 8 FMECA RE DOMS a a a a 451 To Generate an FMECA Report aroen naana a 453 9 IMHO EXPO ri rain e ee etc ea 453 FUNCIONAL Blocks Import rria a a a aa a a 456 10 SUMM aY E sseeeseseacecet
570. ta factor is what fraction of the potential Failures would represent a common cause threat CCF Group probability then is mas basic event probability in the group Beta Evert List Description o Power Supply add Power Supply PS Power Supply Delete Define group code unique name description and Beta Factor e Use Add and Delete buttons to link basic events from basic events library to the group e Press Ok button to save your changes Repeat the procedure to add more CCF Groups You may also edit and delete groups Basic Event data dialog has CCF Group field with Select and Clear button next to it use these buttons to add remove specific basic event to CCF Group from basic events data dialog 19 3 13 Gobal Change Global change Special functions option allows to perform a number of predefined specific operations which may affect all fault trees all gates or basic events Global change Special functions dialog is divided to a number of blocks each one performs some Specific operation Copy event gate name to description FTA Global Change Special Functions Copy Name to Description events gates This option goes through the list of all basic events and all fault tree gates and copies information form the Name field to the Description field Contents of description field are overwritten by the contents of the Name field If you choose the Only if description is empty checkbox the existing des
571. te Table m6 0 Fe gt ere er et oo ee a ld o e eee ee oe 275 Copying GPRD Library between Projects ccccoonncncccccccnccconococononananononnnonannncronnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnannnrrrrrrnananarennnnas 277 REPOS serri A A pae R a Ea a a R 277 6 Calculation Defaults sssrin A a a 278 E Managing LIDO S ssis a A A A E uw ioies 282 Copy libraries between Projects ii 282 Global Library Files Locations 283 Back Up and Restore of Global Libraries cccccconnncnncccccccncnancconononananonononnnnnnncrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnrrrnananannns 283 Part 10 Reliability Analysis 286 1 Temperature CUE Cgc ss cda 286 2 A auadenaoumenaesomdctiund ENEE E E a E EE 287 3 Mission Profile a a aa a eae 289 Defining a MISSION Profile ai io ranar Ta 290 Toadd a MISSION PROMO costosa deee na olsen Ea EE r aa AAEE ENERE AAE E ArNe EROSA 291 To add a mission prole Phase sia E A O AA 291 To delete a mission profile Phase tdi caiddn 292 TO CODY a MS SION Pro RIC dt a has Aen a ueerdee pew daatel Sea co asec eee a 293 TO delete a mission profile ios 1chacct tussiosuoi reido doe circa eiii leas nacidas 293 Mission Profile Calculation os ica 293 A E O E 295 4 DUMAS e de 295 Part 11 Maintainability Prediction 297 1 Philosophy and Assumptions instan bso 297 FTG EI dd E AAA A a a aE aA A 298 2 Maintainability Prediction Modeling ooococcccococcconcococanconacancoracancarananrararanrararannarananes 298 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 8 RAM Commander User Manual M
572. te specific gate in the event tree select the gate right click on it choose Delete from the popup menu The gate and all its outcomes will be deleted To delete specific sequence in the event tree without deleting the gate select the gate right click on it choose Clear sequence from the popup menu The gate will not be deleted but all its outcomes will be deleted To delete the whole event you should first remove all gates from it Then click on the event rectangle right click on it choose Delete from the popup menu The event will be deleted Export Diagram as Picture You can insert the ETA tree as a picture to another application Word Excel PowerPoint etc Choose Export to Clipboard from the ETA menu The diagram will be placed in the Clipboard Enter another application choose where to paste the diagram and press Ctrl V or choose Paste from the Edit menu The diagram picture will be copied Print preview Print Zoom From the ETA menu you can also view print preview Print the tree Zoom it on the screen For the best printing we recommend to perform Fit to printer operation before the printing then print the diagram and then after printing return the diagram to the normal size by Zoom 100 option Analysis 4 Calculation To calculate the tree select Recalculate sequences from the calculation menu Updated probability values will be displayed on the Outcomes Reports The ET
573. te with the server by TCP IP through port 475 TCP IP Broadcast enabled Note In case of segmented network some additional configuration of HASP License Manager is required Newer and more reliable licensing method is recommended instead of this method Network Floating License file see later in this table Local License file placed on PC where RAM Commander is installed It grants access to Computer RAM Commander to this PC user only and can t be exchanged between Locked computers License file Network License file placed on PC License Server with ALD license manager installed Floating License Server PC is constantly available through the network to all RAM License file Commander client PCs License file contains purchased number of licenses which may be used simultaneously and concurrently by multiple RAM Commander users Requires installation of ALD License Manager Windows service License Server may be installed on the same computer where RAM Commander Server is 2014 ALD Software Ltd installed Requirements on the license server Windows XP 7 2003 2008 8 2012 May be both Real or Virtual PC Possibility to grant full access permissions and sharing to a folder accessible by all users All four licensing models may be used no matter which RAM Commander installation configuration is selected e g license files for each PC may be used with RAM Commander network configuration or Network plug may be used with
574. ted immediately q exp Atu t A A p A u 1 exp A p t r 1 Q t o M 1 Q t O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Unrepairable 1 1 q exp 1t if A lt 1e 15 simplified formula P M is used For Formula see Table 3 For Formula see Table 2 Latent event linked to periodically with Fault Tree Analysis 483 Frequency Basic Event Input uncondition Parameters Description Unavailability Q Test interval Ti known FR MTTR Time to first test ange Tf FR A a known FR and ProgaoMy a inspection time Test interval Ti Element is not repairable during the mission Average Average probability hour probability of q event during average mission flight hour Linked element is unrepairable FR A Extends the Algorithm with Algorithm Algorithm Probability q Periodical different formulas with different with different yq tests model for different formulas for formulas for suits wider cases different different range of cases cases cases Recommended Time to first test Periodical Tf Table 1 Basic Events Calculation Unavailability Condition Q t t Tf nfi 1 1 q exp ATi Tf nTi lt t lt Tf nTi 1 1 q exp ATi 1 q exp aTi 1 1 q exp 2 t1 MTTR t1 time since the last test Tf nTi MTIR lt t lt 1 1 q exp 1 t1 Tf nti Ti t1 time since the last test Table 2 Unava
575. tenance Levels Setup Level 1 Airport Level 2 Local repair shop Level 3 Regional repair shop Level 4 Supplier Level 5 Manufacturer a Cancel 9 Change them as you wish and click OK The level names appear in Maintainability Data Tab of Item Edit dialog box as well as in other related dialogs and reports like Maintainability reports and Spare Parts Calculation Analysis 11 3 2 Set Mct max Calculation Method RAM Commander implements the advanced approach to the Mctmax calculation in the maintainability module 1 Open the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Configuration The Project Configuration dialog box opens 3 Select the Mctmax calculation method from the combo list 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 305 Project Configuration Current Analysis O Operating MNonoperating A Maintainabilit ReparHeplace Levels l pa Mict mas Calculation based on MIL HDBK 472 Lognormal distribution MIL HDBE 4 72 Logrormal distribution 1 Weighted Lognormal distribution Normal distribution Em pirical distribution 4 Choose OK The MIL HDBK 472 applies the lognormal distribution to the repair times in the standard deviation calculation not taking in the account the item s failure rates As many users have noticed however the results were sometimes paradoxical That s why RAM Commander allows the user to perform Mct max calculation based on va
576. tenance significant items effects will appear ES MSG 3 Step 4 Failure Effect Categorization ATA Number Mem Function Functional failure Failure Effect FEC FEC Name Fuel Storage Syst Fuel storage Fails to store fuel Fuel leakage Evident Operational Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Fails to interconnect left and right fuel t Inability to balance fuel load 6 Evident Operational 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Loss of redundant interconnect betwee Fuel tranfer is slower from one side to th 6 Evident Operational 28 10 00 Fuel Storage Syst Allow interconecti Fails to indicate interconnect valves in t Crew unaware of interconnect valve fu 6 Evident Operational l 4a Determine Failure Effect Category FEC db Provide remarks and explanations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 4 For each failure effect in the list perform the following steps MSG 3 977 a Press Determine Failure Effect Category button or double click on the effect b Decision diagram will appear Click the appropriate answer in the lower part of the diagram MSG 3 Failure Effect Categorization Fuel Storage System Fuel storage FAILURE EFFECT CATEGORIZATION Question 1 ls the occurrence of a Functional Failure evident to the operating crew during the performance of their normal duties Question 2 Does the Functional Failure or secondary damage resulting from the Functional
577. ter Lower font Print remarks es 3 In the Edit RBD Configuration dialog box define the following fields RBD Title Title of the RBD diagram RBD Mission time Mission time used in calculation Display on upper line Data item displayed in the upper section of each element Upper font Select upper font attributes Display on lower line Data item displayed in the lower section of each element Lower font Select lower font attributes Grid Toggles grid Another way to toggle 2014 ALD Software Ltd a RAM Commander User Manual 13 2 3 13 2 4 the RBD grid is to choose Grid from the View menu Print remarks Toggles remark printing 4 Choose OK RAM Commander redisplays the RBD using the new settings To add an element to an RBD 1 Right Click on an insertion node 2 From the popup menu choose a required RBD element see element descriptions in RBD Basics paragraph aa Add Regular Add k out of M Add SUbRED Add Parallel section Add Parallel Branch Edit Alt Enter Delete Del Split K out af M 3 New element or elements will appear E 4 Enter new RBD element data by double clicking the element to open its data dialog or Drag and Drop related item from the Product Tree window see next paragraph for more information To enter data for an RBD element Do one of the following e From the Item menu choose Edit In the Element Parameters Definition dialog box
578. the Project Configuration dialog box select Maintainability as the current processor and choose OK or Select the Maintainability button in the Product tree view button bar 4 RAM Commander product tree view item data dialog reports list and other menus and windows will change their appearance to accommodate maintainability mode Now you may set some initial configuration parameters and libraries in order to start the analysis 1 Set up customize organizational level names 2 Set Mct max calculation method 3 Set up Maintainability libraries e Standard Tasks Library e Standard Times Librariy e Skills Equipment Materials libraries Then you may proceed to the Maintainability Analysis 11 3 1 Customize Organizational Levels You may also set up maintenance levels level of replace repair names 1 Activate the Project tree view 2 Choose the Project Configuration from the Project menu the Project Configuration dialog box is displayed O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Project Configuration Current Analysis O Operating A Nonoperating 2 Maintairiability RepairlReplace Levels bict mas Calculation based or MIL HOBE 4 2 Lognormal distribution Derating FMEA Phase Operation 3 Click Maintainability radio button to choose the type of Current Analysis se T Pa a LH H 4 Click the Repair Replace Levels button the dialog box with maintenance levels is displayed Main
579. the events in your database will get codes like BE1 BE2 etc Set up the template and press the Change button Change gate codes Change Gate Codes Patter lt Aootlode gt lt Sequentialll gt Use lt Sequentiald lt Hierarchicall gt lt I gt lt Aootlode gt Tree ames TreelD gt lt TreeSequentiallD gt in pattern Change Similar to previous option but lets you change the codes of all gates in all your fault trees You also need to specify the template which in this case may contain multiple different placeholders to compose the code lt RootCode gt is replaced with the code of a root gate of your tree lt SequentiallD gt is replaced by number by order of your gate in tree like 1 2 3 4 etc lt HierarchicallD gt is replaced by hierarchical ID of your gate in tree for root it is 1 for root s first child it is 1 1 for root s second child it is 1 2 for the third child of root s second child it is 1 2 3 etc lt ID gt is internal system ID for the gate lt TreeName gt is the name of the fault tree lt TreelD gt is internal unique Id of the fault tree lt TreeSequentiallD gt is number by order of the fault tree in the list of fault trees You may see an example of a fault tree after this function execution using the template lt RootCode gt lt HierarchicallD gt O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 477 COMM GF Communication system general failure Qt 1 258 006 Qh 1 25e 00 COM
580. the following license agreement carefully Fress the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Product License Agreement Rev 01 90 2001 1 0 GENERAL GRANT OF LICENSE Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement 4 L 0 hereby grants to Licensee a nonexclusive license to use Favow eb Product solely for Licensee s internal business purposes the enclosed software program s including any Ink time and runtime modules any hardware key that may be furnished user documentation andor documentation oil Do you accept all the termes of the preceding License Agreement IF you choose No the setup will close To install RAM Commander tor Windows you must accept this agreement No 6 In the Setup Type Selection box choose Workstation Network Installation 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Selection Pleaze select a setup type 1 Single User Installation Description 2 Server Network Installation Use this option to install RAM 3 Workstation Network Installation Commander on a computer connected to a network on which R th Commander i already installed lt Back Cancel 7 When prompted for the Full path to RAM Commander in Network specify the RAM Commander location on the server folder which is mapped as network drive If RAM Commander in installed on the server s C drive to folder C APP RAMC32 and server s C APP folder is map
581. the new template description 6 Press Ok 7 Template will appear in templates list and may be used for report generation 8 Select it and press the Select button to initiate the report generation 5 7 4 Graphs RAM Commander provides a convenient graphics package that offers a wide variety of graph types The report may be viewed using 2D and 3D bar pie line graphs in a variety of customizations Different RAM Commander modules provide different graphs like Pareto in Reliability prediction or Unavailability curve in FTA module See particular module chapter for more information 2014 ALD Software Ltd 5 8 all Graph Generator for RAM Commander version 3 0 Baag 3 E Capacitor M Antenna BA Switch i 1C Digital M Motor Other Once the graph is displayed in the Graph View dialog box its appearance may be changed press the Setup button and make required selections on the graphs setup dialog To print the graph press the Print button on the Graph View dialog box Export the graph as image using the Save button Choose Clipboard button to place the graph image to the clipboard Then you may switch to another application like MS Word and paste the graph to your document Press the Close button to return back to RAM Commander main window You may also zoom in out the graph using mouse wheel and rotate the graph using mouse pointer and left button to achieve the desired presentation of the
582. the product tree structure reliability maintainability and FMECA data of product tree elements It does not provide information on FTA RBD and other modules To add a tree data report using the Report Generator 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Reports menu choose Report Generator the Report Definition dialog box opens 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 131 Report Generator Report 2 Scan method D by tree oe Depth 9 SSS Include items ltemst ssp C Project Drive C Current Date Project name Report Definition Column Name Sort Order Depth Depth ltem family Family ltem code ltem code Ref designator Ref des Fart name Fart name Generic name Generic name Quantity QTY Rel Prediction method Rel pred method Add Delete Edit Move Up Move Down 3 In the Report Definition selection box at the top of the Report Generator dialog box choose Add and enter a new report name 4 In the lower Field box choose Add the Add Edit Field dialog box opens Add Edit Field Group Tree General Field Mame Generic name Cancel Width 2 2 0 Column Mame Generic namel Sort Order Ho Formula Edit formula 5 In the Add Edit Field dialog box select a screen name to which the field belongs from the Group list box General Operating Non operating Maintainability ILS Miscellaneous FMECA 6 In the Field na
583. the removal procedure and run the newer version installation package again Removal procedure will not remove your data just the older software modules 6 Choose Server installation type InstallShield Wizard E E l Setup Type Selection Pleaze select a setup type Description Use this option to install RAM Commander on a network server 1 Single User Installation 2 server Network Installation 3 Workstation Network Installation Installshield lt Back Cancel 7 Choose folder where the previous version server components where installed O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 78 RAM Commander User Manual InstallShield Wizard ee x RAM Commander for Windows Setup The setup program will copy ASK Commander files into the following directory A new program group will also be added to the Program Manager Destination Folder CAAPPARAMC32 InstallShield Cancel 8 Proceed with the rest of the setup process Il Workstations Upgrade 1 Log in into the workstation PC with administrative privileges 2 Run installation package of the newer RAM Commander version 3 If it displays dialog offering to Modify Repair Remove the previous version choose Remove proceed with the removal procedure and run the newer version installation package again Removal procedure will not remove your data just the older software modules 4 Choose Workstation installation type 2014 ALD Software Ltd
584. ther in all trees Scan all trees replace all inclusions of event with code to event with code Change First field should contain the code of the event you wish to be removed like A in example above second field should contain the code of the event you wish to be inserted like B in the example above Then press Change button Note This Global change option should be used by advanced users only and with caution Changes may affect all the events gates fault trees and are not undoable 19 3 14 Importing Fault Trees RAM Commander supports Fault Tree import from other FTA software tools RiskSpectrum Isograph Fault Tree CAFTA and Aralia Simtree Import options may be found in the Tools menu of FTA module 19 3 14 1 Import FT from RiskSpectrum RAM Commander may import single fault trees from RiskSpectrum Import is performed from RSA file which should be prepared using RiskSpectrum software before importing in to RAM Commander To import RiskSpectrum fault tree into the RAM Commander 1 Open the desired project and database 2 Open the list of fault trees create new or open any FT 3 Choose Import from RiskSpectrum option from the Tools menu 4 Select the RSA file exported from the RiskSpectrum 9 Fault tree will be imported and you will get message about import result 19 3 14 2 Import FT from Isograph FT RAM Commander may import single fault trees from Isograph FaultTree Import is performed from Excel fi
585. ther users input FMECA or draw RBD diagrams or work with Fault Trees all inside the same project and simultaneously Some resources in a project cannot be edited simultaneously e g FTA diagrams RBD diagrams etc When a user tries to access one such resource currently occupied by another user a warning message appears For example if one user is editing specific RBD diagram another user cannot open the same diagram However he can open another RBD diagram or create a new one RAM Commander allows or restricts performing different operations with projects open change delete back up calculate according to two possible limitations permissions and other users activity Permissions The permission level is set individually for each project from one of the following options CS Only the project author may access the project Only members of the same user group as the project author may access the project A Anyone can access the project Permissions are set individually for each user group for each module operation User will not be able to open the project or perform specific operation on that project If he does not have corresponding access permissions See more information about Permissions management later in this chapter Other users activity Each project has it s owner author and its current manager 2014 ALD Software Ltd Working with Projects 145 List of Projects on Drive
586. ting state the following state data screen appears State data x Code i Mame Description State type Operational State Calculation parameters Performance Initial state FO probability Visual representation Background Foreground Font Shape lo Ellipse Picture Clear picture Alignment Center MIDDLE Border line fo Solid oneei Below is the explanation of state data fields en lae ooo state code Name Statename name State description appears as a tooltip when mouse pointer is over state node on diagram State type State type define if the state is Failure state or Operational state Performance Value describing whole system performance or capacity when the system is in the current state Performance measurement units are user defined you may define percent of maximal performance or absolute measurement like power station power produced while it is in current state Performance unit is defined on Diagram Properties screen Initial state Probability that the system is in the current state when it starts working Total prob initial probability for all states should be 1 2014 ALD Software Ltd Markov Analysis EOS Visual Possibility to select shape color border background picture and text alignment for representatio diagram element 17 2 4 Transition Data When you create a new transition or double click an existing transi
587. tion the following data screen appears Transition data 0 a te xj Code A Hame Po Description P Transttion type Custom tana Calculation parameters Transition rate transttions hour Connection with Product Tree FMECA Product Tree ID Select FR number Select Clear j Visual representation Line style lo Solid Link direction Bezier Line width f Color oa Below is the explanation of transition data fields Code Unique transition code Name Transition name Description Transition description appears as a tooltip when mouse pointer is over transition on diagram O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Transition type define if the transition is Failure usually from good to bad state Repair usually from bad back to good state or custom transition Number of transitions per hour between states connected by current transition link Possibility to select line style direction color and width Connection with Under development Product Tree FMECA 17 2 5 Diagram data To define general Markov Chain diagram properties choose Properties from Diagram menu or just double click empty blank space on the diagram The following screen appears Markov Chain properties a x Mame Test Description Author ALDI Lreated joz 13 07 Updated y Calculation settings PU jo ane Probability calculation 0 0001 precizion l Number of points ir
588. tion and analysis you should also define the envronment and temperature of product tree assemblies and components see next paragraph Environment and Temperature Definition for more information See more information about other Item data dialog pages related to the specific analysis type Operating Non operating reliability Maintainability FMECA etc in relevant chapters later in this manual 9 Press Ok product tree view and the database will be updated 2014 ALD Software Ltd 172 RAM Commander User Manual 7 3 4 1 Environment and Temperature Definition For reliability prediction and analysis you should also define the envronment and temperature of product tree assemblies and components Product environment and temperature should be defined on the top item data screen see paragraph Top item definition All underlying components and assemblies in the product tree inherit their envronment and temperature settings from higher level items if their Envronment is set to and temperature is set to Delta 0 in red Environment Protile and Temperature Set specifically for the current item Environment Temperature Parent item has envronment GF and temperature 35 this assembly has default environment and no temperature raise Delta 0 so its current conditions ar GF and 35 degrees too in green You do not need to set or change environment or temperature of items if they are the same as for their pare
589. tion ranking 2014 ALD Software Ltd Process Design FMEA 509 21 1 FMEA Basics Up front time spent in doing a comprehensive FMEA well when product process changes can be most easily and inexpensively implemented will alleviate late change crises An FMEA can reduce or eliminate the chance of implementing a corrective change which could create an even larger concern AIAG Potential Failure Mode and Effects Analysis Third Edition 2001 p 1 To compete in today s marketplace manufacturers must eliminate all severe malfunctions and possible failures from their products and manufacturing processes Failure Mode and Effects Analysis FMEA is a systematic set of activities intended to identify and help eliminate potential concern To yield the most valuable results an FMEA must be performed before a design or process failure has been unknowingly incorporated into the product Moreover modern standards and regulations require designers and manufacturers to formally prove that all potential malfunctions have been eliminated or put under control Up front time spent in doing a comprehensive FMEA at the stage when products processes changes can be easily and inexpensively implemented will obviate late change crises An FMEA can be described as a systematic group of activities intended to a recognize and evaluate the potential failure of a product process and the effects of that failure b identify actions that could eli
590. tiple nodes bring to front to back overlapping nodes etc you will find all these functions in the Item menu To edit the node data e double click on it or e select Edit on the Item menu or e press ALT ENTER or e right click the mouse and select Edit from the pop up window The FMEA item data dialog box opens Here you can define FMEA information and also can choose the diagram node background color shape and assign a bitmap picture For each diagram node the following data may be entered 2014 ALD Software Ltd 21 4 2 21 4 3 Process name or design element name Comments Description visible as a tool tip while the cursor is over the diagram node Select the shape you find most suitable for the node you wish to create from the combo list Color Choose the node s color Responsibility Department group or person responsible for the FMEA group or person responsible for the FMEA Prepared by Name phone number and company A the engineer responsible for preparing FMEA Core Team List the names of the individuals and departments with authority to identify and or perform tasks Key Date The initial FMEA due date which should not exceed scheduled production design release date FMEA Date The date the original FMEA was compiled and the latest revision date Latest revision The latest FMEA revision date Drawing a Link Bring the mouse cursor into the handle at the center of the selected node pr
591. tive affect on the calculation result for the MCS is less than the Relative cut off value the MCS is deleted The following FTA elements are used and supported in the RAM Commander software 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis NON OR gate OR gate output event occurs if any of the input events occurs AND gate AND gate output event occurs only when all the input events occurs simultaneously NAND gate NAND gate NOT AND operation NOR gate NOT OR operation 5 HE a p h E UR gate XOR gate Exclusive OR operation K out of N gate OAR K out of N gate output event occurs if K or more of the input events occurs Transter Transfer gate transfer to another tree sub tree 2014 ALD Software Ltd Basic event represents a basic equipment fault or failure that requires no further development into more basic faults or failures Latent dormant ever Latent Dormant event similar to basic events but indicates the latent failure which is discovered by periodical tests Undeveloped event represents a fault event that is not examined further because information is unavailable or because its consequence is insignificant House event House event represents a condition or an event which is TRUE ON or FALSE OFF false Priority AND gate output event occurs only when all the input events occurs in the specified order Notes e In addition NO
592. to the GPRD library To review the table activate the Product tree view and select GPRD from the Library menu In the GPRD parts list select the required Part number the Part number used in step 4 of the previous procedure choose Edit from the pop up menu and then click either Operating or Non Operating You will get a FR table for this part O 2014 ALD Software Ltd GPRD Operating Part Name SM Environment GE Use for conversion W Project F R 10e 6 Tmas 150 SOLUCE Packed Box Temperature A FE 106 41 1061 0 0 237 27 3 31 0 347 38 3 42 0 45 7 Edt 49 3 53 0 56 7 Redraw 60 3 l l Delete H 1 2 d 4 a E T A oo Copy to Eny a l _ mi Tic 64 0 n l0 20 30 40 0 0 70 20 amp 100 110 120 130 140 150 Er 713 FR or MTBF interpolationextrapolation le done according to provided FA temperature points For electronic family components or assemblies Pamily calculation ls done according to RAL 25 0 Reliability Toolkit formulas For mechanical and electro mechanical family components linear interpolation extrapolation i used a A A e D N Ajo 9 5 4 3 Import In addition to manually creating failure rate tables you can import failure rates from an external file into the project s failure rate table There are two import approaches in GPRD e Import from ASCII file e Import Wizard customizable impo
593. to the RBD diagram in a manner such that each element represents a reliability stage in the entire system The overall system fails when there is no path from the input node to the output node wth all its elements operational Insertion node K out of N element Regular item Input Output Parallel branch As you build the RBD you must consider how true it is to the real system For instance an automobile stops functioning when one of its tires fails The appropriate RBD for this situation is placing a k out of n element where k 4 and n 4 Using four parallel branches one for each tire is inappropriate since the RBD would still be functional when one of the tires fails Each RBD element block has time to failure parameters for example MTBF and may have time to repair parameters for example Mct The same block identical block with the same Ref Des value may be repeated multiple times in the diagram If Identical calculation or simulation is specified algorithm assumes that identical blocks represent the same physical system block and it is taken into account by calculation RBD diagram may contain another nested RBD diagrams Sub RBDs 2014 ALD Software Ltd 342 RAM Commander User Manual When RBD is built and time to failure repair parameters for all elements are specified RBD calculation may be performed to calculate Reliability Availability and MTBCF 13 2 Drawing the Diagram You may create unl
594. to the question bug report when contacting RAM Commander technical support Configuration informatica RAM Commander Version 8 1 R b Commander SP Version RAM Commander location ARAMEA Data Security RAM Commander configuration report file contains information solely about R Commander and system settings It does not contain any data relevant to your R b Commander projects other files settings or software other than AAt Commander The file does not contain any data about your organizational or network structure The RAM Commander configuration report file can be viewed with the help of MS Word or Notepad programs 3 Please send this file to RAM Commander support team 4 If you use client server configuration perform this operation on both client and server computers and send both files ramcconf txt to us Please send us also the precise specification of your problems error messages and screenshots Then we will be able to take care of your problem quicker without wasting time on additional questions about RAM Commander version Windows version etc Installation Problem 1 during or after the installation the error messages appears Oper lt 11 gt Microkernel error 11 The specified pre imaging filename is invalid Solution The problem is Novell Client v4 91 SP2 Novell accepts this problem and provides a fix See the article in Novell Support database for more information http www novell
595. ts or assemblies Familp calculation i done according to RAC 150 0 Reliability Toolkit formulas For mechanical and electro mechanical family components linear interpolationextrapolation i used Extrapolated failure rates are computed as follows taken from RAC s Reliability Tool Kit 2014 ALD Software Ltd 276 RAM Commander User Manual E fy AS Agel oa where A known failure rate for temperature ty A required failure rate for temperature t gt to Interpolated Failure Rates Interpolated failure rates are computed as follows Case A pa paa 47 pos5l 10 2 198L 10 Xy A 1 25 7X5 A 125 where Ay and Ay known failure rate for temperature t4 and t5 respectively t temperature for which failure rate is to be evaluated Case B log x log x log A ta Interpolation and Extrapolation for Mechanical parts Interpolation and Extrapolation for mechanical parts is linear and is performed by any 2 closest points 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults 277 GPRD Operating Part Name MOTSI78 Environment er Use for conversion Project F R 10e o Tmas 500 Source User Defined Temperature A FE 106 41 1061 0 0 5 0 Tua 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 Ed 40 0 45 0 30 0 Redraw 55 0 l i 60 0 35 70 105 140 1753 210 3453 230 315 350 33 65 0 70 0 FR or MTBF interpolation extrapolat
596. ts the file directly into the GPRD library Environment and Temperature fields without data are assigned the default values you set in step 4 9 5 4 3 2 Import Wizard Import Wizard is a convenient way to import files of different format text Access Excel into the GPRD library It allows importing both General data part number catalog number price weight etc and FR tables To use the GPRD Import Wizard 1 Activate the GPRD window 2 Choose Import Wizard from the Library menu 3 The next steps are very similar to the Product Tree Import Wizard 2014 ALD Software Ltd 274 RAM Commander User Manual 9 5 4 4 Copying and Deleting Failure Rate Tables To copy a failure rate table to another environment in the GPRD FR table dialog box select the Part number and Environment and click Copy to Env The environment data is copied with the necessary adjustments In the Add Copy Table dialog box select a target environment in the Environment list and click OK Click to select the Copy using Toolkit checkbox if you wish to use the Reliability Analysis Center Reliability Tool Kit RAM Commander makes a new copy of the failure rate table for the Part number Envronment combination To delete a failure rate table select the Part number and Environment and choose Delete A prompt appears asking if you want to delete the table Click Yes and the table is deleted 9 5 4 5 Using GPRD Library in Reliability Prediction RAM Comm
597. tuppie to depending Mince PLANT 4 750 006 100 008 condicnmng speler SOLO li oa 2 lepen mang arte SANIT system L leasdrg lo pack elos e 3 Leda dl bleed al suppla lo Criz seer ION M or Hiii l i 10 003 ar E enga abate e alerting by bleed an ayer Probability N O COTS iL COTS 2L COTS 4L E meca nd Lean of Cr atlas ert CONTROL va nat PACKIN MLET how SENSOR L Leak 54th 248 007 AED 1 Shey Llera ble Liriegusr bdo Uripa Linea abi Ll teats FRE FA 1 5 FR i io di A FA i 19 2 FTA module initiation To enter the RAM Commander FTA module do one of the following e In the list of projects select a project right click and choose FTA from the pop up menu e Open a project and choose FTA from the Modules menu e Open a project click Modules at the left button bar and click the FTA button The FTA module screen is displayed with a list of existing FTA diagrams 2014 ALD Software Ltd 19 3 MM Open Create FTA diagram Open Hans Dscriion Root Code RoctName e Cancel Pressure_ Tank Pressure Tank Example Fault Tree Ha E1 AUPTURE Rupture of tank Tutorial Sample Fault Tree for project TUTORI S Communication sy Delete Tutorial ABD Sample Fault Tree for project TUTORS RBD Tutorial RBO St Rename Save As VIEW az a List 7 C Tree To edit an existing diagram select it in the list and click OK To create a new diagram enter its name in the
598. tware Configuration le JE aa 0001 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 4 Copy the screen to the clipboard by pressing the Alt Print Screen keys and paste it in the email message pressing Ctrl V in the body of the message or into Word document Paint image and then save and attach this image to your email 3 4 2 Network USB plug Network USB plug contains purchased number of licenses which may be used simultaneously and concurrently by multiple RAM Commander users Network USB plug should be physically connected to a computer which is always connected to the network and available to all other RAM Commander user computers License Manager software Windows Service should be installed and running on this computer Before the installation select a computer to act as the plug server The network plug must always be attached to this computer so that users can access RAM Commander The plug server does not need to be the application server any other server or workstation will do The only requirement is that this PC must be switched on whenever someone is using RAM Commander Plug server and RAM Commander network server could reside on the same PC O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started os Note Only an authorized network administrator should perform this installation procedure The installati
599. uce the failure rate applicable and effective ls a discard task to avoid failures or to reduce the failure rate applicable and effective ls there a task or combination of tasks that are applicable and Not applicable for category 9 effective Task Definitions TaskNumber Task Type Task Description Interval Interval Unit Remarks Inteval Justification 001 OP E Op check of the wing flapper 8 flights valves 5 After decision for all items is taken the items list will display the results 6 Press Ok to close the failure effects list 24 1 2 6 Step 6 Task Interval The purpose of this step is to review the provided maintenance tasks set change their intervals perform task grouping by setting equal intervals etc 1 Select top element or highest manageable MSI item in the product tree 2 Choose 6 Task Interval MSG 3 step in the button bar List of all tasks will appear only maintenance significant items effects will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd MSG 3 Step 6 Task Interval Definition TaskNumber Task Type Task Description Interval Interval Unit Remarks Remarks Access 001 OP Op check of the wing flapper 8 flights valves X Operational check of the wing 8 flt hrs flapper valves Operational check of wing tank 8 eng cycles float valves Operational check of wing tank 8 flights float valves X d Close 3 Edit the tasks and their interval inside the table cells 24 1 2 7 Step 7
600. uired FM 2 Choose Copy FM from the pop up menu 3 Select another diagram element right click on the lower grid and choose Past FM from the pop up menu 21 5 5 Spelling checker RAM Commander FMECA has a built in Spelling Checker with 16 dictionaries in the following languages SpellUS lex US English SpellLAT lex Latin SpellUK lex British English SpellNL lex Dutch Spell GER lex German SpellPL lex Polish SpellESP lex Spanish Spell CRO lex Croatian SpellFRA lex French SpellSLO lex Slovenian SpellDAN lex Danish SpellSVE lex Swedish SpellITA lex Italian SpellCZ lex Czech SpellHE lex Hebrew SpellRU lex Russian English UK and US German and French dictionaries are included with the standard installation other dictionaries are available by request from our support service 2014 ALD Software Ltd 520 RAM Commander User Manual 21 5 6 To set up Spelling Checker 1 Open your project 2 From the Tools menu choose Spell checker dictionary 3 Select a dictionary from RAMC32 BIN folder see the above explanation for a list of dictionary file names You can now initiate the spell checker in any cell of FMEA or FMECA table or field of the data dialogs To use Spelling Checker 1 From the Tools menu choose Check spelling or press Ctrl S 2 The standard Spelling dialog box is displayed with options for replacing the misspelled word Lo x Notin dict
601. uired changes to parameters in the Add Edit Field dialog box or change the parameters from within the grid by clicking on it 4 Choose OK 9 RAM Commander redisplays the updated Report Generator dialog box To delete a particular field from your report select it and choose Delete from the field group You can change the order of the fields using the Move up and Move down buitons RAM Commander automatically saves your report definitions as you create them To delete unneeded reports select them from the Report Definition list box and choose Delete You can customize the appearance of your report From the Report Generator dialog box choose Setup The Report Style Setup dialog box opens The customizations apply to all user defined reports not just the one selected in the Report Definition list box 5 7 3 Reports by MS Word Template Several reports may be generated based on RAM Commander project data and customizable MS Word report template It is a powerful tool to generate final documents for customers or safety reliability authorities directly from RAM Commander according to your organizational documents standard and requirements To generate report with MS Word template 1 Choose the appropriate menu item in Reports menu of required module see particular module chapter for module specific report description 2 Available report templates list will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd MS Word Template Selection
602. ular project and now wish to have the same corrected values to be used in all newly created projects Caution Be careful when updating global libraries There is no undo facility to easily return your library to its original state To update global defaults library using the project defaults library 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Project menu choose Transfer O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Reliability Libraries and Defaults ES 3 Select the Project to Global option button 4 Select the Calculation Defaults option Transfer Direction Project to Global Global to Project Transter A New ltem Defaults 5 Derating Definitions O UTEC Mission Profile O FIDES 2004 Mission Profile IEC Mission Profile O 217 Plus Mission Profile C FIDES 2009 Mission Profile 9 Click OK 6 RAM Commander updates the selected global library Refreshing project Defaults from the Global Defaults Library The project s defaults may be refreshed from the global defaults This may be necessary when there was a change to the global defaults you want to use in your project or when you feel that the project defaults you assigned are no longer required and you need to revert to the standard defaults To refresh project defaults from the global defaults 1 Close any open Default Manager windows 2 Activate the Product tree view 3 From the Project menu choose Transfer 4 Select the Global t
603. ult values for all fields containing three dashes See Calculation efaults paragraph for more information SES Save data to project Add update project library with new data for the component with the current generic name aoc REF orense n Cross Update cross reference between the Generic Name and the o REF 5 reference record Part number Military Number or Catalog Number Search by the beginningLocation sensitive search To find component data use A of the Generic Name first position pattern matching of the string in the Generic Name Part Number Military Number or Catalog Number field depending on cursor location RAM Commander displays a Search Results list box containing generic part military or catalog numbers that satisfy the search criteria When you select one of the entries in the Search Results box the component library values are loaded into the fields Sy B B Search by any part of Location insensitive To find component data use any CD the Generic Name position pattern matching of the string in the Generic Name Part Number Military Number or Catalog Number field depending on cursor location RAM Commander O 2014 ALD Software Ltd displays a Search Results list box containing generic part military or catalog numbers that satisfy the search criteria When you select one of the entries in the Search Results box the component library values are loaded into the fields Notes e In any search t
604. umeric Duty Cicle o FM_name string failure mode name Each item may have more than 1 failure mode in this case each failure mode is a separate line in worksheet o Sev rank string severity rank of the End Effect o FM Alpha numeric failure mode ratio o FM Cause string cause of the failure mode o FM _compens string compensating provisions of the failure mode o FM_remarks string remark for the failure mode o NHE_ID string hierarchical ID of tree element for Next Higher Effect o NHE_name string Name of the Next Higher Effect Each Failure Mode may have more than 1 NHE in this case each NHE is a separate line in a worksheet o NHE_Beta numeric NHE conditional probability Failure Modes of highest level tree elements are End Effects Please see example for project TUTORIAL A E C E E F E H 1 iterIO Depth RefDes Oty FRoper DutyOycle FM_name sey rank 2 1 U TUTORIA 1 45 677 1 Maintainance Degradation MW J J ll Ll 0 Communication Degradation Ill d ll ll 0 0 Communication Loss IIl Bb l l Pedestal 1 7 3083 1 Wrong movement E Ll Ll Ll U Mo movement E 0 ll 0 0 Mo Transmission g Ll ll Ll U Transmision with errors 3 1 1 1 Antenna 1 66503 1 Ho Transmission 10 I O O 0 Signal Leakage 11 Ll ll Ll U Spurous Transmis 12 1 1 2 Motor J Bearing Failure 13 0 0 0 0 Fail Run Ger Strt 14 J ll Ll 0 Fails to Start 15 U U U 0 Vvinding Failure 1b 11 1 3 Bearing 0 65 1 Bindings Sticking TAM
605. umn indicates the default parameter value applied to all component types within the Item type if a specific technology appears in this column its parameter value overrides the default 12 1 1 To define Derating Guidelines Use the following procedure to define derating guidelines To define derating guidelines 1 Activate the Product tree view 2 From the Modules menu select Derating the Open Guidelines dialog box opens Open Guidelines Mame SCENOO1 Cancel 2014 ALD Software Ltd Derating Stress Analysis 331 3 Select a guideline and choose OK the Derating list opens Derating Guidelines SCEMDO for Project TUTORIAL Drive ELECTRONIC IC Digital Parameter Techn WIE Yin RPA gt IBE WinsRpg TM POLE Frege 4 In the Derating list make selections for family and item code the list displays all existing derating parameters for each type See the descriptions of available Derating parameters below VssSR Suppl voltage stress ratio in Analog devices Fanout is a measure of the ability of a logic gate output implemented electronically to drive a number of inputs of other logic gates of the same type In most designs logic gates are connected together to form more complex circuits and it is common for one logic gate output to be connected to several logic gate inputs 9 To modify a type s parameter values double click on its row in the list the Derating Value Definition d
606. uration installed e In case of Client Server configuration the procedure is performed in any one workstation PC connected to the common server Service Pack installation procedure itself is described below 1 Run installation package of the RAM Commander Service Pack 2 The Installation Wizard will go through a sequence of the setup screens asking the user to make the appropriate selections just press Next button on each screen without any changes 3 Installation Wizard will copy files and display final dialog with Finish button press Finish Note RAM Commander installation requires administrative privileges Make sure you are logged in with administrative privileges before installing RAM Commander 3 8 Uninstall or Modify The user may modify the RAM Commander configuration adding or canceling modules as well as uninstalling the RAM Commander To uninstall or modify the RAM Commander installation 1 From the Start menu choose Settings and then Control Panel 2 Double click the Add Remove programs icon 3 From the list of the installed programs select RAM Commander for Windows and choose the Add Remove button 4 The Installation Wizard displays the following dialog box 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started NON InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the Rak Commander for Windows 7 2 Setup Maintenance program This program lets wou modify the current instal
607. urer were entered correctly you will immediately see the data you entered in the item s data fields Ononr WD Another way to use this feature is through the Load from Library option You may use the Import Wizard or tree editing to enter the Manufacturer and the Part number for items Then from to the Modules menu choose the Load from library option If the Part number and Manufacturer were entered correctly you will immediately see the item s icon changed and FR calculated One more way to use the new automatic recognition feature is with the Quick Create option It is used for the fast creation of the component in the Product Tree when the component is located in the Component Library or when the Part number and Manufacturer is recognized by the recognition algorithm In the Product Tree choose Quick Create from the Tree menu Enter the information about the component Generic name GN for search in the Component Library Part number PN and Manufacturer for use of recognition algorithm etc Quick Create eo x Ref Dez C36 aTe li PA T4918105M03545 CH Cancel GH O Manufacturer Kemet E ai data CIEeri Click to select the Open method data screen check box for checking and editing of the component data before inserting it into the tree or leave it cleared if you wish to create the component without additional editing Click OK BE C36 17 T4916105M03545 1 2 490 004 A lf the component
608. urrently highlighted choose Insert The Maintainability Task Data dialog box opens Follow the steps in the next procedure To edit a highlighted task type choose Edit The Maintainability Task Data dialog box opens Follow the steps in the next procedure To copy a task select it and choose Copy RAM Commander appends it at the end of the task list To delete a task select it and choose Delete RAM Commander deletes the task and 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability Prediction 311 redisplays the task list To set the tasks order use the move up and move down buttons to move that task accordingly 3 Choose Close RAM Commander stores the maintenance task list for the current item Preventive Maintenance In addition to Corrective Maintenance Maintainability module supports Preventive Maintenance procedures Choose Preventive in Maintenance type list box of Maintainability RCM dialog box Click on Add button Add edit procedure name box appears Enter required procedure and click on OK In Preventive Maintenance procedure type list box choose Condition Monitoring Failure Finding or Restore or Discard A number of different maintenance procedures may be defined each procedure with its own frequency The frequency may be user defined or optimized Choose Task type and enter Task description Your screen looks like below 2014 ALD Software Ltd 312 RAM Commander User Manual Maintainability R
609. utton to set document header footer properties 6 Press Select button 7 Generated report will appear in MS Word O 2014 ALD Software Ltd O File Edit View Insert Format Tools AutoTag Table Window Help Type a question for help X DS RSS y IiBAS o a 44 Normal Arial Arial 12 gD B Z U 4 G Y 2 gt BI Br LO d pajn EEDD L A sw ho al Srl Br 19 10 dd ewe ewe edges AS ee Wee A7 ee edge a 9ra Qe 2161 2201 2361 24 1 25 A y y y 1 I a Bog ss Example Safety As sment Results Summary Safety Assessment Results Summary Safety Assessment Process Example 3 inte ah Expected Expected Effect of Failure Severity A Cd probability of probability for Reference to Re Objective probability of f Condition Class probability of failure for 1 failure for 1 phase light RBDFTA failure for 1 hour z E anding atastro Unannunciated_ of wheel braking failure when the brakes RTO TA phic oss_of wheel_b are operated The crew XI raking uses spoilers and thrust reversers maximum extent possible This may result In a runway z 5 Unannunciated_ wheel Hola suitable airport notifies oss_of wheel_b emergency ground raking support and prepares occupants for landing overrun Crew uses spoilers and thrust reversers tothe maximum extent Preliminary _ Airc raft_FTA WIBOCO ele e mivelical failure when the brakes loss of wheel braking a
610. value data to TCP IP Registry Editor aj x File Edit wiew Favorites Help a Pervasive Software A zj 3 Btrieve Requester H 153 Communications Requester la Remote Read Buffer Size REG_DWORD OXOD000004 4 lab Remote Sessions Enabled REG 52 YES 43 Database Names ES Remote worker Threads REG_DWORD gogogo 16 E Microkernel Router EN supported Protocols REG_MULTI_SZ TEPIP El PoP T Microkernel workstation Engine mere as oe sa a a 4 Bb System Cache REG_SZ YES a DE E ab System Data REG_5Z YES T Es ee Bal Systrans Bundle Limit REG DWORD OxCOOOFFFE 65535 a a 8 Monitor Uti ity Z a woke oe Tine l imik NET Lan Cee ees 4 l My Computer HKEY LOCaL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive SoftwarelMicroKernel Workstation Engine Version 7 Settings a Do it also for key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive Software Communications Requester Version Settings value name Supported protocols if key exists Do it on all RAM Commander workstations servers or standalone PCs Reason 2 No write permissions for Pervasive Database Engine service and log files Solution We can suggest two options to solve this issue 1 Give write permissions to C Windows MKDE folder for RAMC users on the RAMC Server in client server configuration and on PC which makes the problem 2 Change settings in registry for each RAMC workstation Find Key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Pervasive Software MicroKernel Workstati
611. ve settings button 10 Working folder should be shared with full control access rights to all RAM Commander users Share the working folder and grant Full Control access rights to this share 2014 ALD Software Ltd 70 t CREATOR OWNER BA SYSTEM 11 Press Generate Site Code button Site code file containing unique identification of your License Server PC will be generated in the working folder ALD License Server i x O Site Code file is generated I C ALDLicenseServer ServerSiteCode Imc Please send this file to your software vendor in order to get 12 Please send this site code file to ALD Software Support ald co il or your software vendor 13 We will generate and send license file back to you put it to the working folder 14 Press Start Licensing Server button Service Status and License status indicators should appear in green and show Ok and Active state 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started ALD Software Licen sing Service Monitor Licensing service status Service status Active License status Ok Service start time 5 30 2010 1 24 44 AM Working folder CAALDLicenseberver Maximum allowed number of connected users Real maxumum number of simultaneously connected users Number of curently connected users Total number of rejected license requests Total number of unique users Total number of logged exceptions 0 0 0 0 0 Press Refresh button seve
612. vents with the same code are updated in the tree and in the library Such events are regarded as identical during the calculation Basic events linked to the tree product tree or and FMECA by the Tree element ID or Failure Mode number get their parameters FR MTTR from corresponding product tree FMECAelement during the linking To update the basic event data later on choose Update events from RAM amp FMECA from the Library menu Delete elements The following options are available for deleting tree elements To delete only the selected element select the element right click choose Delete element from the pop up menu If the gate element has its children deleted all its children are then reconnected to the element s predecessor To delete the whole branch select the branch gate right click and choose Delete branch from the pop up menu or simply press the Delete key To delete all child elements of a specific gate choose the gate right click choose Delete sub levels from the pop up menu 2014 ALD Software Ltd Fault Tree Analysis 471 19 3 7 Copy 8 Paste You can copy paste selected element or elements inside the tree or between different Trees To copy and paste elements 1 Select the items and then Choose Copy from the Item menu Or Press Ctrl C Or Right click and select Copy from the pop up menu 2 Choose a tree to insert the items 3 Select the tree element gate which will be the predecessor of the co
613. w Do not show this screen again 4 Choose one of recently used projects or choose Open DEMO TUTORIAL project button to open the TUTORIAL project or close this window and choose Open drive from the Drive menu to get the list of projects on specific drive Then select the drive where your project is located and press Ok List of projects on this drive will appear Here you may open existing project or create a new one See Working with Projects and other chapters for instructions on navigating through a RAM Commander project 2014 ALD Software Ltd Getting Started 3 6 Major Upgrade RAM Commander Upgrade is required if you wish to install newer RAM Commander version over existing older RAM Commander version If you wish to upgrade to newer Service Pack of the same version see Minor Update paragraph later in this chapter The procedure slightly differs depending on current RAM Commander installation configuration standalone or client server Next paragraphs explain the upgrade procedure for each configuration type e Standalone Configuration Upgrade e Network Configuration Upgrade It is highly recommended to perform RAM Commander installation folder and database backup before the upgrade It could be done by backing up the whole RAM Commander installation folder local e g C RAMC32 for the local installation and server located RAM Commander installation folder e g D APP RAMC32 for the client se
614. wer level parts must be equal to the level of repair of the assembly MTTR can only be calculated for this situation 2014 ALD Software Ltd Level of repair organizational Level of replace organizational When there are functional items in the product tree then use level of replace unapplicable so that these items will be transparent for MTTR calculation purposes Unapplicable may be assigned to as many levels as required Assembly Functional block Level of replace Unapplicable Level of replace Organizational Level of repair Organizational 11 1 1 Information Required You must provide the following data to perform maintainability prediction e The Product Tree Bill of materials e The list of maintenance tasks or activities including the number and description of all steps required to restore each replaceable item e For each task the list of skills equipment and materials required to perform the task optional for maintenance planning only e The failure rates associated with each replaceable item These are taken automatically from the reliability prediction module e The estimated or required fault isolation resolution expressed as a percentage of faults isolated to each of the ambiguity groups Note RAM Commander is able to take the ambiguity groups data from FMECA module 11 2 Maintainability Prediction Modeling This topic presents theoretical development for several maintain
615. work Installati n ar O ia 37 Server INSTANAUOMN cita ii tato ic 37 Workstation INS tala ON as 44 Standalone Installation Common Network Database ccccconcccccococccccccococoncnnnananononnnnnannnnrnnnnnanannnronnnnas 50 M ltiple versions ai A A ia 52 A LICENSING ii bicis ooo 56 Local USB NG adi alde 56 Updating pug GONPIQUI ALON soi ld OE de 56 Reporting Pug COMMUN ALON sss setts tre aaa he cree act eine tee tet aaah asia eas aa acne eels 57 NetWork USB DIGG usiaa tad A dest cicds 58 Local License File A A AAA AE 60 Deleting ense a a dd del en da lat late la 62 Sending License Re DON lace eee a Win eee ae telat aed a 64 Network License Elli ta dina 65 9 R ANINO RAM COMMANde Fins cora EAN 73 6 Major UD Ola GG nadan ae 75 standalone Configuration UP Grade dada 75 Network Configuration Upgrade iiuiicsiiosntai ii a ena 77 T MINO RI DO ALC usina eo bb menses bras bleed 80 o UninstallOr MOGUIY sisses a aaa aaa 80 9 Install Component LIDIA A A ada aS 81 LOY AQGMINISITA ION sta 82 Users Managemen urinar E E ida 83 Proj ts MANTE MENE a 85 Libraries and Defaults Management cccccccocccncccccccnnonnncnocnnnnnnncrnnnnnn nan rrrrrrnnnnnnrrrrrrnnnnnrerrrrrnnnnnrarrrrrmaaananns 86 O 2014 ALD Software Ltd 4 RAM Commander User Manual setings Manage MEA aca 86 Usera thentic aio US MANO AA DP Py a aca oe pea tet sleet ee E O 88 User Activity LOQ A ida 89 11 TL FOUDICSNOOUNG sirbe 89 A o EE o coteien
616. xploring folders in Microsoft Windows O 2014 ALD Software Ltd RAM Commander Fundamentals 123 El RAM Commander for Windows Project TUTORIAL on Drive C z Project Tree Calculation Reports Modules Library Tools View w EA e Current Analesis_ RetDes Cty Op FA 105 Status TUTORIAL 1 Communication System 187 0765 Communic 1 COMMOO1 100 2550 Ke Switch 1 Swag ui puin 3 80031 b u12 4 LM299 T gt 13 5 74L530 A1 10 E ALA cta 7 AN A30 34 a AZ Aa 9 CK Cc 10 CK 00 MEE CCA APS A 0 0607 J 13 CK 1 FE L 4 14 HLMP 2450 4 YE L5 6 15 HLMP 2400 1 2 16 DP2 Receiver 2 ACOO4 Transmitter 3 TR987 001 O Power Supp DU Control Control Unit 1 P5495 Eq Pedestal POOO 4265 Modules ACM MSG 3 For Help press Fl ID 1 1 1 12 The RAM Commander Product tree view appears when you open RAM Commander project in main analysis mode see previous paragraph Projects When you run the RAM Commander for the first time the Product tree view opens in the Operating mode Afterwards it opens in the analysis mode last used for a current project There are several analysis modes performed on the Product Tree View window Current Description Analysis Operating Reliability prediction for equipment in Failure rate operating operating mode Non operating Reliability prediction for equipment in non Failure rate operating mode such as storage non operating Maintainability M
617. xported using the Report Generator ID item hierarchical identifier like 1 2 3 4 Depth Numeric 1 or higher See Depth field Item type Component ltem type like resistor capacitor or spring Each family has its own list of Item types See ltem type abbreviations Reference designator AA AAA Numeric 1 or higher component data Catalog number Factory ID Item catalog number typically in house part identifier Military number Item military number Part number Manufacturer ID Part number by manufacturer O 2014 ALD Software Ltd Product Tree 193 Description OSO Remark o Item Function OSO LCN Spare Part Turnaround time Time days required to send the failed part for repair and get it back repaired Used in Spare parts calculation optimization Spare Part Condemnation Rate Percent of items needing repair that will not be repaired Spare Part Minimal Qty Minimal number of spare parts to be on stock at all times Used in Spare parts calculation optimization Spare Part Maximal Qty Maximal number of spare parts allowed Used in Spare parts calculation optimization SMR Source Maintenance Recoverability code used for ILS Integrated Logistics Support earch in libra See Search in Libra see Parent Ref Des field See Hierarchical Parent Ref Des field O regular item component default or 1 functional block The ATA Chapter numbers provide a common referencing standard for all commercial aircraft docum
618. y Composite Report HTML Tuesday July 10 2007 H Lancel Mission Profile Report HTML Thursday June 24 2010 Applied Values Def Report Thursday June 24 2010 Failure Rate Data Report HTML Thursday June 24 2070 Library Report HTML Thursday February 07 200 RED Info HTML Monday March 30 2009 User Generated Report HTML Monday March 09 2009 FIFA Renart HTML Thursdau lune 24 PMA p 4 oe Delete all 3 In the Select report list box select the report you wish to view 4 Choose OK RAM Commander displays the report on your screen Repeat this procedure to open several reports at once To delete a report select it and choose Delete To delete all reports choose Delete all Report Generator In addition to the standard set of custom reports RAM Commander provides a Report Generator for designing and printing custom reports The report generator requires experience in RAM Commander operation Before generating a new report examine an existing report definition to understand the report generator s primary principles and options Report definition involves two phases The first phase is building the report by selecting which data fields to include sort orders column widths and optional column headings The report s appearance can now be customized as described below Report Style Setup dialog box Report Generator may generate reports based on
619. y FMECA data between Phases e lf you are performing FMECA analysis for several phases and wish to copy all FMECA data from the existing phase to a new empty phase use lt Copy all FMECA data gt option of the Phases library Copy all FMECA data e lf you are performing FMECA analysis for several phases and wish to copy FMECA data from the existing phase to a new empty phase for specific item only perform the following actions 1 Open project window choose phase you wish to use as FMECA data source select the required item choose Copy processor data from the tree menu choose target phase where you wish to copy data to press ok ota IS Popup menus 2014 ALD Software Ltd The FMECA grid is manipulated by invoking pop up menus with a right mouse click Each field column in the FMECA grid has a different pop up menu displaying the available options The next paragraphs provide explanation to these options 18 5 2 1 FM Column Pop up Menu Options Right click the Failure mode description cell to get options menu Ref Des ID Mame El Pedestal 3 CNO17880 Antenna 1 CNO31 30 eegMotor A EE Bearing 3 CNO55550 ky LAIA 4 Description Alpha Cause Bearing Fae a i E E gt Falun Aler n Get from FM Library 13 Add to FM Library 7 Fails to Start Get From Component Library 1 3 Winding Failure Get from Get GPRD 13 Add MHE Failure Cause Maintenance RCM Show connected Faulk Trees Delete FM Delet
620. y Libraries from the Library menu The Open Project Lists dialog box is displayed 4 Select which project you want to copy to libraries to 9 Select which libraries you want to copy the project to multiple selection is possible Select Libraries A x Failure Modes End Effects Causes Controls Actions Severity Decurence Detection To LIEL Cancel 6 Click OK 2014 ALD Software Ltd 534 RAM Commander User Manual 21 9 5 21 10 Load to Library RAM Commander allows data input directly to FMEA table without filling the libraries of Failure Modes Causes etc Using libraries significantly speeds data input but sometimes FMEA worksheet is just filled in with data without using the libraries but at some stage user may wish to put the repeating failure modes causes etc to the library to speed up the work The Load to Library option scans FMEA table for selected diagram elements and adds their data Failure Modes Causes Detection Methods Corrective Actions into a corresponding library enabling data reusability To execute the Load to Library function select Load to library from Libraries menu Reports FMEA displays analytical results in a wide variety of tables or graphs You can export these reports to other programs such as MS Word or Excel for customized analysis Before generating reports you should use FMEA s built in facility to report and automatically correct erro
621. y Proschan Formula ooocccccoonccncccocconcoconconcnnnos Frequency W t Calculation ooooooccnnccoooooooo PFH and PFD Calculation acaricia Lambda Equivalent cccoooccccccooconcccoononcconononononos House Event Profiles cccooonncccicccocccccanccocononananonnonnnnanas Importance Sensitivity Analysis FALSE TRUE Propagation cooccnnccccccconcconcconononananonnnnnnnanas Repeated Events Indication ooocccconnnnccnonncnconnananconnanos Event Tree Analysis ETA module initiation oooooonnccoccccccnnnnnnnnno ETA diagram building ooocococcncncoccncncocanancanananos Events library ir i iene taint Delete oda da Export Diagram as Picture oncccconnnncococncncononnancronananconnnnos Print preview Print ZOOM ccocccccoccnccononocnnanononaronananinon Analysis Calculation oocococococococcconanacnncanananono Process Design FMEA FMEA BASICS us es de ed FMEA module Initiation c ccccesceesseesneesneeeneees Defining FMEA Properties ceceeeeeeneeeeeeees Drawing the Diagram cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenees DRAW ING a Nod neia aena ao Drawing a Link iaa MUIIS C16 cli Stretching a LINK estat Drawing a Reflexive LINK oonoocccccccconccanccoconocananononnnnnanas Delete rrie E CODY amp Paste remitan r estate senanvs 2014 ALD Software Ltd Contents SUD dagr ANS dia 515 Prine Loom WINGO vuinrita A dite eemactdsSaceadacuaan
622. y once again 2 Make sure that user has full access rights to RAM Commander installation folder by default C RAMC32 and all it s sub folders and files on all levels Just Read Write permissions are not enough file creation deletion folder creation deletion should be also allowed so Full Control permissions are required 3 If previous advices do not help grant Full Control access rights to Windows folder and try again Problem 10 Error message The setup routines for the Microsoft Access Driver mdb could not be loaded due to system error code 126 Solution See Microsoft KB article http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb EN US q260558 There are two possible causes for this problem e Incorrect registry settings for MDAC components e Incompatible dll files These problems may have arisen because of an installation of older software that changed the registry settings of the ODBC drivers or replaced some dll files with incompatible versions Resolution for incorrect registry settings problem 1 Start Registry Editor Regedt32 exe 2 Locate the following key in the registry HKEY_ LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ODBC ODBCINST INI Installation information for ODBC drivers is stored in this key Make sure that all the required ODBC driver files are in the correct folder as described by the registry keys For example assume that you have the following information in your registry for the Microsoft Access ODBC
623. y optimization graph and report 2014 ALD Software Ltd Cost Availability optimization gt r E a 2014 ALD Software Ltd Spare Parts Analysis aor SPARE PARTS OPTIMIZATION report No of systems in the field 10 Operation hours per day 24 00 Budget 50000000 Unsupported Mission Time days 365 0 tems replaced in Organizational Intermediate Depot Report depth 9 Cost Availability optimization results for project TUTORIAL start from 1 TUTORIAL Scenario Test spr 5 1os9900 0 08302997 gn ez45o00 ___ oseos30 a S L E 55400 0 09969657 8700 0 5600 4 1000 1700 9500 0 1 2 Pt Psa Ca oo foe 3 2 Ps CT fat Psa oS 6 E m Lai A LT ro 3 600 0 0 9999295 600 0 03993994396 92425000 099992396 The optimization report gives an overall availability or NSP for a particular monetary amount You can review the exact quantities of each spare part to take on the mission La Oo a La 16 4 5 2 To review optimal spare part quantities 1 From the Modules menu select Spare Parts Optimization the Spare Optimization dialog box opens 2 Select the required scenario 3 In the Select point by group box do one of the following e Select Cost and enter a cost value in the field below e Select Criterion and enter a value for NSP or Availability in the field below e Select Point and enter a value for one of the evaluation points in
624. y per average mission hour calculated using Fault Trees as described above and also objective probability some reports may show both Safety Requirements Objective and Design Objective probabilities per average mission hour If expected calculated probability is greater than objective probability RAM Commander will provide red color indication in that grid report line The objective probabilities Safety Requirements Objective and Design Objective are defined in Safety FMECA libraries Safety Severity library and End Effects library See the next paragraphs for more information about the libraries 22 8 Reports Reports The Safety Module has a number of customizable reports Below is the list of available reports with their explanations Name Description a Functional Tree Diagram Functional tree with all branches expanded 2014 ALD Software Ltd 552 RAM Commander User Manual Functional Breakdown All functional tree items represented in a tabulated form Functional Hazard Analysis FHA Failures information for all functions 4 Safety System SSA failures information including selected assessment means for Assessment each function 5 Safety Assessment Results SSA summary all failures with S R objective Design objective and Summa probability for each failure 6jAFO Special report for AFO Safety Assessment analysis List of all latent events leading to failure conditions with specified Asses
625. ype Testabity el O Subtype Testability Information y ATA T estability nformatian Phase Testability Information O uantitie Testability Data Undetectable FM Detectable FM Detectable FM Quantitive Approach Depth fro Coverage Fault Isolation Fault isolation with Replace Recommendations Fault Isolation with Recommendations incl End Effects Isolation Tree Isolation Tree per End Effect Report types are described in the table below Report subtype estability Information ltem Failure Mode EE Severity Tests information Testability Information Item Failure Mode EE Severity FM Ratio FM Criticality Tests Quantitative information intersection contribution to severity and MTBF for each FM Detectable FM List of tests for each test list of detectable Failure modes with test information for each including test type test level efficiency etc List of tests for each test list of detectable Failure modes with test information for each including test type test level efficiency failure effect probability etc total and detectable Failure Rates etc Fault Isolation Fault Isolation Resolution report with ambiguity groups Recommendations recommendations for each test Fault Isolation with Replace Fault Isolation Resolution report with ambiguity groups and replace Recommendations recommendations for each test including EE information including End Effect Isolati
626. ys the Maintainability MIL 472 Procedure 5 button in the right section of the Item data dialog box Click on the button The maintenance task list will appear 2014 ALD Software Ltd Maintainability ROM Ref Des Main Switch Description Main Switch Failure Mode Maintenance type Maintenance procedure Preventive Preventive Maintenance procedure type a Total maintenance times Maintenance procedure frequency Met 0 280667 Hours every D Hours MLH 0 280667 Hours every U Hours Task Type Task Description Preparation UNIT DISCONNECTION Fault lsolation Diagnostic Procedure Disassembly Remove panel Interchange Replace switch Reassembly Replace panel Start up Power On Append Append ngert Edit Copy I Delete MoveUp Move Lp Move Down Close Note The MIL 472 Procedure 5 button will not appear if levels of repair replace are not defined properly according to the assumptions if the Philosophy and Assumptions paragraph 11 4 2 1 To define MIL 472 Procedure 5A maintainability task information 1 If necessary update the reference designator in the Ref Des field 2 Do one of the following To append a new task type to the end of the task list choose Append The Maintainability Task Description dialog box opens see above Follow the steps in the next procedure OR Enter the task information directly into the last row marked with an To insert a new task type above the one c
627. ys the report in a report window Only items with the MMEL status equal to Candidate will be included in the report The MMEL module provides the following reports 1 MMEL Candidate List shows all MMEL candidates in the project 2014 ALD Software Ltd MMEL 967 Candidates List Report Project name AIRC ATA 21 50 07 PACK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 21 50 16 PACK INLET TEMPERATURE SENSOR L 21 51 76 FLOW CONTROL VALVE 21 52 12 PACK DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR L 21 52 48 PACK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR L 2 MMEL five column format report Master Minimum Equipment List System ATA Chapter Sample project with MMEL analysis Rectification Interval System amp Sequence No Number Installed Number required for dispatch Remarks or Exceptions 1 9 4 3 36 11 01 HIGH PRESSURE T 2 1 0 WALWE L Switch the affected air conditioning pack off Maximum Tight altitude 25000 A 7600 mi Refer to AF M for additional limitations Avoid icing conditions ht Secure failed valve in closed position T Z 0 May be inoperative provided 1 AFU works nonnally AND 2 LOY works normnally AND 3 Ram air ventilation works nonnally 0 Switch both air conditioning packs off Maximum flight altitude 10000 f 3000 rmt Refer to AF M for additional limitations Avoid icing conditions MM secure both failed valves in closed position 36 11 03 PRESSURE T 2 0 REGULATING VALVE switch the affe
628. yze different aspects of system reliability e Analyze system reliability under different environments and temperatures Temperature Curve e Analyze and find components with largest contribution to system MTBF Pareto e Calculate mission reliability when system is performing complex missions in different environment conditions Mission Profile 10 1 Temperature Curve Temperature curve reports show the influence of temperature on a project s reliability You can view the temperature curve results for several environments simultaneously in graph or text form RAM Commander s series of temperature curve reports provides many ways to look at failure rates with variation in temperature You can review a project s failure rates for one or more environments or generate a report for selected project items To view a Temperature Curve Report 1 Activate the Product Tree View 2 Navigate to the desired level in the Product tree Note Like all reports temperature curve reports are level specific Select the desired level in the product tree before running the report 3 From the Reports menu choose Temperature Curve the Temperature Curve dialog box opens Temperature Curve Type Mutli Environment Result F A Environments Output Graph Lowest Temperature 0 Highest Temperature 100 E of points 50 Description 4 Enter an optional report description 9 Select a report type in the Type list box e

RAM Commander User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents